How-Tos
Advertising & Marketing
How to Make a Restaurant Website
In today’s business climate, digital marketing is key to expanding your customer base and growing. A strong online presence in the restaurant industry allows potential customers to find important information about your business easier. The most critical part of a strong online presence is establishing a well-designed and functional website. Below, we’ve created a guide to help you build your restaurant website and optimize its effectiveness in generating new customers. Use these links to learn more about various aspects of making a restaurant website: How to Create a Restaurant Website Building a Restaurant Website Designing a Restaurant Website What Makes a Good Restaurant Website? Restaurant Website Goals How to Create a Restaurant Website When setting up a website, the first step is to register your domain and create a URL. You can pay to register your domain with a service like GoDaddy or Google Domains, but you can also choose a free website hosting service. Here are some of the best free website hosting platforms where you can build your restaurant's website: 1. WordPress One of the most popular web hosting sites on the Internet, WordPress offers a variety of useful tools that help users set up their websites. They have many free themes that users can utilize or tweak to their exact needs. Users with graphic design or web development backgrounds can also build their sites from scratch if they want. 2. Wix Boasting a user-friendly design and a lot of free tools, Wix is a great option for beginners and webmasters without a tech background. The service also offers hundreds of free templates that you can use to get your restaurant's website started. 3. Weebly Weebly offers customers a lot of freedom in customizing their website, allowing them to create exactly what they want. The service also offers a variety of free templates and designs that customers can utilize. If you're willing to spend some money on more features, there are many affordable options available, such as Squarespace or GoDaddy. Additionally, all of the free options listed above have premium options, which will give you access to many more features, storage space, and templates. Building a Restaurant Website Once you've signed up for a web hosting service, you can begin designing your restaurant's website. You can work on the website yourself, but many restaurant owners may choose to hire web developers or freelancers to give their websites a more professional look. While each restaurant's website will differ slightly, there are four major components that every restaurant should have on their website: a home page, a contact page, a menu page, and an about us page. Homepage Your homepage is the central hub of your restaurant's website, and it's important that it's well-designed and easy to navigate. The homepage should have important information on it, such as your hours of operation and a link to your menu. You'll also want to prominently display your restaurant's name and logo. Restaurant Menu You want to be sure that your restaurant's menu is readily available and easy for customers to use. You should never make your menu a downloadable PDF or file that customers have to download because it can cause them to leave your site. Instead, have custom programs built into your site that display your menu items in a more visually appealing manner. Contact Us Page Your website should have a way for customers to contact you in case they have any questions or issues with their meals. Additionally, you can add a lot of other useful information to your contact page. Here is some other information that should be on your contact page: Social media accounts, such as Facebook, Twitter, TikTok, and Instagram Hours of operation Address Tripadvisor and Yelp Reviews 4. About Us Page This page is a great chance to make a personal connection with your customers and explain how your restaurant got started and some of the personal aspects that customers may not be aware of. On this page, for example, you can talk about the owners of the restaurant and their background, talk about when the business was founded, or introduce some of the kitchen staff. Designing a Restaurant Website Your restaurant's website should have a strong framework and structure, but it's also important for it to look appealing. Similar to the process of optimizing your menu, designing an excellent website can give your customers a great first impression and make your business look professional. Here are a few tips that you should consider when designing your restaurant's website: Color Scheme - The colors that you use on your website can affect how your customers perceive your restaurant, so choose them carefully. For example, colors like red, orange, and yellow can boost someone's appetite and make them excited to visit your restaurant. On the other hand, cool tones like blue and purple are not often naturally found in food, so they may decrease your customers' appetite. Image Quality - Nothing makes a website unprofessional like low-resolution or grainy pictures. So, if you're going to use photos on your website, make sure that they're high-quality and clear. Number of Images - While using a few images on your website may pique your customers' interest, too many images may make your website and business look cheap as many people connote lots of images with diners and low-quality restaurants. Try to limit yourself to only 1 or 2 images per page. Social Media Feeds - Using a simple string of HTML code, you can insert images from your social media feeds onto your website. It's a great way to show off your latest creations and for potential customers to see what patrons are saying about your business. Reviews - Personal reviews are very impactful on potential customers. So, if you see a particularly glowing review on your Yelp or Tripadvisor account, consider featuring it on your site. What Makes a Good Restaurant Website? Although restaurant web pages will vary depending on what type of restaurant you operate, there are some hallmarks of a good restaurant website. Typically, a great restaurant website will make things as easy and convenient as possible for customers. Here are some of the most common features of a quality restaurant website that customers will surely appreciate. Consistent Design & Branding - A high-quality restaurant website will contain consistent design and branding across all web pages. The consistency will give your website a more professional look and feel to customers. Fast Load Times - Quick load times are necessary to ensure customers don’t become frustrated and click away. Additionally, fast load times can boost your SEO rankings, helping your site climb search engine results pages. Easy Navigation - Strong restaurant websites should be easy to navigate. Important information should be readily available because you don’t want customers spending a considerable amount of time trying to find information such as your menu or contact information. Mobile Optimization - A great deal of online traffic comes from mobile devices such as phones and tablets, so it’s vital to optimize your website for mobile browsing. If your website is not properly designed, mobile users will likely get frustrated and look elsewhere. Restaurant Website Goals When creating a restaurant website, it’s essential to have a few goals in mind of what you would like your website to accomplish. Your restaurant’s website is the biggest part of your online presence and can generate a lot of positive outcomes when constructed correctly. Below, we’ve outlined some of the most important goals you’ll want your website to contribute to: Visibility - The main goal of a restaurant website is to establish your online presence and allow more customers to find your business. A strong website will rank highly in search engine results, boosting brand awareness and visibility. Information - One of the main purposes of your website is to inform customers of important details regarding your business. Your website should provide your hours of operation, location, contact information, and menus. Reservations - Including a section where customers can book reservations is a great way to get more customers. When customers can book reservations directly on your website and don’t have to take extra steps, they will be more likely to book a reservation with your restaurant. Connection - A website should be an extension of your restaurant’s physical location and make it easier to connect with customers. Information like an about us page and FAQ help customers gain a better understanding of your restaurant. A restaurant website can open many new opportunities for your business. If done correctly, the website can attract new customers, boost awareness, and add legitimacy and professionalism to your restaurant brand. With the industry becoming increasingly digitized every year, establishing a quality restaurant website is one of the best ways to ensure success.
Catering Marketing Ideas
Whether you’re just starting in the catering industry or are looking to expand your customer base, marketing is vital to the success of your catering business. Strong and effective marketing campaigns can bring in new clients and establish long-lasting partnerships, strengthening your catering business. It doesn’t matter how well your company caters for events if local businesses aren’t exposed to your brand and don’t know how to reach out and hire your company. Below, we’ve created a list of marketing, advertising, and promotional ideas your catering company can use to ensure it receives maximum exposure to your target audience. Shop All Disposable Catering Supplies Use these links to learn more about how to market your catering business: Catering Marketing Plan Catering Marketing Catering Advertising How to Get Catering Clients How to Promote Your Catering Business Catering Marketing Plan One of the most important aspects of marketing your catering business is the creation of a catering marketing plan. This plan will outline your marketing strategies and provide you with quantifiable goals that you can use to measure the success of your marketing efforts. Below, we’ve listed some of the most important information to include and actions to take in your catering marketing plan: Consumer Research - Understanding your target market’s interests, buying habits, and location is key to effectively marketing to it. Conducting consumer research is a great way to ensure that you pursue the right marketing strategies, allowing you to choose the most effective ways to reach your customer base. Create a Marketing Budget - In your marketing plan, you should outline the budget for your marketing efforts. Marketing strategies can be expensive, so it’s important to outline how much is needed for your campaigns, as well as how you plan to finance these marketing efforts. Establish Marketing Goals - Having quantifiable goals is a requirement if you want to accurately measure how successful your marketing campaigns are. Some examples of marketing goals include reaching a certain number of new event bookings, acquiring a specific number of social media views and followers, or receiving a particular amount of website traffic. Update Your Brand - The creation of your marketing plan is a fantastic opportunity to update and refresh your catering brand. Updating and modernizing aspects like your catering menu, logo, or mission statement is a great way to boost your marketing efforts. Outline Potential Partnerships - Outlining potential partnerships with other businesses and how you can utilize them to grow your customer base is an important part of a marketing plan. Forming strategic partnerships with other local businesses like wedding halls is a fantastic way to build your network and acquire new customers. Catering Marketing There are several small changes and improvements you can make to your catering business to boost brand awareness and stand out to potential clients. Making these changes is a great way to improve your appearance to customers, without having to run massive advertising campaigns or host any special events. Here are a few things you can do with your catering company to boost marketing efforts with minimal effort required: Update Your Website - Digital marketing is vital in obtaining new customers, and the most important part of your online presence is your website. Making your website easily navigable and including modern content like blogs and videos is a great way to establish a strong online presence. Display Reviews - Showcasing positive reviews and testimonials on your website is a fantastic way to show your capabilities to potential clients. These reviews highlight what your catering company does well, which could attract several clients. SEO - Search engine optimization is a great way to expand your online presence and reach new audiences. SEO allows your website and its content to rank higher on search engine results, driving more online traffic to your business and creating more leads. To engage in SEO, try utilizing tools such as Google Analytics to monitor traffic to your catering website. Optimization for Mobile - A large portion of internet traffic comes from mobile devices such as phones and tablets. Optimizing your online presence with mobile-friendly photos and webpages to ensure that mobile users can easily access, browse, and utilize your website expands your potential consumer base and can generate many leads. Back to Top Catering Advertising While marketing is the overall strategy of identifying and catering to consumer needs, advertising is the act of reaching out and promoting your business through paid channels. Advertising has undergone a huge shift in recent years, as digital advertising has increased in importance due to the continued rise of technology. That being said, engaging in multiple forms of advertising is a great way to ensure brand exposure and reach customers across multiple channels. Here are some of the most effective forms of advertising that you can use to market your catering business: Social Media Advertising - Social media is a huge part of everyday life now, so expanding your marketing efforts to social media platforms and engaging in social media marketing is a great way to get your catering brand out there. Shortform content showcasing your catering is great for platforms like TikTok, Instagram, and YouTube, while other platforms like Facebook and Twitter are perfect for connecting with customers and providing menu and service updates. Print Advertising - While print marketing might not be as effective as it once was, there’s still plenty to be gained from engaging with it. Forms of print marketing such as business cards, direct mail, flyers, and newspaper advertisements can reach a large number of people without having to invest too much. Radio Advertising - Although not as popular as other forms of advertising, advertising your catering company over the radio can be a cost-effective way to get your brand out there. While it may not have the reach that some other forms of marketing have, radio advertising is cheaper, meaning you can reach your target market without having to splurge on your marketing budget. Live Event Advertising - Attending live events like trade shows is another great way to show off your food and service to prospective customers. Not only can you network and gain new customers at live events, but you can also acquire valuable feedback from industry experts on how you can improve your business. How to Get Catering Clients Acquiring new clients is at the core of any catering marketing campaign. Through strategic partnerships and special events, your catering company can receive a ton of brand exposure. You can then convert this newfound brand recognition into new clients, boosting overall profits. Below we’ve listed some of the best ways you can entice potential clients to work with your catering company: Utilize Your Network - Creating or utilizing an already existing network of businesses allows you to create a solid customer base that you can rely on. Try reaching out to local businesses and proposing a partnership, offering them special deals or promotions in exchange for becoming the go-to catering company for their events. Host Tastings - Another great way to expose potential clients to your catering company is by hosting a tasting event that showcases your food. Invite interested clients to an event that allows them to sample your menu and service, giving them a taste of what they can expect if you cater their event. Find a Competitive Advantage - To stand out from other catering businesses, you’ll need to find a competitive advantage that separates you from similar companies. That could be a variety of different features, including offering low prices, serving unique types of food, or supplying services that go above and beyond what is traditionally offered. Brand Your Storefront/Delivery Van - Branding your storefronts and delivery vans provides a more professional look for your business and makes it easier to separate your business from the competition. Additionally, adding your brand to these items will create more awareness and visibility, exposing potential customers to your company. Back to Top How to Promote Your Catering Business Offering promotions and other special events is an effective way to entice potential customers. Other promotions can reward already-existing customers, helping you to retain valuable connections. Establishing strong relationships with customers through special promotions builds brand loyalty, ensuring you have a solid customer base to support your catering business. Below, we cover some of the best promotions your catering company can run to generate new business: Sales - One of the easiest ways to promote your business and attract new customers is by offering sales. Offering special sales and coupons during busy times of the year such as during the wedding season is a great way to attract new customers. Discounts - To encourage clients to book multiple events with your catering business, try offering discounts for multiple bookings. If a client books several different events at the same time, knock a percentage of the overall cost off to encourage multiple bookings. Loyalty Programs - Creating a loyalty program is a fantastic way to reward repeat customers and encourage them to continue to do business with you. Loyalty rewards such as free items and special products help establish a strong connection with customers, leading to long-lasting partnerships with your catering company. Referral Bonuses - Offering referral bonuses allows your customers to help with your marketing efforts. Offer special discounts to both the referrer and the refer-ee, making it much more likely that clients will refer your company to those in their network. Expanding your catering company’s marketing efforts allows your company to acquire new clients and increase brand recognition. Even if you don’t alter any other aspects of your business, improving your marketing efforts has the potential to provide a massive boon to your business. There are a variety of ways to reach potential customers, giving your catering company the chance to tailor its campaigns to its target markets. With successful marketing, your company can greatly increase profits, allowing you to further improve and expand your business in other areas.
How to Capitalize on Sports Bar Marketing
There are a lot of tips out there that can help you run a successful bar, but sports bars present their own unique set of challenges and opportunities. By targeting the sports community, you can create a fun environment and a set of regular customers. But, how can you combat lulls between major sporting events and keep the interest and excitement piqued year-round? Can you appeal to a casual crowd without alienating sports fans? Read on for a few sports bar marketing ideas that apply to new and established operations alike. Shop All Sports Themed Furniture and Decor Use these links to learn more about individual aspects of sports bar marketing: What Is a Sports Bar? Sports Bar Marketing Traditional Sports Bar Marketing Sports Bar Designs What to Broadcast at a Sports Bar What to Offer at a Sports Bar for Non-Sports Fans What Is a Sports Bar? A sports bar is a bar that caters to sports fans by continuously showing televised sporting events. Sports bars are typically themed with sports memorabilia to enhance the atmosphere. For many, sports bars are their preferred way to watch major sporting events because it allows them to have a sense of community while watching the game. For this reason, big-ticket sporting events are extremely lucrative for sports bars. Sports Bar Marketing One of the most important elements of sports bar marketing is advertising. You may have great bar food and a lively atmosphere, but advertising through social media and other more traditional methods can help fill your seats, even during your local team’s off-season. Social Media Marketing Using social media as a sports bar marketing tool provides you with instantaneous connections with your customers. Establish a presence on Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and other social media platforms to make your business more accessible to followers. These sites can give you a strong and free way to spread the word about special deals and events to your target audience. But if promotions are all you have to offer on social media, they can easily become white noise, so be sure to actively communicate with your followers to establish a more meaningful and profitable rapport. Consider the following social media features to get your sports bar’s name known: Use Facebook Events to spread the word on upcoming events and gauge interest. Go live to notify customers of what they are missing out on at your location. Share Instagram Stories and Facebook Reels with some behind-the-scenes videos of your location and staff. Purchase a Snapchat Filter that customers can play with while in your sports bar and share with friends. Join a beer-based community like BeerAdvocate, TapHunter, or Untappd to indicate to customers what new beers you’ll be featuring at your establishment. Mobile Options In addition to your social media marketing, consider creating a website where customers can access information about your sports bar and the promotions you’re currently running. The National Restaurant Association discovered in a 2017 study that 90% of smartphone users first search for restaurant information online when choosing a dining establishment. A website, Google listing, or Yelp page will make your location more prevalent during their search. You can also try creating a loyalty app or mobile club using SMS marketing where customers can opt-in to have coupons and other special offers sent directly to their phones. There are a lot of things to consider when going this route, so be sure to research how to set up an SMS campaign system before you get started. Traditional Sports Bar Marketing In an age of technology, you may find that there is a lot of competition in an online setting. Here are some traditional sports marketing methods that can help you advertise directly to your local community: Advertise at a Local Game Marketing your sports bar at a local sporting event is a fantastic way to reach your target audience. Here are some advertising ideas you can use to advertise your bar at local games: Get your advertisement in the program. Buy banner space in the stadium. Ask to cater food during the game. On-Air Advertisements On-air advertisements during games are a great way to cast a wide net and get your sports bar's name out there. Below are some of the most common ways to advertise your sports bar on-air. Run a short radio commercial around game days. Submit a television commercial to run a few days before a big game. See if a television station would be willing to cast a pre- or post-game segment at your establishment. Run Promotions Running promotions and special deals is a fantastic way to reach sports enthusiasts and non-fans alike. Here are some of the most common promotions run by sports bars: Provide limited-time offers like new appetizers or drinks. Have a raffle giveaway. Incentivize large parties with group rates or discounts on larger dishes. Offer a freebie after team victories. Provide play-by-play discounts according to the action during a big game. Sponsor a Team Sponsoring a local team or charity can be a highly effective advertising choice in traditional sports bar marketing. This allows your bar to create connections with the local community while getting exposure for your brand name. Supporting your community establishes your company as a valuable asset to the neighborhood while providing a place where locals can come to dine and relax. When you sponsor an amateur league team, your advertisement may be placed on banners in the stadium, in the program during games, and sometimes even on their jerseys. Your sports bar also becomes a location where the team can bring their friends and family to celebrate victories or unwind after losses. Sports Bar Designs Once you have decided what you will be broadcasting in your sports bar, you’ll need to make sure that the sports atmosphere is established to accompany the games and matches. The atmosphere depends not only on your decor but on your staff as well. Sports Bar Themes Help your customers become fully immersed in the wide world of sports with some careful interior decorating. Pennants, pictures, jerseys, sports movie posters, balls, and other memorabilia should be craftily sprawled across the walls of your sports bar, with extra points for anything that's autographed. Here are some more ways to embrace the fandom in your establishment: Name a meal or beverage after teams or players. Print stat charts for your customers during big games. Set up a photo booth station with creative backgrounds and props for customers to take pictures. Sports Bar Uniforms Your location may be decorated in the right way, but your staff can truly make the sports atmosphere come alive with their attire and their conversations. You may choose to have your wait staff all in referee uniforms to embrace the sporting theme while keeping it general. Another option would be to design a custom jersey for your sports bar featuring each staff member's name on the back. On special occasions, you might encourage them to wear their favorite team's jersey. And remember— sporting events are a social experience so, while not everyone needs to be a die-hard fan, hiring those who have a basic level of sports knowledge can turn some of your more passionate customers into regulars. What to Broadcast at a Sports Bar You may already be equipped with a great menu, great service, and great pricing, but what you televise at your sports bar can make or break your business. Perhaps the most important thing to consider when it comes to sports bars is excellent programming. Broadcasting the local teams' games is an absolute must, but you’ll also want to create a broadcasting schedule to cover your establishment year-round. Local Sporting Events To create regular customers, be sure to take full advantage of a fan base that is already established in your area during game season. If your sports bar is located in a town or city with a champion team, be sure to make your loyalty known by broadcasting their every game and getting into the excitement. Fans will then be able to use your establishment as a place to celebrate team victories or mourn team losses together. Even if the local team is off their game, maintaining a commitment to that team throughout the season can earn you some goodwill with its most ardent supporters. You can also draw local fans into your location by: Hosting a tailgate party for pre-game hype. Throwing big parties for significant games. Celebrating the opening of a sports season. Providing an after-party location for team victories. Pay-Per-View Broadcasts Broadcasting games from your local teams is important, but they will not provide you with year-round coverage. So, what should you broadcast when many of the major sports enjoy their off-season? Consider showcasing classic sports broadcasts from years past that have local, national, or worldwide significance. It's also important to expand your scope beyond regional sports coverage, especially when it comes to big games and events with broad appeal. You can take things to the next level by offering premium content that customers otherwise wouldn't have access to without paying subscription fees. This could mean showing pay-per-view events like boxing matches or providing access to every pro football game (which are regionally restricted). The key is to draw patrons in with something they couldn't just tune into at home on basic cable. Not sure what to show? Poll your customers on sporting events they would be interested in viewing that go beyond what regional cable can offer. Once you establish what you will be broadcasting, prepare a schedule that customers can access so they don’t miss their favorite events. What to Offer at a Sports Bar for Non-Sports Fans It's understandable that your target customers for your sports bar will be sports fans; however, to maintain a steady flow of business, you’ll also want to provide ways to attract and entertain non-sports fans. The key is knowing how far you can go to create an environment that will appeal to the casual crowd, without interfering with the sporting atmosphere enjoyed by your regular customers. There are various ways that you can cater to both sports fans and non-sports fans alike. Set up Game Stations Creating a game room in your sports bar can give customers fun activities to do while they wait for their food and keep them ordering drinks while they play. You can include games like: Arcade games Dartboards Board games Jenga Pinball machines Billiards Feature Competitive Events Competitive games get guests involved and excited, especially when there are prizes to be won. For prizes, you can offer a free beverage or appetizer, merchandise with your sports bar's logo on it, or gift cards. Here are some competitive events you may be interested in featuring: Trivia nights Cornhole tournaments Backyard beer games Card table games A basketball hoop to shoot for prizes Host Live Appearances Creating events like live appearances can give your customers something to look forward to and bring in a new crowd of faces who come to support the act and order food and drinks while they are there. Some suggestions for live appearances include: Book a local band Feature a local comedian Host an open mic night Bring in a local celebrity to do signings Rent out Spaces Larger parties of customers tend to gravitate toward locations where their group can have an added level of privacy. By adding a party room that can be rented or a patio that can be reserved, customers can then host private events at your sports bar. When those areas are not booked, they can be used for overflow seating. Back to Top You can build these tips into your sports bar marketing plan to start bringing in customers and keep them coming back for more, whether they are sports fans or not. However, don’t be discouraged if you do not see immediate positive feedback after implementing one of these ideas. Give it time, poll your regular customers about their needs and wants, and adjust accordingly to achieve success in your sports bar.
How to Customize Products at WebstaurantStore
Boost your brand recognition and customer base by adding customizable supplies throughout your establishment! Whether you’re outfitting your staff in personalized aprons or adding your logo to a custom coffee sleeve, customized products can provide an eye-catching and professional source of marketing for your business. We offer an easy-to-use customization tool so you can design a full inventory of personalized supplies! Read on to find out how you can customize products right here at WebstaurantStore. How to Use the WebstaurantStore Customization Tool Easily design a wide variety of custom printed restaurant supplies by following these simple steps to navigate through our customization tool! Shop All Customizable Supplies 1. Accessing Customizable Supplies From the Homepage - Scroll down on the homepage and you will find a purple button on the right hand side that reads “Make It Personal With Customizable Supplies”. This will take you to all of the eligible customizable products. See Step 2 for your next step. From a Product Page - If a product is customizable, you will see a large red or purple button below the price that says “Customize & Add to Cart”. This will take you to the customization tool for that specific product. You can jump to Step 3 from here. 2. Select a Product to Customize If you navigated to the customizable products from the homepage, you will then need to take the following steps: Select the type of items you would like to customize from the eligible categories. Select the specific item by using the dropdowns on the following page from the variations available. 3. Check the Design Considerations The Design Considerations will have important instructions that pertain to the customization of the product you are interested in. Find essential details, such as the following: Maximum Printing Area Color Fees and Restrictions Plate Charges Required File Resolution 4. Explore the Customization Types Once you’re familiar with the Design Considerations of your product, you are ready to move forward to selecting a customization type. The customization tool will show you what you can add to the product! Your options may include the following depending on the product: Image/Logo Text Both 5. Identifying the Available Product Regions The available regions for customization will be listed below the Image/Logo section. For example, your logo may be able to wrap around a customizable foam cups, or you may be given the option to customize the left chest, right chest, and right shoulder of a chef coat. 6. Upload Your Images Once you know how many images you can use and where you can place them, it's time to begin uploading your image files. Here are some important tips to keep in mind for selecting your images. Only one file can be uploaded per region. Select the file type that is listed in the Design Considerations for that product. Although the tool can accept file types such as .png, .jpg, .gif, .eps, .pdf, and .ai, the manufacturer may need a specific file type to proceed with your customization. Adjust the placement and size of your image to ensure you get the proper amount of coverage that you desire. 7. Inspect the 3D Rendering The 3D rendering on the right side of the page will update as you upload images to the regions in the tool. This can help provide you with an idea of what the final product may look like. This is how you can toggle your 3D rendering to see it from all angles: Spin the image by left clicking Move the image by right clicking Zoom in to the image by scrolling 8. Check Different Product Options You can easily try out your logo on different products within the same category by using the Product Options dropdown above the 3D rendering. The 3D rendering will automatically update as you toggle through the available options. These options will typically feature product variations and availability for the following: Sizes Colors Materials Before you can move onto the next step, be sure that all other dropdowns in the tool are filled out with your preferences. 9. Review the Pricing When you are satisfied with the 3D rendering, click the green button that reads “Get Pricing”. On this page, you’ll be able to do the following: Leave a note for Customer Solutions about your order if needed Check the pricing discounts you can receive based on the quantity of items you select Review the minimum quantities for the order Select a quantity for your purchase See your subtotal Add the purchase to your cart 10. Checkout Once you hit the “Add to Cart”, you'll be led to the Cart page to proceed through the checkout process as usual. <iframe scrolling="no" width="392" height="226" src="/v/?num=6948&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> What to Expect After You Place Your Custom Order With WebstaurantStore Once you hit the “Complete Checkout” button for your customization order, here is what you can expect: You’ll receive your order confirmation email. The Customizable Team will review your order and email you to either confirm the uploaded artwork or request new artwork. Additionally, they will provide the estimated lead times for the proof process and production. Once the artwork is confirmed, the Customizable Team will request a proof of your custom product from the manufacturer. The manufacturer will provide a proof of the item with your customizations and request your approval; occasionally a signature is required. Once your approval is received, the manufacturer will begin production of your order. Your order will ship to you! Customization FAQs We addressed some of the more frequently asked questions regarding the customization process to help make your experience go smoothly. Will I Be Able to See a Sample of My Customized Product? The manufacturer will send you a proof PDF via email of your customized product for your approval. Cambro is currently the only one of our manufacturers that will send a physical sample before production. When Will I See the Price And/Or Quantity Minimum? The pricing and quantity minimums will be visible through the “Get Price” button after you have uploaded your image into the customization tool. This is because the pricing can be impacted by the options you select while designing your custom product. I’m Having Trouble Uploading an Image. What Should I Do? If the customization tool isn’t taking the image file you are trying to use, you may upload any image that is in a JPG, PNG, or Tiff format. The Customizable Team will then contact you after the order is placed to request the file in the proper format and resolution. You may leave a comment for Customer Solutions during the checkout process notifying them of the file issue. I Want to Reorder, but I Can’t Add the Item to My Cart? If you are looking to reorder a previously placed customizable purchase, just email us at [email protected]. Let us know the quantity you are looking for and the Customizable Team will be able to send you a quote to add to your cart during checkout. How Long Will the Custom Order Take to Make? Lead times for custom orders can vary depending on the item and manufacturer. Contact Customer Solutions through our chat system for an estimate on proof lead times and production lead times before placing your order. Can I Expedite My Custom Order? Custom items cannot be expedited since they are made to order. What If I Get the Proof and I Change My Mind? Can I Cancel the Order? If you don’t love your proof, you may cancel the order at this point. However, some products will still have a sample fee or proof fee that is non-refundable. You will receive an email from the Customizable Team after the order is placed to approve any additional fees before moving forward to the proof process. How Can I Get My Image into the Accepted Format? The final image for the customization will need to be in Vector format. If you are working with a designer, they should be able to convert the file for you. Vector converters and instructions are available online and may vary depending on the image program you are using. How Many Colors Can I Use in My Custom Image? The number of colors you can use in a customization depends on the product you choose. The color limit will be clearly listed in the Design Considerations for that product. I Am a Plus Customer; Why Am I Being Charged Shipping? Each new customization order will have a shipping cost even for WebstaurantPlus accounts due to the time and effort they take to get set up with the manufacturer. However, each reorder you place for your custom purchase will have free shipping since it is already established in their system! Adding custom products to your establishment is a simple marketing strategy to build your restaurant branding and create recognition for your business! By familiarizing your customers with your logo or slogan through custom restaurant supplies, you can encourage impulse sales and enhance brand loyalty among customers.
How to Get More Yelp Reviews
One of the most popular sites for finding, rating, and reviewing bars and restaurants is Yelp. And having a favorable score on Yelp can create a free advertising boost that can bring in more customers. That’s because, for many, the search for a new restaurant starts on the Internet, with 90% of customers seeking out online reviews before making a purchase from a business. Keep reading to learn how this popular site can affect your business and the best practices you can use for getting more Yelp reviews. How Does Yelp Work? Yelp is a social media website that allows customers to review their experience at foodservice establishments. Over 50 million new customers visit Yelp’s website a month. The website features over 135 million reviews and 90% of total Yelp users say that the reviews they read impact their purchases. Yelp rewards customers who post frequent and useful reviews by providing them with the title of Elite Yelper and extra influence. These Yelp reviewers hold a higher impact on a restaurant's Yelp score. Yelp also provides important business information including the address, hours of operation, and amenities included in order to help potential customers decide where to eat. While the website was created with the consumer in mind, they offer tools that business owners can use to communicate with customers and market their restaurant. These include the ability to add a menu, update business profile information, view visitor activity, and respond to customer reviews. How to Get Yelp Reviews When it comes to Yelp, you’ll want not only positive reviews but a lot of reviews in general. This creates the impression that your establishment is popular and busy, which is an appealing attribute for future guests. So, how can you get more Yelp reviews? Here are a few tips on what to do and not to do in order to get your customers to leave reviews of your business online. 1. Don’t Ask for or Influence Your Customers’ Reviews If you want to get more Yelp reviews, authenticity is key. You want customers to give their honest impression of your business, because that honesty is what will persuade other customers to visit your establishment. Explicitly asking customers to leave a positive Yelp review is not recommended. Doing this could easily turn off some customers from writing a review altogether or, even worse, coming back to your restaurant. Never Buy Yelp Reviews or Add Fake Ones One important thing you need to know about Yelp is that they punish users who buy Yelp reviews or have employees leave fake Yelp reviews. The website and its community of loyal followers can easily tell when an unauthentic review has been posted. The Yelp algorithm, as well as other filters, and programs are in place to help them find fake and paid Yelp reviews. Associating your business with these types of reviews can have a negative impact on your restaurant. If the website determines that you buy Yelp reviews, it will post a Consumer Alert banner on your page for 90 days. This banner will notify your potential customers that your company was caught attempting to pay for Yelp reviews, which will break their trust in your brand. Yelp fake reviews and paid endorsements are also a violation with the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) and can result in serious fines or further repercussions. Yelp filters reviews with these common attributes as fake or insincere: No profile image on the reviewer's profile Review lacks specifics about the dining experience Review is under 135 characters Reviewer writes similar reviews each time Review is either entirely negative or entirely positive, sometimes sounding exaggerated Reviewer has little to no review history with other businesses Reviewer has little to no “Yelp friends” on the profile Reviewer’s profile includes no information about themselves Reviewer posts multiple reviews around the same time or in a day Reviewer posts a 5-star review for one company and a 1-star review for its competitor Yelp’s algorithm will err on the side of caution and filters out reviews that sound fake even when they may be real reviews. For that reason, it is important to advertise review options for all of your customers, encouraging as many of them as possible to write an authentic Yelp company review. 2. Post Reminders and Yelp Signs in Your Dining Space There are ways that you can let your customers know you’re on Yelp and interested in receiving reviews without explicitly asking. Directly asking for a review is against the Yelp review policy, but a simple “Let us know how we’ve been doing!” sign in your business and on social media is an effective way to encourage your guests to share their thoughts. Place an official Yelp sticker around your establishment to let guests know your business is active on the site and you’d appreciate their reviews. Consider placing these stickers near your cash register or front door so it’s the last thing your customers see before leaving. Seeing the Yelp stickers in your business may remind your customers to write a Yelp review when they return home. Yelp even offers the HTML coding that allows you to add a Yelp badge on your website and social media profile pages. You may pair the badge with a caption inviting customers to visit your Yelp page, along with some authentic review examples that previous customers have written. If you do so, choose well-formatted reviews that can show customers how to write a Yelp review that will be approved by the Yelp review filtering process. 3. Follow up with Customers After Their Experience Customers usually don’t think about leaving a review after a dining experience. It is estimated that only 15 in 1,000 customers will bother to write a review about a business. A great way to increase the number of customers who are willing to leave a review is by following up with them after their experience. This interaction can begin face-to-face by training your staff to ask your customers how their meal and experience was before presenting the check. If the customer expresses a positive experience, kindly suggest that they share their feedback online on their favorite review website. If the experience was negative, you then have a chance to make it up to the customer by asking further questions and offering some sort of discount or freebie as an apology. This may save your Yelp business page from a negative review. You can even follow up with customers after they have left your establishment with the help of websites like ReputationStacker.com. Consider adding a location on your receipt where customers can provide their email or phone number for feedback. You can then enter their information into ReputationStacker’s system, and the website will automatically send them a single-question survey asking about their experience. Once your customer replies, they will be guided to the review sites of your choice and you will be notified about any negative reviews that need addressing. 4. Offer Exclusive Deals and Gift Certificates on Yelp While businesses should not offer deals or coupons in exchange for reviews, Yelp Deals can be an effective way to get customers in the door and leaving a review of your business. These deals can be in the form of a discount coupon or a gift certificate, and customers can print or pull up these coupons on their smartphones to easily show their server. Offering a discount or coupon is an excellent way to bring Yelp users into your establishment and, because they got the coupon from Yelp, there's a good chance that they'll leave a review after their visit. You may also offer a discount or promotion to customers who bring in a copy of their Yelp review, regardless of star rating, during their next visit. This will encourage them to write reviews on Yelp and become repeat customers. 5. Respond to Both Negative and Positive Yelp Reviews It is inevitable that customers will post negative reviews on Yelp, but negative reviews aren’t always bad Yelp reviews! Fortunately, Yelp allows owners to respond to reviews, so you can turn negative reviews into a positive for your business. Here are some tips you can use when responding to a negative review: Respond within 2 weeks of the original review posted Read the entire review before responding Start the response by apologizing and thank them for reaching out Admit any mistakes your business may have made in the situation Include details in your response that show you read the whole review Do not insult the customer or accuse them of lying Defend your business without becoming defensive Try to offer a solution or offer to contact the customer directly for further discussion and a personal resolution Provide manager contact information such as a phone number or email Try to reserve public messages for comments that will benefit all customers. If you can add something to a positive review, then post it publicly—but recognize that multiple public “thank yous” can look like pandering to customers for reviews. If your customers posted a review, it means they had such an impressive visit that they want to share it. 6. Keep Your Business Profile Up to Date As a restaurant or bar owner, you need to claim your Yelp business page to ensure the information posted is accurate. Yelp licenses business information from third party data collectors and posts that information online. As a result, the information that Yelp puts up on your business's page isn't always correct. It’s also important to post your restaurant’s menu on Yelp. This could be the difference between a guest coming to check out your new dinner special or heading to their regular place down the block. Posting a menu will also give you the advantage when out-of-town guests are looking for somewhere to eat. Yelp is a valuable resource for curious consumers and business owners who refuse to pay for reviews. Thanks to an entire community built on offering candid, honest feedback, restaurants can be held accountable for their actions, praised by happy customers, and offered valuable critique to help them improve. Follow these simple tips to build your business’s reputation and get more reviews on Yelp.
How to Advertise Your Restaurant For Free
Opening a restaurant is an expensive investment, and the last thing many restaurateurs think about are ways in which to advertise and market their new ventures. Many believe that, “if they build it, they will come,” but that isn’t necessarily true in the cut-throat foodservice industry. More times than not, restaurants fail due to insufficient or poor advertising. Business owners then wonder why crowds of hungry people aren’t rushing into their establishments, but usually it’s because there hasn't been enough marketing involved, or owners ran out of enough money in the first place. By using these tactics and tips, entrepreneurs will be able to advertise their restaurants for free within their communities and on the web. Determine Your Audience One of the first ways in which you can start your free restaurant advertising is to determine who you want as a customer. Who do you want to bring into your restaurant? As soon as you figure out who you want to serve, you can then focus on how you’ll make them interested in you. Are they senior citizens who will likely be coming in for the early-bird menu? Are they sports enthusiasts who want to watch the 'big game' at your establishment? Or are they young adults in college who are more interested in drink specials? Maybe your restaurant is geared more towards families? Even though you will want to serve everyone, it’s important to narrow down a target audience to start. Create a Website Four out of five consumers conduct local searches on their smartphones or computers for information on business hours, directions, addresses, and product availability. Making sure your business has an online presence, and is able to answer basic questions like location, hours of operation, and even product availability, is crucial to your success. Luckily, having a personal website doesn’t have to cost you much, if anything at all. There are many free programs that will let users create beautifully and visually appealing websites for free, and some look just the same as paid websites do. Programs like Wix, Weebly, Yola, Zoho, Wordpress and other builders let a business owner customize their website from the ground up. Everything from the theme and colors, to the images and fonts can be simply dragged and dropped with these easy-to-use website makers. When designing your website make sure to include the following: Menu- Include the prices of your menu items since many times this is why customers will be visiting your website. About- Include a section with details that tells patrons a little about your business, what you offer, how you got started, how many years you've been in business, if it’s family-owned and operated, etc. Specials and Upcoming Events- Update customers on event happenings in your restaurant so they can be sure to mark it down on their calendars. Hours of Operation- Inform customers when your business opens and closes. Map- Include a map of your location, along with directions from highly trafficked interstates and highways that will lead customers to your restaurant. It’s also important to mention where customers can park once they arrive. Try implementing the Google Maps widget on your website so customers can click and be instantly directed to your restaurant by Google Maps driving directions. Reservations- Include a phone number that people can call to make reservations, or link to apps like OpenTable where guests can enjoy the convenience of reserving their table online! Multimedia- Add pictures and videos of your restaurant, signature dishes, and special events that you've hosted. Social Media - Link visitors to your social media accounts where they can continue to engage with you. Establish Your Brand with a Blog While a website is meant to inform potential customers about your restaurant’s hours of operation, menu offerings, and specials, the purpose of a blog is similar to your social media accounts, and they’re used to entertain your readers and build your establishment’s brand. Having a good restaurant brand is important because it gives your business the opportunity to establish brand loyalty with your customers. Additionally, blogs are ideal for longer posts than social media platforms like Facebook and Instagram, which is ideal when explaining upcoming events or changes within your business. In addition to building your brand, creating a blog for your restaurant can help in a few other ways. For example, blogs are informal, and they are an excellent opportunity for your business to connect with your customers on a personal level. You can also blog about your new menu items or upcoming events to create buzz among your customer base. Additionally, your restaurant’s blog is a platform for your customers to leave comments, reviews, and suggestions, which can be valuable for improving your business. Online Directories Today, consumers live in a world where information is expected to be delivered instantaneously. Most everything is researched online, and many business directories have switched from the classic Yellow Book, to an online format. Websites like Yelp, Yahoo, Google Places, Yellow Pages, Super Pages, and Switchboard offer free services that business owners can sign up for to create their own page listings. Including information such as contact info and a link to your website will allow customers to find you easier on local search rankings. Become a Member of Your Chamber of Commerce Even though it’s not entirely free, becoming a member of your chamber of commerce is much cheaper than many other advertising strategies out there. For just a small fee each month, you can pay to join your community’s chamber of commerce, which is an organization that recognizes businesses throughout the community. Why Should You Join? Increases public perception- Being linked to an elite organization, such as a chamber of commerce, creates credibility for your business. Raises your visibility in the community- When you join your chamber of commerce your business will then be published in chamber newsletters and highlighted in other publications. This free press helps get your name out into the community. Be mindful that the cost of joining could range from $300-$1000, depending on how many employees your business employs. Create networking opportunities- This free form of advertising creates a link between you and other business owners, which can build an exchange of information by developing important contacts. Host Events & Promotions Another effective way to advertise your business is to host events that patrons will look forward to coming to each week. Trivia nights, karaoke music, happy hour, and special tasting opportunities are free ways that give customers a reason to want to visit your restaurant. You could give away a gift certificate to the winner of trivia nights which instantly creates a reason for them to come back. Promoting contests is another way to spread brand awareness because it entices customers to do something to get what they want. Offer coupons for free desserts or appetizers, since its likely your customers will order an expensive drink to go along, or an entrée to start. Create Buzz Will your restaurant be celebrating its grand opening? Or maybe you will be hosting a large event with some of the proceeds going towards an important cause? Pitch these ideas to the press or send out a press release about happenings going on at your restaurant since it may lead to a reporter wanting to cover the story at no cost to you. Engage Customers A great form of free advertising is to directly connect with your customers on a personal level, which can be done for free simply by using your computer. Create customer feedback cards as a way to gauge your restaurant’s service, while also helping you collect names, email addresses, and birth dates that you can use later to produce an email campaign. Send customers coupons when their birthdays approach, and send out e-mail blasts with announcements and special offers describing events happening at your restaurant. However, make sure to clearly state your intent when collecting information from individuals, like telephone numbers, because you don't want to violate any rules regarding the Telephone Consumer Protection Act. Build Partnerships A great way to network and advertise your business is by building relationships with other businesses in the community with whom your products relate to one another. For instance, if you own a smoothie shop, or juice bar, partner up with a local yoga studio or gym that you’ll likely share customers with. Offer discounts to promote each other’s business as a way of reaching more people in the community. Get Involved Customers who see that your business is actively involved with charitable events might benefit you by creating a positive reputation. Have your employees participate in events in the community since they will act as representatives of your business. You could also donate products to a worthy cause because it’s likely you will recoup profits by gaining that much back in free advertising. Though it isn't entirely free, becoming a sponsor to local school clubs and sports teams could create a large opportunity for your restaurant’s name to reach groups of people in the community. Elementary, middle, and high school sports teams need the financial support, and in return your logo, brand, and name will be displayed on baseball jerseys, signs, and banners, where crowds of people are likely to turn out. Social Media The largest and most widespread way that restaurateurs can advertise their business for free is by participating in social media. It is estimated that one out of every four people uses social media daily, and that 4.2 billion of those users access this information directly from their hand-held devices. Restaurant owners should select just a few social media sites to get started with, and spend their time focusing on quality posts, conversations, and ways in which to foster engagement with customers. Some of the best ways to market your restaurant for free are with the following social media strategies: Facebook Known as the largest social network, Facebook accounts for 23.39% of all Internet traffic. It allows anyone, including business owners, to create their own page describing content about themselves, pictures, videos, and updates, as well as being able to generate relationships with other users. Facebook even gives you free analytical information about how well your status updates and links are ranking so you can visually see how well your business is reaching others. Tip- Design a Facebook page that includes a strong cover image which is the first thing visitors will see upon arrival to your page. Change this image frequently to correspond with holidays, seasons, events, and other promotions that you want your restaurant to show off. Tip- Create exclusive offers to customers that can only be used if they “do” something for you, such as “liking” your Facebook page, following you, or mentioning you in a post. In return, patrons could be rewarded with a coupon to you restaurant, and each time they log on to Facebook they will be connected with your business. Twitter According to the IACP Center for Social Media, there is more than two billion searches on Twitter each day. Make sure your restaurant is next by joining this online community that enables users to post updates with 140 characters or less. Promote your events, menu items, and specials using Twitter since it doesn't take much time for users to read. Tip- Create a unique hashtag to use on posts that will help customers find you in the future. Ex. #ThePubHouse or #MamasItalianBistro Tip- Use Twitter to take advantage of posting visual content since you are capped at a 280 character limit. Post pictures of weekly events, new signature dishes, or flyers promoting specials. Tip- Strategically send out posts at times of the day when people might be the most hungry. Breakfast, lunch, dinner, and late-night hours are popular times that customers might be looking for something to eat. Don’t have the time to dedicate to this? Programs such as Hootsuite and Tweetdeck allow you to schedule and monitor tweets ahead of time, saving you time to work on other projects! Pinterest Much like a corkboard, Pinterest lets users “pin” their favorite findings on the web through the use of links and images. It’s not surprising that food is the top-ranked category on Pinterest since many users go here to find recipes and culinary inspiration. Tip- Search Engine Optimization is essential when gaining a presence in social media. The more descriptive your pins, titles, and descriptions are, the more likely they will be found when users search for you. Tip- Share links and images that are industry-related to your restaurant. If your business specializes in farm-to-table ingredients, post pins that link to local farmer’s markets. Tip- It’s also helpful to create boards that break down the categories on your menu, such as appetizers, signature salads, and entrées. Take pictures of each of these items so future customers will be able to see exactly what you have to offer. Instagram If a picture is worth a thousand words then Instagram would be a library. This mobile photo app instantly lets you share filtered and enhanced images with followers. 90% of users 35 and younger participate in Instagram daily, which is a great campaign opportunity to use if your target market is within that demographic. Tip- Motivate followers with photo contests that they can easily enter just by tagging your restaurant in their Instagram posts. Tempt customers with prize packages they could win by taking a picture of themselves with items that you want to promote the most! Tip- Include a link in your Instagram profile to your website and other social media accounts you use. Lead customers into your restaurant with these free marketing and advertising strategies that are sure to increase your presence in the community and on the web. Try tactics like hosting events, joining your local chamber of commerce, and engaging with customers which are all great ways to publicize your restaurant. Since 46% of Internet users depend on social media to influence their decision when making a purchase, it's now more important than ever to become involved with this free form of PR.
Bakery Management
How to Write a Bakery Business Plan
Starting your own bakery is no easy task. Many people have tried and failed to get their business ideas off the ground, or worse, their business flopped within the first year. So what sets a successful bakery apart from the ones that don't make it? A solid bakery business plan that can help you stay organized and obtain the funding you need. We’ll talk you through every major part of a business plan, from creating a basic description of your establishment to offering financial projections to future investors. Why is a Bakery Business Plan Necessary? A bakery business plan can be used to garner interest from potential investors or loans from a bank. Additionally, it is helpful to you as an owner. Creating a bakery business plan allows you to thoroughly analyze every detail of your potential business. This includes things as small as the equipment you will need or as big as the space for your business.While your bakery may have started as a vision, evolving it into a solid plan will allow you to prove to yourself and others that it is a viable business venture. What Sections Should a Bakery Business Plan Include? When presenting a business plan for your bakery to potential investors, include the following information: Executive Summary Company Overview and Description Market Analysis Business Offerings Management Marketing and Public Relations Strategies Financial Projections Keep reading below to learn how to create an effective bakery business plan that includes each of these important sections. Bakery Business Plan Sample Breakdown Below we give you an in-depth look at each section in your bakery business plan. 1. Write an Executive Summary Although it’s the last thing you’ll write for your bakery business plan, an executive summary is the first thing you hand to bankers or potential investors. That’s because this is an over-arching summary of your bakery’s business plan. Investors will read the executive summary to determine if they're interested in the rest of your business plan. Typically, executive summaries are between one and four pages in length, but vary depending on each individual's business. The goal of this summary is to get your foot in the door and have face time with the investor. You should detail what makes your company special and why that will make your company successful, along with your expected growth. It acts as an introduction, but it should be completed last to reflect the most current business model you have developed. A few important questions to answer in your executive summary include where your bakery will be located as well as how much building space is required for operation. It’s important to also cover the expected cost of your building space and any necessary equipment. From there, be sure to cover your overall goals and projected profits. In order to make your executive summary as powerful as possible, consider some of the following tips: Write a strong hook. The first paragraph should serve as an introduction to your executive summary that explains what your bakery does. Use concise language. Take advantage of bullet points to allow investors to read through your summary faster. Be careful, however, not to sacrifice quality and the level of detail for conciseness. Discuss your business’s core strength. Maybe you have an excellent management team lined up, or you know that you make an exceptional product. You may even offer a unique service that nobody else in the area can provide. Be sure to include these details. Know who your investors are, and use language that will resonate with them. Make your executive summary easily understandable by whomever you are presenting it to, based on their profession or educational background. Change your executive summary when presenting to different investors. If your executive summary had too much detail the first time and the investor skipped right over it, then change it up for the next attempt. Avoid using superlatives, cliches, or claims that can’t be backed up. Don’t try to make claims such as “the best donuts in the world” if they can’t be backed up by proof. Stay realistic with your statements and instead offer tangible facts. For example, you can say you use the highest-quality ingredients in your donut recipes and make them to order. Be authentic. This business is something you’re obviously passionate about, so let it show in your plan. 2. Company Overview and Description The first step in writing a bakery business plan is to compose a company overview of your business. The overview should explain why you want to open a bakery, so you can show your financial source that you’re passionate about the business you want to start. <p">While a bakery may sound self-explanatory, use this section to outline the finer details of your business plan. It is in this company overview that you can further develop ideas mentioned in your executive summary. In general, the company overview is your chance to discuss how and why you plan to open your bakery. When writing a company overview for your bakery, be sure to answer the following questions: What is your niche? Do you have a specific theme that your bakery will revolve around? Who is your target audience? Do you have any special recipes or promotions? What is your strategic differentiator? What is the legal structure of your bakery’s business? What are your short term and long term goals? 3. Market Analysis This section of your bakery business plan will probably require the most research. Here you will expand on how you will fit into the existing bakery market. The details will demonstrate your knowledge of the industry and market because your research findings should be a sound confirmation of the conclusions you have stated up to this point. When conducting research for your market analysis, be sure to consider the following: Look at the demographics of your area. What’s the largest age group? What is the income level of your intended customers? Learn about trends. How much do people in the area spend on eating out? Are there any seasonal trends that would likely prevent people from coming to your bakery? Research your competitors. What can you learn from their success? How can you take that one step further to be a contender in the market? Become familiar with codes and regulations. What regulations will apply to your bakery? How do you plan on complying with these rules? Detail relevant financial information. What will your pricing structure be like? 4. Business Offerings Use this section to specify what type of baked goods you will supply to your customers. Whether you’re focusing on fresh-baked breads or colorful macarons, go into detail about your offerings. In addition, be sure to explain your reasoning behind selling these particular items. How will these goods help your bakery become the next neighborhood hot spot? When detailing your business offerings, be sure to answer the following questions: Will you have specialty items, including gluten-free or custom-made products? Did you create a completely new product? If so, do you intend to patent it? Are any of your items unique to the culture of the area you plan to sell in? Do you plan to develop new recipes over time? Is there anything that might cause a decline in the demand for your particular goods? Where do you intend to buy ingredients and equipment? 5. Management Plan Developing a plan on how your company will be organized is a very important step in writing your bakery business plan. In this section, you should lay out your bakery’s management structure. If there are several owners of the business, it is in this section you can include personal information and shares of ownership. Showing future investors a management plan allows you to prove you’re qualified to run a bakery. When preparing your management plan, take time to answer the following questions: Will you have a business partner? What percentage of the company do you plan to own? How many employees do you plan to hire? Will you be doing the actual baking or running things behind the scenes? Will you have a financial advisor or accountant who handles the business aspects? Will anyone else be included in the day-to-day decision making process? 6. Marketing and Public Relations Strategies Before you can start profiting, your business needs a solid strategy for entering the market and attracting customers. Building a strong community presence is a very important step to entering the existing bakery market. It’s in this section that you should explain and develop the steps you will take to reach potential customers. Aside from offering unique goods and services, coming up with a creative or catchy name can quickly draw in curious customers. Begin thinking about how you want to develop your brand as you outline how you want to market your business. Reaching Your Target Audience During your market analysis you should have identified your target market. When working on a marketing strategy, consider offering special or competitive pricing to appeal to your market. Promote certain products or flavors that will entice potential customers, or highlight special services or goods unique to your business. Additionally, you’ll want to consider how you plan to appeal to your audience’s sense. For example, some restaurants or bakeries will go as far as to place their ovens closer to the front of the store, which allows enticing smells to waft out onto the street. Develop an Advertising Strategy It’s important to develop an advertising strategy that will work most effectively with your target market. Will you use social media to create an online presence for your business? Or will you have more success with newspapers and flyers? Additionally, you may want to consider hosting a grand opening to draw in a crowd and promote your business. Exploring Expansion Even before opening day, you’ll want to begin thinking about possible plans for expansion. Investors will want to know whether or not you plan to expand your store down the line. Will this require opening another location? If so, will you be eventually hiring more employees? 7. Financial Projections For the final section of a business plan for your bakery, you’ll need to elaborate on the financial aspects of your business. While you can’t know for sure how your business will fare in the future, you’ll need to outline your costs and do some research to explain the potential success of your business. By this point you have analyzed the market demographics, so you need to use this to set up financial goals for your company. Detail all of the costs of supplies, bills, and salaries that are necessary to keep your bakery up and running. After taking all of this into consideration, carefully try to determine the period of time in which you expect to turn a profit. When creating financial projections, it’s important to be realistic. This will help you secure investors. You are trying to assure them that they would be making a good investment by aligning with your business. Creating a formal bakery business plan is a crucial step in obtaining financial investors and staying organized. This plan can turn your vision into realistic goals and expectations meant to impress and interest investors. When done right, your bakery business plan can provide you with peace of mind that you’re entering a viable and profitable business venture. </p">
How to Cut a Cake
Anyone who’s been in charge of cutting a cake knows that it can be a high-pressure situation. From ruining the appearance of your frosting to uneven sized slices, cutting a cake can sometimes be more stressful than actually making and decorating one. Luckily for you, we’ve provided an instructional video and step-by-step directions that show you how to cut a cake. How to Choose Your Knife For each cake, you’ll want to cut them with a slicing knife. However, you’ll want to use a different edge style for different cakes. For example, since delicate cakes, like pound or angel, have to be cut in a sawing motion, you’ll want to use a slicing knife with a serrated edge. The rest of the cakes listed below can be cut with a knife that has a smooth edge. How to Clean Your Knife No matter what kind of knife you’re using to cut your cake, it’s important that you properly clean your blade in between each cut. Not only does this preserve the finished appearance of your frosting, but it also makes it easier to make each cut. Before you begin cutting, briefly soak the blade of your knife in a container of warm water. It’s important that the water is warm as this can help with cutting into your cake. Then, wipe off the excess water with a towel. After you’ve made your first cut, you’ll want to dip the blade of your knife back into the water and move it around to remove any crumbs and frosting. Once again, take your towel and wipe off the blade. Step-by-Step Instructions How to Cut Delicate Cakes Since delicate cakes are usually sticky, it’s helpful to have the blade of your knife slightly wet and warm before your first cut. 1.Using a slicing knife with a serrated edge, cut into your cake in a sawing motion. 2. Determine the size of your slice of cake. 3. Again, gently saw into your cake. 4.Using the flat side of your blade, pick up your slice of cake from the bottom to serve. How to Cut Layered Cakes To avoid touching the cake with your hands, use a cake stand with a cutting board mat for grip. 1.Using a pie or cake marker, delicately place it on top of the cake. 2.This will leave marks behind that you will use as a guide for cutting. 3.Using a knife with a thin, long blade, press down into one of the marked lines. 4.Once the knife has gone all the way through, pull it away from the cake. 5.Then, take the knife and choose a line to the left or right of your first cut. 6.Again, press the knife down into the marked line and pull it away. 7.Slide a pie server under the bottom of the slice and serve. How to Cut Sheet Cakes To avoid touching the cake with your hands, use a cake stand with a cutting board mat for grip. 1.Using a knife with a long, thin blade, vertically cut your cake in half. 2.Then, vertically cut your halves in half, leaving you with four long sections. 3.Starting from either end of the cake, press the blade into the cake and pull it away. 4.Continue this until you have five slices from your one of your quarters. 5.Using the flat side of your blade, slide it under the bottom of your slice to serve. 6.Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 for the remaining quarters. How to Cut Dense Cakes To avoid touching the cake with your hands, use a cake stand with a cutting board mat for grip. 1.Using a knife with a thin, long blade, cut your cake in half. 2.Next, cut your halves in half, leaving you with four equally sized sections. While we cut four, thin slices into each quarter, the size of the slices can be left up to your preference. 3.Begin cutting one of the quarters in half. 4.Press the blade down and pull away once you've reached the bottom of your cake. 5.Repeat the previous step on the remaining quarters. 6.Using the flat side of your blade, slide it under the bottom of your slice to serve. If you would like to get 16 slices from your cake, you can do so by cutting the halves from your quarters in half.
Bar Management
How to Become a Certified Cicerone®
If you're familiar with sommeliers, the experts who help choose the perfect wine to complement meals, then you may be interested to know that the beer world has an equivalent. Allow us to introduce you to the Cicerone®, a certified expert in every type of beer. Cicerones® can achieve certification at four different levels, each showcasing their expertise and passion for beer. For bartenders and brewers, obtaining a Cicerone® certification offers valuable insights into the beverage industry and demonstrates professionalism in discussing and handling products. Operators can also benefit from these certifications by using them as a tool to assess potential hires or as a training resource, eliminating the need to create one internally. Explore the role of a Cicerone® and the requirements for each of the four levels of certification. What Is a Cicerone®? A Cicerone® is an expert in the brewing, selection, pairing, and serving of all varieties of beer. This title is earned through a certification process that involves both written and tasting examinations as well as a required demonstration of beer pairing expertise. It is the equivalent position to a sommelier in the wine industry. What Does a Cicerone® Do? A Cicerone® makes beer pairing suggestions, serves beer to customers, and is responsible for ensuring beer is stored and handled properly. The Cicerone® knows the proper temperatures and conditions for all beer styles and is trusted with keeping a beer garden or restaurant’s brews in their best condition. How to Pronounce Cicerone® Cicerone® is pronounced sis-uh-rohn. Cicerone® Levels There are four levels of certification in the Cicerone® Certification Program, ranging from Certified Beer Server® to Master Cicerone®. In the table below, we provide information on the certification requirements and benefits of each level. Level 1: Certified Beer Server® The Cicerone Certified Beer Server® exam assesses one’s ability to clean beer glassware, pour properly, and ensure beer hasn’t been ruined by improper handling. Holding this certification proves you know how to showcase a beer as its brewer intended. Certified Beer Server® Exam Prerequisites: None How to Take the Certified Beer Server® Exam: Register online and purchase the exam from the “My Account” page Certified Beer Server® Exam Cost: $69, two attempts provided per payment What You’ll Learn Below is an overview of what you’ll learn and be tested on to become a Certified Beer Server®. See the Certified Beer Server® syllabus for specific information. The terminology of beer, including important flavor descriptors and popular beer varieties Expertise in beer service, including the proper techniques for preparing glasses and pouring draft and bottled beers The primary ways beer flavor can deteriorate after leaving the brewery and effective methods for preventing these issues Certified Beer Server® Exam Format Online only 60 multiple-choice questions 75% required passing grade In addition to the exam, test takers must pass a short quiz about the Cicerone® program Level 2: Certified Cicerone® Everyone from bartenders to brewery executives benefits from the Certified Cicerone® designation. The certification signifies professional knowledge and crucial tasting abilities in the field of beer. To obtain this certification, you must pass both a written and tasting exam. Certified Cicerone® Prerequisites: Must be 21 years or older and have passed the Certified Beer Server® exam Certified Cicerone® Written Exam Cost: $225 Certified Cicerone® Tasting/Demonstration Exam Cost: $175 How to Take the Certified Cicerone® Exam: Register online and view the Cicerone® exam schedule to find a test near you and sign up through the My Account page What You’ll Learn Below is an overview of what you’ll learn and be tested on to become a certified Cicerone®. See Certified Cicerone® Syllabus for specific information. Extensive knowledge of beer storage, service, and styles as well as relative knowledge of beer history The ability to identify flawed beers How to make appropriate beer pairings Certified Cicerone® Exam Format In-person only Written exam with short answer and essay questions Tasting and demonstration component 80% required passing grade overall, with at least 70% for the tasting portion Level 3: Advanced Cicerone® The third level of certification is the Advanced Cicerone®. Passing this exam proves your expertise in beer, sensory skills, and ability to use advanced beer vocabulary in both industry and consumer-facing applications. Advanced Cicerone® Prerequisites: Must be 21 years or older and have passed the Certified Cicerone® exam. Must pass both written and tasting sections within three years. Advanced Cicerone® Written Exam Cost: $425 Advanced Cicerone® Tasting/Demonstration Exam Cost: $375 How to Take the Certified Advanced Cicerone® Exam: Register online and view the Advanced Cicerone® exam schedule to find a test near you and sign up through the My Account page What You'll Learn Below is an overview of what you’ll learn and be tested on to become a certified Advanced Cicerone®. See Certified Advanced Cicerone® Syllabus for specific information. Expert knowledge of brewing, beer, and beer service issues Theoretical and hands-on knowledge of draft systems Thorough knowledge of beer styles and beer and food pairings The ability to identify the beer flavor compounds listed on the syllabus by taste using AROXA™ flavor standards Advanced Cicerone® Exam Format Two in-person oral examinations plus in-person tasting panels The written portion is online and remotely proctored (a limited number of in-person written exams are available) 80% required passing grade overall, with at least 75% for the tasting portion Level 4: Master Cicerone® The Master Cicerone® certification is the highest level of certification. This prestigious certification acknowledges an unparalleled comprehension of brewing techniques, beer varieties, and the art of pairing. It combines exceptional tasting skills with extensive knowledge of the vast landscape of commercial beers. Master Cicerone® Prerequisites: Must be 21 years or older and have passed the Advanced Cicerone® exam. How to Take the Master Cicerone® Exam: Register online; exams are given once a year in the United States Master Cicerone® Test Cost: $995 What You’ll Learn Below is an overview of what you’ll learn and be tested on to become a Master Cicerone®. See the Master Cicerone® syllabus for specific information. “Encyclopedic knowledge” of all brewing, beer, and beer service issues Theoretical and hands-on knowledge of draft systems Thorough knowledge of beer styles and experience collaborating with chefs to create beer and food pairings Master Cicerone® Exam Format In-person only 2-day exam with multiple written, oral, and tasting components 85% required passing grade overall Which Level of Cicerone® Certification Is Right for You? Depending on the type of establishment you’d like to work in, your certification goals may vary. Earning a Certified Beer Server® is helpful when working in casual bars and restaurants, but working towards the title of Master Cicerone® makes sense for bartenders working in upscale environments and brewers. When considering certifications, it is important to think about the financial investment involved. For example, before becoming an Advanced Cicerone™, you should consider if there are job opportunities that can offset the cost of the certification. Check if there are high-level Cicerone® positions available in your area before investing. If not, you may need to consider relocating or asking if there is room to create a position for yourself. Since becoming a Master Cicerone® takes time, you can make these decisions while working towards the certifications. Cicerone® Exam Group Discount for Businesses The Cicerone® Certification Program offers discounted group exam rates for companies that produce and serve beer. Businesses can take advantage of individual training for staff or on-site training by a Cicerone® representative. Your employees then take their Certified Beer Server exams® individually online. This is a great option for any restaurant, brewery, or foodservice establishment that deals with the handling, manufacturing, or serving of beer. How to Prepare for the Cicerone ® Exam Whether you're studying for a Master Cicerone® certification or wondering how to become Cicerone Certified Beer Server®, there is a large amount of information to absorb and put to use. Thankfully, the Cicerone Certification Program® has plenty of tools and resources you can take advantage of or purchase to help get you ready for your exam. Beginners can make preparing for their Certified Beer Server® exam easier by taking the BeerSavvy® optional paid course before taking the test. This program teaches you the information found on the exam and is available online as an e-learning program as well as in person. For the Master Cicerone® exam, the Cicerone® Certification Program suggests the following in addition to studying their free resources: Taste a wide range of beer styles, and be familiar enough with their flavors to describe them in great detail Practice recognizing when a beer is flawed by using off-flavor kits and training Travel to beer-producing areas (particularly in Europe) to learn more about the brewing process Brew alone or with partners to gain hands-on experience Know the proper beer glass types for serving Practice beer and food pairing, especially in collaboration with chefs Becoming a Certified Cicerone® is a great investment for individuals seeking careers in all parts of the beer industry. With these certifications, you can prove your knowledge of beer and make yourself an attractive candidate for positions in breweries, restaurants, tap rooms, and more.
How to Saber Champagne
Sabering a bottle of champagne is a neat trick that can be very impressive to your guests. Opening a bottle of champagne with a saber is most typically done for special occasions like birthdays, anniversaries, and New Year's parties. With our easy step-by-step guide to sabering a bottle of champagne, you too can open a bottle with a blade at your momentous events. Here we'll teach you the history of sabering champagne, what type of blade you'll need, the physics behind the phenomenon, as well as how to saber champagne safely. Shop All Champagne Sabers Sabering Champagne Video For a tutorial on how to properly saber champagne, check out our video below: <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=5434&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> What Is a Champagne Sword? Traditionally, sabers have been used to open champagne bottles in the practice of sabrage. These champagne swords have medium-length blades that are around 30 centimeters or 12 inches with dull edges. Many champagne sabers have decorations on the handle and a highly polished blade, which enhances the show. A traditional champagne sword is not necessary for sabering a champagne bottle, though. For restaurants and clubs that only need to open bottles on rare occasions and holidays, you can use a simple chef knife. What Do I Need to Saber Champagne? To properly saber champagne, you'll need the following sabering supplies: Ice Bucket Foil Cutter Champagne Sword or Chef Knife Champagne Flutes How to Saber a Champagne Bottle Use the following steps to learn how to open a bottle of champagne with a saber: 1.Chill your champagne before you're ready to open it. You can either refrigerate the bottle until it's around 38-40 degrees Fahrenheit or chill it in a wine bucket for 10-15 minutes. The glass becomes more brittle when it's cold, which makes it easier to open. 2.Remove the wire fastener or any foil covering the cork with a foil cutter. 3.Find the seam on your bottle. The seam is the line that runs down the side of your bottle, and it's the weakest part of the glass. 4.Hold your bottle firmly at a 45-degree angle with the top of the bottle facing away from you. The cork may fly a fair length, so be sure to stand at a safe distance from your customers. 5.Hold the knife flat against the bottle with the blunt edge facing the lip. Run the blade along the seam, and then quickly and firmly push forward, up the seam toward the lip of the bottle. You are aiming for the spot where the seam meets the lip of the bottle. 6.Pour flutes of champagne from your freshly sabered bottle for your guests to enjoy! With a successful sabering, the cork breaks off and champagne spills out of the opening. Allow a little champagne to pour out to ensure any remaining glass shards are washed away, and then serve your guests. What Is Sabrage? Opening champagne bottles with a saber is also known as sabrage, and it became popular in nineteenth-century France under the reign of Napoleon. After winning a battle, Napoleon's armies would celebrate by drinking champagne, and they would open the bottles using the easiest method on hand. In many cases, the quickest way to celebrate was to open champagne with a sword carried by one of the soldiers. Since then, opening a bottle with a saber has become a tradition in fine dining settings for special occasions and celebrations. How Does Sabering Champagne Work? So, why can you cut off the top of a glass bottle using a dull knife? It has to do with the pressure. Champagne is very bubbly and full of carbon dioxide, which creates a lot of pressure inside the bottle and on the cork. In medieval days, many bottles of champagne would explode in wine cellars due to the pressure. To combat this, winemakers would add wire cages over their corks to keep them secure. When sabering champagne, you're creating a small crack in the glass near the top of the bottle, which releases the pressure in a powerful burst that removes the top of the bottle completely. Why Saber Champagne Opening champagne with a saber is a great way to celebrate special occasions and New Year's parties. It's an impressive skill to have for foodservice operators at banquet halls, upscale restaurants, and classic venues. Create a memorable evening by popping the champagne with a method rooted in history. Be sure to tell your guests to have their cameras ready to capture this special moment for social media marketing opportunities.
How to Build a Restaurant Wine List
Not every restaurant has a sommelier on-hand to help curate a wine list. In fact, very few do. That means it’s up to the restaurant owner or manager to find wines that complement the menu. To run an effective wine service, follow the tips below to design a wine list that’s both profitable and enticing. Shop All Wine Glasses Tips for Designing a Wine List Whether you’re dedicating a page on your menu or creating a separate wine list for every table, there are ways you can make your menu easy to read for the customer while maximizing your profitability: Do not organize wine by price Keep the list simple and provide important information like vintage, country of origin, body, and price per glass or bottle Offer a variety to appeal to various price points and tastes Arrange it in an order that makes logical sense such as dry to sweet, by geographical origin, or body of the wine Highlight specially selected mid- to high-priced wines on the menu to upsell or showcase Suggest food and wine pairings on menu items Keep your wines rotating seasonally to keep it from becoming too stale or boring Tailor your wine selection to match your establishment’s menu. For example, if you have a steakhouse, you’ll want a lot of bold, full-bodied reds and less floral whites. If you run an Asian restaurant, you’ll want more delicate, spice- and fruit-filled wines and bubbly roses to counteract the heat. Or, you may choose to fill your menu with wines from the same country as the food you serve. Wine Flavor Profiles It's important to understand wine tasting basics so you can create a well-varied menu. For example, higher sugar content results in a wine with a sweeter flavor, whereas high tannin levels make wine feel more dry or bitter in the mouth. Common terms used to describe the flavor and mouthfeel of wine include spicy, fruity, floral, peppery, earthy, and smoky. As you curate a selection of wines to best match your food menu, consider the following factors and profiles commonly used to describe the flavor of wine: Sweetness When pairing on a menu, wine should always be at least as sweet as the food. Descriptive Terms: Dry, Semi-Dry, Semi-Sweet, Sweet Acidity The more acidic the wine, the better it will cleanse your palate. This makes it ideal for pairing with rich, creamy dishes. Descriptive Terms: Low to High Complexity Pair wines with complex flavors with simpler foods, and pair simple wines with powerful, flavorful dishes. Descriptive Terms: Simple to Complex Alcohol Content Wines with a lower ABV typically pair best with salty or spicy foods. Descriptive Terms: Low, Medium, High Oak Influence The more oaky the wine, the better it will pair with robust, smoky flavors. Descriptive Terms: None to Oaky What Are Tannins in Wine? Tannins in wine are naturally occurring polyphenol compounds found in plant parts, including the skin of grapes. They exist in many other foods, such as tea leaves, walnuts, almonds, and dark chocolate. When vintners make wine, some tannins are extracted from the fruit or the wooden barrels they age the wine in. This produces the drying sensation in your mouth as you sip a full-bodied red wine. Most wines with higher tannin levels are red wines, though white wines may have tannins if they are aged in wooden barrels. What Is a Red Wine Headache? A red wine headache is either caused by histamines released in your body when drinking aged wines or the tannins found on the skin of grapes. For some, drinking just a glass or two of red wine can cause headaches or migraines, while others feel no effect. Histamines are the same chemical released when your body has an allergic reaction, and the release of this chemical can cause symptoms, including headaches. Alternatively, red wine contains more tannins than white. And because some people may have a sensitivity to tannins, their body reacts poorly to a glass of cabernet Sauvignon or merlot. Temperature of the Wine The temperature at which you serve your wine will depend on the variety: Red wine should be served at room temperature between 62 and 68 degrees Fahrenheit White wine should be served cool at a temperature below 55 degrees Fahrenheit or chilled Sparkling wine should be chilled at least 3 hours in the refrigerator before service When building your wine menu, consider altering the wine based on the temperature at which it should be served. For example, patrons may be more likely to order a warm, full-bodied red wine in winter and a chilled glass of sparkling rose in the summer. Common Types of Wine There are countless varietals and blends of wine in the world, all with unique features, but choosing a few popular types of red and white wines from our guide below will get your restaurant's wine list off to a great start. Without an in-house sommelier, curating a wine list can be a daunting task. But following a few essential tips listed above and gaining a better understanding of food and wine pairings can help make your decisions much more manageable. Remember to offer a diverse menu to appeal to a wider audience while ensuring your list is complementary to your restaurant’s dishes.
How to Set Up a Kegerator
After you've deliberated and chosen the best kegerator for your business, it's time to set up your beer dispenser and start serving fresh, cold beer! We've got step-by-step directions and an instructional video to help you through the process, allowing you to pour the perfect pint. Use our steps as a general guideline, but always refer to your equipment manual for the manufacturer's specific instructions. Shop All Beer Dispensers 1. Unpackage the Kegerator Remove all the packaging from your kegerator. If the unit has been transported on its side, let the unit stand upright for at least 24 hours before plugging it in. Move the unit to its final location and install it on a level surface. Make sure to provide clearance around the unit for ventilation, per the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install the Draft Tower Once your kegerator is unpackaged and placed in its final location, you can begin installing the draft tower. Gather your materials and look for the circular opening on top of the unit. You'll need the following materials: Rubber washer Draft tower Beer line 4 mounting screws Air hose Tap faucet handle Follow these steps: Place a rubber washer on top of the circular opening. Feed the beer line down through the opening into the interior cabinet. Place the draft tower on top of the opening and secure it with 4 mounting screws. Feed the air hose into the draft tower from inside the cabinet. The air hose helps to keep the beer cold as it travels up the beer line. Screw the tap handle onto the tap faucet. Connect the tap faucet to the draft tower. 3. Connect Beer and Gas Lines You'll need two lines to set up your kegerator - the beer line and the gas line. The beer line connects to the keg by way of the keg coupler and delivers cold beer to the tap faucet. The gas line connects to the CO2 regulator on the CO2 tank, then also connects to the keg coupler. Depending on the manufacturer of your unit, you may need to purchase some of these required beer dispensing components separately. Refer to your kegerator manual for more information. You'll need the following materials: (2) Rubber washers Nut Keg coupler Beer line Gas line Beer keg CO2 tank CO2 regulator Follow these steps: Keep the tank upright at all times. Attach the beer line to the keg coupler, placing a rubber washer at the connection point. Attach the gas line to the CO2 regulator output barb and tighten screw clamp. Connect the other end of the gas line to the keg coupler and tighten screw clamp. Using a rubber washer and nut, attach the CO2 regulator to the CO2 tank. Screw the coupler onto the keg. When the coupler is fitted into place, push the coupler handle down to open the seal. Place the keg inside the kegerator. 4. Adjust the CO2 Regulator With your beer and gas lines in place, you're almost ready to start dispensing your customers' favorite beers. You'll just need to make some adjustments to your CO2 tank and regulator to release the gas and make sure it's at the correct pressure. Follow these steps: Turn the handwheel on the CO2 regulator to the left to open the air tank. Flip the shut-off valve on the regulator to ON. You should hear air enter the gas lines. Adjust the PSI so the pressure gauge reads between 10 and 15. Carefully place the CO2 tank into the cabinet and close the door. Now that your kegerator is in place and ready to use, set up a schedule to maintain your beer system and ensure your taps and beer lines stay clean. Inspect the CO2 levels on your tank regularly and check the PSI gauge to make sure the pressure is at the right level. With proper maintenance, your beer dispenser will provide many years of service.
How to Become a Bartender
The key to becoming a bartender is to position yourself in a role where you can watch, learn from, and assist a working bartender. Through seeking out entry level employment in bars and restaurants, you have the ability to create a learning environment where you can also get paid. You can supplement your on-the-job training with bartending school and other learning resources, but working in the service industry remains the best way to get close to the bar and to start building up knowledge. Keep reading to learn how to get started on the path to becoming a bartender without any prior experience. 1. Get a Bartending License A bartending license isn't required in all states, but if you're competing for a bartending position against other candidates, having a license can give you the leverage you need to get hired. To receive a license, you'll also have to meet the minimum age for serving alcohol, which differs from state to state. In addition to meeting state or local requirements, a bartender license course will ensure that you're familiar with the following topics: Knowledge of laws and penalties regarding minors Identifying the stages of intoxication in customers How to handle and prevent disturbances Online bartending certification is easy to find with a quick internet search, but make sure the course is state-approved. To pass the course, you'll need to show that you have an understanding of state laws. It's also important to note that a bartending license doesn't guarantee employment. You'll still need to earn the position by being the best candidate for the job. 2. Get Hired as a Barback The most common advice you’ll hear from actual bartenders is that you should start out as a barback if you want learn how to be a bartender. The barback position requires no experience, only a willingness to work hard. As a barback you’ll be expected to do most of the manual work behind the bar, like cleaning, restocking, and a lot of heavy-lifting. The barback is essentially the bartender’s assistant, which puts you in a great position to learn and observe. Working as a barback isn’t easy, but it provides a lot of benefits. If you’re someone who has never worked in the bar or foodservice industries, you’ll gain an understanding of how everyday operations work. Pay attention to what goes on around you and you can gain some useful knowledge: As you stock beer and liquor for the bar, make a point to learn the different brand names Watch the bartender as they make cocktails and make note of the most popular drinks Get comfortable behind the bar and helping with customer requests Memorize bartending terms like straight up and on the rocks Learn when to prepare for the busy rushes and stock up accordingly Become familiar with the different types of barware and garnishes Provide support for your bartenders and in return they may teach you how to bartend 3. Start at a Restaurant Bar Starting as a barback isn’t the only way to get behind the bar. You could also start out as a hostess or server in a restaurant with a bar and work your way up. Restaurants that sell alcohol often have openings for bartenders and they will promote from within, especially if you’ve proven yourself to be an efficient and capable server. Another benefit of getting your feet wet at a restaurant bar is that restaurant chains usually have stringent training programs and they will train you to mix drinks to their standard. Bars in restaurant chains are often smaller than and not as busy as the bars in lounges, nightclubs, or taprooms. They provide a gentler environment in which you can practice your skills and get experience under your belt. The hours are also different, as many restaurant bars don't operate as late as other bars. You won't find as much opportunity to experiment with cocktails, but a restaurant chain might be the stepping stone you need before branching out to a trendier locale. 4. Find a Bartending Mentor As you seek employment in restaurants and bars, be on the lookout for a bartender who is willing to take you under their wing. If you're starting out as a barback, here are some tips to help you: Always treat your bartenders with respect Anticipate their needs and keep the bar stocked at all times Don't bombard them with questions during busy hours Wait for the calm moments to strike up a conversation Look for the bartender who is willing to share their knowledge As a server, the more time you spend around the bar, the more likely you are to find a mentor. Follow these tips: Offer help to your bartenders whenever possible Retrieve any items they need from the kitchen or storage Run food orders out to customers at the bar Keep the bar top clear by delivering any drinks that have been prepared for servers Always make sure to tip your bartenders fairly and generously for any drinks they've made for you 5. Learn How to Pour Drinks Anyone can pour rum and coke into a glass and call it a cocktail. If you want to become a good bartender, you need to learn how to pour correctly so you achieve balance between the liquor and the mixers. Invest in some bartending tools and start practicing your pours at home. If you've already followed the previous steps in this article and have spent some time watching a bartender, you'll be familiar with an important tool of the trade, the jigger. Jiggers are small cocktail measuring tools that allow you to control the amount of liquor you're pouring. With practice, you may be able to skip using a jigger and free pour instead. Free pouring is the art of pouring liquor using a silent count. With either pouring method, accurate pours are essential for a couple reasons: The right amount of alcohol yields a balanced drink that tastes great Every time you over pour, you cost the bar money Good pouring technique makes you more efficient at mixing drinks 6. Practice Mixology When you've mastered the art of pouring, try experimenting by making your own cocktails. You can start out by practicing with standard well drink recipes like gin and tonics or screwdrivers and work your way up to more complicated cocktails that have multiple mixers. Learn about cocktail ingredients like bitters and syrups and how they change the taste of your drinks. Not every bartender has to be a mixologist, but it does help to have an understanding of how to build cocktails. Through this process you might find that your interests are more geared towards the craft of mixing drinks, rather than serving customers. 7. Be Patient and Available Your bartending skills won't develop overnight. You'll have to spend many hours and many shifts working at your barback position before you gain the trust of the bartender and bar manager. One of the most important things you can do is make sure they know you're available for whatever they need you to do. Before you know it, the bartender might feel comfortable stepping outside for a break and asking you to step in while they're gone. Always be ready for those types of opportunities. The more useful you can make yourself, the better. 8. Don’t Rely On Bartending School Alone Bartending school might seem like a fast track plan to achieving your goal, but you'll still most likely need real world experience before a bar manager will take a chance on you. You can learn many things in bartending school, like how to pour and how to practice mixology, but you can't learn how to handle a tough crowd of thirsty customers. Working behind the bar requires the ability to multitask and perform well under pressure. In bartending school you might learn how to make the perfect martini, but in the real world you'll have to make several different drinks at the same time, tend to your customers, and keep your bar area clean, all while wearing a smile. Becoming a bartender isn't an easy road. When you first start out, you'll have to be humble. Beginning as a barback and learning from a mentor are two things you can do that require no experience. If you're willing to learn and work hard, you'll see your dream come true more quickly.
How to Pour the Perfect Pint
When it comes to the world of beer, knowing how to pour specific brews is essential to serving your guests the perfect pint. Whether you are pouring pilsners, stouts, IPAs, or Belgians, proper technique will maximize flavor, aroma, and mouthfeel while also producing the appropriate amount of head and releasing carbonation. Teaching your bartenders to properly pour a beer is crucial to the success of any bar, restaurant, brewery, or taphouse, especially as craft beer becomes more and more popular around the country. This guide will show you how to pour beer from a regular tap, nitro tap, or bottle. Step-by-Step Instructions on How to Pour the Perfect Pint When pouring a beer, you want to ensure a good ratio of beer and foam, also known as the "head" of the beer, in the glass. Plus, it's important to avoid overpouring to prevent waste and save money for your business. Keep reading to learn how to pour draft beer, how to pour nitro beer, and how to pour bottled beer. How to Pour a Beer from a Tap Draft beers are typically kegged with high levels of added carbon dioxide. During the tapping process, the keg is filled with carbon dioxide to push beer through the tap and maintain carbonation when served. As a result, draft beers feature large bubbles and a thin head. Carbon dioxide amounts in draft beers must be carefully monitored in order to keep the brew from becoming flat or overly foamy. While there are many different types of beer that can be served on tap, some of the most common include lagers, IPAs, and wheat beers. Here's how to properly pour them: 1.Begin by rinsing your beer glass to remove any remaining detergents or residues. Doing so also helps with head retention. 2.Hold your glass at a 45 degree angle and begin pouring. Pour until the glass is around half full. 3.Turn so that you are holding the glass at a 90 degree angle (upright) and finish your pour. 4.Stop pouring right before the beer level reaches the top of the glass to leave room for about a half an inch of head. 5.Allow the beer to settle. The carbonation will build the head a bit more as the beer settles in the glass. How to Pour a Nitro Beer Nitro beers incorporate mostly nitrogen rather than carbon dioxide when they are kegged. Unlike their traditional draft counterparts, nitros contain around 70% nitrogen and 30% carbon dioxide. Because nitrogen is insoluble in liquid, the head and mouthfeel of nitro beers is rich, thick, and creamy. The addition of nitrogen also creates smaller bubbles, which make the carbonic bite and “hoppy” taste characteristic of draft beers relatively nonexistent. Stouts and porters are generally served on nitro. Here's the proper way to pour a nitro beer: 1.Rinse your glass to remove any residue or detergent left behind from washing. Rinsing your glass will also help with head retention. 2.Place your glass directly below the tap. Do not hold the glass in your hand as you would with a regular draft beer. 3.Fill your glass to about two thirds of the way. Then, stop for a few seconds and allow the beer to settle. 4.The beer will begin to cascade, which refers to the small bubbles that move from the top of the glass to the bottom. Once a few seconds have passed, fill your glass the rest of the way. 5.Stop pouring right before the beer level reaches the top of the glass to leave room for the head. How to Pour a Bottled Beer Bottled beer is often pasteurized before bottling, giving it a shelf life of around 3 months, which is longer than a draft beer. Interestingly, beer bottled in a brown bottle (rather than a green or clear one) keeps longer due to its protection from oxidizing sunlight. One advantage of bottled beer is that you can avoid the bacteria that often build up in tap lines and distort your beer's flavor. However, if your bar's tap lines are sanitized properly and often, bottled beer's greatest advantage over draft beer is that it's more convenient to transport. Learn how to serve bottled beer below: 1.First, rinse your glass to get rid of any residues or detergents. Additionally, this will help with head retention after pouring. 2.Open your bottle of beer. Hold your glass at a 45 degree angle and begin pouring your beer very slowly. Pouring too quickly will produce too much head and cause your beer to lose a lot of carbonation. 3.When your glass is around half full, slowly shift the glass from a 45 degree angle to a 90 degree angle and finish pouring. 4.Allow the beer to settle and the head to foam up. Knowing the proper serving techniques for beer and which beer glass to use can help to improve your bar's service. Not only will it help you avoid some messes, but proper pouring can also enhance the flavor and mouthfeel of your beers. Refer to this guide to make sure you're pouring the perfect pint of draft, nitro, and bottled beer.
How to Set Drink Prices In Your Bar or Restaurant
Choosing bar drink prices can be a tricky aspect of running a bar. Too expensive, and you drive away customers. Too cheap, and you won't be in business for much longer. One of the most important aspects of a restaurant, and especially a bar, is to create a profitable and manageable list of cocktails. There are many variables that each business needs to take into consideration when figuring out how to price drinks, like rent and overhead, but there are also a few industry standards that we'll highlight to help you properly price drinks for your bar or restaurant. Establish Drink and Cocktail Prices When taking into consideration how many different types and brands of liquors are used, it can seem quite overwhelming to begin setting a standard for your pricing. Fortunately, it's just simple math that will be applied across your entire drinks menu. How to Price Bar Drinks You can follow these steps to help you estimate the price of the drinks at your establishment. Calculate the liquor cost. You can use the following formula to help get to this number: Bottle Price / Ounces in Bottle = Liquor Cost per Ounce Calculate the pour cost or beverage cost. You can use the following formula to help get to this number: Cost to Make the Drink / Price You Sell It for = Pour Cost Most locations will set the pour cost at 20% to 25%, while others will use 22% for wine, 20% for beer, and 14% for liquor. You can adjust the percentage to what works best for your establishment. Calculate the drink price. You can use the following formula to help get to this number: Liquor Cost / Pour Cost in Decimals = Drink Price Factor in the garnish prices. You can do this similarly to how you calculate the liquor cost and price out each individual ingredient, or set a flat rate that is added on to the drink price. Factor in the shrinkage variance. Most bars will add in an additional fee of approximately 20% to cover the cost of lost product due to expiration or damage. Round to the nearest quarter. The number you get after you complete your calculations may not be a well-rounded number. To make the price more visually appealing, round to the nearest quarter to create a cleaner drink menu. Evaluate and adjust. The prices you come to may not always be the most cost-effective price for your demographic. You can use a profit and loss statement to make adjustments and track the impact it has on your clientele to find the best menu pricing for your establishment to be profitable. Drink Cost Breakdown in Practice We’ll walk through the pricing breakdown of a basic drink to provide a visual of the calculation above. To start, we’ll say that a 25-ounce bottle of liquor costs $22. Liquor cost: $22 purchase cost / 25 oz. per bottle = $0.88 per ounce Pour Cost: We’ll use 20% as a standard. Drink Cost: $0.88 liquor cost / .2 pour cost = $4.40 Garnish Cost: We’ll use a flat rate of $0.50. The drink total is currently $4.90 with the drink cost and garnish cost combined. Shrinkage Cost: Using the shrinkage rate of 20%, you’ll want to multiply the drink total by .2 and add that amount to the price. $4.90 drink total x .2 shrinkage = $0.98 shrinkage cost $4.90 drink total + $0.98 shrinkage cost = $5.88 new drink total Round to the Quarter: The final drink price is $6.00. Understanding that most drinks do not consist of just one type of liquor or ingredient, you’ll want to price out your ingredients the same way you calculated the liquor cost and add them all together. Multiply the liquor cost accordingly to how many ounces of that particular liquor you used in the cocktail. You would then use that recipe total in place of the liquor cost during the drink cost step. Four-Tier Liquor Pricing Liquor pricing will usually fall into a four-tier organizational system that can help you adjust your pour cost according to the liquor quality. Well: These brands will usually sit in the well behind the bar. Well drinks are made with the cheapest liquors in your establishment and usually mixed with multiple liquors and drink mixes. They will have the highest pour cost, set at approximately 30%. Call: These brands are the most popular brands in your establishment and are usually located directly behind the bartender. Customer can usually call them by name when asking for a drink. They will have a pour cost set at approximately 25%. Premium: These brands will usually be located on the lowest shelf behind the bar and will be the highest quality certain brands have to offer. They will have a pour cost set at approximately 20%. Super-Premium: These brands are considered to be top-shelf bottles and will be the highest quality liquors in your establishment. They are generally liquors that have been aged and distilled. They will have the lowest pour cost, set at approximately 15%. Organizing your bottle brands into these four categories can provide a quick reference system when setting drink prices. Creating Standard Recipes Establishing standard recipes for each drink is important to ensure consistency and quality. If each bartender makes cocktails a different way, your customers aren't only receiving different types of margaritas, but your effort to price the beverage is essentially useless. When standardizing recipes it's also important to stress the necessity of avoiding over-pouring to your bartenders. Over-pouring costs bars thousands of dollars per year, but you can help prevent that by adding measured pourers behind the bar. Factors That Impact Drink Prices Drink prices can be impacted by a variety of factors apart from their ingredients, such as your location and competition. Demographic Setting drink prices goes beyond calculations. It is important to consider your location’s demographic to set prices that your customers will accept. Consider the age, gender, occupation, and income of the people in your surrounding neighborhood. If your bar is located in a bustling city with higher rent rates, customers may accept and expect higher priced drinks. However, if you’re in a rural town or near a college community where the population is pressed for money, higher priced drinks won’t sell very well. It’s important to evaluate how your customers are responding to your drink prices by tracking your bar sales and adjusting your prices accordingly. Checking Out the Competition With any business, it is necessary to know what your competition is up to. If you're priced significantly higher than the bar around the corner, chances are that you'll slowly lose business and see the effects financially. And vice versa, bar drink prices that are too low won't cover costs of staff, rent, and electricity. Many bars choose the “meet or beat” technique where they try to meet the prices of their competition or beat them if possible. However, not all bars are made the same. If your bar or restaurant features an upscale ambience, it would not be expected for your drinks to be the same price as the casual dining bar around the corner. Your atmosphere will also impact the discount of your happy hour drinks, if you choose to have a happy hour at all. A sports bar serving a happy hour may see a 30 % pour cost, while an upper-class martini bar keeps its beverage cost at 18%. Ultimately, your pricing depends on how much you paid for alcohol, the competition or the type of clientele you wish to attract, and the overall profit you plan to bring in. Find that happy medium, price your food menu reasonably with your drink menu, and you'll have a continuous flow of satisfied customers.
How to Become a Sommelier
Although the word sommelier may inspire images of a medieval steward scurrying through dark, damp corridors in a wine cellar with only torchlight to find the perfect bottle of wine for his master, in reality, the established profession of the sommelier, and the organizations that certify those professionals, only recently came into existence in the past several decades. Though the history of the Sommelier is long and rich, it wasn't until the mid-1900s, when wineries began to estate bottle and label their vintages, that restaurants gained the ability to stock more varied selections, making the need for knowledgeable wine experts all the more crucial. Along with the ever-expanding American palate and growing food culture, comes the need for more of these highly trained wine service experts. Responsibilities So what is a sommelier, and what do they do? In short, a sommelier (or somm as they're often called) is a highly knowledgeable wine professional who is an expert in every aspect of wine service and food and wine pairing. Today, the responsibilities of a sommelier are as varied as they are demanding. Not only must a good somm show a mastery of a broad spectrum of wines, but they must be able to connect with a guest in a way that makes them feel comfortable and part of the experience. Other responsibilities include: Storing wines in optimal conditions / temperature Rotating stock in proper order / ensure accurate pricing Presenting the wine list to guests highlighting featured wines / new additions Suggesting starter wines and emphasizing wines that pair well with meals Knowledge of liquors, high end spirits, beers, and cigar pairings Ordering wines appropriate to restaurant offerings (sometimes directly from the vineyard) Educating front-of-house staff and chefs about wine, wine pairing, and proper service Knowledge of the appropriate types of wine glasses in which to serve product Becoming a Sommelier "To become a sommelier you need a passion for beverage service, the hunger for knowledge, and the desire to share what you have learned," says Calvin Hines Jr., general manager of Art and Soul Restaurant in Washington, D.C. Mr. Hines, with 16 years' experience in the restaurant industry, and having just completed his introductory course and examination in the Court of Master Sommeliers, provides valuable insight into what it takes to be a good, more importantly, employable sommelier. "It's more than opening bottles, swirling fermented grape juice in a glass, and blind tasting," says Hines. "Developing and maintaining menus, organizing the cellar, doing inventory and other not-so-glamorous things are done way before you talk to the guests." So how then does one do it? How do you become a great sommelier? In truth, anyone can call themselves a sommelier. After all, it's just a job title. Just like bartending, no certification is actually required to apply for or even become a great somm. However, according to Hines, "being certified is more attractive to restaurants and hotels that are hiring. It also gives you a good structure to work from and shows that you are not only knowledgeable, but know how to apply what you have learned." In the past, the only way of verifying someone's knowledge of wine was through observing their work, and in some instances, that works just fine. Today, however, there are numerous international organizations that offer sommelier training and sommelier certifications to both educate and license experts in the field. Here is a list of some of the more reputable establishments: Court of Master Sommeliers Courses and Certification Levels Offered: Introductory Sommelier Course, Deductive Tasting Method workshop, Certified Sommelier exam, Advanced Sommelier course and exam, Master Sommelier diploma exam Location(s) of Availability: US and Europe (exams are offered internationally) Time to Complete: 5 years of mandatory industry service required to take the master sommelier exam, 3 years recommended for introductory course Society of Wine Educators Courses and Certification Levels Offered: Hospitality/Beverage Specialist certificate, CSW, CWE, CSS, CSE Location(s) of Availability: US Time to Complete: Varies based on certification The Sommelier Society of America Courses and Certification Levels Offered: Sommelier Society of America certificate course, advanced tasting workshops, SSA deductive tasting guide Location(s) of Availability: New York City, US Time to Complete: 21 weeks for certificate course International Sommelier Guild Courses and Certification Levels Offered: Teacher Education Program, Fundamentals of Wine , Intermediate Wine Certificate, Advanced Wine Certificate, ISGM Location(s) of Availability: US, China, and Canada Time to Complete: Varies. 300 clock hours in total for ISGM course. Wine & Spirit Education Trust Courses and Certification Levels Offered: 10+ awards and diplomas in wine, spirits, and sake Location(s) of Availability: 700 third-party teaching and examination centers in over 70 countries Time to Complete: Varies by course and provider American Sommelier Association Courses and Certification Levels Offered: Foundation, Viticulture and Vinification, Blind Tasting, Viti3 (region-focused classes), and Sales, Service, and Buying Location(s) of Availability: New York City, US Time to Complete: Varies by course Cost vs. Benefits Most wine sommeliers typically earn between $30,000 and $75,000 a year in salary. Compare that with the salary of a typical bartender who earns between $16,000 and $32,000 a year and you can see why gaining this expertise has its advantages. As with any profession, the upper end of financial gain depends on the demand in any particular market. A master sommelier with extensive knowledge and experience can command upwards of $150,000 a year in highly competitive markets. As for those looking to break into the profession who need experience as opposed to competition, "it depends on where you are," says Hines. "If you are in NYC or San Francisco, competition is tough, but in places with a growing food culture, it is a little easier." Luckily, for many aspiring sommeliers, growing markets are plentiful; all you need is the education, patience, and passion to succeed.
How to Serve Wine & Cocktails On Tap
Imagine a world where every cocktail you served tasted the same no matter which bartender made it, and every glass of wine was handled properly stayed as fresh as the first. You can stop imagining now because taps aren’t just for beer anymore! Serving wine and cocktails on tap is becoming a popular trend in many restaurants and bars. Having these drinks ready to serve straight from the tap not only cuts down on drink preparation time, but it also ensures consistency among drinks. In this article, you’ll learn whether or not these systems are beneficial in your particular establishment, and if they are, we’ll give some recommendations for your setup. Shop All Wine Dispensers Wine on Tap Do you ever wonder why certain wines can’t be ordered by the glass and only by the bottle? Truth is wine is a tricky beverage. Traditionally, it goes through a rather pricey packaging process. It has to be bottled, labeled, printed, sealed, and cased. Then, the cases finally get shipped to the restaurant or bar who has to pay for all of those costs. If all the wine is sold in a timely fashion, then it’s no big deal. But, for many establishments, someone will order a single glass of premium wine, and then that wine won’t get ordered again for some time after. Once a bottle of wine is uncorked, the wine begins to oxidize. Oxidation changes the taste of the wine the longer it sits in the bottle, even if it's recorked. If someone orders a glass of wine from a bottle that’s been opened a week previously, it won’t taste nearly as fresh, and it won’t have the flavor it should. More often than not, the glass will be sent back, and the bartender will have to pour out the entire bottle of wine. That’s why it’s too risky for many establishments to offer wine by the glass. But now, there’s a solution to this wine wasting! Benefits of a Wine Tap System More cost-efficient to package stainless steel kegs than multiple bottles Many kegs are reusable Keg is lighter weight than a case of bottles No oxidation since wine is constantly pressurized by an inert gas that prevents oxidation The last glass of the keg is as fresh as the first More premium options by the glass can be made available No wasted time pulling corks No bottles, corks, and cardboard boxes to get rid of at the end of the night Increased wine sales since customers can order premium options by the glass Kegs take up less storage space than bottles One keg equals approximately 26 bottles Setting up a Wine Dispensing System On average, it can cost anywhere from $3,000 to $5,000 to have a wine dispensing unit set up in your restaurant or bar; however, this cost will quickly pay for itself due to savings per bottle and savings from waste. In fact, many establishments will see a return on their initial investment within nine months. Setting up a wine tap system is similar to setting up a beer dispenser. First, you simply have to decide where to place your dispensing system. Do you serve a lot of wine on a daily basis? If so, you should consider locating it centrally behind-the-bar. If wine orders aren't nearly as popular as beer orders, then maybe you can place your wine dispenser off to one side. You also have to consider the special requirements for a wine tap. The valve coupler, tubing nipples, and faucet must all be constructed of 304 grade stainless steel. If wine doesn’t flow through a special 304 grade draft system, then the flavor will be affected. You must also have a 304 stainless steel oxygen barrier to prevent oxygen permeation, as well as an air tank that has a blend of 75 percent Nitrogen and 25 percent CO2. This blend preserves the wine’s quality and freshness and is readily available in many bars because Guinness also requires this gas blend. Cocktails on Tap Now, it’s time to picture this: It’s thirty minutes prior to your home team’s kickoff time. You own a sports bar, and the lines are at least five people deep. You have a cocktail special, but you still have to take the time to measure out perfect rum to lemonade ratios. Then, you get a complaint about someone’s drink not being as strong at their friend’s. There has to be an easier way! Now there is. Outfit your high volume sports bar, night club, or casual restaurant with a cocktail dispensing machine that offers liquor on tap. These types of machines hold bottles of liquor on a tray that slides out for easy refilling. They also hold the bag-in-box mixer of your choice. With the simple pull of the unit’s tap handle, you’ll have a perfectly mixed and consistent drink within seconds. And, the best part about this is, you didn’t have to measure out a single ounce of alcohol! Benefits of a Cocktails on Tap System Makes 5 – 7 cocktails per minute, compared to the 1 drink per minute average when done by hand Consistent drinks every time, so nobody gets a stronger or weaker beverage than someone else Units come prefixed with a set liquor to mixer ratio No more waste from over pouring Keeps lines in busy bars moving quickly Less dirty dishes from not using shakers and jiggers Attractive styling of tap head lets you advertise drink specials and drive impulse sales Setting up a Cocktail Dispensing System A cocktail dispensing system is very easy to install! Its compact size allows its base to fit underneath your bar, while the tap platform slides onto the bartop with no mounting hardware required. An included hose attaches to the tap and connects to the base, allowing you to dispense product. These units are also powered by a CO2 tank and require no electricity, which means you can place your unit almost anywhere. Simply choose a spot where bartenders can easily access the tap during happy hour, kickoff, or a special event. If you're looking to reduce wine waste, offer more premium wine options by the glass, and ultimately increase wine sales, then offering wine on tap is a great choice for your restaurant, upscale bar, or lounge. However, if you're running a crowded sports bar, night club, or casual restaurant, you will benefit from having cocktails on tap. Not only will these systems cut down drink prep time, but they'll also provide consistency among drinks.
Catering Tips
How to Use a Chafing Dish
Whether you’re starting a buffet or catering business, chafing dishes ensure your culinary creations stay at the perfect temperature. With their sleek designs and polished finishes, chafing dishes add a touch of elegance to your presentation, elevating the aesthetic appeal of your hot food display. We teach you how to set up and use chafing dishes so you can maximize these essential pieces of catering equipment. What Is a Chafing Dish? Chafing dishes are specially designed containers that keep food warm during service. They typically consist of a frame, a water pan, a food pan, and a cover. The water pan is filled with hot water, which creates a gentle and even heat source to keep the food at a safe and desirable serving temperature. There are a wide variety of chafing dishes, allowing you to choose a model that accommodates your soups, main courses, coffee, and desserts. Chafing Dish Tutorial Video Check out our video tutorial to learn how to use a chafing dish: <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=6056&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> What Do I Need to Use a Chafing Dish? To use a chafing dish, you’ll need the following items: Chafing Dish - They come in a variety of materials such as stainless steel, copper, and silver plated. Most models will include a food pan, water pan, cover, and fuel holders. The water pan helps to distribute heat evenly and prevents the food from drying out. Fill it about 1 inch deep for the best results. Fuel - Chafing dishes typically use a fuel source, such as gel fuel or canned heat, to keep the food warm. Stock up on chafer fuel to ensure uninterrupted service throughout your event. Serving Utensils - Don't forget to have a set of serving utensils on hand for guests to help themselves to the delectable offerings in your chafing dish. From ladles to tongs, having the right tools will make serving a breeze. Steps to Set Up a Chafer Dish With Pictures We provide a step-by-step guide to how to use your chafing dish. Before beginning, read through the user’s manual your chafing dish manufacturer provided and follow all recommendations. 1.Place the water pan in the chafing dish frame. 2.Add 1 inch of hot water. 3.Place fuel in the fuel holder. 4.Light the fuel. 5.Warm for 20 minutes. 6.Add hot food. 7.Cover to keep warm. Chafer Dish Safety Tips Follow these chafer dish safety tips to create a safe and enjoyable dining experience for your guests. Remember, prioritizing safety not only protects your guests but also prevents any potential accidents or mishaps that could impact your event. With proper care and attention, you can confidently serve your delicious dishes without any worries. Use a stable surface. Before you start using a chafer dish, place it on a sturdy and level surface. This will prevent any accidental tipping or spilling of hot food and liquids. Avoid placing it near the edge of a table where it may be more prone to accidents. Use fuel safely. Most chafer dishes use fuel to keep the food warm. When using fuel, ensure that you follow the manufacturer's instructions carefully. Always use a chafer dish fuel holder specifically designed for that purpose. Avoid overfilling the fuel holder and keep it away from any flammable materials to prevent fires. Handle with care. Chafer dishes get hot, so it's important to handle them with caution. Use oven mitts or heat-resistant gloves when touching any part of the chafer dish, particularly the lid and the frame. Remind your staff to be mindful of the hot surfaces and to avoid touching them directly. Keep children and pets away. If you’re catering a child-friendly event or serving your food in an outdoor area where pets are welcome, it's crucial to keep children and animals away from the chafer dish area. The hot surfaces and open flames can cause serious burns if not handled properly. Consider setting up a physical barrier or assigning staff to monitor the area to ensure everyone's safety. Regularly check for hazards. Throughout your event, periodically inspect the chafer dishes for any potential hazards. Look for loose or damaged parts, such as handles, hinges, or fuel holders. If you notice any issues, immediately remove the chafer dish from service and replace it with a safe and functional one. Practice proper food handling. While chafer dishes are excellent for keeping food warm, it's essential to maintain proper food handling practices. Ensure that the food is cooked thoroughly before placing it in the chafer dish. Use separate utensils for each dish to avoid cross-contamination. Additionally, regularly monitor the food temperature to ensure it stays within the safe range. Chafing dishes are a versatile and essential tool for any commercial kitchen or catering business. They are designed to keep food warm and presentable, making them perfect for buffet-style events or large gatherings. Whether you are hosting a wedding, a corporate event, or a holiday party, investing in a chafing dish is a smart choice that will impress your guests and elevate your food service.
How to Cater Your Own Wedding
From the venue to the menu, weddings are expensive. According to The Knot’s data, the average couple pays $70 a head to feed their reception guests, bringing most wedding catering fees over $9,000. If you’re looking for an economical way to cater your wedding, a DIY reception menu is a potential solution. While self-catered weddings require careful planning and budgeting, they can create an affordable and personal celebration. Self-catering is incredibly meaningful for couples who share a passion for cooking. Read on to learn how to cater your own wedding and decide if a DIY reception menu is right for you. Shop All Wedding Supplies Use the following links to jump to the DIY wedding catering step that interests you: Choose a Wedding Service Style Write Your Reception Menu Purchase Wholesale Supplies Delegate Tasks Factor in Cleanup Time Sample DIY Wedding Catering Timeline Checklist to Cater Your Own Wedding Catering Safety Guidelines Is Self Catering Cost-Effective? How to Find a Wedding Caterer How to Plan a Wedding Reception with DIY Catering The most important aspect of planning a wedding reception with DIY catering is organization. From ingredients and servingware to cooking equipment and cleanup supplies, you need to write down everything you need, research the best prices, and establish an execution timeline. For a smooth and budget-friendly experience, follow these steps to plan a wedding reception with DIY catering. 1. Decide How You Want to Serve Your Reception Meal How you plan to serve your meal affects the food items you select. If you want a full course meal, you’ll require multiple small dishes. If you’re creating an action station, you must consider all the toppings and add-ins you want to offer. DIY brides must choose a food service style they can prepare in advance to minimize stress on the day of the wedding. You will either need the food squared away prior to your ceremony starting, or you will need to hire people to carry appetizer trays and clear your guests' plates. Best and Worst Wedding Food Service Styles for Self Catered Weddings From dessert-only receptions to family-style feasts, there are numerous wedding food service styles. We break down your reception food serving style options and explain which formats work best for DIY catering. Cocktail Style Reception - Save yourself the expense and hassle of preparing a sit-down dinner with a cocktail style reception. Set up an hors d’oeuvres table for your guests to graze on in between dancing the night away! A sumptuous charcuterie board requires little prep work, and there are many premade appetizers you can buy in bulk, making hors d’oeuvres receptions an excellent choice for self-catered weddings. Buffet Style Reception - If you want to have a full dinner, buffets are a great option for self-catered receptions. The last thing you want to worry about is getting hot food to tables during your event. Chafing dishes preserve food-safe temperatures so you can set up buffet lines in advance. Buffets allow your guests to serve themselves, saving you money on hired wait staff. Station Style Reception - Station-style receptions are growing in popularity. While they’re traditionally staffed by a chef, you can set up DIY stations in your event space. Popular options for station-style reception meals are taco stations, potato bar stations, and pasta bar stations. Station-style receptions allow guests to customize their meal, so they can build it to their dietary needs and flavor preferences. Dessert Reception - Feeding a crowd is extremely expensive. If you feel like you can only invite a handful of guests to affordably feed everyone, you have another option – just serve dessert! Everyone’s favorite part of a wedding feast is the cake and sweets, so set up a killer dessert table for your guests to enjoy. From macaron towers and donut walls to s'mores makers and ice cream bars, there are so many ways to create a fun and interactive dessert reception you and your guests will love. Family-Style Reception - While you may think your homemade reception dinner is perfect for family-style service, we recommend you strongly reconsider. Family-style receptions use servers to deliver food to guests at their pre-assigned tables. The last thing you need to worry about at your reception is transporting food from the kitchen. You can always ask your loved ones to help, but keep in mind that if they’re serving your guests, they can’t participate in the fun themselves. Another option is to hire wait-staff, but this will increase your costs. Plated Sit-Down Style Reception - The most traditional and formal wedding reception style is not well suited for self-catered weddings. Plated sit-down dinners offer guests multiple courses (anywhere from three to twelve), which is a lot of food to prepare. You’ll also have to purchase the appropriate servingware for each dish and hire waiters to serve each course. If you have dreams of a plated sit-down-style reception, then DIY catering is not for you. 2. Create a Simple, Personal Menu While imported ingredients and intricate dishes are attractive, you should keep your wedding menu simple if you’re preparing it yourself. You’ll be serving a sizable number of guests, so choose dishes that are neither labor nor cost-intensive. Attempting a new dish is the food equivalent of cutting bangs right before your wedding. Stick to a recipe you have practice making because producing it in bulk will be challenging enough. Use our recipe converter to bulk up your favorite dishes without altering their flavor. Self Catered Wedding Menu Ideas A simple menu with just a few crowd-pleasing options saves you stress and helps your food come out well on the day of the event. Don’t feel pressured to provide several hors d’oeuvres, three main entrees, and four side dishes. The beauty of a self-catered wedding is you can truly personalize it. Use beloved family recipes and dishes that speak to your respective cultures. This is your day. This is your menu. Keep it simple and special. For inspiration, consider these DIY reception dinner ideas that are easy to make in bulk: Salad - Panzanella salad, garden salad, burrata salad Rotisserie Meats - chicken, prime rib, ham Pasta - carbonara, pappardelle Bolognese, chicken rigatoni Roasted Vegetables - balsamic brussels sprouts, maple glazed carrots, curried cauliflower Rice Dishes - fried rice, arroz con pollo, jambalaya 3. Buy Your DIY Catering Supplies in Bulk The wedding industry has inflated prices, so renting your reception supplies usually isn’t the most cost-effective option. Instead of renting items specifically targeted and marketed for weddings, purchase wholesale catering supplies. Ownership saves you the hassle of returns after your wedding. Keep mementos from your celebration, reuse them for your next big occasion, or sell your supplies to a bride-to-be and recoup some of your investment. You can find the chinaware, flatware, and glassware you need from a restaurant wholesaler. Buying in bulk is key for staying within your wedding budget. Most likely, you will require larger quantities of ingredients than you’re used to working with. When purchased from a grocery store, items like spices and sauces add up fast. Disposables and dinnerware are key to serving your meal, but they can devour your budget if you don’t look for the best deal. Review your carefully planned menu and purchase the ingredients and supplies you need in bulk to secure the best price. Buying bulk supplies lowers your presentation costs as well. Enhance the appearance of your tables with wholesale candles, tabletop displays, and linens and table covers. Purchasing reception decor from a wholesale retailer can save you a lot of money, freeing you to use the venue of your dreams or purchase the perfect dress. Back to Top 4. Ask for Help Self-catered doesn’t mean solo catered. When making plans to cater your own wedding, remember that you are one person. In fact, you are one very busy person around the time of your wedding. From photo ops to first dances, your wedding day will be filled with a frenzy of fun. Food will probably not be at the forefront of your mind, nor should it be. Remember that you’re not in this alone. Rely on your partner, a close friend, or family to assist in the organization and delegation of tasks. While you should do everything you can to prepare in advance, you will still need assistance setting up and breaking down your food stations on the day of your wedding. You may want to enlist outside help to execute your reception dinner so your loved ones can participate in the festivities. Ask around and see if there is anyone in your outside circle looking to make pocket money. You can also put out an ad and see if local teenagers or college students would help out in exchange for cash. Depending on the formality of your event, you may need to train them in fine dining etiquette for servers. 5. Create a Catering Cleanup Plan No matter how much planning and preparation you put into your big day; you will likely have some food leftover. Not only do you need to make sure that you leave no food behind, but you must also have a removal plan for any cooking equipment, serving supplies, or displayware that you brought. If you are taking your honeymoon immediately after the wedding, be sure to delegate these tasks to someone you trust, so nothing gets left behind at the venue. To thank your friends and family who helped you cater your wedding, provide take-out containers so they can take leftover food home. If you and your partner share a commitment to giving back, consider contacting a local homeless shelter before your wedding and set up a plan to donate leftovers after your reception. 6. Write Out a Catering Timeline With your menu ironed out and your help lined up, it’s time to write out your reception catering schedule. Many venues limit access to their space, so let your assistants know when to arrive and when they need to start packing up. Schedule times for warming, serving, and cleaning up the food. Don’t forget to incorporate a cocktail hour and cake cutting into your timeline. Sample Wedding Catering Timeline Time Task 12:00 - 3:00 Set up and decorate the venue 3:00 - 6:00 Prepare food 6:00 - 6:30 Send food out to buffet line or send appetizers out with servers 6:30 - 7:30 Appetizers end, dinner is served 7:30 - 8:00 Send food back to the kitchen and tear down the buffet line 8:00 - 10:00 Wash dishes, put away food, and clean up the kitchen 10:00 End of event Self Catering Wedding Checklist You’ll need a solid catering supplies checklist to make sure nothing is forgotten. You can click below for a downloadable catering checklist template: Download Our Catering Checklist PDF Ask yourself the following questions to make sure you’ve checked all the boxes and are ready to cater your own wedding. Does your venue have cooking equipment? Does your venue have refrigeration? How will you transport your supplies to and from the venue? When will you cook the food? What temperature must you maintain for your food to be safe to eat? How will you keep your food at that temperature? If you are using chafing dishes, when will you light them? How will you light your chafer fuel? Do you have serving utensils? Who will prepare/warm the food once your wedding has started? Who will clear the food while you are spending time with your guests? Do you have somewhere to clean the dishes afterward? Back to Top How to Safely Cater Your Own Wedding Thousands of people each year get sick from improper food handling. To make sure your wedding reception doesn’t aid in that statistic, educate yourself on safe food handling techniques. You’ll need to supply your helpers with gloves and proper sanitizing chemicals for use throughout the day. Use food thermometers to keep your meal out of the temperature danger zone. The COVID-19 pandemic increased awareness of transmittable diseases and expectations for sanitation. For a deep dive into post-pandemic catering, read our guide to safe event planning for caterers. Is It Cheaper to Cater Your Own Wedding? If you purchase your supplies in bulk and stick to a simple menu made with inexpensive ingredients, it is usually cheaper to cater your own wedding. However, if you have your heart set on a complex menu that requires a lot of labor and serving supplies, it’s typically less expensive to hire an experienced caterer who already has the tools and expertise required. If you work with a caterer, you will agree on a price, and your final bill will remain in that range (with slight fluctuations based on market prices and ingredient availability). With self-catering, it’s dangerously easy to go over your projected budget. How to Hire a Wedding Caterer If catering your own wedding sounds like more work than you want to take on, it’s time to start searching for a caterer who can create the reception of your dreams. You don’t have to hire a traditional caterer for your wedding. If you were hoping for something personal, fun, and interactive, have your favorite food truck cater your reception. Below, we have a few tips for hiring a wedding caterer: Finding a caterer: Many venues have a list of preferred caterers. If you don’t like the options they provide, do an internet search for caterers in your area. Figuring out pricing: Ask how much you will be paying per dish. The caterer may even have flat rate packages for different reception sizes. Budgeting for price fluctuations: Remember that the cost may end up being different than the caterer’s original quote, depending on market prices and ingredient availability. Asking for a tasting: If you are going to invest in a caterer, make sure you love their food by trying a sample menu. Back to Top Catering your own wedding is a major undertaking, but it can be a great way to cut costs. Joining forces with family and friends to create a wedding feast can make the day more meaningful. If you're considering catering your own wedding, use this article to get organized and prepare for your big day.
Coffee Shop Tips
How to Start a Coffee Roasting Business
House-roasted beans are becoming a fixture in local coffee shops. Taking single origin beans from far-flung locales and roasting them yourself is the perfect example of the glocalization movement. Glocalization is the call to adapt global and international products to the local contexts where they’re used and sold. But are roasting businesses just the latest coffee trend? Buzz aside, roasting coffee beans in-house allows cafes to offer superior beverages and diversify their sales by offering their roasts a la carte or as a part of a coffee subscription service. Whether you’re operating a coffee shop and want to add house-roasted beans to your wheelhouse, or you’re wondering what it takes to roast coffee beans professionally, we guide you through the steps of starting a coffee roasting business. Shop All Coffee Roasters Use these links to jump to the step of starting a coffee roasting business that interests you: Coffee Education Branding Business Plan Startup Costs Licenses and Permits Insurance Location Supplies Website Advertising How to Roast Coffee Beans Professionally 60% of coffee consumed in the U.S. is from the specialty coffee market, making fresh and sustainable coffee beans an excellent opportunity for entrepreneurs. Roasting coffee beans professionally takes more than choosing the types of coffee roasts you want to make. You must acquire equipment, business permits, and marketing strategies. Implement these steps to start roasting coffee beans professionally. 1. Coffee Education Before starting a coffee roasting business, you should have foundational coffee knowledge. From brewing with a French press to an espresso machine, master brewing methods so you can test your coffee beans with each. Consider investing in professional cupping and roasting courses. The Specialty Coffee Association (SCA) offers a sensory skill module that helps new roasters identify green and roasted coffee defects and flavor characteristics. If you want thorough knowledge, the SCA’s comprehensive coffee skills education program is right for you. Beyond coffee coursework, taking marketing classes allows you to handle promotion yourself. This makes starting a coffee roasting business more affordable since you won’t have to pay marketing professionals high salaries. The more skills you develop before starting your coffee roasting business, the fewer roles you’ll have to outsource. Once your business is off the ground, you can bring on these staff members to lighten your load. 2. Develop Your Coffee Brand Having a clear and definable brand for your coffee roastery attracts and retains customers. Branding is the process of communicating your values, mission, personality, and identity. It should be evident in your customer service, packaging, marketing, and products. For example, if you roast fair trade coffee beans, your branding should reflect your dedication to ethical and sustainable sourcing. Including information about your brand on your coffee roasting website and packaging is a great way to help like-minded patrons connect with your brand. One branding idea is to focus your coffee roasting business identity on coffee tourism. Just like wine enthusiasts travel to destinations renowned for their wine production, many coffee enthusiasts are visiting countries where coffee is grown. Your state-side coffee roasting business can tap into the coffee tourism trend by offering multiple single origin roasts from other countries. Provide information on the country the beans came from, photos of the coffee farm, and curated snack pairing kits for a coffee stay-cation experience. 3. Write a Coffee Roasting Business Plan Having a thorough business plan is a vital step in roasting coffee professionally. It acts as a roadmap for your new business, consolidating your goals and strategies so you can convert them into action steps. A business plan will help you secure funding for your coffee roasting business because it proves to investors that you know how to make your business succeed. Your coffee roasting business plan should include the followings: Executive Summary - The executive summary provides a brief overview of all of the information included in your business plan. You will need to write it last after you have the rest of the information. Company Description - Your company description expands on the specific strategies and projections provided in your executive summary. Concept and Products - Explain what concepts you have chosen for your coffee roasting business, which types of roasts you’ll sell, and any subscription services you plan to offer. Management and Ownership Structure - Discuss what type of ownership your coffee roasting business will have and explain its managerial structure. Employee and Staffing Needs - Outline how many employees you’ll need to operate your coffee roasting business, and which positions you must fill. Marketing and Competitor Analysis - Identify a target market and complete a comprehensive analysis of your competitors. Then highlight potential competitive advantages. Advertising and Marketing Strategies - List potential advertising and marketing methods that will entice customers and establish brand loyalty. Financial Projection and Summary - Outline sales projections, perform a break-even analysis, and list potential expenses. For an in-depth guide to writing business plans, check out our restaurant business plan guide. Back to Top 4. Raise Coffee Roasting Startup Costs While not as expensive as opening a coffee shop, starting a coffee roasting business still requires capital. A Specialty Coffee Association study determined that on average, a roaster wholesaler and retailer business owner will need $120,000 to cover startup costs. Discover the basic elements you must pay for when starting a coffee roasting business. Location Down Payment - The great thing about a coffee roasting business is you can operate out of your home with the proper licenses and permits in most states. If you’re adding a roasting business to your coffee house, you can make room for your roasting machine without purchasing additional space. However, if these aren’t options for you, you must purchase or rent a location to roast your coffee beans. If purchasing your location, you’ll likely take out a loan to help cover the expense. Expect to make a down payment of around 15-20%. Property Renovations/Construction Costs - Whether you’re purchasing a location or operating from home, be prepared to spend money on renovations. Many states allow entrepreneurs to roast coffee from home as long as the part of their home where they will roast the coffee meets state-specific criteria. Expect renovations to bring your space up to your local health department’s standards. Coffee Roasting Equipment - Your primary cost will be the commercial coffee roaster. A commercial coffee roaster can cost anywhere from $20,000 to $150,000. While you may not require a large unit when you first start out, we recommend purchasing the largest and best roaster you can afford. As the most essential element of your new business, you don’t want to quickly outgrow or wear out your coffee roaster. Coffee Roasting Supplies Inventory - You must factor in the costs of green bean sourcing, packaging, and shipping supplies into your startup costs. As you test and develop your roasts, be prepared for a large amount of initial green bean waste. Employee Wages - You may be able to handle much of the coffee roasting process yourself when you first start out. However, if you plan to run a larger operation, you’ll need employees and staff. With the rise of staffing shortages, be prepared to pay fair wages. Advertising - An advertising budget is needed to run marketing campaigns and attract new customers. Permits and Licensing - Coffee roasting businesses require several permits and licenses, many of which come with fees. POS System - A POS system streamlines the ordering process, inventory management, and sales reporting. Website - Creating a website where patrons can order coffee beans is essential to your success. Provide information about your supply chain, products, and brand, so customers see your value. 5. Get Business Licenses, Permits, and Certifications To start a coffee roasting business, there are several licenses, permits, and certifications you must acquire. We break down the official standards you must meet to roast coffee beans professionally. EPA Requirements - Since volatile organic compounds and harmful particulate matter are released during the roasting process, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in many states requires roasters to have Air Permits if they roast high volumes annually. Check your local EPA requirements to see if an Air Permit is required for your coffee roasting business. FDA Requirements - According to the Food Safety Modernization Act (FSMA), any facility that manufactures, processes, packages, or holds food for consumption must register through the FDA Food Facility Registration page and allow the agency to inspect the food facility. Local and State Requirements - Most states have laws and regulations over the sale of food products enforced by local health departments. If your production is under a certain volume or you sell your roasts under home cottage laws, many states allow you to roast and sell coffee beans from any location with little health department oversight. Most cottage laws do not allow you to sell food online. However, other states require professional coffee roasters to use a commercial-grade kitchen and require random health department inspections. Check your local and state requirements to make sure you’re in compliance. General Business License - While some states require a general business license or permit to roast coffee beans for sale, these licenses are usually found at the city level. Check your local requirements. Form a Business Entity - You must select a legal entity that defines how your coffee roasting business is organized. You have four options: proprietorship, partnership, corporation, and Limited Liability Company (LLC). Business Name Registration - Many states require owners to register their business name. The process of registering your business name varies by state and the type of business entity you chose. Employee Identification Number - Before you can hire staff, you must get a nine-digit employee identification number. Every business in the United States has a unique employee identification number. Sales Tax Permit or Business Number - A state sales tax permit (aka business tax number or tax ID number) may be required to sell roasted coffee beans. If necessary, you’ll create an account number with your state’s taxing agency so they can collect and remix the sales tax. Resale Certificate - A resale certificate (aka seller’s permit) allows you to purchase inventory that will be resold to customers tax-free. When a business owner has a seller’s permit, they won’t pay the sales tax to the vendor they purchase their inventory from. The sales tax is charged to the end-user of the product instead. Occupancy Certification - Most cities will require your coffee roasting business to have a Certificate of Occupancy (CO) before operating out of a commercial building. It is usually offered by the city and county. Before you receive the CO, the building must comply with zoning regulations, building codes, and any additional local requirements. If you’re operating your coffee roastery from your home, you may need to obtain a home occupation permit. Check your local laws and regulations to make sure you’re in compliance. What Is Fair Trade Certification? The Fair Trade certification confirms that a product’s social, economic, and environmental aspects of production comply with Fairtrade Standards for Producers and Traders. As a coffee roasting business, it’s worth obtaining a Fair Trade certification, proving to your clients that your coffee promotes fair pay and ethical treatment of the producer groups in developing countries that exported your green coffee beans. Consumers are willing to pay approximately 3.62% higher premium for Fair Trade Certified coffee, so having a Fair Trade certification can earn you greater profits in the long run. It also sets your coffee roasting business apart from competitors, and it can earn customer loyalty from patrons who appreciate your efforts to promote an equitable global economy. 6. Invest in Business Insurance Insuring your coffee roasting business protects against workplace injuries, property damage, and claims of product liability. General liability insurance is the best insurance for most coffee-roasting businesses. The average coffee roaster spends between $500 and $1,200 to have general liability coverage for $1 million. Your location, number of employees, deductible, general aggregate limit, and per-occurrence limit will determine the price of your general liability policy. Some providers may offer a discount on your general liability policy if you purchase it as a part of a business owner’s policy (BOP). Back to Top 7. Secure a Location for Your Coffee Roastery You must find a space large enough to accommodate your coffee roasting equipment and provide enough room for you to safely roast, package, and ship your coffee beans. If you’re a micro roaster, you won’t require a large commercial space to operate your coffee roasting business. As long as cottage laws in your area allow it, an up-to-code basement or garage will work as a location for a small roasting business. As your business grows, you may require a larger space. There are commissaries that allow you to pay for timed access to commercial roasters. This allows you to complete large orders without having to invest in your own commercial space. 8. Purchase Coffee Roasting Supplies It’s time to purchase the coffee roasting equipment and supplies you’ll need to start roasting coffee and selling it to customers. We’ve rounded up the essential supplies required to start your coffee roasting business. Coffee Roaster - There is a wide range of coffee roasters on the market, but most small roasting businesses can start with a 5 kg capacity classic drum roaster. Choose a model that is compatible with helpful roasting software for the best outcome. Unroasted Coffee Beans - Having a steady supply of green beans you can roast will be essential to your business. Decide whether you want to focus on a particular region of origin or offer blends of different beans. Coffee Bags - Branded coffee bags build brand identity, but if you don’t have the funds when you first start out, purchase flavor-conserving, wholesale recyclable coffee bags. Your first customers will care more about the quality of your product and the sustainability of your packaging than a cool design. Bag Sealer - A reliable bag sealer allows you to seal your roasted coffee inside your bags so it can be sold to customers. We recommend choosing an automatic bag sealer that adds the roasting date to the bags. Sample Roaster - A small sample roaster allows you to test your roasts and judge their quality without wasting all your green coffee beans on a large batch if it doesn’t turn out well. Bean Trier - A bean trier is an instrument that pulls a sample of beans from a coffee roaster so you can view their shade and smell their aroma. It is a long tool shaped like a wand with a hollow shaft that has a slot in it. Roasters insert the bean tier into the beans, rotate it, and collect coffee into the shaft. Roasters can then place the bean trier under a spotlight to evaluate the roast shade. Spotlight - To accurately determine the color of your roast, mount a spotlight with a full-spectrum bulb above your bean trier. Color Meter - For true color accuracy, invest in a color meter. A color meter analyzes the degree of roast, allowing you to create a consistent product. Moisture Reader - A moisture reader reveals how coffee was prepared, how its quality might alter over time, and how it will respond inside the roaster. Scales - You will use scales to weigh green coffee before roasting it, ground coffee before taste testing, and roasted coffee beans before packaging them for your customers. You’ll need a scale with a high weight capacity and a large weighing platter. Look for a unit that is accurate to 0.1g. Coffee Grinder - You’ll need a reliable grinder with adjustable grind settings so you can test your roasts in every grind size. Coffee Brewer - You must have a brewer to test your roasted beans with. Pour over and French press brewers are popular choices. Make sure you can test the method your core customers will likely use. Coffee Roasting Software - There is a lot of wonderful software to help you roast coffee. For the new roaster, Artisan is an excellent choice. It’s free, open-source software compatible with over 30 types of roasting machines and over 50 associated devices. For advanced roasters willing to pay for their software, Cropster is a comprehensive tool that helps roasters with monitoring their inventory, production, planning, quality control, and manage the buying and selling of green coffee online. Cleaning Supplies - You'll need to maintain a tidy space and thoroughly clean your equipment. Safety Equipment - Protect against injury by providing safety supplies. Help reduce the risk of fires by adding a water line with a spray head and an accessible valve. Shipping Supplies - If you plan to run an e-commerce coffee roasting business, purchase shipping supplies so you can fulfill customers’ orders. 9. Create a Website for Your Coffee Roasting Business Having a navigable website is essential to your success. Make sure your product pages offer ample information to guide people. Use descriptive words so customers understand each roast’s flavor profile. Consider offering interactive quizzes to help patrons find a roast they’ll like. Your coffee roasting website should reveal who you are as a brand and guide patrons to purchases. Provide information on your sustainability efforts and on where you source your beans. According to a Label Insight survey, 94% percent of consumers are more loyal to brands that provide supply chain transparency. Lastly, make it easy for customers to subscribe to loyalty programs and email lists from your website. 10. Advertise Your Coffee Roasting Business You can have the best brand, premium products, and incredible customer service, but if no one knows about your business, your efforts will fall flat. Creating a social media presence is crucial to marketing your coffee roasting businesses. Each social media platform favors a different type of content. Optimize your content for each platform by following best practices for Instagram and learning how to create engaging videos for TikTok. If you have a cottage food roasting business, get involved with your local farmer’s market scene. Don’t hesitate to make in-person connections with local gourmet grocers and coffee houses to advertise your roasts. Back to Top Thanks to its comparatively low startup costs, launching a coffee roasting business is a wonderful opportunity for entrepreneurial coffee enthusiasts. Whether you’re a coffee shop owner interested in gaining a competitive edge or a coffee roasting hobbyist looking for a new career, refer back to our guide to start your own coffee roasting business.
How to Clean a Coffee Pot
Coffee is one of the most popular beverages in the world. Serving coffee through a decanter or airpot allows you to provide large amounts of coffee at once for your guests, but after multiple uses, minerals and oil build up and can leave a residue. Not only does it look unsightly, but it can also lead to bad-tasting drinks. To keep your coffee tasting great, you need to thoroughly clean out your coffee pots, dispensers, and other coffee shop equipment. Just follow these instructions and you can get back to making rich, delicious coffee for your customers. How to Clean a Coffee Pot Video To maintain a clean and organized coffee service, watch our video below on how to clean a coffee pot. <iframe width="560" height="315" src="/v/?num=3744&width=560&height=315&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> How to Clean a Coffee Decanter and Coffee Airpot Cleaning your coffee decanters and airpots may be difficult due to their unusual size and shape. So, we broke down the process into easy steps, ensuring that you can get your decanters and airpots perfectly clean. How to Clean a Coffee Decanter 1.Shake the liquid coffee pot cleaner. 2.Add 3-4 squirts of solution into your dirty decanter. 3.Fill the decanter about halfway with hot water. 4.Scrub the inside with a decanter brush. 5.Rinse the solution from the decanter. You may need to fill the pot with hot water multiple times to completely rinse the pot clean. 6.Dry your clean decanter. How to Clean an Airpot 1.Shake the liquid coffee pot cleaner. 2.Remove the stem assembly. 3.Add 3-4 squirts of solution into your dirty airpot. 4.Add hot water to the airpot. 5.Scrub the inside with a carafe brush. 6.Replace the stem assembly and close the lid. 7.Run the solution-water mixture through the stem assembly by pressing the button the way you would dispense coffee. Do this until the airpot is empty. 8.Remove the stem assembly and rinse the airpot out with hot water. You may need to fill the pot with hot water multiple times to rinse it completely. 9.Use a small cleaning brush to scrub inside the stem. 10.Using a scouring pad and some coffee pot cleaning solution, scrub the outside of the stem until the residue is gone. 11.Run the stem under hot water to rinse it. 12.Replace the stem assembly and close the lid. Keeping your coffee pots clean is an integral part of maximizing proper hygiene in your coffee shop or cafe. Follow these step-by-step instructions when cleaning and sanitizing coffee decanters and coffee airpots so all of your coffee roasts maintain their intended flavor and aroma.
How to Use a French Press
French press coffee is becoming one of the most popular coffee brewing methods in the food service industry. Coffee brewed in a French press offers bold flavors that guests at coffee shops, cafes, and restaurants have come to love. Learn more about this brewing style and follow our French press brewing instructions to extract your coffee beans like an expert. Shop All French Presses Click below to learn more about how to use a French press: Step-by-Step Instructions French Press Brew Guide What Is a French Press? How to Choose a French Press How to Use a French Press Video Check out this video for a visual guide to making coffee in a French press: <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=7047&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> How to Make French Press Coffee Creating your own French pressed coffee is an uncomplicated process that can improve your restaurant’s coffee service and reward you with flavorful coffee. French Press Coffee Ingredients and Supplies To make French press coffee, you’ll need: Coarse ground coffee beans Hot water between 190 and 200 degrees Fahrenheit. This can be achieved by allowing the water to come to a boil, removing it from the heat source, and letting it sit for a minute or two before use. French press Portion scale to measure ingredients How to Make Coffee in a French Press: Step-by-Step Follow these step-by-step instructions to make coffee in a French press: Preheat French press: Add hot water to your French press and swirl it around to warm up the device before use. This will reduce temperature shock to your beans and keep your coffee hotter for longer. Remove water and dry: After about a minute, dump out the water from the canister and dry your press. Add coffee beans: Measure out your ground coffee beans and add them to the canister. 2 Tbsp. (28.3 grams) of coffee is used per 1 cup of water. Soak the grounds: Add just enough boiling water to cover and soak the grounds. Stir the grounds and let them sit: Stir the grounds, attach the lid, and allow the mixture to sit for about 30 seconds. Add remaining water: Remove the lid and add the remaining water to the canister. Give the mixture a gentle stir. Attach the lid: Attach the lid and make sure the plunger is pulled up. This allows the screen to sit flush against the bottom of the lid, which prevents steam from escaping. Steep: Allow the coffee to steep for 3 to 5 minutes, depending on how finely ground the beans are. Push the plunger down: After 3-5 minutes, hold the top of the lid down with one hand and slowly push down the plunger with the other hand. This should take about 20 seconds, and there will be some resistance. Pour coffee: Pour the coffee into a coffee decanter or coffee cup immediately. Because of the direct immersion between the water and the beans, the longer you let the coffee sit in the French press, the more bitter it becomes. Back to Top French Press Brew Guide Once you master the basics of making coffee in a French press, you’re ready to perfect your coffee craft. Use our French press brew guide to produce the perfect cup of French press coffee. We answer some common questions about French press coffee below. French Press Coffee Ratio If you’re wondering how much coffee you need for your French press, you must first decide whether you want a mild, regular, or strong brew. For a mild French press brew, measure out a 1:17 ratio of coffee to water. For a regular French press brew, measure out a 1:15 coffee to water ratio. For a strong French press brew, measure out a 1:12 coffee to water ratio. Because a French press is an immersion brewer, the water is saturated with coffee throughout the brewing cycle, requiring more coffee beans and an extended extraction period. For the best tasting French press coffee, use a portion scale to measure your coffee and water ratios. The French press brewing style requires more coffee than other methods. French Press Grind Size A French press requires coarse coffee grounds. For an even extraction, the coarse grounds will need to be even in size. How Long to Brew French Press On average, French Press coffee takes four minutes to brew. If your water is on the cooler side, you can extend the brew time to five minutes. What Is a French Press? A French press coffee maker is a cylindrical pot with a plunger and built-in filter used to brew ground coffee beans. The French press keeps the coffee grounds in contact with the water throughout the entire brewing period and “presses” hot water through the ground coffee. A French press filters the brew through its built-in metal screen, which means the essential oils found in the grounds are not absorbed by filters or evaporated. Instead, they remain in the brew and result in a stronger, richer coffee with a more aromatic flavor. This method is known as direct immersion brewing. Because more of the coffee beans' flavor infuses into each cup, pressed coffee is the perfect brewing method for savoring single-origin coffee beans. How Hot Should Water Be for French Press? You should heat the water for your French press to 195 degrees Fahrenheit. While less precise, you can bring the water to a boil and then rest it for 30 seconds before pouring it over your coffee grounds and starting the brewing process. Drip Coffee vs. French Press Drip coffee from traditional commercial coffee machines filters coffee grounds through coffee filters, yielding milder coffee compared to French presses. Most drip coffee machines employ automatic brewing, produce large volumes of coffee, and keep the coffee warm for extended periods. French presses produce a smaller amount of stronger-tasting coffee intended for immediate consumption. When purchasing coffee shop equipment, you'll require a mix of tools and machines to meet a variety of coffee drinking needs. Before choosing your coffee, roasts, and creating your menu, you should understand which establishments benefit from a coffee press vs. a coffee maker. Settings that Benefit from Drip Coffee: diners, office break rooms, and cafeterias Settings that Benefit from French Press Coffee: small cafes, coffee shops, and bakeries What Are the Best Coffee Beans for a French Press? You’ll always want to grind whole coffee beans when using a French press because pre-ground beans are too fine for direct immersion brewing. Because the coffee beans remain in contact with the water during the entire steeping process, you’ll want to grind your beans to a coarser consistency than you would for an espresso maker or automatic drip brewer. The fast infusion rate of French press brewing means finely ground beans will produce a bitter taste. Back to Top How to Choose a French Press When choosing a French press, you’ll want to consider two factors: materials and size. We break down what you should be looking for when you choose a French press below. How to Choose French Press Materials The three main components of a French press are its carafe, plunger, and lid. There are other small parts and pieces, but the quality of the plunger, carafe and lid determine the quality of the French Press. We explain what you evaluate for each of these three parts below. How to Choose a French Press Plunger The plunger piece includes a handle and a filter. When you push the plunger’s handle down, it forces the filter down which in turn pushes the coffee grounds to the bottom of your French press carafe. You can determine the quality of a plunger by its filter. Avoid filters with plastic edges. They will erode after repeated use and are not dishwasher safe. Over time, plastic carafes allow coffee grounds to slip into the brewed coffee, soiling your final product. Choose a filter with non-degradable, metal edges. Your metal filter will remain intact unless it is bent, preserving your investment and reducing replacement costs. How to Choose a French Press Carafe Stainless Steel Carafe - If you’re brewing your French press coffee in your kitchen, a stainless-steel carafe is your best option. Stainless steel carafes neither break nor interfere with the brewing process. The only drawback of a stainless steel carafe is you cannot watch the brewing process. However, if the customer will never see the French Press, this is a non-issue. Tempered Glass Carafes - If you’re going to display the carafe to the customer and want to create a premium cup of French press coffee, then tempered glass carafes are ideal for your operation. Tempered glass doesn’t interfere with the brewing process and provides a beautiful window for the patron to watch their coffee brew through. However, tempered glass is prone to breakage, making it unideal in high-volume establishments where accidents are more likely to occur. Plastic Carafes - If you operate a bustling establishment in a small space and want to display your French press to customers, then a plastic carafe is ideal for you. Plastic carafes allow you to view the brewing process but do not break. However, plastic interferes with the brewing process and will not produce the highest quality product. Weigh the potential breakage of a glass carafe and the lack of aesthetic appeal of a tempered glass carafe against this quality loss and decide what is best for you. How to Choose French Press Top Piece Look for a French press top piece with a guard. The guard prevents heat from escaping through the carafe spout while your coffee brews. Most top pieces with guards twist on and off, removing the air barrier and allowing you to pour your extracted coffee. How to Choose a French Press Size You’ll need to determine how much coffee you want your French press to make at one time. 3, 8, and 12 cup French presses are the most common. In ounces, a French press cup yields 4 ounces of brewed coffee. 3 Cup French Press - produces 12 ounces of brewed coffee 8 Cup French Press - produces 32 ounces of brewed coffee 12 Cup French Press - produces 48 ounces of brewed coffee Back to Top While a French press may require more attention than your automatic brewer, the outcome is an aromatic cup of coffee your customers will savor. Serve it hot or bring bold flavors to your selection of iced coffees. No matter how you serve it, this easy, trendy brewing method is sure to put your restaurant or cafe’s coffee service on the map.
How to Clean a Coffee Maker
Running hard water through your coffee equipment can cause mineral buildup and calcify your heating elements. If you’re looking to get the most out of your commercial coffee maker, then it’s important to make sure it’s properly cleaned. Cleaning your coffee maker will prolong its life span and improve the taste of your coffee. Follow our video and step-by-step instructions to get your coffee maker back in top shape, and don't forget to set up a water filtration system for your coffee equipment to cut down on mineral buildup in the future. Shop All Coffee, Espresso, & Tea Machine Cleaners How to Deep Clean a Coffee Maker Video Tutorial <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=3760&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> Step-by-Step Instructions for How to Clean a Coffee Maker 1.Unplug the coffee maker. 2.Wipe down the machine with a damp towel. Once dry, plug it back in to begin the deliming process. 3.To delime your coffee maker, mix 10 oz. of lemon juice with 32 oz. of water. 4.Pour the mixture into the water reservoir. 5.Turn your coffee machine on as if you are brewing a pot of coffee. 6.Once your coffee machine has finished its brewing cycle, remove the machine's spray head. 7.Remove any residue that may block the holes in the spray head. 8.Insert a deliming spring into the opening where the spray head was. In a sawing motion, move the deliming spring back and forth about 5-6 times. 9.Wash the coffee filter with warm, soapy water. Then run two or three brewing cycles with plain water to remove any traces of lemon water solution. Coffee Maker Cleaning FAQs Get answers to the most frequently asked coffee maker cleaning questions below: How to Clean a Coffee Maker with Vinegar White vinegar is very effective for cleaning a coffee maker. You can sub white vinegar for lemon juice when you follow our step-by-step coffee maker cleaning instructions. To clean a coffee maker with vinegar, add equal parts vinegar and water to your machine's reservoir until it's full. Put a paper filter into your machine's empty coffee basket and put the pot into place. Brew the solution halfway and then turn off the machine. Let it sit for 30 minutes before turning the coffee maker back on and finishing the brew cycle. Dump the coffee pot before rinsing it and the basket out. Next, put a new paper filter into the basket and brew a full pot of clean water twice to remove all the vinegar. How to Clean a Coffee Pot Your coffee pot should be cleaned every day. You can clean your coffee pot by washing it in your three-compartment sink. Most commercial coffee pots are dishwasher safe but check with your manufacturer before running it through your dishwasher. How to Descale a Coffee Maker If you follow our step-by-step instructions for the best way to clean a coffee maker and your unit still shows signs of hard water residue and limescale buildup, then you'll need to add a rest period. Turn the coffee pot off mid-cycle and allow the lemon juice solution to rest inside your machine and carafe for one hour before completing the brew cycle. How Often Should You Clean a Coffee Maker? You should clean and delime your machine at least once every six months. However, if the water you use is extremely hard, you may need to clean it monthly. Best Coffee Pot Cleaner Both diluted lemon juice and vinegar are effective coffee pot cleaners. If you're looking for ready-to-use coffee equipment cleaning wipes, espresso equipment cleaners, and coffee equipment descalers, there are numerous commercial-grade coffee maker cleaning solutions available to you. To uphold food safety standards, cafes must regularly clean their coffee shop equipment. Taking a few minutes to clean your coffee maker will improve the taste of your coffee. This is a simple way to improve your restaurant's coffee service.
How to Make Latte Art
When it comes to creating specialty coffee beverages, the delicious taste is only half the appeal. In order to step up your coffee game and really impress your guests, it’s time you learned to make latte art. Not only will this bring a personal touch to each drink your baristas create, but it’s also a great way to draw in new customers. To learn all the ins and outs of making latte art, we visited Square One Coffee. Additionally, be sure to check out the video we made with Square One on how to use an espresso machine. Step-by-Step Instructions to Make Latte Art To make latte art, you first need to steam milk. Once you have steamed your milk, you're ready to start creating beautiful latte art. We'll break down how to steam milk perfectly and then create two different types of latte art. How to Steam Milk Since steamed milk is a key ingredient in creating a delicious latte and beautiful latte art, it's necessary that you know how to froth milk. While it may seem like a simple task, it can be tricky to learn how to do properly. Before you begin with the steps below, it's important to know that you should never steam your milk more than once or add cold milk while steaming. By re-steaming your milk, you can alter the proteins in it and negatively affect the texture of your frothed milk. For a latte, you'll want to fill your pitcher about half way with milk. 1.Purge the steam wand to remove any residue and to heat up your wand. 2.Submerge the wand into your milk, but do not allow it to touch the bottom of your frothing pitcher. 3.Begin frothing your milk. You should stop once you feel the pitcher becoming hot. 4.Once you're finished, wipe your wand with a cloth towel. While trained baristas will use their hand to gauge the temperature of the steamed milk, you can also use a frothing thermometer to see if the milk has reached a temperature between 120 and 140 degrees Fahrenheit. How to Make Rosetta Latte Art Before you begin steaming your milk, you should start pulling your shot of espresso. 1.Purge your steam wand. 2.Steam your milk until you feel the pitcher becoming warm. After you've steamed your milk, you'll want to swirl it around the pitcher so that the foam integrates with the milk. 3.Pour your espresso shot into a mug. 4.Begin pouring your milk high, so that it settles to the bottom. 5.As you bring your mug closer to your pitcher, make a zig-zag pattern with your milk. 6.Pour your milk through the center of your design to complete the rosetta. 7.Place your mug on a saucer with a spoon and serve. How to Make Tulip Latte Art Before you begin steaming your milk, you should start pulling your shot of espresso. 1.Purge your steam wand. 2.Steam your milk until you feel the pitcher becoming warm. After you've steamed your milk, you'll want to swirl it around the pitcher so that the foam integrates with the milk. 3.Pour your espresso shot into a mug. 4.Keeping your pitcher close to your mug, pour your milk in a quick back and forth motion to create the first section. 5.Pull away the pitcher from the mug and repeat step 4 to create a smaller, second section. 6.Once again, pull away the pitcher and repeat step 4 to create the third and final section. Then, pour your milk through the center of your design. 7.Place your mug on a saucer with a spoon and serve. For more help with making latte art, check out our video below. <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=4129&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe>
How to Use an Espresso Machine
If you’re looking to diversify the coffee drink options in your cafe or restaurant, then it’s time you invested in an espresso machine. Espresso is a form of coffee that is finely ground and then brewed with a small amount of nearly boiling water. Each shot of espresso contains the same amount of caffeine as the standard-sized cup of coffee, which results in it having a stronger taste. To offset the bitterness, milk can be added to the espresso to make popular drinks like cappuccino, latte, and macchiato. Making espresso can be intimidating, especially for new baristas. So, we visited Square One Coffee in downtown Lancaster to learn how to make the perfect cup of espresso. Check out the video below. Shop All Espresso Machines Step-by-Step Instructions on How to Use an Espresso Machine Learn how to use an espresso machine in nine simple steps: Make sure your portafilters are locked into the group head before use so that they are always hot when pulling a shot. 1.Detach portafilter and wipe clean to remove any leftover residue. 2.Using an espresso bean grinder, dispense your freshly ground beans into your portafilter. Before you re-attach your portafilter, you should purge the group head to run out any lower-temp water that could be resting in your water line. 3.Level the grounds in a circular motion. Be sure to remove any crumbs lingering around the edge. 4.Evenly tamp your grounds. 5.Re-attach the portalfilter to the group head. 6.Immediately begin brewing into an espresso shot glass. 7.Keep an eye on the time it takes to reach your preferred volume of espresso. 8.Pour the shot into an espresso cup. 9.Place the cup on a saucer with a spoon and serve. Espresso Terms If this is your first time working with an espresso machine, then check out the definitions of these popular espresso terms for clarification on some of the phrases used throughout our instructions and video: Crema - the light colored liquid that first comes out while extracting your espresso shot. After the darker espresso comes out and mixes with the crema, the lighter liquid filters up to the top, leaving a tan-colored layer on top of the darker espresso. Group head - the metal disc-shaped piece of an espresso machine that the portafilter locks into. This is also where the hot pressurized water is distributed to create an espresso. Portafilter - a handle that features a filter basket where you place your ground espresso beans. This is also where the water from the group head runs through. Pulling a shot - using the machine to create a shot of espresso. This phrase is a reference to older times when baristas had to pull an actual lever in order to create a shot. Purging the steam wand - allows steam to exit the wand, which helps to remove any residue and heats up your wand. Tamping espresso grounds - compacting your espresso grounds into your portafilter. This helps the pressurized water extract more flavor from your grounds since there won't be any cracks and crevices for the water to pass through.
Cooking Equipment
How to Clean a Charbroiler
Maintaining your charbroiler, along with any kitchen equipment, helps to foster a safe and sanitary work environment. Regular cleanings reduce residue and grease build-up, which can prevent grease fires. Plus, removing excess particles ensures your fresh foods aren't absorbing unwanted flavors. This allows you to maintain high-quality food and prevent costly or time-consuming maintenance issues. Follow these simple steps to keep your charbroiler clean. Shop All Charbroilers Click the links below to learn more about vacation rental property profitability: How to Clean a Charbroiler Video What Do I Need to Clean My Charbroiler? How to Clean a Commercial Charbroiler How to Clean Cast Iron Grates FAQ How to Clean a Charbroiler Video <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=10604&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> What Do I Need to Clean My Charbroiler? Choosing the right brush to effectively clean your charbroiler's grates can minimize labor. In addition to the right grill brush, here are a few items you should have on hand to effectively clean your charbroiled: Wash cloth Soap and warm water Cleaning gloves Spray degreaser Optional: Grill cleaner How to Clean a Commercial Charbroiler To learn how to clean a commercial charbroiler, adhere to the steps listed below. We've also included a video that walks you through each step of the process. 1.Make sure your charbroiler is still hot but not on. Use a wire brush or scraper to remove stuck-on particles or fat from grates. 2.Once the tops have been cleaned, flip the grates over and thoroughly clean the bottoms. 3.Wait for your charbroiler to cool completely. Use a damp cloth or sponge, along with soapy water, to clean the rest of your grill. For excess build-up, use a degreaser or heavy-duty grill cleaner. Be sure to thoroughly rinse the degreaser away from the charbroiler after use. 4.Optional: If you use a radiant charbroiler, clean the radiants as well. We recommend doing this in the sink. For lava rock charbroilers, flip the stones every few weeks to burn off any accumulated grease. How to Clean Cast Iron Grates When it comes to using cast iron cookware, it's essential that you and your staff stay educated on how to properly clean it. Not only do cast iron cooktop grates have a tendency to rust if not cared for properly, but leaving grease and food stuck to the surface can make contribute to bacterial growth. Below, we'll walk you through the process of cleaning and seasoning your cast iron grill grates. Cleaning Cast Iron Grill Grates To clean cast iron grill grates, follow these steps: Remove leftover food: Set your charbroiler to high heat in order to burn off any leftover food particles. Cool down: Turn off the unit and allow it to cool. Brush: Use a wire brush to remove the burnt food and ashy residue from the grates. Flip: Once one side is clean, flip the grate over and brush the other side. After the cast iron charbroiler grates have been cleaned, season the grates to prevent rusting and extend their longevity. Seasoning Cast Iron Grill Grates To properly season your cast iron grill grates, follow these instructions: Add oil: Coat the grates thoroughly with a high heat oil like canola oil or peanut oil by using a spray bottle or soaked paper towels. Wipe: Using a clean paper towel, wipe off any excess oil. You should still see an even coating of oil left behind. Heat: Heat the grill for approximately 15 minutes to allow the oil to bake into the grate. Add more oil: Once the grates have cooled, lightly coat the grates once more in oil. Repeat as needed: Repeat the season process after each cleaning. FAQ Below, we've answered some of the most commonly asked questions about charbroilers: How Often Should I Clean My Charbroiler? Depending on how often you use your charbroiled, it's best to clean it daily. Grease, food particles, and fat accumulate along the top and bottom of the grates, as well as the sides, front, and back of your grill. What Is a Charbroiler Used For? Charbroilers are used to grill various meats, including beef, chicken, and fish. They are larger than traditional grills, allowing you to cook more food at once. Used indoors, charbroilers give food the appearance and taste they would have if they were cooked on an outdoor grill. Incorporate these simple steps into your cleaning routine to ensure your charbroiler is safe to use in your commercial kitchen. Keeping your equipment clean can both extend the life of the product and prevent food from absorbing or transferring flavors.
How to Cure Meat
With the recent increased popularity of charcuterie boards, there come new opportunities to provide your guests with a sophisticated assortment of flavors and textures. By curing your own meats, you can earn the most profits for your business, especially since many charcuterie items include inexpensive cuts of meat. The practice of curing meat also falls nicely into the “nose to tail” trend of using every part of the animal, because some of the commonly cured cuts would ordinarily be discarded. Keep reading to learn more about meat curing methods and important laws and regulations so you can offer the latest charcuterie trends. Shop All Charcuterie & Cured Meats What Is Cured Meat? Cured meat refers to any meat that's been preserved through the removal of moisture. By eliminating moisture from meat, it takes on new textural properties that are not conducive to the growth of bacteria. The most common way of achieving this is by using salt to draw the moisture out and create a new, more shelf-stable substance known as “cured meat.” People have been curing meat for centuries, mainly as a way to preserve their food. Especially before the days of refrigeration, most cultures found ways of curing meats through processes that remove moisture from the food through the use of salt. And you’ll still find specialty meat shops in Italy or other parts of the world that cure their meats in cellars or other cool environments that aren’t necessarily refrigerated. While there are certain types of meats that will only cure properly if stored at room temperature, most meats should always be stored in cold environments, like walk-in refrigerators. How to Cure Meat with Salt Salt was once more valuable than gold. Since it has the power to prolong the shelf life of otherwise perishable foods, it’s no wonder why. The centuries-old practice of curing foods with curing salt is simple to do and has been perfected over the years to create some of our favorite and well-known delicacies, from prosciutto to pepperoni. Dry Curing To dry cure meat with salt, cover it entirely in salt for a full day. In order to make sure the meat is completely covered, fill a container with salt, place the meat on top, and pour more salt over until it’s buried. You can also add some flavorings (like celery seed and black pepper) at this point, if you want. Equilibrium Curing If you’re worried about wasting so much salt, there is another (more modern) method you can try. First, weigh the meat. Apply 3% of that weight’s worth of salt onto the meat, covering evenly and thoroughly, then use a vacuum sealer to seal everything up and let it sit in the refrigerator for about 5 days. This technique is called “equilibrium curing.” No matter which method you choose, the basic result should be pretty much the same. Once the meat has had ample time to sit, you’ll notice that the texture will change dramatically. It should become tougher and dryer. Warning Signs If you notice a foul odor at any point in the process, that means that the salt was not properly applied and bacteria has begun to grow. There’s no real way to salvage meat after rot has begun, so if you find any indications of bacteria, it should be discarded right away. Adding Flavors After the meat is somewhat dehydrated, the fun part begins: adding flavors! There are endless combinations of herbs and spices you can use to create your very own signature cured meats, such as prosciutto. Simply shake off the majority of the salt (it’s okay if some stays on the outside) and coat the meat in your spice mixture. Hang It to Dry Once the spices have been applied, you can either wrap the meat in cheesecloth to keep the spices together or simply tie it with a series of butcher’s knots, using regular kitchen twine. The basic idea is to keep the meat in a tidy shape that’ll be easy to cut, while ensuring that air can circulate around the entire piece. So, as soon as you have everything neatly tied, hang it in the fridge until it’s done. Between 40 and 33 degrees Fahrenheit is the proper temperature range for storing meat (without freezing it). Use a label maker to identify all your different meats—including the start weight and goal weight. How Long Does It Take to Salt Cure Meat? The meat should lose 35-40% of its weight by the end of the process, and the only way to tell when the meat is finished curing is to weigh it. Follow this formula to find what the final weight should be: beginning weight X 0.65= final weight goal. The amount of time it takes for the meat to cure depends entirely on the size of the meat. A small duck breast should take about 4-5 weeks. Large cuts of pork could take several months. After you’ve left ample time for curing and the process is complete, it’s time to enjoy your creation! Use a meat slicer to slice the meat into the thinnest pieces possible (they should be translucent). You can put the pieces on a sandwich or simply serve them on a board with fruits, cheeses, and specialty mustard or jam. The end result should have a chewy texture and a perfect amount of salt and spice. Cured Sausage Salami is one of the most popular kinds of cured sausage, and it’s been around for centuries. The main difference between cured sausage and other cured meats is that you actually combine the salt and seasonings with the meat in a meat grinder that best fits your needs, rather than simply coating the outside of a complete cut. Making your own sausage isn’t difficult, but it can be time consuming. So why not get the most out of your efforts by curing it? One thing to keep in mind, though, is that many kinds of cured sausage must be stored at room temperature in order for the process to be effective, and that can require extra permits or special storage spaces in a commercial setting. But if you can manage the legal aspects, house-cured salami is a wonderful addition to a cheese and fruit board. Commercial Meat Curing Laws and Regulations If you plan on curing your own meats, make sure you understand the laws and regulations of your municipality, as well as the Department of Health guidelines for your state. While meat and poultry regulations vary by country, state, and even city, some basic principles that apply throughout the nation include: Licenses - Most facilities that process meat, whether they're a slaughterhouse or delicatessen, need to obtain proper licenses through an application process. Inspections - Trained professionals will inspect meat processing facilities before production begins and will most likely check in periodically to ensure that everything meets their standards. There are different levels of inspectors: federal, state, and municipal. Facility - The layout of your facility is extremely important to plan out before you take on a meat curing endeavor because there are restrictions on the footpath permitted through the building, in order to reduce the risk of contamination. Access to potable water and proper drainage to sanitary sewage systems are essential. Separation of Products - Raw products must be kept separate from ready-to-eat items. Similarly, it is recommended that edible items be kept separate from inedible supplies, in order to better control the growth of bacteria in areas where food is kept. Clearly, there are a lot of different methods for curing meat, but the same basic ingredients are important to all of them: salt, temperature, and time. Depending on your location, you may be able to cure meat in your existing space, or you could consider meat curing chambers to keep meat contained during the curing process. No matter if you’re looking to create a signature charcuterie to set your business apart from other eateries or if you’re simply hoping to extend the shelf life of the sausage that you painstakingly prepared, curing is a useful process to know.
How to Clean a Meat Slicer
Meat slicers are used constantly in delis and grocery stores, however they can also be found in cafeterias, buffets, catering businesses, and other foodservice establishments. You can slice and chip meats, cheeses, and produce with your machine, making it extremely versatile. Since slicers are used so often for a variety of foods, it's important to understand how to clean them. Eventually, your slicer will wear out and you'll need to replace it with a new one. Until that point, you should learn basic meat slicer maintenance and ways to keep up your meat slicer blade. Read on for information on how to clean a meat slicer, blade maintenance, and more. Shop All Meat Slicer Sanitizer Why It's Important to Clean a Meat Slicer Slicers are used for a variety of deli items and can even be used to slice produce. When you don't regularly clean your slicer, food residue can build up in parts of the machine, causing bacteria to grow. This bacteria can contaminate foods and cause foodborne illnesses, which can make customers very ill! In addition, a meat slicer can transfer flavors or small food particles onto items you slice later, altering the pure taste or texture of your products. Specific Problem Areas Carefully monitor the ring guard mount, blade guard, and slicer handle on your meat slicer for any cracks, broken, or missing or unattached components and replace them with new meat slicer parts as necessary. Food particles can accumulate at ring guard mounts, inside your blade guards, and under your slicer handle. When food collects, it can breed and harbor dangerous bacteria. Make sure you regularly examine the seams, seals, and gaskets on your machine to see if they've worn away and created additional cracks and crevices where food and bacteria can accumulate. You should never use a slicer that has missing, broken, unattached, or defective seals, seams, or gaskets. Remove this slicer from service and repair it before using it, as there may be dangerous trapped bacteria. When to Clean Meat Slicer You should always wipe your slicer down when switching meats, cheeses, or produce. It's a good idea to fully clean your machine every day to prevent oils and solid food pieces from building up on your blade or faceplates and harboring potentially dangerous bacteria. The FDA recommends cleaning meat slicers every 4 hours if they're being used continuously, so you should clean your machine as frequently as possible. Tips Before Starting Always wear protective gloves. Cut-resistant gloves like cut-proof metal gloves are the ideal option, especially when handling the blade. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions exactly. Never use steel wool because it can scratch the machine. Never submerge the slicer completely. Your slicer's manual will specify which parts are dishwasher safe and how to care for others. How to Clean a Meat Slicer 1.Set your thickness to zero. Using a gentle scrub pad, wipe both sides of the blade as the slicer is in motion. Once you have removed any large food particles, turn off and unplug your slicer. 2.Next, make sure the gauge plate is in the fully closed position and the sharpening stone is out of the way. Then, remove the product tray, slice deflector, and center plate. Wash, rinse, and sanitize these components and let them air dry. 3.To clean the blade, you can either remove it or leave it in place. If you leave the blade in place, make sure to clean it thoroughly. Create a soapy solution with a 1:1 ratio of hot water and soap. Alternatively, you can use degreaser spray to clean the blade. Clean both the front and back of the blade while wiping from the center outward. 4.Wipe down the exterior and all remaining pieces of the slicer. Then, rinse with hot water using a clean towel. 5.Sanitize your appliance using meat slicer sanitizing spray. Use a spray bottle to coat the machine thoroughly and allow it to air dry. 6.Lubricate the slide rods using a spray lubricant. Once the slicer is dry, replace the blade, faceplate, and product tray If there are any areas on your slicer where water seems to accumulate, dry the areas with a non-linting towel, and lubricate them to prevent rust or corrosion. You may need to replace gaskets or other components if they're collecting water. This step-by-step how to clean a slicer video is a great resource, too! Meat Slicer Blade Maintenance With proper maintenance, you can lengthen the life of your meat slicer. Here are a few simple tips: You should frequently clean your meat slicer blade and sharpen it with a sharpening stone for meat slicers. Only sharpen a clean blade, and be sure to clean disinfect your blade after sharpening. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Have your machine serviced routinely as recommended by the manufacturer. Now that you know how to clean a meat slicer, you can keep the one in your deli, grocery store, or restaurant in premium condition. Be sure to regularly inspect your machine for any damaged components or food buildup. When you're consistent with meat slicer maintenance, you can increase the lifespan of your unit and reduce the chances of contaminating food.
Food Prep
How to Make Sausage
From Argentinian asado to Texas-style BBQ, sausage is a popular food enjoyed around the world. It's a staple at Oktoberfest celebrations and pairs wonderfully with beer. You can elevate your menu and save money by making your own sausage. Keep reading for step-by-step sausage-making instructions and watch our video for a visual guide to making sausage. Shop All Sausage Making Supplies How to Make Sausage Video Check out our sausage-making video to learn how to make sausage for your butcher shop. <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=4625&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> How to Make Sausage From Scratch Making sausage from scratch is easy when you have the right equipment. Discover the tools you'll need to make your homemade sausage recipe below: Meat grinder Sausage mixer Your choice of meat Seasonings Sausage stuffer Sausage casings If you don't have a meat grinder in your establishment, you can also use pre-ground meat. However, freshly ground meat tastes better and allows you to adjust the coarseness and fat content of your protein. How to Make Your Own Sausage 1.Insert the meat into the hopper of the meat grinder. The meat must be cold before you grind it. 2.Add several types of herbs and spices together in a separate container. 3.Add the ground meat to the meat mixer. Then, add the seasoning mixture and turn the handle on the mixer until the meat is thoroughly coated. 4.Fill the tower on the sausage stuffer with the ground and seasoned meat. 5.Soak the casings in cold water according to the instructions on the packaging. To make the casings easier to slide onto the funnel, run warm water through them first. 6.Once the casings have soaked, slide them onto the funnel of the sausage stuffer. 7.Turn the handle on the sausage stuffer to lower the plunger. This forces the ground meat into the sausage casings. 8.Keep one hand near the opening of the funnel to ensure the casing goes on smoothly. Guide the sausage onto the table into a spiral shape with your other hand. 9.When the casing is full, tie the end off into a knot. 10.You can choose to twist the sausage to create links or keep it as one long strand. Then, the sausage is finished and is ready to be smoked or grilled. Is It Cheaper to Make Your Own Sausage? It is cheaper to make your own sausage than to purchase premade sausage. Reduced cost isn't the only advantage of making your own sausage. Discover all the benefits of homemade sausage below: Making your own sausage is less expensive. It is cheaper to buy ground meat, seasoning, and sausage casings and make sausage yourself than it is to buy it from a store. If you want to cut your food costs even further, you can also learn how to make your own ground meat. Homemade sausage tastes better. Some grocery stores and delis may use scraps and undesirable cuts of meat to make their sausage. When you make your own sausage, you can control what type of meat you use, resulting in more flavorful sausages. Preparing your own sausage allows you to experiment with different seasonings. There are a variety of different seasonings and ingredients that you can add to your sausage. Making your own sausage allows you to adjust the flavors, so you can serve your customers the best option possible. Making your own sausage is simple, and it's an excellent way to cut food costs and provide your guests with a fresher and tastier dish. So, next time you're making gumbo or jambalaya, consider making your own sausage to complete the recipe.
How to Use a Meat Grinder
Meat grinders are convenient pieces of equipment that are most commonly used in settings like delis, butcher shops, and grocery stores. But they are also becoming more popular in restaurants as restaurant owners are finding that meat grinders can help cut food costs. Keep reading to learn why you should get a meat grinder for your business, how to assemble and use your grinder, and some helpful tips for maintaining your appliance. Shop All Meat Grinders and Choppers How to Use a Meat Grinder Video Check out our meat grinder tutorial below: <iframe width="560" height="315" src="/v/?num=5646&width=560&height=315&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> How to Assemble a Meat Grinder When assembling your meat grinder, be sure that all of the components are secured tightly. Additionally, some meat grinders may have slightly different configurations depending on the brand, but most meat grinders will follow this general order of assembly: Step 1.Before you assemble your meat grinder, you should wash, rinse, and sanitize all of the parts. After washing, let the pieces air dry. Step 2.Check to ensure that the power cord is disconnected before assembly. Step 3.Place the T link into the enclosure on the front of your meat grinder. Tighten the T link into place with the locking screw. Step 4.Insert the screw pushing bar into the T link. Rotate the bar and make sure it's all the way into the back. Step 5.Add the four-leaf blade onto the screw pushing bar with the flat side facing out. Step 6.Place the round knife on the end of the screw pushing bar. Make sure the edges of the knife are flush with the edges of the screw pushing bar. Step 7.Attach the four-leaf handle cap to the T link and tighten. Step 8.Add the stainless steel square plate or food pan to the top of the T link and you're ready to start grinding. How to Use a Meat Grinder Once you've assembled your meat grinder, you can begin using it. Here's how you can grind meat in 7 easy steps: Step 1.Remove skin, bones, and silver skin from your meat. Cut it into smaller chunks that will fit into the feeding hole. Step 2.Use the feeding bar to feed meat into the grinder. Step 3.Place a bowl or pan beneath the blades to catch the ground meat when it falls out. Step 4.When you're finished grinding meat, disconnect the power cord. Step 5.Wash, rinse, and sanitize all of the components. Then, let them air dry. Step 6.Thoroughly clean the machine body with a damp cleaning and sanitizing cloth. Step 7.Lubricate the oil seal of the gearbox through the screw hole. You should lubricate your meat grinder every six months or so. Meat Grinder Tips Meat grinders are a useful piece of equipment for your establishment, but there are some things that you can do to get the most out of your machine. Here are a few helpful tips: Keep your meat refrigerated until it's ready to use to prevent it from spoiling. Never use frozen meat in your grinder because it won't grind easily and it can even damage your blade. Before grinding your meat, submerge the T link, screw pushing bar, blade, and other components in ice water, or place them in the freezer. This helps your meat stay cold and prevents it from getting stuck. Don't overload your meat grinder because it can cause jams and can wear out your motor. Place a bowl of ice under your catch bowl to ensure that the ground meat stays cold. How Can a Meat Grinder Help Your Restaurant? Many restaurants have grown used to using store-bought ground meat, but there are many benefits to grinding your own meat. Here are a few reasons why you should consider investing in a meat grinder: Cost Savings: Grinding your own meat will end up saving your business money in the long run. It is much cheaper to buy, butcher, and grind large cuts of meat yourself than to buy pre-ground meat from a store. Control: When you grind the meat yourself you have more precise control over the ratio of lean and fatty meat, which means you get juicier burgers, sausages, and meatballs. Taste: Ground meat from the grocery store has been vacuum sealed and sprayed with preservatives to lengthen its lifespan. When you grind your own meat you get a fresher product that has a better taste. Attachments: There are many different attachments and add-ons you can get for your meat grinder to add to its functionality. For example, you can add a sausage stuffer so you can make your own sausage. Meat grinders are an accessible piece of equipment that can help many types of foodservice establishments save money on their food costs. These products are simple to use, and with a few easy steps, you can begin grinding your own beef, pork, or chicken and curing your own meat. If you're looking for a visual representation and more tips on how to use your meat grinder, check out the video above.
How to Make a Waffle Cone
Ice cream cones are a favorite treat for summertime or any time! But the one thing that makes this classic dessert even better is a house-made waffle cone. We carry all the tools and supplies you need to make your very own cones at your restaurant or ice cream shop. From batter mix to cone forming tools, you can find everything you need to create delicious waffle cones. You can even find chocolate waffle cone dips to bring your cones to the next level. See our tips below to learn more about making your own waffle cones. Shop All Waffle Cone Supplies How to Make Waffle Cones House-made waffle cones can be a big selling point for your creamery and help set you apart from the competition. Here’s our step-by-step guide to making your very own waffle cones. 1.Measure out your waffle cone mix, following the proportions on the package. In our case, we used a 1 lb. mix to 8 oz. cold water ratio. 2.Whisk ingredients to combine. 3.Let the batter rest for 5 to 10 minutes. 4.Pour the desired amount onto the center of your preheated waffle cone maker. It’s alright for some space to be left around the edges. 5.Remove the waffle while it’s still pliable. 6.Use your waffle cone forming tool to shape the waffle. 7.Remove the cone from the tool, allow it to harden, and you’re ready to fill it with your favorite ice cream! Whether you own a popular ice cream shop, or simply want to try your hand at a new skill, our waffle cone supplies make it easy to create your very own house-made ice cream cones . The flavor and texture of fresh cones can greatly enhance your customers' overall ice cream eating experience, so don't be afraid to give it a try.
How to Open a Coconut
The coconut is a puzzling fruit that isn’t exactly the easiest to access. The shell of the coconut is so tough and thick that it seems impenetrable. However, there is a simple tool that’s specifically designed to open coconuts, so you can gain access to the meat of the fruit or even just drain the coconut water for use in gourmet drinks or recipes. That tool is the Vacu Vin coconut opener. While opening a coconut may seem like a daunting task, it’s easy to do if you use the right tool. The Vacu Vin coconut opener features a spike on one end to pierce the eye of the coconut and allow the liquid to drain out, while the blade along the side functions to crack the tough outer shell. So, by using this tool the whole fruit can be split in half, giving you access to the soft fruit inside. How to Open a Coconut Opening a coconut is easy if you use a Vacu Vin coconut opener. Here's how it's done: 1.Pierce the soft eye of the coconut by inserting the blade on the tip of the tool and twisting it to form a round hole. 2.Drain the coconut water from the coconut by simply pouring the liquid through the hole and into a vessel. You can save this coconut water for later. 3.Using the long blade along the side of the tool, carefully hit the center of the coconut and rotate it until it’s cracked all the way around. 4.Pull the two halves apart and that’s it! Now you can enjoy the flavor of fresh coconut. So, next time your recipe calls for coconut, keep in mind that working with raw ingredients can save money, and opening a coconut isn’t as tough as it looks.
How to Make Cotton Candy
Pink, light, soft, and swirling high on a paper cone. You see it at the stadium, the concession stand, and the amusement park. Everybody has it and you want it. But how is cotton candy made? We're here to tell you how in just a few simple steps. Unsure whether or not your business needs cotton candy? You're soon to discover how this sweet confectionary creation makes the perfect addition to any affair! Shop All Cotton Candy Machines Cotton Candy as a Canvas: Colorful and Flavorful Cotton candy is one of the most profitable concession foods that yield one of the highest profit returns. It can be served on a stick for made-to-order service or packaged in bags for quick impulse buys. Spun sugar is naturally white, but it's easy to add vibrant colors and flavors to your cotton candy service, including everything from banana to grape to orange. Though pink vanilla and blue raspberry varieties typically conjure childhood memories of fun houses and roller coasters, you can make cotton candy any way you want - and you're still guaranteed to draw a crowd of customers. Making Cotton Candy is On the Rise When cotton candy was first invented, it was labor-intensive and a sweet treat for a select few. Machine-spun cotton candy was first introduced at the 1904 World's Fair as "fairy floss." Despite the playful names and nod to nostalgia the wispy candy brings, cotton candy was modernized in the 1970s when the first automatic cotton candy making machines were created. These machines have been evolving ever since to accommodate a selection of styles and sizes, and you can still preserve an old-fashioned appeal by placing your machine atop a cotton candy cart. As long as you have sugar and floss sugar concentrate, or pre-mixed floss, you too can make cotton candy! Should I Buy Pre-Mixed Floss? In order to give cotton candy its color and flavor, either mix floss sugar concentrate with regular granulated sugar, or buy a product that is already ready to use. Ready to pour into your cotton candy machine's floss head right out of the carton, pre-mixed cotton candy sugar saves time and allows for fast, efficient service from start to finish! If you're looking to make a larger volume of cotton candy with a smaller amount of product, floss sugar concentrate may be the way to go. In fact, one 1 lb. jar of floss sugar concentrate can yield over 4,000 cotton candy servings when prepared properly! Compare this to the 60-70 cones you get from a 1/2 lb. carton of pre-mixed floss sugar, and the savings quickly add up. Steps for Making Cotton Candy If you’re wondering how to make cotton candy, follow the six easy steps below. These can be used with pre-mixed floss or a combination of sugar and floss sugar concentrate that has already been mixed together. Load the floss (cotton candy mix) into the center, which is known as the floss head or spinning head, of your cotton candy machine. Never put your hand or other objects near the floss head while it’s running. As the floss mix heats up, it begins to liquefy. The fast-spinning floss head forces the liquid out to the sides of the bowl. This is when the floss begins to form its characteristic cotton-like consistency. Reduce heat as the floss begins to flow out of the spinning head.When the amount of floss produced begins to slow, add more cotton candy mix into the machine.Once enough cotton candy has gathered, use a cone to twirl it out of the machine. If you’re having trouble with this step, apply a small amount of water to the cone for the cotton candy to stick to.To rid the machine of the rest of the cotton candy, simply run the machine and let the sugar burn itself out.Features to Look For in a Cotton Candy Machine Make sure that each batch of cotton candy is prepared to perfection by choosing the best cotton candy maker to suit your establishment's needs. Not sure which machine is right for you? Here's what to look for: 1. High performance spinning head There is a chance that sugar will clog in ordinary ribbon heating elements. It's important to select a durable unit, and all metal or aluminum construction is superior to plastic parts. 2. Roll-top bubble A roll-top bubble sits on top of the bowl and provides superior product visibility and handling. Its roll-top design rolls back for easy access when making floss, while still protecting the contents of the machine from airborne particles. Your machine will also be fully protected when not in use. 3. Stabilizer and clips Before turning your cotton candy maker on, install plastic screening-also known as stabilizer-and clips, for holding the screening in place, to the inside of the bowl. Stabilizer and clips prevent cotton candy from spilling out of the bowl and make the finished product easier to collect. Quick Tips to Attract Even More Customers Now that you know how to make cotton candy, and the features in a cotton candy machine that help make that process smooth, learn how to present your cotton candy to maximize your profits! Often times, cotton candy is sold amongst a variety of other tempting concession stand treats. How do customers pick cotton candy over pretzels, popcorn, or snow cones? 1. Attractive cotton candy carts Add a sense of vintage charm to your cotton candy merchandising with a spoke wheel cart. Its timeless appeal will enchant customers of all ages. With a sleek metal exterior, it will combine durability with an old-fashioned sense of fun. 2. Fun displays and merchandisers Cotton candy on a stick adds height and volume, compared to other smaller concession treats like candy apples and funnel cakes. One way to showcase this sense of verticality is with a display pole, also known as a floss tree. It doesn't take up much space, and you'll be able to hang bags of fresh cotton candy on all sides. 3. Stands and signs Sometimes all your customers need is the image of cotton candy to make them start craving. Design whimsical stands picturing the light and fluffy confection swirled atop a cone and watch as lines begin to form! Once your customers are drawn to the eye-catching sign or stand, they won't be able to resist.
Food Trucks & Concessions
How to Write a Food Truck Business Plan
Food trucks are at the forefront of influencing upcoming food trends and can be a very profitable business. But before you can start your own food truck business, you’ll need to plan out your concept and how you’ll fund that dream. Writing a food truck business plan helps you lay out the details of your new endeavor and address the questions of potential investors. Because this is such an important step, it should be completed before you even buy a food truck. Shop All Food Truck Supplies Click the steps below to learn about the sections of a food truck business plan: Executive Summary Company Description Market Analysis Organization and Management Service or Product Line Marketing and Sales Funding Request Financial Projections Appendix Food Truck Business Plan Template We've outlined how to format your business plan and listed the key topics you should cover. Below you'll find some food truck business plans suggestions to give you an idea of what to include when writing your own. 1. Executive Summary The first section of your food truck business plan is the executive summary. Think of this as your introduction to the reader. To make a good first impression, you should be concise and interesting without explaining too many granular details. You can cover the finer points of your business in the following sections. This is your chance to highlight who your company is, how you expect it to grow, and why your food truck will be successful. In the executive summary, you should identify the gap in your target market that your company can fill. It's also a good idea to cover how your knowledge and background will benefit you as you pursue your company goals of opening a food truck business. Although the executive summary is the first section your potential investor will read, you should write it last. Food Truck Business Plan Executive Summary Considerations These are the key topics to include in a food truck executive summary: What type of food do you plan to offer? Where do you plan to sell your food? Why will this type of food be successful in the area where you plan to sell it? What is the projected cost and profit of your food truck business? What are your future goals for your food truck business? 2. Company Description Use this section of your food truck business plan to explain the details of your company. Describe your food truck business and convey how it will be a valuable addition to the existing market. Essentially, this is the section where you can expand upon the topics you briefly mentioned in the executive summary. Food Truck Company Description Considerations Think about these food truck company description questions as you write your business plan: What kind of food truck will it be (truck, trailer, or food cart)? Why a food truck as opposed to a brick-and-mortar location? Will you prepare your food in the truck or a commissary kitchen? How will the food items you provide compete with the menu items of existing food trucks or restaurants in your target area? What specific consumer niche will you serve? What is your overall competitive advantage (your unique cuisine, your outstanding customer service, your creative marketing, etc.)? 3. Market Analysis The market analysis section of your food truck business plan is where you will explain and detail how you'll fit into the existing market. It's important to do extensive research on starting a food truck business before writing this section so you can include solid research findings to back up your conclusions. Food Truck Marketing Analysis For Business Plan Cover these topics in your food truck market analysis section: Describe the food industry, including current trends, growth rate, major consumer groups, etc. Pinpoint the age group, geographic area, socioeconomic status, and other key demographic information of your target market. Identify the needs of your target market and any seasonal trends that could impact your business. Define the size and growth potential of your target market. State how you will gain a large percentage of the market share in your geographic location. Explain your pricing structure, gross margin levels, and any other financially relevant information. Identify your competitors and explain how you will make your food truck a viable contender in current and future markets. Address any obstacles you may encounter as you start your food truck business. Cite food codes and other governmental regulations that will affect your business. Back to Top 4. Organization and Management The next step of your food truck business plan is to outline your organization and management plan. Explaining your organization and management structure may not seem that important if you're hoping to open up a food truck manned by two people. However, outlining responsibilities from the start helps to avoid confusion as your business grows and develops. This section should include a detailed profile of your management team, information about the ownership of your company, the salary and benefits you'll offer your workers, and growth opportunities for people within your organization. Creating a chart that shows the organizational structure of your business is a great way to illustrate that all the bases are covered, from the cooks in your food truck kitchen to the accountant who balances your checkbook. Food Truck Ownership Information Include this ownership information in the food truck organization and management section of your business plan: Legal structure (Are you forming a partnership? Are you a sole proprietor?) Full names of the owners Percentage of the company each owner holds Type of ownership (common stock, general partner, etc.) Stock information Profiles of Your Food Truck Management Team The following details should be included in the management section of a business plan for food trucks. Manager's full name Position and primary responsibilities Educational background Prior employment and how it relates to his/her position within your company Important experience and skills that will help your business be successful Past track record with hard numbers to back it up Food industry recognition Community involvement Salary 5. Service or Product Line Use the service and product line section to describe your food truck menu items. What unique flavors are you offering and how will your products entice passersby and convert them into die-hard fans? This is the section where you can display your innovative ideas, describe your products, and explain how you will keep customers coming back for more. Food Truck Menu Description for Business Plan Here are some questions to consider when creating a profitable menu for your food truck: What type of cuisine will you offer? Why are you passionate about this type of food? Why will customers eat your food? What is your competitive advantage? Are your recipes well-established or still being developed? Food Truck Product Line Next, you'll want to explain where your products are in terms of life cycle by answering the following questions: Are you launching a totally new product? Are you already gaining popularity with your target market? What might cause a decline in demand for your product? Food Truck Intellectual Property Discuss any intellectual property that might be included in your food truck menu items to protect them: Do you have any trade secrets or patents in the works? Will you require your staff to sign any non-disclosure or non-compete agreements? Food Truck Projections Show that you have considered the future of the menu for your food truck with these questions: How do you see your menu changing over time? Are you developing any new products? Do you plan to own a fleet of food trucks someday? Will you expand your reach by attending food truck fairs or booking catered events? 6. Marketing and Sales The marketing and sales portion of your food truck business plan is focused on building customer loyalty. You will need to define your overall marketing and sales strategies, but how you do so is completely up to you. One important thing to remember is that customers value originality, whether that means adopting a recognizable food truck design or creating a unique selling point for your food truck. Food Truck Marketing and Sales Questions Provide answers to these important questions in the food truck sales and marketing section: How will you compete with other food trucks in your area? Will you set your prices lower than your competitors'? Will you offer a product that has never been seen before? How will you grow your business? Will you hire more employees? Will you acquire more food trucks? Will you extend the geographic area your truck serves? How will you distribute your products? Will you sell only from your truck? Will you attend food truck fairs or festivals? How will you reach your customers? Will you advertise on traditional media (radio, newspaper, billboards)? Will you develop a social media presence by utilizing Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or TikTok? Will you offer special rewards or discounts for returning customers? Will you give away free samples to entice future customers? Will you create an interactive map to help customers locate your truck? How many sales are necessary for your food truck to be profitable? What is a fair menu price for the products you'll be selling? How many days will you take off in a year? Will you sell throughout the winter or just during the warmer months? Back to Top 7. Funding Request Not every food truck business plan has a funding request section, but it's something to consider including. It can be tricky to map out how much a food truck costs, but it is a necessary part of securing a startup loan. If you do plan to request funding, you should clearly explain how much funding you need, what you need it for, and how you'll repay anything you owe. Make sure to include the cost of food truck insurance, the cost of fuel and any permits or licenses you'll need to start doing business. Funding Section of Business Plan for Food Trucks Think about these important questions when you create your food truck funding request: How much capital do you really need? Do you foresee needing more funding in the future? How will you use the funds you are awarded? How will you repay your loans? What are the potential benefits to an investor if your food truck does well? How would these funds create new opportunities for your food truck? 8. Financial Projections It's difficult to know what realistic food truck financial projections are when you're starting your food truck business from scratch, but to allocate funds efficiently, it's important to analyze your target market and set clear financial goals. If your business has already been in operation for a few years, this is the section of the food truck business plan where you'd include historical financial data. However, if you're just starting out, you will need to calculate how much your business will potentially make over the next five years using realistic assumptions. Make sure that these food truck financial projections align with the funds you asked for in your funding request. 9. Appendix The appendix section isn't necessary in every food truck business plan, but this is a great place to include information that didn't fit anywhere else, from product photos to building permits to letters of reference. Back to Top Starting your own food truck is overwhelming at first, but writing a business plan is a great first step. It will help you get organized and cover details that you may not have originally considered. Once you have completed your business plan, you’ll be ready to put your dream into motion. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Start A Concession Stand
Concession businesses have lower startup costs than both restaurants and food trucks, making them a great way for entrepreneurs to get their start in the foodservice industry. They’re also an ideal business model for operators who specialize in one niche menu item. While your concession stand’s location will determine its ongoing success, starting a concession stand requires a unique menu, corresponding equipment, and a thorough business plan. Read on to learn how to start a concession business and determine if it’s the right off premise dining model for your concept. Shop All Concession Supplies Click any of the tips below to learn about starting a concession stand: Develop A Concession Stand Concept Write a Concession Stand Business Plan Get Funding for Your Concession Stand Purchase a Concession Stand Get the Required Licenses and Permits Choose Food Storage and Preparation Equipment Select Your Concession Stand Supplies Hire a Concession Stand Staff Market Your Concession Stand What Is a Concession Stand? A concession stand, sometimes referred to as a snack bar, is an area where guests can purchase food, drinks, and snacks. They can often be found inside movie theaters, amusement parks, and stadiums. While some establishments own and operate their own concession stands, others contract with third parties. Common foods sold at concession stands include hot dogs, popcorn, and pretzels. How Much Does a Concession Stand Cost? The cost of acquiring a concession stand varies by the size of the unit and whether you’re purchasing a used cart or having one built from scratch. A new, medium-sized concession stand will cost between $11,000 and $21,000 to build. A new stand won’t contain any equipment, which increases your startup costs. You can purchase a used and equipped concession stand for between $6,000 and $45,000. The price range for used concession stands is so wide because it reflects both minimalistic, older stands and lightly used stands stocked with premium equipment. How to Start a Concession Business From writing a solid business plan to marketing your concession stand, we walk you through each step of starting your concession business. For additional financial planning advice, check out our guide to profit and loss statements complete with an interactive spreadsheet. 1. Develop A Concession Stand Concept Your concession stand concept and menu determine what size cart you need, how much startup money you’ll require, and the ideal location for your concession stand. Concession stand menus can offer everything from pre-made snacks to creative and gourmet cuisine. The needs of a simple prepared foods stand differ from a concession stand that sells fresh, gourmet waffles. 2. Write a Concession Stand Business Plan Once you have a general idea of what kind of concession stand you want to operate, you need to develop a business plan. Your business plan acts as the blueprint for your concession stand’s growth trajectory and helps you make the right investments without wasting time or money. A solid business plan is also what you’ll use to gain outside funding for your business venture. It gives both you and your investors a clearly defined look at your concession stand’s financial status, concept, target audience, and business structure. We have a comprehensive guide on how to write a business plan that walks you through each step of the process. 3. Get Funding for Your Concession Stand With your business plan in place, you’ll know how much money you need to start your concession stand. While you may launch a small, simple concession stand on your own, a larger concession business with a complex menu may require outside financing. We provide a list of potential places where you can seek funding below: Investors: You can use your business plan to pitch your concession stand concept to investors. Loans: There are small business loans, equipment loans, and leasing opportunities, and traditional bank loans available to business entrepreneurs. Crowdfunding: “Crowdfunding” allows a large group of people to invest small amounts of money into a business. It typically takes place on websites like GoFundMe, where you can set your concession stand funding goals, attract investors, and update them on your progress. 4. Purchase a Concession Stand With your business plan and funding in place, you can purchase a concession stand that meets your scale and budget. You’ll need to consider whether you want a stationary, short range, or trailer concession stand. This will affect what kind of stand you purchase, where it’s located, and even what laws apply to it. If you have a great location where you can reliably set up shop, like a stadium, then an inexpensive stationary concession stand is perfect for you. However, if you want to vend at multiple street corners spanning a few blocks, you’ll need a short-range cart. To cover more distance and change locations frequently, invest in a concession trailer or consider whether a food truck better suits your needs. Types of Concession Stands There are three different types of concession stands: stationary concession stands, mobile concession stands, and concession trailers. Each concession business model reaps the benefits of their target audience’s spending patterns. Stationary concession stands conduct their business in short bursts of high output. Short range carts experience slower and steadier sales. Trailer concession stands can serve events and a steady stream of returning customers. However, while the trailer model combines the benefits of stationary stands and short-range carts, they are more expensive to purchase and operate. Stationary Concession Stands: Stationary concession stands are small, have fixed locations, and don’t provide space for a lot of equipment or ingredient storage. They typically sell one prepared menu item or pre-made snacks. Mobile Concession Stands: Designed for short-range use, mobile concession stands often have a home location where vendors prepare their food before adding it to the cart, which typically contains a holding unit. Concession Trailers: Concession trailers offer long-range mobility, are powered via gas or generators, and have space to create a compact kitchen complete with countertop warming equipment and undercounter storage. Back to Top 5. Get the Required Licenses and Permits Like any business, you need licenses and permits to operate a concession stand. We provide a few of the common licenses and permits, but please check with your local ordinances to make sure you align with their stipulations. Food Manager Certification Food Vendor License Food Handling Certificate Sales and Use Tax Permit Employer Identification Number If you operate a mobile concession stand, check with your local drivers’ license department to see if you need a commercial license for your concession stand. 6. Choose Food Storage and Preparation Equipment Your menu determines what concession equipment you require. To power the equipment, it’s best to use a generator or a container of propane to keep everything operational throughout the day. It’s also important to note that some equipment — particularly gas-powered equipment — requires special hookups like gas connector hoses. To prevent overcrowding and heating, we suggest using undercounter or half height appliances. Some concession stands cook their menu off-site at a commissary kitchen and equip their carts with a few warmers. However, you may run out of food fast, which could hurt your reputation and customer retention. You can address this challenge by hiring additional staff to replenish and transport goods. Concession Stand Equipment The perfect concession equipment list balances tools for storing pre-cooked food at food safe temperatures and appliances for preparing raw food. As you form your list, evaluate your space and make sure you don’t overfill it. Having spare room maintains a safe working environment for employees enclosed in the small, hot space. While your exact equipment needs are defined by your menu, here are the most common concession business appliances: Food Holding & Warming Equipment: Keep your fare ready-to-serve with food holding and warming equipment. Hot Dog/Sausage Equipment: Invest in a roller grill, steamer, and merchandiser to cook, preserve, and sell sausages and hot dogs. Griddles: Cook burgers and hot sandwiches on a griddle. Ventless Fryers: Ventless fryers are perfect for compact concession stands. Remember to save space for spare stocks of oil. Popcorn Machines: Popcorn is an easy, inexpensive, and profitable concession stand food item. Cotton Candy Machines: You can set up a countertop cotton candy machine in your concession stand or use a cotton candy cart to conduct your business. 7. Select Your Concession Stand Supplies The equipment you choose will determine what kitchen tools and serving products you need. Tongs and turners are great all-purpose tools, but some appliances may require fryer baskets, ladles, or cutlery. You’ll also need cups, bowls, trays, and other common disposables to serve your customers. While the exact supplies may vary, almost every concession stand requires these items: Aprons Coin Dispensers Cash Registers Signs Snacks and Drinks Disposable Concession Supplies Cooking Equipment Serving Utensils 8. Hire a Concession Stand Staff Once your concession stand is established and you have acquired the necessary permits, you’ll need to hire a staff. The number of employees you’ll need to hire depends on your expected output and how much you offer on your menu. For example, a concession stand that offers a limited menu in a small venue may not require many employees to function, while stands that serve a large number of people and offer several different foods can require a larger staff. How Much Do Concession Stand Workers Make? A concession stand worker, or concession attendant, typically makes somewhere between $15,000 and $35,000 per year. This can vary depending on several factors including how often they work and where the stand is located. It’s important to note that concession stand workers are typically paid hourly, with wages ranging from as low as minimum wage to as high as $18/hour. 9. Market Your Concession Stand Thanks to social media, you can begin marketing your concession business before you open. Post pictures of your menu items as you practice your recipes. Use Instagram polls to engage with your target audience and find out what flavors would convert them into customers. For example, if you’re a gourmet popcorn concession business, ask your followers whether they’d rather try a Bloody Mary or Nashville hot chicken inspired popcorn mix. Back to Top Compact, accessible, and convenient, a concession stand is a unique foodservice model that has the potential to turn major profits. Concession stands are most successful in areas with sports stadiums and regular events. Save our guide as a reference to help you start your concession business. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
Leasing a Food Truck
Whether you’re just getting started in the food truck business or looking to expand your current operation, leasing a food truck is an excellent way to achieve your goals. Leasing opens up a variety of options and opportunities to grow your business and develop a successful business model. Below, we’ll explain what it means to lease a food truck, the different types of leasing options available to you, and how to negotiate your own food truck lease. Click any of the tips below to read the section that interests you: What Is a Food Truck Lease? Food Truck Leasing Companies Types of Food Truck Leases How to Lease a Food Truck What Is a Food Truck Lease? A food truck lease is an agreement that allows you to rent a food truck for a specific time period at a fixed monthly rate. The duration of the lease and how much you pay are dependent on several different factors, however most leases last two to three years. Leasing a food truck allows you to start a food truck business without assuming the financial risk associated with buying your own. Additionally, many leases allow you to build towards owning the food truck yourself. Advantages of Leasing a Food Truck Leasing a food truck instead of purchasing one can lead to multiple advantages that aid you through the process of establishing your business. Not only does a lease offer added flexibility when starting your business, but it also provides you with a clear timeframe as to how long you will be paying. Some of the most helpful advantages of starting a food truck lease include: Decreased cost: In general, it can cost between $100,000 and $200,000 to buy your own food truck and equipment. In some cases, that figure can be even higher. By comparison, leasing a food truck often costs somewhere between $2,000 and $3,000 per month. More accessibility: For those who don’t have the benefit of being able to buy a truck in full, leasing a food truck allows you to secure one without paying a high amount upfront. Though many leases still require some kind of down payment, this option is much more manageable than buying a truck out of pocket. Customization: Some food truck leasing companies will work with you to customize your truck. This allows you to ensure the truck matches the theme of your business as well as the services you provide. Disadvantages of Leasing a Food Truck Despite all the advantages they bring, there are aspects of leasing a food truck that can prove difficult to manage in certain situations. While the advantages typically outweigh the disadvantages, it is important to review them to develop a full understanding of what it means to lease a food truck. Below, we’ll investigate some of the most common disadvantages of leasing a food truck: Truck returns: If you choose to sign a shorter lease or forgo lease to own options, you may find yourself rushing to find a new food truck as the end of your lease agreement nears. This can be particularly stressful if you've already chosen not to renew. For this reason, you must plan far ahead in the process of leasing your truck to ensure your business doesn't have to temporarily cease operations. Lack of ownership: Just like renting or leasing property, lack of ownership presents certain limitations. For example, you may not be able to change the layout or add on to your truck without permission of the leasing company. Furthermore, certain terrains or enviornments may be off-limits to your truck to avoid damage. Before you sign any documents, be sure that both parties are on the same page as to how you can use your truck. Food Truck Leasing Companies In recent years, many companies have been founded to help prospective food truck businesses achieve their goals. Companies like Roaming Hunger, Mobi Munch, and Prestige Food Trucks each offer different solutions and plans to help get your food truck up and running. Some companies will even help schedule business opportunities such as catering events and aid you in starting a website for your truck. Partnering with one of these companies can open the doorway to many opportunities for your business. Types of Food Truck Leases There are typically two main types of food truck leases, known as traditional and lease to own options. Each option can offer a variety of benefits depending on the context of your business, making it vital that you understand the key differences between them. Below, we’ll investigate both options: Traditional Food Truck Leases In a traditional lease, you pay a set amount of money each month for the duration of the lease. Once your contract is up, you can either renew the leasing agreement or choose to go in another direction. One benefit of a traditional lease is that if you realize your truck doesn't fit your long-term needs, there is an easy way out at the end of the contract. Additionally, these types of leases can often be shorter than their counterpart, giving you the flexibility to do what is best for your business. Lease to Own Food Trucks Also known as rent to own food trucks, lease to own food trucks allow you to put your monthly payments towards a goal of ultimately owning a truck. Lease to own food trucks often require a higher down payment, however, they can be advantageous for those aspiring to own a truck. These types of leases often give you options to customize the truck, while some even allow you to work hand in hand with designers. For those who aspire to own a truck but can't afford it in the short term, a lease to own option can be the perfect compromise. How to Lease a Food Truck If you’re new to the leasing process or have never started a business, chances are you’re unfamiliar with what it takes to lease a food truck. To successfully secure a lease and get your food truck business started, adhere to the following steps: 1. Create a Food Truck Business Plan Your first step in securing a food truck lease should be to create a business plan. This allows you to show leasing companies that you have a roadmap to guide you through the process of starting your business. To write a successful business plan, it is essential to include information on your concept, market, and structure. To learn more about this topic, check out our article on how to write a restaurant business plan. 2. Prepare Financial Information As you create your business plan, remember to include detailed information regarding your financial background. Whether you’re applying for a loan, lease, or rental agreement, chances are you’ll have to show proof that you are responsible with your money and will be able to make payments on time. Some of the most commonly asked questions include: What is your credit score? How much financial capital do you currently have access to? How much money can you put down? Have you had previous financial troubles or bankruptcies? 3. Negotiate and Finalize Your Lease With your business plan and financial information organized, it’s time to negotiate your lease. There are multiple options available to you, making it important that you choose the lease that best fits your specific needs. Negotiations can be a back-and-forth process and can often involve multiple parties including yourself, the leasing company, and any lawyers hired to read over the lease. Be sure to ask questions about the lease to make sure you fully understand what you're about to sign. 4. Insure Your Food Truck In most cases, the person or company leasing their property to you will require some kind of insurance. In some instances, the lease can even be terminated if you fail to provide proof of insurance. Insurance protects both the leaser and the lessee if the truck is damaged. Each company will have different preferences as to the minimum requirements of the insurance, meaning that you should take extra care to read through your leasing agreement. Back to Top Despite seeming like a complicated process, leasing a food truck can be an advantageous experience which helps to establish and grow your food truck business. By building an understanding of what it means to lease a food truck, the advantages and disadvantages associated with it, and how to lease your own, you can ensure that the leasing process goes smoothly and set your food truck business up for success.
How to Start a Food Truck
The popularity of food trucks has grown so rapidly over the past few years that some cities are now known for their food truck scene. What used to be considered a food risk has become foodie trend across the globe. If you are wondering how to start a food truck business of your own and what the cost is to start a food truck, check out the following steps and tips to help you get the ball rolling. Shop All Food Truck Supplies Learn how to open a food truck by following these 9 easy steps: Research Your Food Truck Scene Choose a Food Truck Concept Write a Business Plan Get Funding Get the Proper Licenses and Permits Buy a Food Truck Purchase Equipment and Supplies Choose a POS System Invest in Marketing and Advertising Food Truck Pros and Cons How Much Does It Cost to Start a Food Truck? The average cost to start a food truck can be anywhere between $70,000 to $130,000. Depending on legal fees, customization, state, and niche, a food truck owner can end up paying as little as $10,000 for their business or as much as $250,000. There are several variables that can impact your cost at the end of the day. How to Open a Food Truck Starting your own food truck is much less complicated when you break it down into steps. We've create a food truck opening list to guide you through the process. 1. Research Your Food Truck Scene Before committing to starting up a food truck, you’ll want to make sure that your idea will stand out against the existing market. Start by researching your city for the following: Existing food truck businesses and concepts Existing restaurant concepts The average demographic of the population Space where food trucks can stop and sell their products Busy street times where commuters can become customers Be sure to find out if there is a demand in your city for the food truck concept you’ll be interested in presenting. 2. Choose a Food Truck Concept You’ll want to cater to the interests of the population of your city with your food truck, however, you’ll want to share your interests and passions through your business as well. After doing your preliminary research, choose a food truck concept that merges your unique style with the concerns of the community. From there you can select a name and logo that properly reflect the heart of your business. Your concept, name, and logo should exhibit the following attributes: Be unique and memorable Be descriptive and attention-grabbing Clearly express your intentions without being too specific so that it can allow for growth A well thought-out concept and a visually appealing logo can make a major impact on customers and whether or not they choose to shop from your truck. 3. Write a Food Truck Business Plan Once you have your concept established, it is time to get started on your food truck business plan. Writing a food truck business plan is an excellent way to work out the details of your business before you begin investing into it. This is also the document you would present to potential investors, so it is important to lay out your vision and financial plan carefully. The sections of a food truck business plan should include the following: An Executive Summary: This section should establish your company’s identity, lay out your goals, and depict what kind of food you want to sell and why. A Company Description: List why you would like to start up a food truck and how your business is different from the competition in this section. A Market Analysis: Use this section to explain which demographic your truck would cater to and who your target audience would be. An Organization and Management Plan: Lay out the employee ranks and your internal structure in this section to show a clear business organizational system. A Service or Product Line Description: You’ll want to provide your menu details and options for seasonal or future menu alterations. Marketing and Sales Strategies: Provide your advertising plan and different marketing tactics you plan on using to spread the word about your food truck. A Funding Request: Clearly identify where the funding for your truck will come from and how much you will need to get your business started. A Financial Projections: Here you’ll show your investors the projected growth and financial plan for your company’s future in the next 5 years. An Appendix: In this final section, you can add any additional information that did not make it into the plan, like photos, logo design, and blueprints. For more information on how to write a food truck business plan, check out our business plan resource. 4. Get Funding for Your Food Truck Your business plan is your first step toward requesting funding for your truck. Considering the costs involved in opening a food truck, it is likely that you will need a loan to get your business off of its feet. That funding and startup savings can come from a variety of places: Community sponsors Personal investors such as friends and family Crowdfunding such as Kickstarter Small Business Administration microloans Rollover of Business Startup (ROBS) from a retirement account Opening a business credit card Equipment loans and financing programs 5. Get Food Truck Licenses and Permits After you have established where your funding will be coming from, you’ll need to explore what licenses are needed to start a food truck. Food truck permits and licenses can vary from state to state and even city to city, so it is important to check with your local jurisdiction like the Chamber of Commerce, Health Department, and the Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) office to find out their requirements. To open a food truck, you will also encounter many of the same licenses and permits required for restaurant businesses: Business License Employer Identification Number Food Service License Employee Health Permit Additionally, you will most likely need the following food truck specific permits: Mobile Food Facility Permit Zoning and Parking Permit As you work with your DMV to establish your parking permits and registration, be sure to ask about parking restrictions and limits in your city, along with where overnight parking is permitted. 6. Buy A Food Truck Considering that the largest portion of your startup budget will go to your food truck vehicle, it is important to select one that will serve your business well. There are a few aspects to consider when choosing the vehicle that will become your food truck, such as the following: Deciding whether you want to lease or own your truck Deciding whether to select a new or used vehicle Choosing a reputable food truck dealer Selecting what customizations you will need for your truck Additionally, it is important to purchase insurance for your truck and business to cover any physical damage and liabilities that may occur. Once you acquire a food truck vehicle, you may need to finalize your inspections and permits in order to become street legal. For more information on the process of buying a food truck, take a look at our in-depth food truck purchasing guide. 7. Purchase Your Food Truck Equipment and Supplies With a truck in your possession, the next step is to furnish your space with food truck equipment and supplies. These items will be essential for producing your products and keeping your truck operating efficiently. To stock your food truck you will need: Cooking Equipment - Grills, ranges, fryers, microwaves, toasters Warming and Holding Equipment - Countertop food warmers, soup kettles, fry dump stations Food Prep Equipment - Work tables, chef knives, cutting boards, cookware, kitchen utensils, kitchen thermometers, serving and portion spoons Serving Equipment - Disposable take-out supplies, food trays, napkins, cups, plastic cutlery Refrigeration Equipment - Prep tables, undercounter refrigeration, ice machines Janitorial Equipment - Handsinks, compartment sinks, floor mats, sanitizing chemicals, trash cans, recycling bins, floorcare products For a full food truck equipment checklist, check out the one in this helpful resource. 8. Choose a POS System When you’re operating a food truck, chances are you will also need a mobile Point of Sale (POS) system. These systems allow you to take credit card payment directly from your truck but may require internet access. Many food trucks choose to take a cash-only route in order to not depend on internet access; however, customers are less likely to have cash on them, which can limit your customer base. This is leading food truck owners to select POS systems that allow them to accept both cash or credit. Toast POS systems are ideal for food truck environments because they can be set up with mobile order and pay options. This means your customers can order and pay by phone, freeing up your time to focus on preparing orders. No more pens, paper, or receipts. For help selecting the right mobile POS system for your truck, feel free to explore our POS resource. 9. Invest in Food Truck Marketing and Advertising Because your food truck won’t have a permanent physical address, advertising and marketing for your food truck plays an essential part in its success. There are various marketing tactics you can use to boost your brand awareness in the public eye. Here are just some food truck marketing ideas: Make your eye-catching logo highly visible. Place it on your truck, on flyers, and online. Design a bold menu board. You will want to make sure that your menu board is legible, appealing, and clearly showcases your food. Create a website that features your regular locations, photos, and an “About Our Company” section. Create social media accounts where customers can be notified about events, see pictures, and interact with your business. Find unique locations for your food truck. At first you will want to explore various neighborhoods to find where your business best fits. Once you have determined excellent locations, visit them regularly to establish name recognition with your customer base. Be featured at community events like catered parties and local food truck festivals. These events will make customers more familiar with your business. Sell merchandise with your logo or slogan on it. You can offer t-shirts, travel mugs, and stickers for customers to purchase at your truck or online. You can find more food truck advertising and marketing tips with this resource. Pros and Cons of Opening a Food Truck Food truck businesses certainly present a unique set of advantages and challenges that are important to consider before you move forward with your business. Advantages of Opening a Food Truck Mobility. With a food truck, you're able to move your establishment from place to place, ultimately expanding your customer base beyond one location and increasing your advertising potential. Flexibility. You have the flexibility of bringing fresh food directly to events and festivals without renting equipment. Additionally, food trucks have a greater sense of flexibility when it comes to adjusting their menus and schedules. Tax deductions. Food truck owners are able to deduct various expenses on their taxes that are not available to standard restaurant owners, like the truck itself and rental fees for truck storage. Challenges of Opening a Food Truck Competition. With the food truck market booming, it can be difficult to break through and generate a concept that will stand out from the masses. Long hours. A food truck can require many hours of maintenance, location scouting, cleaning, event booking, and more. Zoning laws. It can be difficult for food truck owners to stay up to date with zoning restrictions and local ordinances regarding where they can park their truck and how long they can remain at a single location. Opening a food truck can definitely be a challenge, but by following the steps above you are sure to get started on the right foot towards establishing a successful business. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Buy a Food Truck
Purchasing a kitchen-equipped truck is the most expensive and time-consuming part of starting a food truck business. You’ll need to find a food truck manufacturer you trust, establish clear communication, and customize your food truck to meet both your personal needs and regional requirements. To make buying a food truck less intimidating, we’ve created a comprehensive guide to the food truck purchasing and personalizing process. We’ll explain the average food truck costs and help you determine whether a new, used, or leased food truck is right for you. Shop All Food Truck Supplies & Equipment If you have a specific question about buying a food truck, use the links below to jump to the correlating section. Click any of the tips below to read the section that interests you: How Much Does a Food Truck Cost? How to Own a Food Truck New vs. Used Food Trucks Lease a Food Truck Where To Buy a Food Truck Design Your Own Food Truck How to Customize a Food Truck How Much Does a Food Truck Cost? On average, most food truck entrepreneurs spend between $70,000 and $80,000 on their food truck. The total price of buying a food truck can amount anywhere from $50,000 to $250,000 depending on how you acquire the truck, customize it for your needs, and your local permit and licensing requirements. To help you narrow down how much you should expect to spend on your food truck, we break down the average cost of new, used, and leased food trucks below. How Much Does a New Food Truck Cost?: New food trucks typically cost between $100,000-$175,000. How Much Does a Used Food Truck Cost?: Used food trucks typically cost between $50,000-$100,000. How Much Does Leasing a Food Truck Cost?: Leasing a food truck typically costs between $2,000-$3,000 each month. How to Own a Food Truck The first step in owning a food truck is assessing the financial obligation by writing a food truck business plan. Begin by researching your target market, local ordinances, licensing and permit demands, parking permit regulations, and what type of equipment your menu requires. Most food truck entrepreneurs need to apply for financing or a loan to offset food truck startup costs. Before heading to your bank, know your credit score and, based on your food truck business plan, know how much owning a food truck business will cost you. Once you’re approved for a loan, you'll know your budget and can start shopping for a food truck. There are three paths to owning a food truck business: buying a new food truck, buying a used food truck, or leasing a food truck. What Is Better, to Buy a New or Used Food Truck? One of the biggest decisions of buying a food truck is deciding whether to purchase it new or used. While there are advantages and disadvantages of each choice, it ultimately comes down to what your budget is and how much you can afford upfront. We'll go over the pros and cons of buying new and used food trucks, so you can make the best decision for your financial status. Buying a New Food Truck If you have the money, buying a new food truck is a worthwhile investment that will help you avoid costly repairs down the line. Discover the advantages and disadvantages of buying a new food truck below. New Food Truck Advantages Custom-tailored to your needs No wear and tear or undisclosed damages Reduces the risk of costly breakdowns and major repairs Usually have great warranties Fresh, clean, and polished appearances New Food Truck Disadvantages Large financial investment Customization requires longer lead times High initial expense makes it hard to make future changes if you quickly outgrow the truck's capacity Buying a Used Food Truck If you want to own your food truck but are hesitant to invest in a brand new vehicle, buying a used food truck is a great alternative. Learn about the advantages and disadvantages of buying a used food truck below. Used Food Truck Advantages Initially cheaper than new trucks Pre-done retrofitting allows you to see if the kitchen layout works for you Equipment is already installed Cuts the decision-making process down Used Food Truck Disadvantages Higher risk of costly repairs and maintenance Unknown wear and tear Lower life expectancy You may have trouble finding a vendor willing to customize it (because they don’t know what was done previously) Back to Top Lease a Food Truck Purchasing a kitchen-equipped truck is the most expensive part of becoming a food truck operator, so many entrepreneurs circumnavigate this major up-front cost by leasing their food truck. Making smaller payments over time allows you to get a brand new, high-end food truck without a large initial fee. The leasing route might be right for you if you're new to the foodservice industry or want to see if your brick and mortar does well as a food truck. One disadvantage of leasing a food truck is you may have to return the truck when your lease ends. If your food truck business is doing well, you’ll endure a stressful transition to a new truck, lose operational time, or be forced to close your thriving business. We strongly recommend choosing a food truck lease agreement with lease renewal or lease-to-own options. Where To Buy a Food Truck Once you know your budget and decide whether you want a new, used, or leased food truck, you'll need to find a reputable food truck dealer. While you can purchase food trucks from private parties and sites like Craigslist or eBay, it’s important to recognize the high risk of this choice. When investing an immense sum of money into the foundation of your business, you want to know every detail about your future food truck. Many entrepreneurs ask the owner of their favorite food truck where they purchased their vehicle. Asking food truck owners for recommendations provides the opportunity to inquire about how well their truck runs and if they had a positive experience with its vendor. Design Your Own Food Truck Customizing your food truck is both the most stressful and most intriguing part of buying a food truck. If you go with a reputable manufacturer, they’ll take most of the stress off your shoulders and bring your vision to life. Founder of Prestige Food Trucks, Jeremy Adams, provided some great insight on how a typical purchasing process goes. While a lot more communication goes into the purchase than what is listed below, these five steps provide a general outline of the process. A customer will call or email the company they want to purchase from with an inquiry. The customer receives a response that typically asks them what their equipment needs and budget are, what city they’ll be operating in, and what type of food they’ll be serving.Once this information is provided, a company will usually send out custom blueprint options to which customers can make any adjustments. After this is completed, a company typically works on a 2-3 month lead time before shipping the food truck. Many manufacturers can ship nationally or internationally. Once a customer receives their purchase, they must obtain any permits needed before they can hit the streets selling their specialty cuisine. Back to Top How to Customize a Food Truck The main determining factor in how you should layout of your food truck is the cuisine you’re offering. While the most common food truck items are flat grills, countertop fryers, food warmers, refrigerators, and freezers, each truck will differ. For example, a food truck specializing in pizza needs a pizza oven and possibly an extra generator or propane tank, whereas a coffee truck benefits from an extra supply of hot water. Also, as you customize your food truck to your menu, make sure your layout provides enough space for other pieces of essential food truck equipment. Food Truck Size The average food truck is 16 feet long and seven feet wide, but they can range from 10 to 26 feet long depending on their operational needs. Make sure you choose a vehicle that’s large enough to accommodate your kitchen layout, ingredient storage requirements, and staff members. After assessing your needs, decide whether your mobile food business requires a food truck, food trailer, or a food cart. Some companies can transform anything, from step van chassis and sprinter vans to passenger vans and RVs, into fully functioning food trucks. Food Truck Fuel Decide whether you want to go with a gas or diesel engine for your food truck, determining your fuel cost. There are many pros and cons to each type, so it comes down to preference. Most food truck owners choose diesel engines for their power, but you have to be prepared for that slightly larger initial investment. While gasoline is cheaper than diesel fuel, diesel has a greater fuel economy. Gas engines will run more quietly and have a less noticeable odor, whereas diesel engines provide you with unmatched power. If properly maintained, a diesel engine can easily go for 300,000 miles. When engines require maintenance, gas operating engines are typically cheaper to repair than diesel. However, since diesel engines last longer, you’ll get a better resale price if you ever decide to sell your food truck. Food Truck Power Supply Portable diesel generators are the typical power source for food trucks and trailers. Diesel-powered generators withstand constant heavy use and have long lifespans. If you live in a sunny location, you can sustainably power your food truck by installing solar panels to the roof. Another food truck power supply option is to use Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) cylinders. Food Truck Special Features Finally, when customizing your food truck, you get to pick the special features that will make it your own unique restaurant on wheels. Whether you’re adding special equipment to the interior of the truck to make food prep more efficient, or you’re adding aesthetic details to the exterior to make your truck more visually appealing to customers, a reputable dealer will work with your vision. Check out some beneficial accessories you can add to your truck below. <blockquote> Security Awning - This locking security awning will protect the contents of your food truck when it's not in use. Security awnings are usually a sliding piece that covers windows, doors, and any external TVs, speakers, or other devices to protect them from vandalism. Use the awning as an extra branding space by customizing it to match your truck’s design. Flat Panel TV - Add a flat panel television to the exterior of your food truck so you can market your menu, specials, locations, and other important information. You can also use it to play music. Speakers - By adding speakers, you can announce when orders are ready and entertain your long line of customers with music. Retractable Awning - Manual or electric awnings shelter customers while they wait at your serving window and create a slight sound barrier that allows workers to hear customers' orders more clearly. Longer awnings protect patrons from the rain, snow, or glaring sun while they're waiting to order, which prevents lost business due to long, uncomfortable wait times. Misting System - This feature is perfect for the summer months or for food trucks in areas where the climate is hot year-round. Food truck operators usually install misting systems above their exterior serving window to keep customers cool while they wait. Vinyl Wrap - Many businesses have designers who work with clients to create a personal logo or image. They then transfer the logo onto a vinyl wrapping that goes around the entire truck for branding. These wrappings can include graphics, menus, business names, and any other advertising materials, and they will include the proper cutouts for windows and serving windows. Perforated Window Film - Window perforation allows your logo or decal to continue onto the exterior of your windows. This allows customers to see the image, but also enables employees to still see clearly out the window. Dual-Service - Many truck owners want to have service stations on both sides of the truck so they can maximize volume and service. </blockquote> Back to Top Owning a food truck frees you from the physical and financial tethers of a storefront. However, buying a food truck involves a lot of research, time, money, and communication. Use this guide to make an informed purchase. With careful planning, you can buy the ideal food truck for your business and take your delicious menu on the road.
Everything You Need to Know About Catering Weddings with Your Food Truck
With their unique flavors, made-to-order selections, and ability to be mobile, food trucks are rapidly becoming one of America's newest guilty pleasures. Oddly enough, the popularity of this street food craze has also won over the hearts of many brides and grooms looking to add something unique to their big day. More and more couples are now using food trucks to cater their weddings instead of hiring a traditional catering company. Couples are looking for more inexpensive ways to serve food to their hungry guests, and food trucks are emerging as a new leader. If you want to set your business apart, you can easily use your food truck to cater to brides and grooms looking for your contemporary fare. Creating wedding services and generating new ways to market your catering company can help you succeed in catering a wedding with your food truck, and it may help you find new opportunities for business and exposure. Did You Know? The wedding industry is valued at $55 billion in the USA Average price of a wedding = $35,329 Average number of guests at a wedding = 141 Average price per person for a wedding using a traditional caterer = $71 Average price per person for a wedding using a food truck = $10-15 Number of guests a food truck can serve at a given time = 50-75 Why Clients Should Choose a Food Truck on Their Wedding Day Making your food truck stand out is of great importance when trying to gain new clients, especially in the competitive wedding industry. One way in which you are already ahead of your competition is by being more economical than traditional wedding catering options. Your food truck is able to serve large groups of people quickly, and your added mobility allows you to reach venues where traditional kitchens are not available. When meeting with potential clients, remind them of how your food truck is different than catering alternatives: Food trucks are perfect for outdoor weddings, especially in the spring and summer months when these are most popular. Food trucks add excitement and can also serve food between the ceremony and reception while guests are waiting for the celebration to begin. Your food is made-to-order, which gives your meal service a more personal touch than traditional catering. Because food trucks make food to order, guests’ meals will be fresher and there will be less food waste. Food trucks can give wedding guests a wider variety of food to choose from, especially if the couple’s budget could limit dinner to one choice of plated meal with a catering company. Food trucks can even provide a "late night snack" for guests to enjoy after many hours of celebrating and dancing. Catering a wedding with a food truck means simpler cleanup than a seated dinner demands. Food trucks are a modern alternative to a buffet meal service. To a couple looking for a contemporary twist on wedding traditions, your service is ideal. Create Services to Make Your Wedding Food Truck Stand Out In order to thrive in the cutthroat food industry, you need a product that will make you stand out from your competition. Remember that you are not just providing a meal to your clients, but also a service. A few simple ideas will allow clients to think of you as more than just a food truck, but a gourmet buffet on wheels for their wedding. Let the Couple Personalize Your Serving Supplies Offer to use containers that the bride and groom can pay to have personalized with their names or monogram. For example, if your food truck specializes in cupcakes, the couple may want to use your cupcakes as wedding favors. Putting the cupcakes in a custom box will dress up their presentation, and this small touch makes your service more unique to the wedding. Your flexibility in using personalized supplies shows the couple that you recognize how important this day is to them. Consider Different Levels of Service Because your food truck offers a fresh take on a catered meal, you can choose how elaborate to make your wedding services. You can simply offer a shorter list of menu items and allow the bride and groom to help you shape the choices, or you can take on some of the tasks that are usually completed by a caterer. For an increased rate, offer to set up decorative tables with tablecloths, candelabras, and pictures of the bride and groom beside your food truck. You could put some of your food there, so guests can grab snacks while they are waiting to order. You may also provide trash cans, utensils, and napkins to give guests everything they need to enjoy their meal. Create a Custom Wedding Menu Instead of using your typical menu board, create a personalized board that makes it clear to your clients' guests what options they have to choose from when ordering. Craft a large sign using the bride and groom's names, colors, and ask the couple if they have a wedding hashtag you should display. As guests take pictures using platforms like Twitter and Instagram, your food will be displayed on social media for added exposure. Draw Up a Wedding Catering Contract While your booking process is probably more casual than that of traditional caterers, couples will like the security of a contract. Especially if you are providing their main course, you want to make your couple confident that you’ll be there on their wedding day, rain or shine. This also allows you to clearly set the terms of your service, so everyone is on the same page. Offer Wedding Packages To simplify the menu planning process, create special wedding packages for brides and grooms to choose from. For example, you could design wedding packages to feature a cocktail hour, main course, dessert, and late night snack. Try developing some special selections such as vegetarian, vegan, or gluten-free choices to accommodate guests with dietary restrictions. Be Prepared for the Weather In the event of rain showers or even extreme heat, have an adjustable roof or awning attached to your truck, so guests can feel more comfortable while getting their food. Before the Big Day Just like with a traditional catering company, meeting with your clients prior to their wedding is a must when organizing such a big event. Meeting beforehand will allow both you and your clients to communicate any questions, concerns, or requirements to make the day go more smoothly. Have a Tasting Offer tastings to clients, so they know what to expect on their big day. If you are crafting a custom menu with them, this will be necessary to test any new dishes. Get the Appropriate Permits Make sure clients understand that they are responsible for all permits regarding food trucks prior to their wedding day. Not all venues will allow outside catering services, and that includes food trucks. Additionally, some event sites may have restrictions for where you can set up your truck. Be advised and aware about any ordinances or parking laws near the venue in order to prevent fines. Know the Guest Count When planning your couple's menu, make sure your truck can handle the number of guests who will be attending the wedding. You need to be able to safely prepare the volume of food, and you want to make sure that lines of guests waiting don’t get out of control. Seek Out New Business Opportunities Catering a wedding isn't only about giving the bride and groom a unique feature at their special day, but it is also a way for you to gain new customers and fill in gaps between event bookings. Your food truck is a moving advertisement for your company. Weddings open your business up to groups of clients who may not have had access to your food before, and your presence throughout the celebration is great exposure for your brand. If you want to start bringing in brides and grooms as potential clients, consider the following ways to attract their attention: Create a Website Design a website that showcases your work and explains your services, so future customers and clients can see what you have to offer before they even taste your food. Include your menu and contact information, and add a page about catering weddings. Inquiry and request forms will help you gain new clients easily with just one click. Ask that potential clients provide information such as their wedding date, location, number of guests attending, as well as how they heard about you. Use Social Media Many contemporary brides and grooms use social media to find wedding vendors. These media platforms are easy for your potential clients to navigate because they are familiar, as they are most likely something that the couple uses on an everyday basis. If you invest the time in curated social media profiles, you could draw in modern brides and grooms. At weddings, you can also hand out business cards with information about your website, Twitter, Facebook, Instagram, and other platforms to increase connections with customers. With the growing popularity of food trucks, more and more couples are choosing to forego traditional caterers for their weddings. This can open up new opportunities for your food truck business, but it's important to know how to plan for weddings and work with brides and grooms. If you’re interested in making your food truck available for weddings, use this guide help you to prepare for the unique demands of these special events.
Industrial
How to Use a Fire Extinguisher
A fire extinguisher is an essential fire safety tool to keep in any workplace. For the safety of your employees and guests, it is required by law for any commercial business to keep a fire extinguisher readily available. Many states even require employees to be trained to use one. Below, we’ll investigate the different parts of a fire extinguisher, how to properly use one, and how to properly clean up fire extinguisher residue. Shop All Fire Extinguishers Click any of the links below to jump to the fire extinguisher tips you need: Fire Extinguisher Parts How to Properly Use a Fire Extinguisher Cleaning Fire Extinguisher Residue Cleaning Dry Chemical Fire Extinguisher Residue Cleaning Wet Chemical Fire Extinguisher Residue Cleaning Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher Residue Fire Extinguisher Video If you've never used a fire extinguisher before, watch the video below for a step-by-step guide on how to use one properly: <iframe scrolling="no" width="392" height="226" src="/v/?num=11949&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> Parts of a Fire Extinguisher Although there are different types of fire extinguishers, most share the same general design. To fully understand how to use a fire extinguisher, it’s important to familiarize yourself with the different parts, what they do, and how they work with one another. Below, we’ll introduce the eight different parts of a fire extinguisher and what they are used for: Safety pin: The safety pin is a key part of the fire extinguisher. It is inserted into the valve to prevent accidental discharge and must be removed before attempting to use your fire extinguisher. Discharge lever: The discharge lever is what allows you to operate the fire extinguisher. After removing the safety pin, this lever can be pushed to use the fire extinguisher. Carrying handle: As its name suggests, the carrying handle allows you to carry and transport the fire extinguisher. Pressure gauge: A pressure gauge displays the pressure inside a fire extinguisher’s canister. If the pressure is too low, your extinguisher will not operate correctly. Pickup tube: Sometimes referred to as a discharge hose, a pickup tube is what allows an extinguishing agent to travel from the tank to the nozzle. Gas canister: The gas canister stores expellant, which is released when one pulls the nozzle. It propels the extinguishing agent out of the fire extinguisher. Extinguishing agent: An extinguishing agent is a chemical substance stored within the fire extinguisher’s tank. It is expelled from the nozzle to quickly put out fires. Discharge nozzle: A discharge nozzle is located on the end of a fire extinguisher’s hose and is what the extinguishing agent is dispersed through. Back to Top Fire Extinguisher Instructions When using a fire extinguisher, there is a simple technique to help you remember the proper instructions to put out a fire. The PASS technique is a four-step method that walks the user through exactly how to properly use a fire extinguisher. We'll break down each step of the fire extinguisher PASS system and how it can help you correctly use a fire extinguisher: PASS Technique Pull: To use your fire extinguisher, pull the safety pin and release the locking mechanism. Be sure to point the nozzle away from yourself and others. Aim: Once you've pulled the pin, aim your fire extinguisher at the base of the fire. This ensures that you are extinguishing the fire at the source. Squeeze: To begin putting out the fire, squeeze the lever of your fire extinguisher slowly and evenly to ensure the expellant is dispersed correctly. Sweep: While aiming at the base of the fire, sweep the nozzle from side to side to ensure you extinguish the fire evenly. How to Clean Fire Extinguisher Residue Hopefully, you never encounter a situation in which you need to use a fire extinguisher in your workplace. In the unfortunate event that you do, it’s important to know not just how to use a fire extinguisher, but how to clean up after using one. Before you begin cleaning fire extinguisher residue, consider the following factors: Residue type: There are three main types of fire extinguisher residue: dry chemical residue, wet chemical residue, and dry powder residue. Each requires specific clean-up methods. Check the label of your fire extinguisher to see what expellant type it uses to prepare appropriately. Safety concerns: Although fire extinguisher residues are typically considered to be non-toxic, exposure to residue can sometimes result in irritated eyes or skin. Remember to have safety equipment on hand and take the appropriate steps to limit contact with residue after it’s been used. How to Clean Dry Chemical Fire Extinguisher Residue Dry chemical fire extinguishers, such as ABC fire extinguishers, put out fires by covering them with a layer of dust that separates the fire from oxygen in the air. Their powder is corrosive, meaning that it will damage metal surfaces and even electronics if left in place. To protect yourself from these chemicals, consider wearing appropriate PPE like dust masks, gloves, and eye protection. To clean up after using a dry chemical fire extinguisher, follow the steps below: Remove excess residue: Using a vacuum or broom, remove as much of the excess residue as you can. Mix cleaning solution: The solution you use depends on the type of residue left over. For silicone-based residue, use a solution of 50% isopropyl alcohol and 50% warm water. For sodium bicarbonate or potassium bicarbonate residue, use a solution of 98% hot water and 2% vinegar. For monoammonium based residue, use a solution of hot water and baking soda. Spray: Using your cleaning solution, spray the area to remove any leftover residue. Let the solution settle: No matter what solution you have to use, be sure to let it settle for five minutes. Giving the solution time to settle ensures that the area is properly cleaned. Wash and rinse: Using soap and water, clean the area once more to ensure any remnants are removed. How to Clean Wet Chemical Fire Extinguisher Residue Wet chemical fire extinguishers are commonly used to extinguish fires that occur while cooking. In particular, they are effective at combatting grease fires caused by oils and fats. For safety reasons, be sure to protect your hands, eyes, and mouth while cleaning wet chemical fire extinguisher residue. To effectively clean up after using this type of extinguisher, adhere to the steps below: Disable fuel: Turn off all fuel sources connected to cooking equipment that might be in the vicinity. Scrub: Using a sponge or cloth, scrub the area with hot water and soap. Rinse: After scrubbing, rinse the affected area thoroughly. How to Clean Up Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher Residue A dry powder fire extinguisher is typically used to extinguish fires stemming from combustible metals, often found in warehouses or factories. As you clean, remember to protect your hands and eyes as you clean up residue from this type of extinguisher. To best clean up after using a dry powder extinguisher, follow these steps: Remove powder: Using a vacuum cleaner or brush, remove as much excess powder as you can. Dispose of powder: Place the powder you’ve removed in a plastic bag, sealing it afterward. Dispose of the bag in the trash. Wash: Using a damp cloth, clean up any remaining residue on the affected surface. Back to Top Knowing how to use a fire extinguisher is an essential skill for anyone working in the foodservice or hospitality industry. By familiarizing yourself with the different parts of a fire extinguisher, the PASS method, and the varying ways that you can clean up fire extinguisher residue, you'll be able to prepare for emergencies that might occur in the workplace. Check out our fire extinguisher reviews to find the right one for your business. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Install Casters on a Work Table
Kitchen work tables are an essential piece of equipment in foodservice establishments, and chefs use them to perform a variety of food prep tasks. While work tables provide an excellent space for kitchen prep, it's difficult to clean beneath a stationary table. That's where casters come in! It's easy to install casters onto a stainless steel work table with a short tutorial. We'll teach you how to install Regency swivel stem casters onto the legs of your stainless steel work table. Shop All Casters Installing Casters Video Check out our casters video tutorial to learn how to install casters on your kitchen prep table. We'll walk you through the steps to installing Regency swivel stem casters on your work table legs. <iframe scrolling="no" width="392" height="226" src="/v/?num=5126&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> What Are Casters? Casters are wheels that install on the legs of your work tables or other pieces of equipment to make them mobile. Many casters are also outfitted with brakes, so you can hold your work table in one place during use, and then release the brakes and move it when necessary. Why Should You Use Casters? Installing casters on your work tables, work benches, and other pieces of equipment is useful because you can easily move the products around when cleaning. This ensures that you don't miss any spots beneath your tables or behind your pieces of equipment. While you can move equipment that doesn't have casters, it's heavy and difficult, and there is a chance you can scratch your floors, making installing casters the ideal option. How To Choose the Right Casters Many work tables and equipment stands are compatible with a type of caster called a stem caster. Instead of being mounted with a plate and screws, stem casters fit inside the hollow legs of the work table. To find the right casters, match up the stem diameter with the leg diameter. Most tables and casters will have a 1 1/2” or 1 5/8” diameter. For other types of equipment, like shelving units and work carts, the stem may have a more narrow diameter. Make sure to review compatibility info when pairing casters with your equipment. How to Install Casters Here is a step-by-step guide on how to install casters on your work tables. 1.Flip your table over onto a blanket or box to prevent the surface from getting scratched. Then, use an Allen wrench to remove the legs from the work table. 2.Use a broom handle to pop the feet off your table's legs. 3.Turn the nut on top of your caster, which will expand a plastic piece, giving you a tight fit inside the leg. Turn the nut until you find the right thickness for your work table. 4.Once you've found the right setting, loosen it slightly and insert the caster into the leg of your table. 5.Then, using a wrench or pair of pliers, tighten the screw on the bottom of the caster to expand the plastic piece and create a snug and secure fit. 6.Reassemble your table by placing the legs into the tabletop gussets and then tightening the screws with an Allen wrench to secure them in place. 7.Flip your table back over and you're done. By following these simple steps you can easily install casters on your work tables in a few minutes. Work tables are common pieces of equipment in foodservice, and you can find them in restaurants, diners, cafeterias, and other kitchens all over the world. And, adding casters to these products makes them mobile, making it easier to clean your floors and walls and ensuring you don't miss any dirt or grime.
Pallet Stacking
Properly shipping goods to your customers comes with a lot of variables to keep in mind, like which corrugated box is best for orders, or how to ship your small business's goods at the best price. And when you're working in a distributing center, knowing how to stack a pallet to make sure the contents aren’t damaged is the top shipping priority. Pallet stacking is more than getting the boxes perfectly packed. It’s what keeps your employees safe from boxes toppling over, as well as optimizing freight costs so you make money from your endeavors. Below we have outlined how to stack a pallet, the best pallet stacking patterns, and how to stack mixed boxes on a pallet. Shop All Pallets How to Stack Boxes on a Pallet Listed below is the best way to stack a pallet: 1. Inspect Your Pallet As a crucial type of material handling equipment, your pallet is the true base of your structure. If there are any cracks or broken pieces, then your box structure will lean or fall. Take a second to inspect the pallet to make sure it is structurally sound. A great way to keep your pallets organized, safe, and all in one place is to try using a pallet rack. 2. Plan Your Pallet Stacking Pattern Take a look at what boxes are in the shipment order and what they contain. If they are all different sizes and weights, or all the same size box yet very heavy, you’re best off using a type of interlocking pattern. If the boxes are the same size and low-density, then a columnar stacking pattern is best. 3. Place Heaviest Boxes Down First Having the heaviest boxes on the bottom creates the most stable base, prevents lighter packages from getting crushed, and also creates a lower center of gravity for a stronger structure. Practice placing the boxes with the barcodes facing outwards so shippers and receivers can see what contents are in the boxes right away. 4. Line Up Boxes Close to the Edge When placing your first layer, bring the boxes as close to the edges as possible without them overhanging at all. Each layer should then line up with the first layer so no overhang happens as you build upwards. When boxes hang over the pallet, the box strength can reduce by 30% or more, not to mention possible freight damage while shipping and handling. 5. Fasten with Straps Now that your boxes are all set on the pallet, you need to fasten them onto the pallet using strapping bands. Use heavy-duty straps that are made from materials like polypropylene, polyester, or steel. Use two straps on either side to secure the load vertically and horizontally. There should not be more than 3 inches of space between the box and the pallet or else the strap cannot secure down the bottom boxes and they will slide around during transit. 6. Secure with Shrinkwrap Once the boxes are strapped in, use shrink-wrap on the entire perimeter of the structure. You can do this by hand or invest in a shrink-wrap machine if shrink-wrapping is very common in your facility. A great alternative to shrink-wrap boxes instantly is with pre-made pallet covers. Shop All Shrink Wrap Pallet Stacking Patterns There are a ton of different pallet stacking configurations you can use to secure your freight, and the final pallet stacking pattern ultimately depends on the box sizes and weight. Below are different pallet stacking patterns your employees can utilize when palletizing boxes. Column Stacking vs. Interlock Stacking But which pattern is the best way to stack boxes on a pallet? Well, it depends on what you're stacking. The biggest idea to keep in mind is whether you need to column stack or interlock stack. The difference between column stacking and interlock stacking is the way the boxes are placed on each other layer by layer, building specific patterns that lend their strengths and weaknesses to the overall stability of the stack. To decide whether you should use a column stacking or interlock stacking pattern, we have the benefits and disadvantages of each type listed below. Column Stacking In the diagram above, you can see that column stacking is when each box is placed directly over the box underneath it so the edges line up perfectly. This method is best for lighter density loads such as soft or fragile contents. Column stacking is the most common type of pallet stacking pattern, although there are both benefits and drawbacks to this pallet stacking method. Column Stacking Benefits Improves box security and strength by 30-50% Resists compression from shrink-wrap Column Stacking Disadvantages More susceptible to toppling if too tall of stacking height Interlock Stacking As shown in the above diagram, interlock stacking uses a type of rotating method when placing boxes so that more than one box below is supporting the box above it. This method is best for higher-density loads, such as canned goods and other heavy contents. Many believe that this is the superior way to palletize boxes, but there are both advantages and disadvantages to this pallet stacking method, too. Interlock Stacking Benefits Provides the most stability Best method for diverse box shapes and weights Interlock Stacking Disadvantages Can have fewer goods per pallet May create more pressure on individual boxes from uneven weight distribution How Do You Stack Mixed Pallet Boxes? Depending on your operation, you may have to build a pallet differently each time with diverse box shapes and weights. While it may not be the most fun game of Tetris, there are tips to make stacking a pallet with mixed boxes easier: Start with the larger, heavier boxes. Having larger boxes on the bottom creates a solid foundation and resists leaning. If the smaller boxes are a lot heavier than the larger boxes, place the smaller, heavier boxes as the first layer, then place the larger, lighter boxes on top. This will ensure that the heavier boxes are not crushing the lighter boxes, causing the stack to lean. Try to keep the same size boxes side by side. Organize each layer so it reaches the ends of the previous layers’ boxes. Keep the square or rectangular shape of the pallet and avoid making a pyramid. The shape is what gives structure to the pallet. When finished stacking the pallet, run packing tape around each layer to provide a bit more strength. What Is Pallet Stacking? Pallet stacking is strategically placing all of the boxes for a shipment on a pallet. Properly stacking pallets is crucial to maintaining the integrity of your shipped goods and, more importantly, keeping your warehouse employees safe from the hazards that a poorly stacked pallet can impose. Practicing proper pallet stacking is imperative if you operate a warehouse. It could make or break your reputation, ensure you’re earning money from your operation, and above all, keep your employees safe from haphazardly made pallet stacks. Familiarize yourself and your warehouse employees with these pallet stacking patterns and best practices so you can run a successful warehouse operation.
Installation & Maintenance
How to Clean a Popcorn Machine
Popcorn machines are a major money-maker for concession stands, snack bars, and movie theaters. They produce food that's constantly in demand to make sure your customers can walk away from your business satisfied. But when you're finishing up after a busy day, you also have to make sure you clean your popcorn machine to prevent grease build-up, food contamination, and other harmful problems. Keeping a clean popcorn popper is not only sanitary, but it also helps your popcorn taste better too. It may take time after you've closed down for the day, but a clean kettle is essential to continued business. Shop All Popcorn Kettle Cleaner How to Clean a Popcorn Machine Video Here is a video demonstrating how to clean a popcorn machine. <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=1660&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> Cleaning Your Popcorn Machine Before you start the cleaning process, make sure all of the light and heating switches are turned off. Unplug the machine and let the kettle cool for at least 30 minutes before you attempt to clean it. During that time, you can mix your Kettle Kleen concentrate with water to create the cleaning solution. To clean your popcorn machine, follow these easy steps: Pour liquid cleaning solution into kettle. Plug machine back in and turn on kettle's heat until solution boils. Turn off heat and let kettle cool. Remove kettle from supports. Pour solution into safe disposal location. Using a rag, wipe down the rest of the kettle. For stubborn soils, repeat steps as necessary. Cleaning the cabinet is the next step: With the kettle out of the way, wipe down floor plating inside cabinet and remove crumb tray. Clean floor plating and crumb tray as needed with a metal-safe solution. Wipe down windows and frame with a material-safe cleaner and towel to remove splotches or stains. With your cabinet, kettle, and plating clean, you're ready to reassemble your unit. Once it's all back together, you're done! Popcorn Machine Cleaning Safety and Preparation When cleaning your popcorn machine, it's important to recognize a few safety steps and precautions. Do not allow any employees under the age of 18 to clean the kettle. Because this part of the machine is responsible for popping kernels, it gets extremely hot. Only experienced operators should touch it. Make sure to wear protective gloves at all times. This will prevent your bare hands from coming into contact with the cleaner. For best results, use a cleaner that does not contain ammonia. Ammonia can leave lasting damage on a number of common foodservice surfaces, including different forms of plastic and metal. We recommend using Carnival King Kettle Kleen to sanitize your popper. It's formulated for maximum cleaning potential without harming surfaces or leaving contaminating residue. Keep your cleaner concentrate in a safe place away from the machine as you're working. It's easy to bump and knock over a bottle, so it's best to store unused supplies somewhere safe when cleaning. Popcorn Machine Use After Cleaning After cleaning your popcorn machine, you can go back to making popcorn the very next day. Make sure to keep up with the daily cleaning and maintenance of your popcorn popper. Not only will it keep you clear in case of a health inspection, but it'll keep your machine running strong for a long time. Popcorn machines are one of the leading drivers of profits at concession stands, movie theaters, and convenience stores, so it's worth it to properly clean and sanitize your equipment. Cleaning your popcorn machine will improve the flavor of your popcorn, pop the kernels more efficiently, and lengthen the lifespan of the machine.
How to Clean an Ice Machine
Ice machines serve important functions in restaurants, bars, hotels, and a variety of other business settings. Even though ice makers are an important piece of kitchen equipment, many restaurant or business owners neglect to clean them regularly. This article will take you through a detailed, step-by-step explanation of how to clean an ice machine, ensuring your equipment is safe for your customers. Shop All Ice Machine Cleaners and Sanitizers Ice Machine Cleaning Video Watch the video below to learn how to clean a commercial ice machine. We've also included a detailed list of steps to walk you through the process. <iframe scrolling="no" width="392" height="226" src="/v/?num=10506&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> How to Clean an Ice Maker Ice makers' maintenance requirements will vary from vendor to vendor, but most ice machines follow a similar overall process. Please consult with your machine's manual for the appropriate procedure, but here are some general steps to clean most ice makers. Remove ice from bin or dispenser: All ice must be removed during the cleaning and sanitizing cycles. This can be accomplished through two different methods. You can either press the power switch at the end of the harvest cycle after ice falls from the evaporators or press the power switch and allow the ice to completely melt. Press the “clean” or “wash” button: Once you’ve pushed this button, water will flow through the water dump valve and down the drain. Wait until the water trough refills and the display indicates to add chemicals. This typically takes at least 1 minute. Add cleaner: Be sure to use the recommended amount of ice machine cleaner per your manual. Wait until the clean cycle is complete: The cleaning cycle typically lasts at least 20 minutes. Once it is complete, disconnect power to the ice machine. If power can be shut off to the dispenser, it's important to do that as well. Remove internal components: Before cleaning, take any internal components out of your ice machine. For safe and proper removal, refer to your machine's manual. Once all parts have been removed, continue to the next step. Mix cleaning solution: Dilute your mix of cleaning solution with lukewarm water. Refer to your machine's manual for an appropriate amount of solution. A general water-to-cleaner ratio is 1 gallon of water to 16 ounces of cleaner. Depending on the amount of mineral buildup, you may need to use more cleaner. Clean removed components: Use half of the water and cleaner mixture to clean all components and parts you've removed. Most solutions will start to foam once they come in contact with lime, scale, and mineral deposits. Once the foaming stops, use a soft-bristle nylon brush, sponge, or cloth to carefully clean all parts and then rinse with clean water. Clean foodzone surfaces: Use the other half of the water and cleaner mixture to clean all foodzone surfaces of the ice machine and bin or dispenser. Use a nylon brush or cloth to thoroughly clean the following ice machine areas: side walls, base (area above the trough), evaporator plastic parts (top, bottom, sides), and the bin or dispenser. Rinse: Make sure to rinse all areas with clean water. This will help remove chemicals to prevent ice from becoming contaminated. How to Clean the Exterior of an Ice Maker As you clean your ice maker, it’s important to focus not just on the machine itself, but on the area surrounding it. Failure to maintain a clean workspace directly surrounding your ice machine can cause dirt and grease to build up faster and contribute to an unhealthy working environment. Below, we’ve included tips for how to clean the outside of your commercial ice maker. Focus on immediate surroundings: Clean the area around the ice machine as often as necessary. Doing so helps to ensure your ice machine operates cleanly and efficiently. Use the correct cleaning materials: Wipe surfaces down with a damp cloth rinsed in water to remove dust and dirt from the outside of the ice machine. Never use an abrasive pad or brush. Clean any grease that remains: If a greasy residue remains after cleaning, use a damp cloth rinsed in a mild dish soap and water solution. See your machine's manual for restrictions. Do not use chlorinated, citrus-based, or abrasive cleaners on exterior panels and plastic trim. How to Sanitize an Ice Machine To truly maintain a safe ice machine, remember to sanitize the machine after cleaning it. While cleaning a surface removes any dirt or germs that you can see, sanitizing it helps to reduce the number of pathogens to a safe level. Here are the steps you need to follow to sanitize your ice maker once you have removed any mold or buildup from your machine and its components. Prepare your sanitizer: Dilute your ice machine sanitizer by mixing it with lukewarm water. Refer to your machine's manual for an appropriate amount of solution. A general water-to-cleaner ratio is 3 gallons of water to 2 ounces of sanitizer. Sanitize removed components: Use half of the water and sanitizer mixture to sanitize all components and parts you've removed from the machine. You can use a spray bottle to liberally apply the solution to all surfaces of the removed parts, or you can soak the removed parts in the solution. It’s essential that you don’t rinse parts with water after sanitizing. Sanitize remaining surfaces: Use the other half of the water and sanitizer mixture to clean all foodzone surfaces of the ice machine, bin, and dispenser. Make sure to sanitize the following areas: side walls, base (area above the trough), evaporator plastic parts (top, bottom, sides), and the bin or dispenser. Replace sanitized parts: Once they’ve been sanitized, place the removed parts back onto the ice machine. Wait 20 minutes: By waiting, you allow the sanitizer to properly disinfect your ice machine. Restore power: Once you’re finished waiting, reconnect the ice machine to power. This can be done by pressing your unit's "clean" or "wash" button. Allow water troughs to refill: It’s important to wait until your display indicates the troughs have been refilled before adding your chemicals. Once this has been done, you’re free to add the proper amount of sanitizer to the water trough. Enable automatic ice making: Set your machine to automatically start making ice after the sanitizing cycle is complete. This will typically take at least 20 minutes. Observe: Upon completion, it's recommended to observe two cycles and monitor the freeze and harvest cycle times. Make sure you throw out the first batch of ice made after cleaning and sanitizing. How to Clean an Ice Machine Condenser and Its Filter Like the other components of your ice machine, the condenser should be cleaned once every six months. Follow these steps to clean the condenser of your ice maker: Turn the power off: Disconnect power to the ice machine head section (and the remote condensing unit, if applicable). Check for dirt: Shine a flashlight through the condenser to check for dirt between the fins. Clean the filter: Blow compressed air through the condenser to remove any dirt in the filter. You can also rinse it with water from the inside out. Double-check: After you’ve gone through the process of identifying and removing dirt, check to see if any remains. If it does, we recommend that you contact a service agent. To clean your machine's filter, simply rinse it with mild soap and water. Why It's Important to Clean an Ice Maker The FDA defines ice as a food, which means it must be handled and cared for in the same manner as other food products. Any part of your ice machine that has contact with water can develop scale, slime, or mold at any time, which will contaminate your ice and potentially harm your customers. How Often Should You Clean Your Ice Machine? Your ice machine should be cleaned and sanitized at least once every six months for efficient operation. First, you must perform the cleaning procedure to remove lime, scale, and mineral deposits, followed by the sanitizing procedure to disinfect the unit and remove algae and slime. Reasons to Clean Your Ice Machine Frequently Avoid scale buildup on evaporator plates Prevent impeded heat transfer Keep harvest times short Help your machine maintain full capacity Defend against costly repairs Signs You Need to Clean Your Ice Maker Since germs and dirt accumulate over time, it may be difficult to identify when your machine needs to be cleaned. If you experience some of the following issues, it may be time to clean your ice machine: Ice machine does not release ice or is slow to harvest Ice machine does not cycle into harvest mode Ice quality is poor (soft or not clear) Ice produces an odor Ice machine produces shallow or incomplete cubes Low ice capacity Ice Machine Cleaning Tips If you’re inexperienced in cleaning kitchen appliances, you may find yourself lost when it comes to efficiently cleaning them. Below, we’ve listed some general tips to consider before cleaning your ice machine. Use the correct cleaning products: Some manufacturers require specific or approved cleaner and sanitizer solutions to be used with their machines. Follow instructions: It's essential that you follow the directions in your ice maker's manual when cleaning. The steps above are general guidelines that apply to most machines. Keep chemicals separated: For safety reasons, do not mix the cleaner and sanitizer solutions. Doing so may result in a chemical reaction, which can be hazardous. Use protective equipment: Wear rubber gloves and protective safety glasses when handling cleaner and sanitizer solutions. Monitor water quality: Check your establishment's water quality if your machine requires maintenance more and more frequently. Water treatment or a new water cartridge may be necessary. Manage controls: Do not leave the control switch in a service position for an extended period of time when the water tank is empty during cleaning. This could damage the water pump. Know your equipment: Nugget and flake machines typically have more moving parts that require additional attention. By cleaning and sanitizing your ice machine, you'll be able to maintain your unit's efficiency, prevent increased energy costs, and make clean and safe ice that is ready to use. Remember to clean and sanitize at least once every six months, and don't forget to refer to your ice machine's manual for special instructions.
How to Clean a Griddle
One of the best ways you can make your menu more diverse and appealing is by outfitting your kitchen with a commercial griddle. Whether you use it once a week or every day, it's very important to take care of your griddle to maintain cooking efficiency and prevent flavor transfer. Since there are many different ways you can go about cleaning a griddle, we've provided you with some general tips and guidelines to follow, so you can continue to produce delicious meals for your customers. Shop All Griddle Cleaner How to Clean a Griddle Video If you've never cleaned a commercial griddle, we've created a video that goes through the entire process. Watch the video below to see an example of what it looks like to clean a griddle: <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=2931&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> Cleaning a Griddle Though there are some key differences between them, the process of cleaning a griddle can be compared to cleaning a commercial grill. In general, there are two different types of griddles: those with a chromium cooking surface and those without a chromium surface. Each type presents its own set of benefits that distinguish it from the other. Continue reading to learn how to clean your commercial griddle. Cleaning Chromium Surfaces Chromium metal is a transition metal made of chromium, one of the elements found on the periodic table. Known for its high corrosion resistance, it is often used when creating different cooking surfaces and appliances. In griddles, chromium is known for providing superior heat retention, which helps to conserve energy. To clean a chrome griddle, follow these steps: Remove food: Use a scraper to remove excess grease and food. You can easily scrape debris into the griddle's waste drawer and empty it once you're finished. Wipe: If desired, wipe the surface with a damp cloth. Scrape: At the end of every day, scrape the surface as you do in the first step, and then using a clean rag, clean the surface with a mixture of mild soap and water. Polish and maintain: Thoroughly wipe down the surface with a different wet cloth, polish the unit's front, and empty the waste drawer. What to Avoid When Cleaning Chromium Surfaces To avoid damaging or scratching your griddle, never use the following products when cleaning chromium surfaces: Pumice, griddle stones, or abrasives A sharp instrument or spatula edge to remove food Steel wool Commercial liquid grill cleaner Cleaning Non-Chromium Surfaces Unlike their chromium counterparts, non-chromium surfaces require a different cleaning process. You’ll also have more freedom to use different products or equipment while cleaning them. To clean a non-chromium surface, adhere to the steps listed below: Scrape: Use a grill scraper after every use to remove excess grease and food. Remove excess debris: If the griddle is extremely soiled, use a griddle or grill brick while the surface is still warm to gently rub off caked-on grease and food. Make sure you rub in the direction of the grain so you don't ruin the steel surface. Sanitize wash drawer: At the end of every day, or sooner if needed, you should also empty, wash, and sanitize your waste drawer. Then, polish the front of the griddle with a clean cloth. Clean surface: Once a week, unplug the unit and allow the griddle to cool completely. Use a fresh cleaning cloth and a non-abrasive griddle cleaner to clean the surface, and then thoroughly rinse with water. Season: After cleaning your griddle, you may need to re-season the surface depending on how often the griddle requires a heavy cleaning. Otherwise, apply a thin layer of cooking oil to help prevent rusting. Why Cleaning a Griddle Is Important Whether you're cooking pancakes and crepes or burgers, sandwiches, and meats, it's important to clean and scrape your commercial griddle regularly. When you cook any meal, fats, juices, and other food debris will be left on the griddle's surface. If this grease and grime isn't cleaned off, it will continually accumulate into a gummy layer which will then carbonize into a hard substance that's extremely difficult to remove. If you continue to cook on this surface, heat won't transfer as evenly and efficiently to the food being cooked, and it could cause the chicken being served at dinner to taste like the cheesesteak that was cooked at lunch. How Often Should I Clean My Griddle? In general, you should clean your griddle after each use. Additionally, you should make sure that it is clear of any dust, debris, or other substances before you begin cooking. This helps to reduce the risk of illness, contamination, and other hazards in your food. Whether you own a stainless steel griddle, a cast iron griddle, or a ceramic griddle, it's important to take care of it to ensure efficient cooking. By regularly cleaning your griddle after every use in addition to performing routine weekly deep cleanings, you'll be able to keep your unit in top operating condition for years to come.
How To Light a Pilot Light
If you're having trouble starting your cooking equipment, it may be due to an extinguished pilot light. A pilot light is a small gas burner that stays lit continuously, so you can ignite a flame for your larger burner. Pilot lights can go out fairly often in busy commercial kitchens. A breeze may extinguish the flame, especially in high-traffic environments or near frequently-used doors. If all pilot lights are out on your equipment, turn on your ventilation hoods, check your gas line, and vent the area. If you smell a strong gas odor or suspect you have a gas leak, contact your gas provider immediately. Do not light a flame or turn on an electric switch until the problem is addressed. With these instructions, you can learn how to light a pilot for several types of equipment in your restaurant. Step-by-Step Instructions for How to Light a Pilot Light How to Light Range Tops On a range top, gas is always coming out of your pilot. 1.Light the pilot light (located within the burner) with a lighter. How to Light a Standard Oven Be sure to set the thermostat to the "off" position and wait 5 minutes before attempting to relight the pilot. 1.Hold down the red button on the gas safety valve to release gas. 2.Light pilot by pushing the red ignitor button. You may need to press it more than once. Continue pressing the igniter button until the pilot stays lit. If the pilot won’t light, you may need to continue holding the gas safety valve button to expel all oxygen from the system. How to Light Fryers 1.Turn fryer off. Turn the gas safety valve knob to “pilot.” 2.Hold the gas safety valve knob in for about 30 seconds to purge oxygen from the line. 3.While holding in the gas safety valve knob, light the pilot. 4.Turn gas safety valve knob to “on.” To turn the pilot off, turn the fryer off, and turn the pilot knob to "off." These techniques can be applied to a wide range of gas cooking equipment, but if you require any clarification or further instruction on the proper procedure to use for your unit, be sure to consult the owner’s manual.
How to Season and Care for Your Grill Grate
Season Your Grill Grate in 4 Simple Steps! Nothing quite says "summer" like the smell of barbecue wafting in the air. But before you fire up the grill, be sure to assess the condition of your commercial outdoor grill. Is food sticking to your grill grate? Is rust starting to form due to high-volume outdoor use? Then it's time to season your grill grate - and we'll tell you how to do it in just 4 simple steps. Whether you're firing burgers at a catered event or grilling kebabs on your poolside patio deck, this guide will ensure that you serve up success at your next barbecue! How to Season and Care for Your Grill Grate Remove grate; preheat grill to medium heat. Wash grate thoroughly using a wire brass grill brush and a decarbonizer and degreaser formula. Let dry. Lightly spread unsalted vegetable shortening over the grate's entire surface. For best results, use a boar bristle pastry brush. <nr> <blockquote>Please note: Spread product lightly. Too much shortening can cause a grease fire once the grill gets too hot.</blockquote></nr> Place the coated grate in the grill. Close grill lid and allow grate to cook for approximately 10 to 15 minutes. Once the grill cools, your grate seasoning is complete! <blockquote>Please note: Repeat steps 3 and 4 until desired seasoning has been achieved. Remember to re-season your grill grate after each cleaning. Sticking food and rust are both signs that the seasoning has burned off, indicating that you must re-season the grill grate.</blockquote> For Cleaning: It's important to clean your grill grate after high-volume use. A simple mix of hot water and grill cleaner will do the trick. Cleaning frequency is dependent upon number of uses. Quick Tip: Coat your grate with shortening after washing it and place it directly back into the grill. That way, it will season the next time you re-heat the grill.
How to Clean Refrigerator Coils
The coils on refrigeration equipment naturally accumulate dust and debris. Over time this buildup will cause your refrigeration system to work harder to maintain temperature and it can potentially lead to failures in other key components. If your refrigerator isn’t getting cold enough, or if it is using too much electricity, it may be time to clean your refrigerator coils. Whether you own a reach-in, blast chiller, walk-in, or any other type of refrigeration equipment, you should be cleaning the refrigerator coils at least once every month. In this video, we’ll show you how to clean refrigerator coils by walking you through four quick and easy steps. When this simple maintenance task is followed correctly, you’ll be running at maximum efficiency and increase the longevity of your unit. Shop All Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers Step-by-Step Instructions for How to Clean Refrigerator Coils Unplug your equipment before starting. Food inside your unit will be safe as long as the door is kept shut and it is already at the proper temperature. 1.Remove the grill. This is located on the bottom, top, or behind the unit, and will usually require a screwdriver. 2.Use a coil brush to clean the coils. 3.Use a vacuum cleaner crevice attachment to remove smaller particles. Try not to bend the fins on the coil. 4.Re-install the grill. <iframe scrolling="no" width="392" height="226" src="/v/?num=8357&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe>
Kitchen & Cooking Tips
How to Make Gyro Meat Using a Vertical Broiler
Gyros are a very popular Mediterranean dish that are easy for restaurants to make and serve. Vertical broilers make preparing gyros a simple task, as the sight and aroma of the cooking meat are a perfect way to boost impulse sales in businesses like concession stands. Gyros are also becoming an increasingly popular bar food, as a large number of great beer pairings make gyros an excellent addition to a bar menu. Utilizing a vertical broiler may seem complicated at first, but it’s easy to integrate into your restaurant operations. Just about any type of restaurant can have staff quickly learn how to use a vertical broiler and add gyros to their menu. Below, we’ll cover how to use a vertical broiler to make gyros, as well as other important information such as the different types of Mediterranean dishes you can use a vertical broiler to make. Shop All Vertical Broilers What Is a Vertical Broiler? Vertical broilers are cooking equipment most commonly used to create gyros, shwarmas, and doner kebabs. The meat is cooked on the vertical broiler in the shape of a “meat cone”, and it is sliced off during the cooking process. The equipment cooks the outer layer of the meat, allowing it to be easily cut off piece by piece from the spit. Vertical Broiler Safety Since vertical broilers keep the internal layers of the meat raw during the cooking process, failing to follow proper food safety guidelines could result in foodborne illness. Ensure that the sliced-off meat is cooked to the required internal temperature and that it remains outside of the temperature danger zone. For food safety purposes, the vertical broiler should remain spinning until all layers of meat have been fully cooked. If there is any leftover meat when the vertical broiler stops spinning, the meat should be discarded. How to Use a Vertical Broiler 1.Slide your choice of meat onto the pole. 2.Turn on your gyro machine. Make sure to turn on both the left and right heating elements, as well as the motor, so your meat doesn't burn. 3.Allow your meat to cook until it reaches a safe internal temperature and the outside is crispy. 4.Carve meat off the pole and catch it with a catch tray. 5.Assemble your sandwich or pita, and you're ready to serve. How to Use a Vertical Broiler Video To learn more about vertical broilers, check out the video below: <iframe scrolling="no" width="392" height="226" src="/v/?num=11605&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> Gyro vs Shawarma vs Doner Depending on where you are in the world or who you ask, the name of this dish varies slightly. The dish originated in ancient Turkey, and it was called "doner," which comes from the Turkish word for "to rotate." The sandwich later spread to Greece, which at the time was part of the Ottoman Empire. In Greece, they translated the name to "gyros," which means "to turn." The dish found its way to the Arabic world, where they translated the name to "shawarma." While gyros and shawarma originated from doner, today there are some regional differences in how the sandwiches are made and presented. While these differences may be small, they are enough to differentiate each type as its own distinct dish. Below, we've broken down each type of sandwich: Doner Kebab - Doner kebab is made with roasted meat that is stuffed into a pita or a piece of thin flatbread. The sandwich also usually contains tomatoes, lettuce, cabbage, onions, pickled cucumbers, and various sauces. In terms of spices, doner kebab is often seasoned with oregano, cumin, and isot pepper. Gyros - Gyros start with an oiled pita to which you add thinly sliced meat, tomatoes, onions, and tzatziki sauce. These sandwiches are also often seasoned with spices such as thyme, rosemary, and majoram. Some gyro shops will also add fries to the sandwich. Shawarma - Unlike doner or gyros, shawarma can be served on a plate and not in a sandwich or wrap. The plate contains sliced meat, and it is typically served with bread, fattoush salad, tabbouleh, tomato, and cucumber, as well as tahini sauce or hummus. Shawarma is usually topped off with spices such as cardamom, tumeric, and cloves to bring out extra flavor. What Type of Meat Do You Use in Gyros, Doner, and Shawarma? Not only are gyros, doner, and shawarma assembled differently, they can be made with various kinds of meat. The versatility gives you the potential to add several different types of Mediterranean dishes to your menu. Below, we've listed the main types of meat traditionally used for each sandwich: Doner Kebab - Traditional doner is made with layers of seasoned lamb, chicken, or beef. Shawarma - Shawarma is typically made with lamb or chicken, but you can also use beef, turkey, or veal. Traditional Greek-Style Gyros - The original Greek-style gyros are made with thinly sliced cuts of pork or chicken. Greek-American-Style Gyros - The original recipe brought over by Greek immigrants has changed dramatically over the years. Gyros that Americans are most familiar with are made with a mixture of ground lamb, ground beef, and spices. The mixture is then formed into a cone and roasted on the vertical broiler. Whether you’re starting a food truck or opening up a restaurant, gyro sandwiches are a great option to add to your menu. Not only is gyro meat delicious, but utilizing a vertical broiler is simple, making gyros easy to integrate into your menu. Adding gyros to your menu is a great way to expand your offerings and boost sales. With their simplicity and cost-effectiveness, using vertical broilers to make Mediterranean dishes is a fantastic option for a variety of businesses in the food service industry.
How to Remove Rust
When it comes to rusted cookware, cast iron pans are the biggest offenders. But even some types of stainless steel can become corroded if they aren't cared for properly. Rust can ruin your pans and become a safety issue if you aren't careful. Learn how rust occurs, the best practices to remove rust, and other methods of preventing rust on metal. Use the following links to navigate and learn more about rust and how to prevent it: How to Remove Rust What is Rust? How Does Rust Occur? Does Stainless Steel Rust? How to Prevent Rust Removing Rust Check out our quick video to learn how to remove rust from your cookware. We demonstrate three methods that will have your cast iron pans looking like new! <iframe scrolling="no" width="392" height="226" src="/v/?num=11824&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> How to Get Rid of Rust If your baking sheets are showing signs of rust, or your favorite sautee pan needs a little TLC, rust removal is an option to refinish the metal. Here’s one method of removing rust from metal and stainless steel. How to Remove Rust from Metal with Baking Soda Take the rusty pan and rinse with water. Cover the pan with baking soda. Let the baking soda sit for an hour or more on the pan. Use a scouring pad to rub the rust off. Wash the pan and dry with a towel. If baking soda and some elbow grease doesn't do the trick to remove existing rust, try this method of using vinegar for heavily rusted pans. Removing Rust with Vinegar Spray or wet pan with water and wipe clean with a cloth. Using a 1:1 ratio of water and vinegar, spray the mixture onto the stainless steel. Let the vinegar mixture sit for a few minutes to soak into the metal. Take a scouring pad and lightly scrub along the grain of the stainless steel to remove the rust. This will prevent other scratches from forming. Wash with soap and water and completely dry the pan with a towel. Do you have a rusty cast iron pan? Follow these steps to remove the rust and resurface your cast iron cookware. How to Remove Rust from Cast Iron Thoroughly scrape the pan with steel wool. Wash with soap and water. Pat completely dry with a towel, or place the pan on low heat for just a couple minutes until dry. Pour a quarter-sized amount of cooking oil into the pan and use a paper towel to coat the inside with the oil. Reseason the cast iron pan by placing it in the oven face down at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for one hour. Put a piece of aluminum foil on the rack below to catch excess oil. Remove the pan and let it cool. Back to Top What Is Rust? Rust is a brown and orange iron oxide, most commonly found on metal, and can be harmful if consumed. Rust can occur on any metal, even if it contains chromium. Chromium is found in stainless steel and is more reactive to oxygen compared to iron. Chromium oxidizes quickly and actually protects metal from rusting. If the chromium oxide on metal becomes scratched, water settles into the openings of the exposed metal, making it rust. How Does Rust Occur? Rust is the chemical reaction that occurs when iron and oxygen meet. When metal is in the presence of water or moisture in the air, rust will form on the metal over time if the water is not removed. If existing rust is not removed, it can continue to build up and get worse over time. Does Stainless Steel Rust? If cared for properly, most stainless steel does not rust because it contains the alloy chromium, which will oxidize and create a natural protective coating on the metal. If the stainless steel does not contain enough chromium, there will not be a thick enough layer of oxidation on the metal to protect it from rusting. When buying stainless steel cookware for a commercial kitchen, it is best to purchase 304 stainless steel because of its higher corrosion resistance. Stainless steel will also rust if not cleaned and polished properly. Cleaning the metal after each use will keep dried and burnt food from building up, and will also help provide a clean surface for polishing. Polishing stainless steel is important for keeping the chromium oxide in tact so rust will not form. How to Prevent Rust To prevent rust from forming on metal cookware, do not allow metal to air dry. Dry the metal pan with a microfiber towel right after washing to remove any water from pans or flatware. Prevent rust from forming on cast iron by simply seasoning the pan before the initial use and continually and routinely seasoning it as it is used. You can also buy stainless steel cookware that contains chromium, which will help protect the metal from rusting. Thoroughly cleaning stainless steel pans after use will keep the metal looking great and help it last longer too. When buying metal cookware, be sure to care for it. This will prevent rust from forming the metal and save a lot of time and effort resurfacing the pans. Keeping your pans in good condition will help them last a lifetime.
How to Carve a Turkey
Carving a whole turkey seems like a messy task, but if you follow our simple steps it can be done quickly and neatly. It's a skill that comes in handy for any chef or foodservice professional, especially around the fall holiday season. Whether you're catering for a large group or prepping roasted turkey for menu items, follow our tutorial to learn the best way to carve a turkey. Carving a Turkey Video Check out our turkey carving video to learn how to cut up a whole turkey the easiest way: <iframe scrolling="no" width="392" height="226" src="/v/?num=11363&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> What Knife to Use to Cut Turkey? Do you actually need a carving knife to cut up a turkey? No, not necessarily. The best type of knife for cutting a turkey has a pointed, non-serrated blade. Avoid using a serrated blade when you're carving because the slices won't be clean. For a turkey that's 15 pounds or larger, choose a chef's knife that is 10" to 12" in length. Use an 8" chef's knife for a smaller turkey. Does a Turkey Need to Rest Before Carving? Yes, you should always rest a cooked turkey before you begin carving. Just like resting a steak, letting a roasted turkey sit for at least 20 to 30 minutes to reabsorb its juices is recommended. Cutting into the bird too soon can result in a dry turkey. What Do I Need to Carve a Turkey? Cooked turkey Sharp knife (non-serrated) Large cutting board Large serving platter Disposable gloves Kitchen towel for cleanup Steps to Carve a Turkey Follow these step-by-step instructions for cutting up a whole turkey: 1.Rest Turkey: Let the cooked turkey rest for about 30 minutes. Gather your tools and put on disposable gloves. Place the turkey on a large cutting board with the cavity facing towards you. 2.Remove Drumstick and Thigh: Find the impression where the breast connects to the drumstick. Press a sharp knife down until you hit bone. Pull the drumstick back and down until the joint pops. Using the knife, press down on the joint bone to sever it. Then slice down to completely remove the leg and thigh. Set aside. 3.Remove Breast: Make a long cut from the neck to the cavity, keeping the blade on the right side of the breast bone. Slice through the breast meat and gently pull it outward as the knife slides down. Set breast meat aside. 4.Remove Wing: Pull the wing to the side until you hear the joint pop. Slice through the joint to remove the wing. Set wing aside. 5.Rotate Turkey: Turn the turkey around 180 degrees and repeat the previous steps to remove the drumstick, thigh, breast, and wing on the other side of the turkey. 6.Separate Thigh and Drumstick: Place the thigh and drumstick on the cutting board with the skin side down. Find the joint and slice through to separate the pieces. Repeat on second thigh and drumstick. 7.Slice Thigh Meat: Remove the bone and cut the thigh meat into even slices. Repeat on second thigh. 8.Slice Breast Meat: Place the breast on the cutting board with the skin side up. Cut into even 1/4” slices. Add breast meat to the platter. Repeat on second breast. 9.Arrange Platter: Add 2 drumsticks, 2 wings, sliced thigh meat, and sliced breast meat to a platter. Serve immediately. What To Do With the Turkey Carcass? After carving away the best parts of the turkey, you'll be left with the carcass. Don't throw it away! Even if the bones are picked clean, there are still bits of skin and fat that will make a delicious turkey broth or stock. Place the whole carcass in a stock pot and cover with water. Add your favorite aromatics and herbs. Simmer for about an hour then strain out the solids. You should be left with a rich turkey stock. The method for cutting up a turkey can also be used on whole chickens, just use a smaller knife. Separating the wings and breasts (white meat) from the thighs and drumsticks (dark meat) is a traditional way to serve a whole cooked bird. Use the cooked meat for your recipes or arrange the meat on a serving platter for guests.
How to Cook Fish on the Grill
When the weather gets warmer, customers start seeking out the smoky flavors of barbecue meals. Grilled fish and seafood provide a healthy protein alternative for your menu that your customers will love. However, it can be tricky to figure out the best grill temperatures for fish. In this article, we’ll show you the best fish to grill and foolproof grilling techniques so you can prepare fish to perfection! Shop Wholesale Fish Navigate through the article by using the links below: How to Grill Fish Video Grill-Friendly Fish Grilling Fish Grilling Fish in Foil Grilling Fish on Plank Alternative Seafood Options How to Grill Fish Video Below is a step-by-step video on how to grill fish perfectly: <iframe width="560" height="315" src="/v/?num=7369&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> Back to Top Best Fish to Grill Before you learn how to grill fish, it's important to first select the best fish to grill. The best way to begin is by choosing a fish that can stand the high-heat environment of a grill and using the proper grilling techniques for fish that cannot. The following fish species feature a firm meat texture like beef or pork that won’t fall apart when cooked, making them some of the best fish to grill: Arctic Char: This fish has a flavorful pink flesh that often resembles the taste of trout or salmon. Chefs will often choose to cook arctic char as fillets on the grill. Halibut: Halibut fillets are known for their tender texture and delicate flavors that are perfect for pairing with bold seasonings and marinades. It is often cooked as fillets on the grill. Mahi-mahi: Also known as dorado or dolphinfish, mahi-mahi is a white fish with a mild and sweet flavor that does well cooked as fillets on the grill. Salmon: Salmon has a fresh ocean flavor that pairs well with a variety of sauces and spices, making it a popular option for grilling salmon fillets directly on the grill grates or on a plank. Snapper: This lean fish is often grilled whole due to its firm texture. Snapper offers a stunning presentation on the plate with its vibrant red color. Swordfish: The firm texture of swordfish fillets allows for them to develop distinct grill marks that create an eye-catching steak. It also features a slightly sweet flavor that fish enthusiasts enjoy. Tuna: Tuna develops a mild flavor while having a beef-like texture when cooked on the grill. Tuna fillets are often cooked medium rare as steaks. Back to Top How to Grill Fish In order to master fish grilling, it's important to become familiar with the full grilling process, from prep to plate. You’ll have to choose which cut of fish will work best for your dish, along with the proper grilling method for that cut. Here is how to cook fish on the grill: 1. Choose a Fish Cut Before you fire up the grill, the first step would be to select which type of fish cut you’re interested in preparing for your menu. You can work with a local fishmonger to ensure that the fish is fresh, cleaned, sustainably caught, and cut to your liking. The most popular cuts of fish for grilling include: Fish Fillet: Fish fillets come from the thick sides of the fish and feature a skin side and a flesh side. As many of the bones as possible are removed before cooking. Fish Steak: Fish steaks are a cross-section cut from a large fish species with firm and fattier flesh. The surrounding skin and interior bones help keep the integrity of the fish but can prove challenging to eat, as guests will have to pick out the bones. A fish steak should be a minimum of 1” thick. Whole Fish: Cooking a whole fish requires the least amount of preparation and creates a striking food plating presentation. The full coverage of skin retains the flavor in the meat but can also present a challenge to guests as they eat around the skin and bones. Leaving the skin on the fish helps to retain the moisture in the meat while also adding stability so your fish doesn’t easily fall apart. The skin also creates a heat barrier to protect the meat from the flame of the grill. It can later be removed after the fish is fully cooked. 2. Prep the Fish After choosing your fish cut, you’ll want to properly prepare the fish before trying any grilled fish recipes. Follow these easy steps to prep your fish: Rinse the fish in cool water to get rid of any debris that may be on the flesh. Wrap the fish in a paper towel or a kitchen towel to remove any excess moisture. Use fish tweezers to tweeze out any bones that may be protruding from the flesh. If using a whole fish, make cuts every 3 inches along the sides for even cooking. Brush both sides of the fish with oil, regardless of the cut. Season lightly with salt and pepper. Additional seasoning and marinating should be done when fish fillets come off the heat to prevent sticking. Whole fish can be stuffed with herbs and citrus. For fish cooked in foil packets, herbs and citrus can be added to the packet. 3. Prepare the Grill One of the biggest challenges you may encounter when adding fish to your menu is figuring out how to grill fish on the grill without it sticking and falling apart. One main way to prevent this from happening is by properly seasoning and cleaning your grill. Cover the grates with aluminum foil to concentrate the heat on them. Heat the grill at the highest heat for 10-15 minutes. Brush the grates with a wire grill brush. Coat the grates with oil by using a wad of paper towels and tongs. You’ll want to wipe the grates 5 to 10 times, re-dipping the paper towel into the oil each time. The oil seasons the grates to prevent the fish from sticking. 4. Grill the Fish There are various ways that you can cook fish on a grill, and some fish cook better depending on the cooking style you choose. The most important factor to check for when cooking seafood is to make sure that the internal fish temperature reaches 145 degrees Fahrenheit before serving. Cooking times can vary depending on the thickness of your cut. A fish should be grilled for a total of 8-10 minutes per inch of thickness. How to Grill Fish Fillets With the skin side down, place the fish diagonally on the grate slats to make it easier to flip and to give it desirable grill marks from the Maillard reaction. Close the grill lid and reduce the heat to medium. Allow the fish to grill for 2-4 minutes. Using a spatula or tongs, try lifting the fish. If it does not lift off cleanly, allow it to cook in 30 seconds intervals until it lifts off easily. Flip the fish onto the flesh side and close the grill lid. Allow the fish to cook for 3-7 minutes, until the thermometer reads the food-safe temperature of 145 degrees Fahrenheit. If the fish flesh is fully opaque and begins to flake when tested with a fork, it can be removed from the grill. Finish by seasoning the fillet to your liking before serving. How to Grill Fish Steaks Bring your grill to a medium heat and lay your 1” fish steak directly on the grates. Close the grill lid and allow it to cook for 3-4 minutes. Flip the fish and marinate the cooked side. Allow it to cook for another 3-4 minutes with the grill cover closed. Check the internal temperature for doneness. Remove the fish from the grill and brush the second side with marinade before serving. How to Grill a Whole Fish Bring your grill to medium-high heat and place the fish down with the dorsal fin closest to the heat and the tail farthest away. Set the fish at a 45-degree angle to the grill grates. Allow the fish to cook uncovered for about 5 minutes. Attempt to gently lift the fish with tongs. If it does not lift easily, keep cooking while testing it at 1-minute intervals. Once it lifts off cleanly, flip the fish over to the second side. Allow to cook for another 3-5 minutes. Once the skin is crisp and flesh is white, check the internal temperature of the fish at the thickest part. If food-safe temperatures have not been reached but the skin is getting too brown, move the fish to a cooler spot on the grill until the thermometer reads 145 degrees Fahrenheit. Remove the fish from the grill and serve. Back to Top How to Grill Fish in Foil Delicate fish such as tilapia, cod, sole, and flounder can still be cooked on the grill but fare best if grilled in foil. Grilling fish in aluminum foil helps to protect the structure of the fish while retaining moisture and preventing sticking. The foil helps to steam the fish and allows the fish to absorb the flavors of any herbs and spices that are in the foil pack. To grill fish in foil: Tear two pieces of foil that are at least 10” x 10” in size. This can be larger depending on the size of your fish. Grease the sides of the foil pieces that will be in contact with the fish by using either oil, butter, or cooking spray. Add your fish, vegetables, herbs, citrus, and aromatics onto the greased foil. Place the second foil piece over the fish and vegetables and fold the ends to enclose the pouch. Light one side of the grill on medium-high heat, and place the fish foil packets on the unlit side. The packet should not be over direct heat. Allow to cook for 8-10 minutes. You can also use this method to grill shrimp and scallops, but you’ll want to cook them for 5-7 minutes only. Remove the packets from the grill with a spatula or tongs. Carefully cut them open with a knife and allow the hot steam to escape before serving. Back to Top How to Grill Fish on a Plank A wooden plank can be used for grilling fish fillets that are slightly too delicate to place directly on the grill grates. The plank provides a sturdy non-stick platform while also enhancing the flavor. Many fish enthusiasts enjoy grilling fish on cedar planks due to the distinct smoky flavor it adds but you may also use apple, cherry, maple, or oak wood. To grill fish on a plank: Soak the wooden plank in water for at least 2 hours. Brush the top of the plank with oil. Place the plank on the grill with the fish fillet on top. Close the grill cover and allow to cook for 10-12 minutes. No flipping is required. Check the internal temperature for doneness. Brush with marinade. Move the plank to a cooler spot on the grill for another 1-2 minutes if it does not reach the proper internal temperature. Remove the fish from the grill and serve. Back to Top Alternative Seafood Options for Grilling Fish aren’t the only types of seafood that fare well on the grill. Below are more seafood options you can fire up this summer, however many of them will require the use of a fish grill basket to cook them properly. Clams and oysters Crab Lobster Sardines and Mackerel Scallops Shrimp and Prawns Squid Shop All Seafood Back to Top You can create a memorable menu straight from the sea by trying out these grilling techniques with a variety of fish and seafood options that your customers will love.
Food Presentation Tips
If you own a food service business, you know that food presentation is crucial to marketing your restaurant on Instagram. Studies from Oxford show that a quality food presentation increases customers' perceived value of your meals, allowing you to raise your menu prices. Chefs tactfully arrange ingredients to curate flavor and textural complexity, and their creative plating techniques stimulate appetites before the first bite. Read on to discover plating techniques, an instructional plating video, and the tools you need to create your own signature food presentation style. Shop All Plating Tools Click any of the sections below to explore the topic that interests you: Plating Video Plating Techniques Plating Ideas Plating Tools Food Plating and Presentation Video An understanding of food plating techniques will help your staff improve your meal presentation and enhance the dining experience for your guests. For a visual guide, check out our video on how to plate food like a chef. <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=4852&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> How to Plate Food like a Chef While there are no fixed food presentation rules, there are several important concepts to keep in mind as you arrange your meals. Remember your plate is your canvas. Arrange food items using the rule of thirds. Entice the eyes with visual stimulants. Use the sauce as paint for your plate. Garnish to enhance both appearance and flavor. Plating Techniques Conceptualize plating as an art form: you are the artist; the plate is your canvas, and the food is your medium. Master the following plating techniques to perfect your craft. 1. Plate Presentation Techniques Selecting the right plate for your meal is the first step in the food presentation process. Consider the following to choose the ideal plate for your food presentation: Plate Size - Your plate should be big enough to make your food stand out and petite enough to prevent your portions from appearing small. Light vs Dark Plates - Use light and dark plates to make your meal stand out. White plates are popular because they offer a neutral background for brightly colored foods. Dark plates lend beautifully to light-colored dishes, such as a whitefish or creamy polenta. Plate Color - A plate’s color can stimulate or reduce appetites. Red increases the appetite, so serving appetizers on red plates keeps customers interested in ordering large entrees and desserts. Professional platers consider blue dinnerware unappetizing because there are few naturally occurring blue foods. Restaurant Style - If you operate a fine dining establishment, classic China dinnerware pairs well with traditional plating styles. A trendy gastropub should invest in unique plates with unconventional shapes that facilitate maximum plating creativity. 2. Food Arrangement Techniques How you arrange your food determines your meal’s aesthetic tone, structural integrity, and flavor dispersion. Here are a few of the most important food arrangement techniques: The Rule of Thirds - When applied to cooking, the rule of thirds prescribes placing the focal point of your dish on either the left or right side of the plate, rather than the center. Use white space by thinking of the rim as your frame and highlight your plate’s focal point(s). View Your Plate as a Clock - As you place your ingredients, picture the face of a clock. From the diner’s point of view, your protein should be between 3 and 9, your starch/carbohydrate from 9 to 12, and your vegetable from 12 to 3. Don’t Overcrowd Your Plate - Keep your design simple by focusing on one ingredient (usually the protein). Having a focal point helps you arrange your accompanying items to complement your standout item. Moist Ingredients First - Plate moist ingredients first and prevent them from running by topping them with other foods. For example, you can angle sliced meat against mashed vegetables. Create Flavor Bites - Flavor bites are forkfuls of food that combine all the ingredients in your dish into one bite. Flavor bites are essential to quality plating as they please both the eyes and the taste buds. Mix Textures - Contrasting a smooth vegetable puree with crunchy onion straws or topping a steak with crumbled blue cheese yields appealing texture combinations that are classic in high-end cuisine. 3. Visual Plating Techniques Maximizing the visual elements of your meal is a key plating technique. While your arrangement develops around your protein, manipulating the colors and sizes of the other elements on your plate enhances your focal point and creates a gourmet presentation. Serve Odd Quantities - If you’re serving small foods like shrimp, scallops, or bite-sized appetizers, always give guests odd quantities. Color Diversity - Colorful dishes build the expectation of a flavorfully complex meal before your patrons take their first bite. Add green vegetables or brightly colored fruits that contrast with your focal point. Monochromatic Meals - Plating color-coded items together visually builds the expectation that the dish only offers one flavor. When the palate receives multiple textures and flavors instead, it surprises the tastebuds, causing them to engage with the dish. Add Height to Your Plate - Stimulate your guests' eyes by building height. While compactly stacking ingredients isn’t as popular as it was 5-10 years ago, building layers of food for guests to explore offers an exciting experience. Create Visual Balance - Balance your plate’s landscape by leaning long, flat items against taller elements (ex: leaning asparagus spears at a 45-degree angle across a stack of lamb lollipops). 4. Sauce Plating Techniques With your principal ingredients plated, you’re ready to top your dish with delicious sauces that enhance your food presentation. Think of your squeeze bottle or spoon as a paintbrush, and your sauce as a medium. Once you're done adding your sauce, make sure you wipe down the edge of your plate with a towel, so no drippings distract from your presentation. We explain some of the simplest, most fail-proof sauce plating techniques below. Smeared Sauce Plating Technique - Fill a squeeze bottle with your sauce. Squeeze a thick layer of sauce and form a large, filled-in circle on your plate. Take a spoon or plating wedge and dip it into the middle of the sauce where it’s thickest. Quickly pull the sauce across your plate. Accent Dots Plating Technique - Fill a squeeze bottle with your desired sauce. Analyze your plate from the perspective of the rule of thirds, then add accent dots. Use multiple sauces to create additional color contrast. Smeared Accent Dots Plating Technique - Alternate between two sauce accent dots in a curved line along the side of your plate. Then, take a small plating wedge and place it at the center of the first accent dot in your row. Drag the plating wedge through the accent dots, creating a multicolored, single-sided edge. Swirled Sauce Plating Technique- Fill a squeeze bottle with your desired sauce. Place your plate atop a cake turntable. Point your squeeze bottle face down at the center of the plate. Spin your stand while simultaneously squeezing your bottle. Adjust your wrist to vary your swirled design. You can use multiple sauces to create more visual contrast. 5. Garnishing Techniques In the past, chefs casually threw a piece of kale and an orange slice onto every plate. However, these garnishes added nothing exciting to the dish, and few guests ate them. Modern garnishes pair thoughtfully with the meal to create flavor bites. Follow these garnishing techniques and guidelines to master the last step of food presentation. Edible Garnishes - As you finish plating, remember that garnishes should always be edible and enhance the dish. To determine whether a garnish belongs, ask yourself whether you would want to consume it in the same bite as the meal it accompanies. Intentional Placement - Never heap garnishes in one corner of the plate. Instead, disperse them thoughtfully to add color or texture. For example, place crispy carrot shoestrings atop a delicate filet of fish nested in a curry sauce and decorate the plate with pomegranate seeds. Less Is More - Never clutter your plate for the sake of a garnish. If your plate is full, opt for a drizzle of flavor-infused vinegar or oil to enhance the taste and appearance of your dish without overcrowding your plate. Garnishes to Avoid - Avoid using unappetizing garnishes like raw herbs, large chunks of citrus, and anything with a strong odor. Also, avoid garnishes that take a long time to apply. Back to Top Food Plating Methods There are three popular plating methods: classic, free form, and landscape. Master each method to create meals worth photographing. We provide ideas on how to plate food using each method below. We’ve selected a white square plate as our canvas. Filet mignon, potato puree, carrots, demi-glace, pea puree, lima bean and pea blend, thyme, and fried leeks are our materials. Classic Plating 1.Pipe the potato puree onto the plate using a pastry bag. 2.Place the carrots next to the puree using precision tongs. 3.Garnish the carrots with thyme using precision tongs. 4.Plate the steak using precision tongs. 5.Garnish the steak with fried leeks using precision tongs. 6.Drizzle the demi-glace around the plate using a spouted saucier. 7.Wipe the edges of the plate with a clean towel. 8.Finished classic plate. Free Form Plating 1.Pipe dots of potato puree onto the plate using a pastry bag. 2.Slice the steak into three pieces using a chef's knife. 3.Plate the pieces of steak using precision tongs. 4.Place the lima bean and pea blend around the plate using a spoon. 5.Plate the carrots using precision tongs. 6.Place dots of pea puree around the plate using a large squeeze bottle. 7.Place dots of the demi-glace around the plate using a small squeeze bottle. 8.Garnish the plate with fried leeks using precision tongs. 9.Wipe the edges of the plate with a clean towel. 10.Finished free-form plate. Landscape Plating 1.Place dots of pea puree around the plate using a large squeeze bottle. 2.Paint the pea puree onto the plate using a brush. 3.Pipe the potato puree onto the plate using a pastry bag. 4.Plate the carrots using precision tongs. 5.Lean the steak against the puree and carrots using precision tongs. 6.Place the lima bean and pea blend around the plate using a spoon. 7.Drizzle the demi-glace around the plate using a spouted saucier. 8.Garnish the steak with fried leeks using precision tongs. 9.Wipe the edges of the plate with a clean towel. 10.Finished landscape plate. Back to Top Plating Tools Having professional tools is essential for commercial plating. We’ve rounded up the foundational items you need to create restaurant-quality food presentations. Decorating brushes aid in detailed line work and broad sauce strokes. You can also use decorating brushes to create a puree or coulis base for meats or vegetables. Garnishing kits come with everything you need to garnish your signature dishes, including plating wedges, tongs, squeeze bottles, and brushes. Molds keep plates clean and increase visual appeal by cutting ingredients to specific shapes and sizes. Ring molds help you develop height and structure when stacking ingredients. Precision tongs help you place garnishes or small, delicate items. Many tongs feature micro-serrations for improved grip and stability. Plating wedges come pre-cut with flat, round, or pointed edges and are perfect for smearing soft ingredients and creating sauce designs. Shavers allow you to top your dishes with shaved or grated chocolate, hard cheese, or soft vegetables. Plating Spoons in varying sizes are essential to the art of food presentation. Saucier spoons help you drag sauce across your plate and slotted spoons quickly separate solids from liquids. Squeeze bottles help you apply sauce and aioli to your finished plate. Many come with adjustable precision control tips. Back to Top Whether you own a fine dining establishment, gastropub, or eclectic cafe, thoughtful plating will attract customers and earn their loyalty. Even before they sample your meal, your guests will eat with their eyes. To test this theory, Oxford researchers plated the same meal two ways, artfully and without attention, and diners reported that the artfully plated version tasted better. By integrating basic food presentation techniques, styles, and tools, you can enhance your plating process and increase your menu prices without deterring customers.
How to Deep Fry a Ham
If you want to try out a new entree this holiday season, a deep fried ham is a tasty alternative to traditional baked ham. Deep frying a ham is just like deep frying a turkey, and the process can be performed very easily with an outdoor fryer kit. Our deep fried ham recipe also includes a sweet and tangy injection marinade. Follow our step-by-step guide for frying a whole ham to create a delicious crispy skin on the outside and juicy, flavorful meat on the inside. Deep Fried Ham Video Watch this video for step-by-step instructions that show you how to inject your ham with marinade and then deep fry it using an outdoor fryer kit. <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=7555&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> Deep Fried Ham Recipe Prep your outdoor deep fryer and get ready to make a deep fried ham with our step-by-step recipe. Equipment for Deep Frying a Ham Outdoor deep fryer Peanut oil (enough to cover a fully submerged ham) Mixing bowl Whisk Marinade injector Deep fry thermometer (usually included with a deep fryer kit) Lint-free towel Large knife Ham Marinade 8 ounces apple cider 1 Tablespoon Coleman’s English mustard 2 Tablespoons dark brown sugar 1 teaspoon garlic powder 2 teaspoons onion powder Steps to Deep Fry a Ham We've provided a step-by-step list with pictures to walk you through our deep fried ham recipe. 1.In a mixing bowl, combine onion powder, garlic powder, brown sugar, mustard, and apple cider. 2.Whisk the mixture until completely dissolved. 3.Add oil to deep fryer, filling stock pot three-quarters of the way full. Leave enough space so oil does not overflow when ham is submerged. Heat oil to 375 degrees Fahrenheit. 4.Fill injector with marinade and inject ham in multiple spots to disperse flavor. Use as much of the marinade as possible. 5.Pat ham with lint-free towel to remove excess moisture. 6.Using a long chef's knife, make a slit that goes all the way through the center of ham. Insert poultry rack into slit. 7.Lower rack into fryer. Cook ham for 7 minutes per pound, or until core temperature of ham is 160 degrees Fahrenheit. 8.Remove ham from fryer and allow excess oil to drain off. Carve ham and enjoy! Deep Fried Ham FAQs We answer the most common deep fried ham questions below: Can You Deep Fry a Ham? Yes, you can deep fry a ham. Deep frying a ham locks in moisture and reduces the threat of overcooking, a common mishap when using a standard oven. Use an outdoor turkey fryer to safely deep fry a whole ham. How Long Does It Take to Deep Fry a Ham? It will take approximately 7 minutes per pound to deep fry a ham. How Long Do You Deep Fry a 10 lb. Ham? At 7 minutes per pound, it will take approximately 1 hour and 10 minutes to deep fry a 10 lb. ham. What Is the Right Temperature for Deep Frying a Ham? For deep frying a ham, the oil should be preheated to 375 degrees Fahrenheit, and the internal temperature of your ham should reach at least 160 degrees Fahrenheit. Does Ham Need to Rest After Cooking? Yes, you should rest a ham for at least 20 minutes after cooking. Just like resting a steak, the cooked ham will reabsorb its juices while it sits. Cutting into the ham too soon will cause the juices to run out and the meat will become dry. Deep frying a whole ham might seem intimidating, but we simplified the process for you with this easy recipe. Impress your guests and create a memorable menu with a mouthwatering deep fried ham this holiday season. If you're looking for other alternatives to a traditional roasted turkey, try a smoked turkey. Learn more about smoking turkeys and other meats in our meat smoking guide!
How to Roll Sushi
Whether it’s raw tuna or deep-fried, tempura-battered shrimp, it seems like everyone has a favorite kind of sushi. This delicious Japanese food tradition, which utilizes ingredients like sushi-grade fish, seaweed, rice, and vegetables, has spread all across the world and is now such a common food trend that you can even pick it up at grocery stores and gas stations. One of the best things about this savory (and sometimes sweet) treat is that despite its small size, it can be made into a filling meal or a light snack, which makes it great for any catered event, party, or cocktail hour. With our step-by-step directions and instructional video, you can learn how to roll sushi and impress your guests. Step-by-Step Instructions for How to Roll Sushi <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=3946&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600" style="user-select: auto;"></iframe> How to Prepare Sushi Rice Before you begin rolling your sushi, you’ll want to make sure that you’ve properly prepped your rice. You’ll want to use either medium or short grain white rice since they both mold together better than other rice options. Before cooking your rice, make sure you rinse it until your water isn’t cloudy. This removes any powdered glucose, talc, or rice powder that may be coating the rice. While it is safe to eat rice without rinsing it, washing it helps to improve the flavor. Pour rice and water into a bowl. For every serving of rice, you'll want to add three times the amount of water, so if you're cooking one cup of rice, add three cups of water. Using your hands, move the rice around to help scrape off the powder coating the rice. Then, pour the rice and water into a mesh strainer to drain the water. You should repeat this process until the cloudy water no longer appears when rinsing your rice. After you’ve cooked your rice, you should let it reach room temperature as this makes it easier to mold into a ball shape. Once your rice has cooled, you’ll want to sprinkle rice vinegar over it since this helps to add extra flavor. Make sure to stir the vinegar around so that it can evenly coat your rice. You’ll also want to use a sashimi knife to cut your rolls, as this will provide you with a more clean and even cut. If you do not have this kind of knife, then it’s important to make sure the blade of the knife you are using is extremely sharp since the nori (seaweed), rice, and filling can be difficult to cut through. How to Roll Hosomaki Hosomaki, also known as thin rolls, is a style of sushi that traditionally only uses one ingredient. For our video, we used cucumber, but you can also use thinly sliced carrots, sweet potatoes, avocados, or tuna. When making this roll, you will only need to use about half a sheet of nori. Since your hands will need to be damp at certain points of the rolling process, you’ll want to have a little bowl of water near your prep area. 1.Place the nori on your cutting board. 2.Fold nori in half and pull apart the halves. 3.With the shiny side facing down, place one half of the nori on a bamboo sushi rolling mat. 4.Spread about a cup of rice across your nori, leaving a ½" border visible. Dip your hands in the water before you spread your rice, but make sure that you shake off any excess water. 5.Place ingredient in the center of your rice. 6.To begin rolling, lift the end of the bamboo mat closest to you and fold it over your sushi ingredient. 7.Using the bamboo mat, tuck the end of the nori into the rice and ingredient. Make sure that you have a tight roll. 8.Lift away the mat from your roll, and dab water along the exposed edge of nori. 9.Using your bamboo mat, roll your sushi into the exposed edge of nori to close. 10.Pinch your sushi roll with the mat to make sure that the seams are tightly sealed. 11.Using a wet, sharp knife, begin cutting into your sushi. Make sure to wipe off your knife in between each cut. You should have six pieces. 12.Plate your sushi with a side of ginger and wasabi. How to Roll Futomaki Unlike its smaller counterpart, a futomaki uses a full sheet of nori and traditionally has four or more ingredients rolled in it. While a standard non-vegetarian futomaki will come with egg omelet, fish roe, chopped tuna, and whitefish flakes, this recipe can easily be modified into a vegetarian or vegan version. In this video, we used fresh cucumber, carrots, and avocado. 1.With the shiny side down, place the nori on your bamboo mat. 2.Spread about a cup of rice across your nori, leaving a ½" border visible. Dip your hands in the water before you spread your rice, but make sure that you shake off any excess water. 3.Place ingredients in the center of your rice. 4.To roll, follow steps 6-9 from the hosomaki rolling instructions. 5.Pinch your sushi roll with the mat to make sure that the seams are tightly sealed. 6.Using a wet, sharp knife, begin cutting into the center of your roll to make two halves. 7.Cut the halves into thirds, wiping off the knife between each cut. 8.Plate your sushi with a side of ginger, wasabi, and soy sauce. How to Roll Uramaki (Inside-Out) Roll A uramaki, commonly known as the “inside-out” roll, is one of the most common sushi rolls in America. Many believe that its popularity comes from the fact that the rice on the outside conceals the nori, making it less intimidating to sushi beginners. While there are no traditional ingredients in a uramaki, one of the most well-known styles is the California roll, which usually consists of cucumber, avocado, and crab meat or imitation crab. 1.Lay a piece of plastic wrap on your cutting board. Place your bamboo mat on top of it. 2.Take the plastic wrap and wrap it around your mat. 3.Place your nori on your mat with the shiny side up. Then add about a cup of balled-up rice. 4.Spread the rice evenly across your nori leaving an inch border at the top. 5.Sprinkle sesame seeds over your rice. 6.Gently lift your nori and rice and flip it over so that the rice is now facing the mat. 7.Add your ingredients. 8.Begin rolling with your fingers pinching the nori to the mat. You may also need to use your other fingers to keep your ingredients in place. 9.Once you’ve begun rolling, pull back your mat and nori to make sure that your roll is tight. 10.Using your bamboo mat, squeeze your roll. 11.Unroll your bamboo mat to dab some water onto the exposed edge of your nori. 12.Take your bamboo mat and begin rolling your sushi into the edge of the nori. Then take the mat and squeeze to make sure that the seams are tightly sealed. 13.Using a wet, sharp knife, begin cutting into the center of your roll to make two halves. 14.Cut the halves into thirds, wiping off the knife between each cut. 15.Plate your sushi with a side of ginger, wasabi, and soy sauce. How to Roll Temaki (Hand Roll) Temaki, also known as a “hand roll”, is a cone-shaped piece of nori that has ingredients spilling out of the top. Since this sushi is larger than most rolls, it is eaten with your hands instead of chopsticks. Think of it as a sushi ice-cream cone. Since the idea of temaki is to have ingredients coming out of the opening, there’s no limit to how many ingredients you can add to this roll. The temaki in this video features spicy shrimp and spring mix. 1.Rip about 1/3 of your nori, leaving yourself with the 2/3 size sheet. 2.With the shiny side down, place ½ cup of rice in the upper left corner of your nori. 3.Place the ingredients on top of the rice. 4.Take the upper left corner of your nori and roll it in towards your ingredients. 5.Continue tightly rolling your nori. 6.Plate with a side of ginger, wasabi, and soy sauce.
How to Cook Steak in a Cast Iron Skillet
Cast iron skillets are a popular choice for cooking because they gradually build up seasoning over use, they can be used both on the range and in the oven, and they're easy to clean and maintain. Cooking a steak on a cast iron skillet is ideal because it helps give your steak a flavorful and crisp crust. Additionally, with cast iron skillets, you have the option to finish your steak in the oven. In this article we'll cover cooking steak in a cast iron skillet, finding the optimal cooking times for steak, and answering your frequently asked questions about cooking steak. Shop All Cast Iron Skillet What Temperature Should You Cook Your Steak To? Whether you prefer your steak rare, well done, or somewhere in between, this chart will show you the optimal internal temperature and cooking time, resulting in a perfectly done steak. Doneness Temp Turning Point 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 1 3/4" 2" Rare 125°F First Side 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 7 min 8 min 10 min Second Side 3 min 4 min 5 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min Medium Rare 135°F First Side 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 8 min 9 min 11 min Second Side 4 min 5 min 6 min 6 min 7 min 7 min 9 min Medium / Medium Well 150°F First Side 6 min 7 min 8 min 8 min 9 min 9 min 12 min Second Side 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 7 min 8 min 10 min Well Done 160°F First Side 9 min 10 min 11 min 12 min 13 min 14 min 15 min Second Side 7 min 8 min 9 min 10 min 11 min 12 min 13 min How to Prepare Your Steak First, add oil to your cast iron skillet and begin heating it on high until the oil shimmers and begins to smoke slightly. While your pan is heating up, season both sides of your steak liberally with salt and pepper. Allow your pan to get good and hot, as this is key to keeping the meat from sticking to the skillet. Step-by-Step Instructions Once you've seasoned the meat and heated your pan, you are ready to place your steak into the cast iron skillet. Be sure to do so gently to avoid making a mess or bruising the meat. 1.Pick the steak up by the bone to avoid tearing the meat and slowly lower it into the pan. 2.Flip your steak using tongs every few minutes. Make sure to also cook the sides. You can do this by pressing each of the steak's edges down against the skillet for a few seconds. 3.Use a spoon to baste your steak in the oil and its own juices. 4.Use a thermometer to check the temperature of the meat. This will help you cook your steak to the desired degree of doneness. 5.Place aromatics and a tab of butter in your cast iron skillet. Spoon your aromatics and generous amounts of butter over the meat as it cooks. 6.Remove your steak from the pan and allow it to rest on a plate or cutting board for 10 minutes. 7.If you need to cut the steak into smaller pieces, use a fork to hold it and a sharp chef's knife to slice from the meat's center out to its edges. Other Frequently Asked Questions Here are answers to some frequently asked questions about how to cook steak in a cast iron skillet: How Do I Avoid Hot Spots in My Cast Iron Skillet? While it is commonly assumed that using cast iron cookware produces even heat and consistent cooking, this is not always the case. Be sure to always choose a skillet that is the same size as the burner you are using to cook the steak, as this helps eliminate hot spots. What Type of Oil Should I use for Cooking My Steak? When cooking steak in cast iron skillets, you want to use a type of oil that has a high smoke point. For example, peanut oil, canola oil, grapeseed oil, and avocado oil are ideal options for cooking steak due to their high smoke points. How Hot Should My Cast Iron Skillet Be? You don't need to worry about the specific temperature, but you do want your pan to be smoking hot, which is the point at which the oil begins to smoke. Depending on the thickness of your cast iron pan, this may take 5-8 minutes on high heat. Should I Cook My Steak Covered or Uncovered? We do not recommend covering steak while cooking it in a cast iron skillet as it will trap steam inside and prevent a crust from forming on your steak. How Can I Prevent My Cast Iron Skillet from Smoking? Some smoke is inevitable, but it shouldn't fill your kitchen. To reduce the amount of smoke, start with oil, rather than butter. We recommend around 1/2 cup for a 12-inch skillet. A few minutes before you finish cooking your steak, add butter and aromatics. Doing so will enhance the flavor and color of your steak without too much smoking and before the milk proteins in the butter begin to burn. Should I See Fire? You should never see fire when cooking in a cast iron skillet. If your pan catches fire, place salt or baking soda on the flames, remove your pan from the burner, and cover it with a lid. Cooking steak in a cast iron skillet is ideal because it can help your steak develop a crispy and aromatic crust while the interior remains juicy and tender. Additionally, you can cook a perfect steak every time by following our simple steps and reading through our list of frequently asked questions.
How to Spatchcock a Chicken
Cooking a whole chicken can make for a juicier, more satisfying end product. In order to get the meat to cook evenly, you need to cut the chicken so it lays flat. This is a method called spatchcocking, and it's the best method for grilling or roasting a whole bird. To do this, all you need is your bird, your cutting board, a knife or kitchen shears, and these instructions, and you’ll be on your way to spatchcocking a chicken. For other ways to prepare chicken, check out our video on how to debone a chicken. Step-by-Step Instructions for how to Spatchcock a Chicken 1.Lay the chicken breast-side down with its legs towards you. Locate the backbone running straight down the middle. 2.Begin cutting along one side of the backbone down the entire length of the chicken. Do the same on the other side to fully remove the backbone. You can discard the backbone or keep it to make delicious homemade chicken stock. 3.Make a 1/2” slit through the cartilage in front of the keel bone. 4.Crack open the skin around the keel bone by folding the chicken outward. The keel bone is another name for the breastbone and is found at the front of the bird, opposite the backbone. 5.Remove the keel bone by breaking the delicate skin on either side with your finger and pulling it out. 6.Flip the chicken over. It should now be pretty flat. 7.Tuck the wings under the breasts.It is now ready to season and cook!
Menu Design
How to Write a Menu Describing Your Food
The words used to describe the food on your menu are just as critical as food presentation. It can mean the difference in converting people browsing the internet for places to eat to new customers or in upselling your more expensive menu items. There are many words to describe food that help convey its taste, texture, and preparation method in an appealing manner. Use our list of food adjectives below to find the best way to describe the food on your menu. Words to Describe Taste The flavor of food is what customers focus on most when they are deciding what to eat. How you engineer your menu can help build anticipation, and a good food description could convince a hesitant customer to try something new. With this in mind, be precise and thorough when choosing words to describe your food's flavor. Here are some words used to describe the taste of food: Acidic: Food with a sharp taste. Often used to refer to tart or sour foods as well. Bitter: A tart, sharp, and sometimes harsh flavor. Bittersweet: A less harsh taste than bitterness. Couples tartness with sweetness. Briny: Another word for salty. Often used to describe pickled foods. Citrusy: A bright flavor like that of lemons, limes, oranges, and other citrus fruits. Cooling: A taste that mimics the feeling of cold temperature. Often used to describe mint. Earthy: Reminiscent of fresh soil. Often used to describe red wines, root vegetables, and mushrooms. Fiery: A taste that feels as though it gives off heat. Another word for spicy. Fresh: A light and crisp taste. Often used to describe produce or herbs. Fruity: Any taste reminiscent of sweet fruit flavors. Full-bodied: Rich flavor that can feel heavy in the mouth. Often used to describe wines. Herbal: A bright, fresh, or sometimes earthy taste created by the incorporation of herbs. Honeyed: A sweet or candied taste that may be reminiscent of honey. Nutty: Any taste similar to the flavors of nuts. Often used to describe cheeses. Rich: A full, heavy flavor. Often used to describe foods containing cream. Robust: A rich taste with some earthiness. Often used to describe wines or aged liquors. Savory: An umami taste. Often used to describe meaty, earthy foods and broths. Sharp: A harsh, bitter, or tart taste. Often used to describe acidic foods. Smoky: A smoky taste is reminiscent of the smell of smoke. Sour: A biting, tangy, tart flavor. Spicy: A burning taste from hot spices. Sweet: A sugary flavor. Tangy: A tart, biting taste that feels tingly in the mouth. Tart: A sharp, bitter, or sour flavor. Often used to describe acidic foods. Yeasty: An earthy taste reminiscent of yeast. Often used to describe beer and bread. Woody: An earthy, sometimes nutty taste. Often used to describe coffees or cheeses. Zesty: A fresh, vivid, or invigorating flavor. Words to Describe Texture Another consideration when describing your food is texture. Properly using food adjectives to describe mouthfeel helps your guests to imagine what it will be like to eat your food before they order it. Here are some words used to describe the texture of food: Airy: A light, pillowy texture often created by the incorporation of air. Buttery: A smooth and creamy texture similar to that of butter. Chewy: The texture of food that needs to be chewed thoroughly before swallowing. Can be light and bouncy or heavy and sticky. Creamy: A smooth and rich texture that usually comes from the incorporation of dairy. Crispy: A light texture with a slight crunch. Crumbly: The texture of food with a loose structure that falls apart into small pieces or crumbs. Crunchy: A firm, crisp texture often identified by the sharp, audible noise that the food makes when being eaten. Crusty: The texture of food with a hard outer layer and soft interior. Delicate: A light, fine texture that may come apart easily. Doughy: A soft and heavy texture that is often coupled with pale coloring. Fizzy: A texture brought on by the presence of many small bubbles, usually referring to carbonated liquids. Flaky: A light texture characterized by layers that come apart during eating. Fluffy: A light and airy texture. Gooey: A viscous, sometimes sticky texture arising from the presence of moisture in a dense solid food. Hearty: A firm, robust texture. Juicy: A succulent, tender texture characterized by the presence of liquid in solid food. Silky: A fine, smooth texture characterized by a sleek feel in the mouth. Sticky: A texture characterized by gluiness in the mouth. Smooth: A consistent texture free of grit, lumps, or indentations. Succulent: A tender, juicy texture. Tender: A soft texture that is easy to break down. Velvety: A smooth and rich texture. Words to Describe Food Preparation Method Describing how your food is prepared will give customers a better picture of its flavor, texture, and appearance. Here are some words that indicate preparation and cooking methods: Baked: Food cooked in an oven, often resulting in a browned or crispy outer coating. Blanched: Food scalded in boiling water and then moved to cold water to stop cooking. Results in a softened texture. Blackened: Food dipped in butter and coated with spices before being cooked in a hot pan, resulting in a blackened appearance. Braised: Food that is briefly fried in a small amount of fat and then slowly stewed in a covered pot. Results in a seared, crispy exterior coupled with a tender interior texture. Breaded: A breaded food is coated with a breadcrumb mixture or batter that is then baked or fried into a crispy outer layer. Broiled: Food cooked with intense radiant heat, as in an oven or on a grill. Often results in a darkened appearance and crispy texture. Caramelized: Food slow-cooked until it is browned, nutty, and sweeter. Charred: Food that is grilled, roasted, or broiled and gains a blackened exterior and smoky flavor. Fermented: Food introduced to bacteria, yeast, or another microorganism to produce organic acids, alcohols, or gases. May result in a pungent, biting flavor. Fried: Food that is cooked by submerging partially or fully into hot oil. Often results in a crispy or crunchy texture and golden color. Glazed: Food with a flavorful coating dripped or brushed onto its surface. May result in a glossy appearance and thin, crisp outer layer. Infused: Food steeped in liquid with another ingredient to extract the flavor of the ingredient. Often used with herbs. Marinated: Food (usually meat) that has been soaked in liquid containing flavorful ingredients like herbs, spices, vinegar, and oil. Poached: Food that has been cooked in nearly boiling liquid. Often results in a tender, moist texture. Roasted: Food that has been cooked with dry heat in an oven or over a fire. Often results in a browned exterior and crisp coating. Sauteed: Food that has been cooked quickly in a small amount of fat. Seared: Food that is cooked in a small amount of fat until caramelized and then finished by roasting, grilling, or another method. Results in a crisp outer texture and tender interior. Smoked: Smoked food is food that is cooked or preserved by long exposure to smoke from smoldering wood. Results in a distinctive, bold flavor. Whipped: Food that has been beaten to incorporate air. Often results in a light, fluffy texture. Positive Food Adjectives Describing food with words that have a negative connotation can accidentally influence your customers into passing over a menu item. Before you use a descriptor word in your menu, take a moment to think about how that word is commonly perceived. Does it bring a positive image to mind, or is it unappetizing? Instead, use adjectives synonymous with the negative word with a more positive connotation. They are often more specific and give customers a more precise visual of the item. Here are some examples of negative descriptive words and positive food adjectives you can use to replace them: Dry vs. crispy: Chicken with a dry breading compared to Chicken with a crispy breading Greasy vs. velvety: Pasta in a greasy sauce compared to Pasta in a velvety sauce Sugary vs. honeyed: Pears with a sugary drizzle compared to Pears with a honeyed drizzle Burned vs. blackened: Burned salmon compared to Blackened salmon Tough vs. hearty: A piece of tough bread compared to A piece of hearty bread Mushy vs. tender: A mushy crabcake compared to A tender crabcake When searching for the right words to describe the food on your menu, remember that you have plenty of options to describe its taste and appearance. Use words appealing enough to catch a customer's eye, common enough to explain your food at a glance, and specialized enough that you don't have to resort to cliches. Next time you add a new dish or want to overhaul your menu, consider how a food's description can be a tool for attracting new customers and higher profits.
Restaurant Menu Pricing
Menu pricing is the engine behind your company's success, as sales are your restaurant's sole source of revenue. When creating or updating your menu, it's important to keep in mind that pricing for food directly impacts your ability to fund essential aspects of your business, including equipment, utilities, labor, ingredients, and more. Follow our tips below to effectively price your menu for maximal profits: Calculating Menu Prices with Food Cost Percentage Calculating Menu Prices with Gross Profit Margin Essential Tactics to Price Your Menu Menu Psychology: Selling Your High-Profit Items How to Price a Menu Item To ensure that your menu items are priced in a way that will make your business profitable but won't scare away customers, you'll want to look at your food cost percentages, gross profit margins, and other pricing strategies. Keep reading to find the tools you need to set appropriate menu prices. How to Calculate Restaurant Menu Prices Based on Ideal Food Cost Percentage Whether you’re just starting a restaurant or simply want to update your menu pricing, follow the steps below to create a base price for each item according to your ideal food cost percentage. Choose your ideal food cost percentage. Your food cost percentage is the portion of sales spent on food. The average food cost percentage for most restaurants is in the range of 25-35%. Many restaurants aim to lower their food costs which will naturally turn more of your sales into pure profit. Determine the raw food cost of the menu item. For example, if you are serving a chicken Caesar salad dish, add up the total cost of the chicken, dressing, lettuce, parmesan cheese, and anything other ingredients used to make the dish. Raw food cost is similar to your cost of goods sold (COGS). Calculate your price. Use the following equation: Price = Raw Food Cost of Item / Ideal Food Cost Percentage. You can slightly alter the price to make it a rounder or cleaner number. In the example below, you could change it to a number such as $14.50. Example: Say your ideal food cost percentage is 28%, and your raw food cost is $4. The complete equation will be as follows: $14.29 (Price) = $4.00 (Raw Food Cost of Item) / 28% (Ideal Food Cost Percentage). The price you will use for your menu will be $14.29. Back to Top How to Calculate Restaurant Menu Prices According to Ideal Gross Profit Margin You can also determine menu prices with your desired gross profit margin for that item. Calculating restaurant menu prices in this way allows you to better predict and understand your bottom line. Below we show you how to use your ideal gross profit margin to come up with a menu price. Choose your ideal gross profit margin. Gross profit margin is a percentage that represents the profit made from your sales. A 40% gross profit margin on a dish means that a restaurant earns 40 cents on the dollar for this specific dish. The rest goes towards the cost of the ingredients and your restaurant’s other expenses. Calculate your price. Use the following equation to find your price based on your desired ideal gross profit margin: Ideal Gross Profit Margin = (Menu Price – Raw Food Cost) / Menu Price Example: Say your ideal gross profit margin is 72%, and the raw food cost is $4. Your equation would appear as follows: 72% = (Menu Price – $4/) Menu Price. The complete equation after solving for the menu price will look like the following: 72% = $14.5 - $4 / $14.50. In this example, the price you will choose for your menu is $14.50. How to Calculate the Gross Profit Margin of Your Existing Menu Prices If you already have your menu prices set, you can calculate the gross profit margin for each item on your menu with the same equation: Choose an item on your menu. Insert the price of the item into the equation. Gross Profit Margin = (Menu Price – Raw Cost)/Menu Price Example: Say your menu price for a chicken Caesar salad is $14.50 and your raw food cost is $4. ($14.50 - $4)/$14.50 = 72% Gross Profit Margin. This restaurant earns 72 cents on the dollar for every Caesar salad, which is quite a high gross profit margin. Gross Profit Margins Determine Your Bottom Line Gross profit is an essential part of the equation that determines your net profit, otherwise known as your bottom line. The equation below shows you how to determine your net profit: Gross Profit – (Labor Cost + Operating Costs) = Net Profit/Loss As you can see, the greater your gross profit, the more you may have left over after deducting labor and operating costs. Therefore, it’s important to make sure you have high-profit items and to sell these items specifically. Back to Top Restaurant Pricing Strategies You can employ a number of other tactics to boast a greater overall profit from your menu. Items with high gross profit margins and low food cost percentages will yield more money for your restaurant and help you cover your overhead costs. However, depending on your type of restaurant, your competitor's price, and the demand for the food item, you can choose a more fitting menu price. Below are 2 tactics to create the most effective menu pricing. 1. Competition Pricing Method This method utilizes the prices of your local competition or in the general market as a baseline to consider your price. Based on your type of restaurant, you can choose from the following competition-driven methods: Price your item the same as your competitor’s. This is most effective if your restaurant is mainly competing based on your unique brand. Price your item lower than your competitor's. This is ideal if you operate a more casual restaurant or if it caters to those looking for a cost-effective alternative. Price your item higher than your competitor’s. If your restaurant is a high-end, upscale spot or if it attracts a demographic of diners looking for high quality, a higher price gives off the necessary impression. 2. Demand-Driven Pricing Method Based on the demand for your restaurant and specific food options, you can potentially raise prices. If you have an enticing ambiance and brand or if your restaurant offers unique and especially delicious food options, you can raise your prices. The demand for your business will naturally be higher because you offer food and/or an atmosphere that guests cannot get elsewhere. For example, places like sports stadiums, amusement parks, zoos, and airports can raise their prices, since customers do not have the option of going elsewhere for food. As such, the demand is high. Menu Prices Ultimately Depend on Your Restaurant Type In general, your restaurant menu prices should reflect your type of restaurant and your target demographic. In this way, your prices are cohesive with your brand, formality level, and food. Guests will appreciate it if your price matches the value of your specific restaurant, and they will also be more likely to return. Back to Top Menu Psychology: How to Sell High Gross Profit Margin Items Using menu psychology and menu engineering, you have a greater chance of selling your high gross profit margin items. Below are some tips to focus on these items, though we always recommended taking a more in-depth look at menu psychology methods. Draw attention to high-profit menu items. According to studies, customers are likely to order one of the first items they notice on the menu. As such, it’s essential to direct your guests’ attention to your high-profit margin items right away. Use graphics and colors. Guide the attention of your guests towards your high-profit items with a graphic, colored or shaded box, or border. However, only highlight one or two items per category on your menu to avoid an overwhelming menu appearance. List profitable items first and last. In each section on your menu, place your profitable items at the top and bottom of the list. Studies show that people more often notice and order the top two or last item in a section. Format the menu with the Golden Triangle. Place high-profit margin items in the center, top right, and top left corner of your menu. This is called “The Golden Triangle” by psychologists, and it refers to the places our eyes tend to go when first looking at a menu. In addition to utilizing menu engineering and menu psychology, you can also have your servers point out and describe certain dishes over others to entice guests to choose those items. Back to Top Menu Pricing Review Test your menu pricing knowledge with our review question below: Which of the following statements about restaurant pricing methods is true? You can find your ideal gross profit margin by subtracting your raw food cost from your menu price and dividing that number by your menu pricing. The two main restaurant pricing methods are competition pricing and demand-driven pricing. You can calculate your ideal menu item price by dividing your raw food cost by your ideal food cost percentage. All of the above <!-- STATES --> <nav class="accordion accordion--arrows"> <label class="box__title" for="cb1">Click to Reveal Answer</label> <label class="box__close" for="acc-close"></label> D. All of the above. Along with common pricing strategies, such as competition and demand-driven pricing, restaurants use their ideal food costs and gross profit margins to set the prices of menu items. </nav> Whether you run a busy diner, casual cafe, or upscale bistro, knowing how to price a menu for a restaurant is a must-have skill. Sales are the most important factor when it comes to whether or not your business turns a profit, and shrewd restaurant menu pricing is key to success.
Pizza & Sandwich Shop Tips
How to Use a Pizza Stone
There's nothing quite like freshly made pizza. However, whether you manage a restaurant or pizza shop, it can be hard to get the crust to crisp up just right without a pizza oven. One effective pizza tool you can use to achieve that satisfying, crispy crust is a pizza stone, which is a flat, hard disc that’s usually made of ceramic or stone. The surface is very porous, so it absorbs the excess moisture from the dough baking on top of it, leaving it crispy. In addition to pizza, these stones can be used to make cookies, biscuits, and bread. All you need is your stone and this guide, and you can start making foods with a lighter, crispier texture that are sure to be a hit. Shop All Pizza Stones For a visual representation of how to use a pizza stone, check out the video below. <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=3833&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600"></iframe> Step-by-Step Instructions on How to Use a Pizza Stone 1.Put your pizza stone in the oven when both are at room temperature. 2.Preheat oven to 500 degrees Fahrenheit. Pizza stones should always be warmed up and cooled down gradually. Otherwise, they may crack due to thermal shock. 3.Prepare the pizza while you're waiting for the oven to heat up. 4.When the oven is ready, use a cornmeal-dusted pizza peel to slide the pizza on the hot stone in the oven. If you have trouble with your pizzas sticking to the stone, dust the pizza stone with cornmeal before putting the pizza on it, or use a pizza screen for the first half of the cooking process. 5.Bake the pizza for 10-15 minutes. 6.Remove your pizza using the pizza peel. Leave the pizza stone in the oven. 7.Turn your oven off and let the pizza stone cool down inside. 8.When you're done, brush the pizza stone off with a wire bristle brush to clean it. Because the stone is extremely porous, it should never get wet or be cleaned with chemicals, unless specifically stated by the manufacturer's instructions. If cheese or other foods get stuck on, leave the oven on high until the unwanted food burns and can be brushed off. It's normal for the stone to have stains or marks that don't come off.
Types of Pizza Ovens
If you're starting a pizzeria, the most important investment you'll make is your pizza oven. While individual models vary, there are five types of commercial pizza ovens: brick, conveyor, deck, convention, and countertop. These five types categorize models of varying sizes and capabilities. Understanding how the different types of pizza ovens operate, their heating method, as well as their average cost, production volume, and dimensions helps you narrow your search. Shop All Commercial Pizza Ovens Click any of the sections below to learn about the different pizza oven types: Brick Pizza Oven Conveyor Pizza Oven Pizza Deck Oven Convection Pizza Oven Countertop Pizza Oven Pizza Oven Comparison Charts What Is the Best Commercial Pizza Oven? Foodservice professionals agree brick ovens are the best commercial pizza oven model. While it’s natural to want the best commercial pizza oven, you also need to consider your pizza order volume, budget, kitchen size, and the types of pizza you want to make. Use our guide to discover the best commercial pizza oven for your business. Be sure to check out our commercial pizza oven reviews as well! Different Types of Pizza Ovens The different types of pizza ovens are distinguished by three main factors: how they operate, how much space they require, and how much they cost. We break down everything you need to know about each of the five pizza oven types so you can make an informed decision about the benefits and challenges of investing in each. 1. Brick Pizza Oven Designed to cook pizzas slowly and evenly, brick pizza ovens are heated by burning wood and imbue pizzas with smoky flavors. The bricks take a long time to heat, but once they’re hot, brick pizza ovens maintain high temperatures. You can design your brick pizza oven as an outdoor pizza oven. Outdoor pizza ovens offer the same wood-burning, artisan flavors as indoor models but usually take up less space. They’re perfect for pizzerias with attractive patio spaces and they elevate the menu of any wine garden. Brick Pizza Oven Fast Facts Brick Pizza Oven Pizzas Per Hour – Approximately 80 Brick Pizza Oven Cook Time – 2-5 Minutes Brick Pizza Oven Heating Method – Convection, Reflection, and Conduction Heat Brick Pizza Oven Preheat Time – 45-60 Minutes Brick Pizza Oven Cost – Custom made, so cost varies by contractor, size, and materials. The Best Types of Pizza to Cook in a Brick Pizza Oven – California-Style, New York, Neapolitan, Chicago, and Sicilian Brick Pizza Oven Production Volume Most brick pizza ovens can hold 10-12 pizzas at a time and can fully cook a pizza in less than five minutes. You can avoid heat recovery time by maintaining your brick oven’s fire. Most brick pizza ovens only have one cooking platform which limits their cooking space. They’re a reliable pizza oven for medium-sized operations, but high-volume pizzerias would do well to choose a conveyor oven. Brick Pizza Oven Dimensions Most brick pizza oven dimensions range from 150 cubic ft to 400 cubic ft., but they’re custom-designed to fit each location. Brick pizza ovens often reach from floor to ceiling and sit atop bases as large as 30 square feet. Restaurants use brick ovens for both function and presentation. A brick pizza oven serves as a centerpiece attraction and is usually built where customers can watch and appreciate it in action. Back to Top 2. Conveyor Pizza Oven A conveyor oven churns out pizzas as fast as you can make them on a continuous cooking platform. Place the pizza on the conveyor belt, and the oven does the rest of the work by pulling it through at a set speed. Some models increase production capacity by stacking up to four conveyor ovens on top of each other. Conveyor ovens are the best option in settings where efficiency is the biggest priority, and you can purchase the gas or electric hookup style your business requires. Conveyor Deck Pizza Oven Fast Facts Conveyor Deck Pizza Oven Pizza Per Hour – 75-100 per deck Conveyor Deck Pizza Oven Cook Time – 4-5 Minutes Conveyor Deck Pizza Oven Heating Method – Convection or Radiant Heat Conveyor Deck Pizza Oven Preheat Time – 10-15 Minutes Conveyor Deck Pizza Oven Cost – $5,000-$30,000 The Best Types of Pizza to Cook in a Conveyor Deck Pizza Oven – New York and Neapolitan Conveyor Deck Pizza Oven Production Volume Each deck on a large conveyor oven produces approximately 100 pizzas an hour. Medium-sized conveyor deck ovens typically produce 75 pizzas per deck each hour. It takes conveyor deck ovens four to five minutes to cook a pizza. Because the pizzas are passing under or through the constant heating elements, there is no time lost for heat recovery. Conveyor Deck Pizza Oven Dimensions Conveyor deck pizza oven dimensions range from 100 cubic ft. to 180 cubic ft., and most are wide enough to fit two large pizzas side by side. Restaurants need a lot of floor space to house a conveyor oven and accommodate the extended conveyor belts at their entrance and exit. A single-stack conveyor oven requires up to 150 cubic feet (about half the volume of a storage unit), while triple-stack ovens often take over 330 cubic feet (about the volume of a storage unit) of floor space. Back to Top 3. Pizza Deck Oven Because their hot stone decks directly heat the pizza crust, cooking the dough completely without charring the toppings, pizza deck ovens are ideal for cooking pizza pies. Deck ovens also employ radiant heat, which sends infrared heat waves to warm the pizza throughout, preventing burned crusts and unmelted cheese. Deck ovens are a great long-term investment because they last many years, even decades, and hold their resale value. Maintaining a pizza deck oven is easy, just scrub burn marks on the decks and wipe down the outside. Since they have no moving parts, pizza deck ovens rarely require professional repairs. Pizza Deck Oven Fast Facts Pizza Deck Oven Pizza Per Hour – Approximately 50 pizzas per deck Pizza Deck Oven Cook Time – 6-8 Minutes Pizza Deck Oven Heating Method – Conduction and Radiant Heat Pizza Deck Oven Preheat Time – Approximately 60 Minutes Pizza Deck Oven Cost – $5,000-$30,000 The Best Types of Pizza to Cook in a Pizza Deck Oven – New York, Chicago, Sicilian, and Neapolitan Pizza Deck Oven Production Volume On average, each pizza deck holds four to six pizzas and produces 50 pies an hour. Baking times range between six and eight minutes. Pizza deck ovens are not a hands-off cooking method. Your staff will need to monitor the pizzas while they cook and move them around, so you may lose time to heat recovery and run out of space. Some models overcome the inherent lack of cooking space by offering multiple stacked decks. Pizza deck ovens can have anywhere from one to six decks. Pizza Deck Oven Dimensions Pizza deck oven dimensions range from 100 to 180 cubic feet. They’re ideal for medium-sized pizzerias, since a high-capacity, four-deck oven requires approximately 160 cubic feet of space. While their overall size rivals conveyor ovens, pizza deck ovens have stacked designs that require more vertical space than horizontal. Back to Top 4. Convection Pizza Oven Commercial pizza convection ovens circulate hot air, cooking every side of the pizza at once. Since the heat is coming from the circulating air, convection pizza ovens typically brown cheese toppings before they finish cooking the pizza dough. Since they are the least expensive to purchase and maintain, non-pizzerias do well to save money with commercial pizza ovens. By using a pizza stone in a conviction oven, one can even simulate the results of a brick pizza oven. By cleaning the inside daily and the intake fan weekly, you can cut down on replacement or repair costs. Convection Pizza Oven Fast Facts Convection Pizza Oven Pizza Per Hour – Approximately 40 pizzas per chamber Convection Pizza Oven Cook Time – 5-6 Minutes Convection Pizza Oven Heating Method – Convection Heat Convection Pizza Oven Preheat Time – 15-20 Minutes Convection Pizza Oven Cost – $1,000-$10,000 The Best Types of Pizza to Cook in a Convection Pizza Oven – New York and Neapolitan Convection Pizza Oven Production Volume On average, convection pizza ovens produce 40 pizzas per chamber each hour. Most models have two to five racks per chamber and can fit one or two 16" pizzas on each rack. It usually takes a convection oven five to six minutes to cook one pizza. Cook times vary depending on the temperature and the number of pizzas in the oven. You will lose some heat when you open the door to remove your pizzas, but most convection ovens counter this effect and minimize heat recovery time. Commercial convection ovens are best suited to restaurants that want pizza as a menu option but aren’t pizza-focused. Convection Pizza Oven Dimensions Most convection pizza ovens require 15 to 60 cubic feet, making them the ideal choice for restaurants with limited space. Some convection pizza ovens have a narrow width and an elevated height to reserve precious floor space for other pizza shop equipment and storage. Back to Top 5. Countertop Pizza Oven You can save money and space by purchasing a countertop version of convection, conveyor, and deck ovens. While the number of pizzas a countertop pizza oven makes per hour varies widely by oven type, they all produce fewer pizzas than their full-sized counterparts. Most countertop pizza ovens are electric, so you can install them anywhere there is an electrical hookup or outlet. Not only do countertop pizza ovens save floor space, but you can also stack them on top of each other or other pieces of equipment to save valuable countertop space as well. They are the ideal choice of equipment for food trucks and concession stands. Types of Countertop Pizza Ovens – Convection, Conveyor, and Deck Countertop Pizza Oven Cook Times – Countertop pizza ovens yield compatible cook times to their full-sized versions. Countertop Pizza Oven Preheat Time – Approximately 12 minutes but varies by oven style. Countertop Pizza Oven Cost – $100-$11,000 The Best Types of Pizza to Cook in a Countertop Pizza Oven – New York, Neapolitan, Heating Frozen Pizza Back to Top Comparison Chart of Pizza Oven Efficiencies Oven TypePizzas Produced/ HourSizeCostHeating MethodPreheat TimeCooking TimeOperator Skill Level Convection40 / chamber15 ft<sup>3</sup>-60 ft<sup>3</sup>$1,000-$10,000Convection heat15-20 minutes5-6 minutesLow Conveyor80 / belt150 ft<sup>3</sup>-300 ft<sup>3</sup>$5,000-$30,000Convection or radiant heat10-15 minutes4-5 minutesLow-Medium Deck50 / deck100 ft<sup>3</sup>-180 ft<sup>3</sup>$5,000-$30,000Conduction and radiant heat60 minutes6-8 minutesMedium-High Brick80 / deck150 ft<sup>3</sup>-400 ft<sup>3</sup> or moreLargely varies by contractor, size, materials, and aesthetic designConvection, reflection, and conduction heat45-60 minutes2-5 minutesHigh How to Make Different Types of Pizza: The Best Oven for Each Oven TypePizza StyleTopping LevelCrust Thickness ConvectionNew York and NeapolitanLight and Medium ToppingsThin and Medium Crusts ConveyorNew York and NeapolitanLight and Medium ToppingsThin and Medium Crusts DeckNew York, Neapolitan, Chicago, and SicilianLight and Heavy ToppingsAll Crusts BrickCalifornia-Style, New York, Neapolitan, Chicago, and SicilianLight and Heavy ToppingsAll Crusts Back to Top By taking your operational needs and financial requirements into consideration, you can find the best commercial pizza oven for your business. Whether you need a steady stream of pizzas or want to diversify your menu with a couple of pies, there is an ideal pizza maker for your needs.
Restaurant Management
How to Become a Chef
Becoming a chef is a dream for many individuals with a passion for food and a desire to create culinary masterpieces. Regardless of whether you are just considering the start of your culinary journey or looking to advance your career in the food service industry, there are several steps you can take to become a chef. Below we’ll provide the most important information you need to know to become a chef, including exploring the requirements for becoming a chef, the various career paths available in the culinary industry, and the essential skills and qualities that can set you apart in this competitive field. Shop All Chef Clothing & Apparel Use these links to learn more about how to become a professional chef: What Skills Do You Need to Be a Chef? Chef Education Requirements What Does a Chef Do? How to Become a Chef FAQ What Skills Do You Need to Be a Chef? Becoming a chef requires a diverse skill set that goes beyond just knowing how to cook. To succeed in the culinary world, you must possess a combination of technical, professional, and business skills. Let's take a closer look at each of these skill categories: 1. Technical Skills These skills encompass a wide range of abilities, including knife skills, cooking techniques, and food preparation methods. A chef must be proficient in various cooking methods such as sauteing, braising, baking, and grilling. They should also have a deep understanding of food safety and sanitation practices to ensure the highest level of hygiene in the kitchen. 2. Professional Skills Professional skills a chef must possess include effective communication, teamwork, and time management. Chefs often work in high-pressure environments where clear and concise communication is crucial to ensure the smooth operation of the kitchen. They must also be able to collaborate with other kitchen staff and work as part of a team. Time management skills are essential to meet the demands of a busy kitchen, as chefs must multitask and prioritize tasks efficiently. 3. Business Skills Chefs need to have a good understanding of food costs, menu planning, and inventory management. They must be able to create menus that are not only delicious but also financially viable. Understanding the cost of ingredients and how to price a menu accordingly is essential to running a profitable kitchen. Chef Education Requirements Becoming a chef requires a combination of formal education and hands-on experience in the culinary arts. While there is no specific degree outside of a high school diploma or GED equivalent required to become a chef, most aspiring chefs choose to pursue a formal education in culinary arts to gain the necessary skills and knowledge. Also, depending on which type of chef you wish to become, education requirements may vary. We've listed the different types of ways you can gain a culinary education and learn the essential skills of the industry: Culinary School: Many chefs start their culinary journey by attending a culinary school or institute. These institutions offer a variety of options, including certificate programs, associate degrees, and bachelor's degrees in culinary arts. Culinary school programs typically cover fundamental cooking techniques, food safety and sanitation, nutrition, menu planning, and kitchen management. Students also have the opportunity to gain practical experience in a professional kitchen environment. On-the-Job Training In addition to formal education, hands-on experience is crucial for aspiring chefs. Many chefs start their careers by working in entry-level positions in restaurants or food service establishments. This allows them to learn the ropes of the kitchen, develop their culinary skills, and gain a deeper understanding of the industry. Through on-the-job training, aspiring chefs can work their way up to more advanced positions and eventually become executive chefs or sous chefs. Apprenticeships Another route to becoming a chef is through apprenticeships. Apprenticeships provide aspiring chefs with the opportunity to work alongside experienced chefs and learn the trade through practical training. Apprenticeships typically last for a few years and cover various aspects of culinary arts, including food preparation, cooking techniques, and kitchen management. This hands-on approach allows apprentices to develop their skills while also gaining valuable industry connections. What Does a Chef Do? A chef is a culinary professional who is responsible for overseeing the preparation and cooking of food in a commercial kitchen. They are skilled in various cooking techniques and have a deep understanding of flavor profiles, food safety, and kitchen management. Below we’ve listed some key responsibilities and tasks that a chef typically handles: Menu Planning - Chefs are responsible for creating and developing menus that suit the needs and preferences of their customers. They consider factors such as seasonal availability of ingredients, dietary restrictions, and food trends to curate a diverse and appealing menu. Food Preparation - Chefs are masters of their craft when it comes to food preparation. They are skilled in cutting, chopping, marinating, and seasoning ingredients to enhance their flavors. Chefs are also proficient in various cooking techniques such as sauteing, grilling, baking, frying, and braising. Recipe Development - Chefs are often responsible for creating new recipes or modifying existing ones to add their own unique twist. They experiment with different ingredients, flavors, and cooking methods to create innovative and delicious dishes that keep customers coming back for more. Food Presentation - Chefs pay great attention to food presentation and the visual appeal of their dishes. They understand the importance of plating techniques and use their creativity to present food in an aesthetically pleasing manner. This not only enhances the dining experience but also adds to the overall perception of the restaurant. Kitchen Management - Chefs are in charge of managing the kitchen staff, including sous chefs, line cooks, and prep cooks. They delegate tasks, ensure that the kitchen operates efficiently, and maintain a clean and organized work environment. They also oversee inventory management, ordering supplies, and maintaining equipment. How to Become a Chef FAQ Here are some of the most common questions relating to becoming a chef: How Much Does it Cost to Become a Chef? While the culinary industry offers exciting opportunities and the chance to work with food every day, it's important to understand the financial investment required to pursue this profession. Costs associated with becoming a chef include potential tuition expenses, supplies and equipment, learning materials, and certification costs. These costs vary based on factors such as location, personal preferences, and individual circumstances. While the financial investment required to become a chef may seem significant, consider the long-term career prospects and personal fulfillment that becoming a chef can offer. How Long Does It Take to Become a Chef? Becoming a chef is a journey that requires dedication, passion, and a commitment to honing your culinary skills. Culinary programs typically range from 6 months to 4 years in duration, depending on the level of education you wish to achieve. In addition to formal education, gaining hands-on experience in the kitchen is crucial to becoming a chef. Many aspiring chefs work in training for several years learning various techniques, understanding kitchen operations, and developing a strong culinary repertoire. Do You Need to Go to Culinary School to Be a Chef? While culinary school can provide aspiring chefs with valuable skills and knowledge, it is not necessarily a requirement to become a successful chef. Many renowned chefs have achieved their culinary prowess through hands-on experience and self-study. On-the-job training that teaches the valuable culinary skills required is another viable way to become a chef. Becoming a chef is a rewarding and fulfilling career choice for those looking to enter the culinary industry. Although the process of becoming a chef may require a lot of education and training, it provides a rewarding career and a great outlet for creativity. Following the correct steps and attaining the necessary skills when becoming a chef helps ensure you have a successful career in this competitive industry.
Restaurant Security: How to Keep Your Business Safe
Restaurant security plays a significant role in the well-being of your customers, the safety of your staff, and the long-term health of your business. No matter what aspect of the foodservice industry you serve, there are several steps you can take to ensure a safe and secure workplace. We’ll investigate different types of restaurant security equipment and the threats your business may face below. Click any of the links below to skip to the restaurant safety tip that most interests you: Restaurant Security Cameras Restaurant Locks Restaurant Safes Restaurant Threats Restaurant Security Systems Every business should take security seriously, and one of the most effective ways to do so is by implementing a reliable security system. While investing in a restaurant security system may require an upfront cost, the benefits far outweigh the expenses. Security systems protect your business, assets, and reputation and provide peace of mind in the workplace. We’ve outlined essential types of restaurant security equipment below so that you can implement an effective restaurant security system. 1. Restaurant Security Cameras Security cameras allow you to monitor your business at all times. They act as a deterrent to theft, vandalism, and other threats. By implementing them effectively, you can significantly decrease the threat of these crimes and maintain constant watch over your workplace. Some areas to consider placing a security camera in your restaurant include: Restaurant entrance Kitchen Dining room Cashier's area Back entrance/loading area There are four main types of restaurant security cameras: Dome security cameras: These cameras provide a cost-effective surveillance option without compromising quality. They can be mounted on walls, ceilings, or even poles, providing flexibility in placement options. Their compact and discreet design makes them blend seamlessly into any environment without drawing unwanted attention. This is especially important in customer-facing areas, where you want to maintain a pleasant atmosphere without compromising security. Turret security cameras: Turret security cameras, also known as eyeball cameras, are a popular choice for outdoor surveillance due to their weatherproof design and ability to rotate horizontally. One of their key advantages is their ability to provide increased clarity at night, facilitating effective monitoring during non-operational hours when the lights are typically dimmed or turned off. Bullet security cameras: The bullet security camera is known for its sleek and cylindrical shape, resembling a bullet casing. They are typically the most expensive option on the market but offer several benefits for their price. They feature infrared capabilities and can withstand harsh weather and temperature conditions, making them suitable for outdoor use during winter and inside your walk-in freezers. 360 security cameras: These cameras offer a 360-degree view, allowing you to monitor every corner of a room from a single device. This comprehensive view eliminates blindspots and reduces the number of cameras needed throughout your workplace. They are perfect for highly-trafficked areas such as dining rooms or crowded bars. 2. Restaurant Locks Investing in high-quality, dependable locks is an easy way to increase workplace security. By outfitting your doors with proper locks, you can prevent intruders from entering your restaurant and restrict access to certain rooms or areas. Conversely, choosing the wrong locks can leave you vulnerable to theft, break-ins, and vandalism. To best protect your workplace, consider using a wide range of locks. We’ll investigate the different locks and what sets them apart below: Padlocks: Padlocks are versatile and not permanently attached to any doors or objects. Use them to secure gates, doors, storage areas, and lockers. There are two main types of padlocks: combination padlocks and keyed padlocks. Combination padlocks open with a combination, providing a convenient and keyless access solution. Keyed padlocks require a key, offer a higher level of security, and are used in situations where only authorized personnel should have access. Deadbolts: Deadbolts are installed inside external doors and offer more protection than standard locks. They are known for their increased durability and have various commercial applications. Deadbolts come in three main varieties: single deadbolts, double deadbolts, and lockable thumbturns. Single deadbolts are the most common type, featuring a key cylinder and a lockable thumbturn. Double deadbolts require a key to lock and unlock from both the inside and the outside. Lockable thumbturns offer the convenience of a thumbturn on the inside, but also have the added security of a key cylinder on the outside. Knob locks: A knob lock should be used on doors that require a basic level of security, such as office rooms or storage areas. However, knob locks should never be the sole security measure on external doors or doors. Knob locks feature an internal locking cylinder, making them relatively easy to install and replace but leaving them vulnerable to tampering or forced entry. Lever locks: One of the standout features of lever locks is their large push-down handle, making them ADA-accessible. Lever locks are also highly secure. With their sturdy construction and built-in mechanisms, they provide a reliable level of protection for your commercial space. Lever locks can be vulnerable to torque attacks, where force is applied to the handle to break the lock. 3. Restaurant Safes Whether you’re protecting documents, currency, or other valuables, safes provide an extra layer of security for your restaurant. Where you place your safe can vary depending on the type of restaurant you run, but many people keep it in a manager's office. Be sure to choose the safe that best fits your needs. The most common types of restaurant safes include the following: Drop Safes: These short-term cash protection systems allow employees to quickly and securely add cash to a collection without needing constant access to the safe. Most drop safes also come equipped with phishing guards that prevent would-be thieves from using tools to fish out cash or other valuable items from the drop slot. Key cabinets: These lockable boxes prevent unauthorized access to keys, ensuring the security of your valuable assets. Key cabinets are accessible via combination code, meaning only those who know the code can access the keys stored inside. Hotel safes: Also known as wall safes, hotel safes hide and safeguard your valuables and deposits. They are recognized for their discrete nature, adding an extra layer of security since potential thieves won't be able to easily locate and access the safe. Fireproof safes: These safes can withstand extremely high temperatures and protect valuables from flames. By providing a barrier against heat, fireproof safes prevent items from melting, warping, or becoming irreparably damaged. They are ideal for storing contracts, legal papers, and financial records. Cash boxes: These compact and sturdy boxes provide a secure place to store your money. There are two distinct types of cash boxes: key lock cash boxes and combination lock cash boxes. By limiting cash box access to verified personnel, you can minimize the risk of internal theft. Restaurant Threats There are several different threats that a restaurant faces every day, and you should always be prepared to deal with them. We’ll outline some of the most common restaurant threats below: Cash Theft The more cash your restaurant deals with, the greater the risk of theft. One of the reasons cash theft is so prevalent is that physical currency is lightweight and untraceable. Unlike credit card transactions, where there is a digital record of each payment, cash can easily be pocketed and disappear without a trace, making it an attractive target for internal and external theft. To mitigate cash theft, follow these guidelines: Invest in a reliable cash management system: Using a cash management system can help reduce the risk of internal theft. These systems automate cash handling processes, such as counting and storing money, minimizing the opportunities for employees to steal cash. Train your staff: Educate your employees about the importance of cash handling procedures and the consequences of theft. Implement strict policies regarding cash management and regularly monitor cash handling practices to ensure compliance. Install security measures: Install security cameras both inside and outside your restaurant. Visible security cameras act as a deterrent to potential thieves and can help identify culprits. Conduct regular cash audits: Regularly auditing your cash transactions can help identify discrepancies or irregularities. By comparing cash register totals with actual cash on hand, you can quickly identify potential theft and take appropriate action. Skimming Skimming is a technique that criminals use to collect credit card information. Criminals install a skimming device on a legitimate point-of-sale terminal, such as a credit card reader. Once installed, it collects information stored on the magnetic stripe of a credit card when it is swiped for payment. The consequences of falling victim to skimming can be severe. For your restaurant, it can lead to a damaged reputation and loss of customer trust. Word spreads quickly in the age of social media, and if customers hear that your establishment has been compromised, they may take their business elsewhere. To prevent skimming in your restaurant, follow these steps: Transparent checkout: Keep your POS system and payment processing machines in your guests and employees' line of sight to prevent foul play. Train your staff: Verify that your staff knows how to use your POS system and can recognize discrepancies. Inspect equipment: Regularly inspect your POS system and other related equipment to ensure a skimming device has not been installed. Property Theft Thieves can strike at any time, and their targets can be anything from expensive decor to simple disposables. One of the most common types of property theft in restaurants is internal theft, which occurs when employees take advantage of their access to steal valuable items. It could be a server pocketing some extra cash from the register or a line cook sneaking out with a box of steaks. Internal theft can be difficult to detect, as the culprits are often familiar faces who know the ins and outs of your operation. External theft is equally prevalent in the restaurant industry. This type of theft occurs when individuals outside the establishment target your property. They may pose as customers or even wait for the right moment to strike when the restaurant is closed. To prevent property theft, implement the following practices: Install security cameras: Strategically placed security cameras can act as a deterrent and help capture evidence in case of theft. Cover all vulnerable areas including the dining room, kitchen, and storage spaces. Train your staff: Educate your staff about the importance of security and theft prevention. Teach them to be vigilant and report any suspicious activity immediately. Encourage an open and honest work environment where employees feel comfortable sharing their concerns. Conduct background checks: Conduct thorough background checks on prospective employees to minimize the risk of internal theft. This includes checking references, verifying employment history, and conducting criminal record checks. Implement access controls: Limit access to certain areas of your restaurant to authorized personnel only. This can be done through keycard systems or locked doors with restricted access. Secure valuable items: Keep valuable items locked away when not in use. Use lockable cabinets or safes to ensure these items are secure. Break-Ins One of the most obvious consequences of a break-in is the loss of inventory. Whether it's expensive cuts of meat, premium bottles of wine, or high-quality kitchen equipment, thieves can make off with valuable items that are essential to your operation. Cash from the register, personal belongings of staff members, and even customer belongings left in coat check areas can all be targeted. To prevent break-ins, follow these steps: Invest in a security system: Install cameras, alarms, and motion sensors to deter potential criminals. Secure entrances and windows: Reinforce doors and windows with sturdy locks, shatterproof glass, and security bars. Consider installing security film on windows to make them more resistant to break-ins. Invest in adequate lighting: Ensure your exterior and parking lot are well-lit. Criminals are less likely to target well-lit areas as they are easily visible to passersby. Regularly review security procedures: Train your staff on security-related situations such as suspicious individuals or unusual activities. Conduct regular security audits to identify vulnerabilities and address them promptly. On-Site Violence The well-being and safety of your employees should always be a top priority. When restaurant workers experience abuse or violence, it can have detrimental effects on their mental and emotional health. The trauma they endure from these incidents can lead to long-lasting psychological scars that may even force them to quit their jobs. For that reason, it's crucial to implement proactive measures that create a safe and secure work environment. Establish a zero-tolerance policy: Make it clear to both your staff and customers that any form of abuse or violence will not be tolerated. Display signs in visible areas of your establishment, such as near the entrance or in restrooms, stating that aggressive behavior will result in immediate removal from the premises. Train your staff: Provide comprehensive training to your employees on how to handle difficult situations and de-escalate conflicts. Teach them effective communication techniques and empower them to confidently address issues with customers. By equipping your staff with these skills, you can help prevent volatile situations from escalating into violence. Install security measures: Implementing security measures such as surveillance cameras, panic buttons, and alarm systems can act as deterrents and provide a sense of security for your employees. Foster a supportive workplace culture: Encourage open communication among your staff and create an environment and establish a system for anonymous reporting to protect employees who may fear retaliation to address potential threats before they escalate. Staying informed on the topic of restaurant security is essential to the safety of your employees and customers. Whether you’re looking to invest in security equipment or trying to identify potential security threats, there are several factors to take into account. With the information above, you can take the proper steps to ensure a secure restaurant environment.
Guidelines for Training Restaurant Servers
Regardless of a restaurant's size or style, the serving staff represents the face of every dining establishment. These individuals have the most face time with your customers during their visit, and positive interactions can go a long way to ensuring those same patrons return. Hiring the right employees for the job from the start is always ideal, but the introduction of a structured server training program can pay huge dividends for your business. Server Training By putting some thought and effort into a restaurant training program, you can immediately emphasize your workplace culture for every new hire and lower the turnover rate for your business. The following guidelines for restaurant server training will help you establish an effective, knowledgeable staff. Click below to learn how to train restaurant servers: Create a Server Handbook Hold a Server Orientation for All New Hires Set Goals for Server Training Cross Train Your Servers Shadow an Experienced Server Hold a Menu Tasting Perform Testing and Roleplay Ongoing Training Create Incentives 1. Create a Server Handbook If you don’t have an employee handbook yet, it’s a good idea to get one created. This restaurant training manual will serve as an important resource for new hires learning how to be a server as well as the rest of your established server staff. Provide a handbook to every server and keep one or two copies in the restaurant so anyone can reference it in times of need. A server training manual should include the following: Server Etiquette Guidelines - The scope of your etiquette may vary depending on the type of restaurant you own. For instance, fine dining has very specific guidelines that dictate every aspect of service. But on the whole, any type of restaurant customer service should emphasize politeness, humility, and the ability to anticipate the needs of your guests. Server Uniforms - Outline all dress code requirements in your guide, including expectations concerning uniforms, hair, jewelry, facial piercings, and fingernails. Some of these details are small, but they should be a large focus for any waitress training program. Make it a priority to discuss these things at length during servers' training and ensure the appearance standards are clear. Server Scripts - How do you want your servers to introduce themselves to each new table? By providing a script for your serving staff you can help them to remember to share specific information about your establishment. How to Upsell - Not everyone is a salesperson, but upselling is a skill that can be learned. Share tips that will help your servers encourage guests to order appetizers, desserts, and upgrade cocktails with top-shelf liquor. Safety Policies - A busy restaurant is full of hazards and you can make sure your staff is safe at all times by outlining all of your safety policies. Stress the importance of wearing non-slip footwear and explain safe methods for carrying trays, ice buckets, bag-in-box sodas, or other heavy items. You should also include emergency procedures and fire exit routes. 2. Hold a Server Orientation for All New Hires As a busy restaurant owner, it can be tempting to skip this step or delegate it to your managers. However, holding an orientation to meet your new servers face-to-face goes a long way to building a workplace culture that improves employee retention in the long run. These are some topics that you can discuss: Mission Statement and Company History - As the owner, this is your chance to share the mission statement of the restaurant with your new employees. By passing on information about what your business stands for and the values that you want to uphold, you can create a trickle-down effect. You would be surprised how often servers get questions from customers about when the business started and who owns it. This is your chance to make sure your servers are sharing your vision with your customers. Restaurant Concept and Culture - You probably put a lot of creativity and thought into your restaurant concept, but your new employees will need an introduction to your theme and how they can help support it. For instance, if your restaurant specializes in locally grown produce, you'll want your staff to be educated about regional fruits and vegetables. If you own a BBQ restaurant with a blues music theme, you'll want your staff to have some knowledge and appreciation for blues music. Tour the Building - By giving your new staff a tour of the restaurant before their first shift, you can help put them at ease. When they arrive on their first day, they'll know which entrance to use, how to find the time clock, and where to keep their belongings. 3. Set Goals for Server Training By setting training goals, you can create a standard that you'd like all servers to meet. This ensures that your program is consistent and every server gets the same level of restaurant training. Provide a Training Schedule - Before each server gets their own tables, they should complete your serving training program. Create a set schedule for your trainers to follow so that your new servers are hitting each step in the program. A sample schedule might last one week or two weeks, depending on the type of restaurant and style of your service. Create Benchmarks for Training - Make sure your training schedule has built-in benchmarks or small goals that each server should meet along the way. For example, after their first day of training they should be able to recite the permanent beer list, recount the company history, or memorize the table numbers. 4. Cross Train Your Servers Cross training with other employees provides valuable insight into how a particular restaurant operates. Before new servers start working with your waitstaff training team, it can be very helpful to have them train with some other key positions first. Cross Train with Hosts / Hostesses - Members of the host team are experts on the layout of your dining room, how to use your reservation software, and how to rotate tables so guests receive the best service possible. By spending a couple of shifts working with the host team, a server will quickly learn the dining room sections and the numbers of each table. They'll also be capable of attending to any guests that walk through the door, in the absence of a host or hostess. Cross Train with Food Runners - The next training session should be with a food runner so that your new servers can apply the knowledge they just learned about the dining room in a different application. They should know where each table is and be able to deliver food to the correct guest. This training session is also an introduction to your menu and what the different food items look like. 5. Shadow an Experienced Server Before completing the training program, your new servers should perform a few shadowing sessions with your most experienced servers. You can designate a certain number of required training sessions, or rely on your trainer's judgment as to how many are needed. During these sessions, the new server is essentially an assistant and any of the tips that are earned go to the trainer. The trainer should go over the following topics: How to Take Orders - After completing a training session with the food runners, your new servers will have a better sense of the most popular food items on your menu when it comes time to interact with guests. They should practice taking orders for each table, with the trainer acting as a guide if any questions pop up. How to Use the POS System - A big part of transitioning to a new restaurant is learning how to use the POS system. Trainers should show the new server how to use the system, then give them hands-on experience entering all the orders for the shift. Sidework Rotation - In addition to serving guests, servers also have sidework duties that must be performed during every shift. These duties usually consist of prep work like cutting lemons, stocking the salad bar, or stocking beverage stations. At the end of the shift, they should make sure all the tables in their section are clean and that condiments are full. Learn Where Items are Stocked - Servers will need to retrieve various items from dry and cold storage during a shift. It's very helpful to point out the location of items like glass racks, ice buckets, and take-out containers so they can be found quickly. Restaurant Layout - During waiter or waitress training, be sure to identify key routes to the most important parts of the facility. Additionally, your staff will always want to be aware of the surroundings, so point out potential problem areas as well. This can include high-traffic locations or places that could contain one or two "blind spots" for servers carrying full trays of food. How to Close Out - The close-out procedure includes everything a server needs to do before they can end their shift. To close out of the POS system, a server needs to print their sales for the shift and turn their cash in to a manager. They'll also need to use their sales to tip out any bartenders, bussers, or food runners. Sometimes a server will be designated as a sidework checker and will have to sign off on each server's sidework. 6. Hold a Menu Tasting One of the best parts about server training is trying out the menu items. Servers can't answer questions or make recommendations if they've never tasted the food. At the conclusion of server shadowing, the trainer should sit down and do a menu tasting with the new server(s). This is a great time to sample a variety of the most popular food items, go over the most commonly asked menu questions, and discuss allergen information. It's also a celebratory moment because training is almost complete. Even the most descriptive of menus still require clarification from time to time, and your wait staff should be as familiar as possible with the menu. The best serving staff should be able to not only explain in detail each menu item, but also provide suggestions, recite any daily specials with ease, and answer a customer's questions. 7. Perform Testing and Roleplay The last step before a new server can work independently is to pass a final test. For some restaurants, this test might be very lengthy if there is a lot of memorization involved, as with extensive wine or beer lists. Written Test - This test could cover everything from menu knowledge to policies in your handbook. It should include everything you think is vital for your servers to know. Roleplay - Require the new server to wait on a manager before their training is complete. With this method, a variety of common interactions can be touched on, all within the span of just a few minutes. In addition, this method can prepare new staff members with the proper responses to complaints or upset customers. 8. Ongoing Training Several of these guidelines, such as your restaurant layout and the menu, may change over time, so it's important to use all of these teaching points as part of ongoing training sessions for all your servers. By implementing an ongoing training program, you have the opportunity to increase productivity, update policies to comply with new industry regulations, and improve job satisfaction in a work area that's often high in employee turnover. Some specific things to make part of long-term training include: Learning which menu items are most popular, least expensive, most expensive, etc. Acquiring knowledge of weekly or daily specials Successfully selling guests on appetizers or desserts Finding the right balance between too much and too little interaction with guests at their table Improving awareness and multi-tasking skills Reading personalities/attitudes and determining exactly which kind of service the guest desires 9. Create Incentives Make sure your serving staff stays engaged by offering incentives for performance. You can reward servers that participate in ongoing training sessions with free meals, preferred parking spots, or raises. Keep track of server wins like the highest alcohol or appetizer sales and give out a gift card to the winner each week. There are many ways to incentivize performance and create a fun work environment to help you retain your best employees. Single-event training can often be forgotten or seem overwhelming for a new employee on the first day. By creating and following a detailed training program, you can set your new employees up for mutual success. Ongoing training allows employers to evaluate and follow up effectively to get the most out of their staff. This type of restaurant server training can help propel your operation to the next level of professional, award-winning service.
How to Start an Ice Cream Shop
Enjoyed by children and adults alike, ice cream is a classic summer treat. The industry has expanded in recent years thanks to emerging types of frozen treats, the growth of the mobile vending industry, and the normalization of pop-up and seasonal shops. For many, getting ice cream with friends and family is a summer ritual, meaning there is plenty of demand for local ice cream shops. Check out our ice cream shop startup guide and learn how to open your own ice cream business. Shop All Ice Cream Shop Supplies Skip to the ice cream shop startup information that interests you: Ice Cream Shop Concepts and Branding Ice Cream Shop Business Plans Ice Cream Shop Start-Up Costs How to Secure Funding for a New Business Business Licenses and Permits Ice Cream Shop Locations Ice Cream Shop Menu Ice Cream Shop Decor Ice Cream Shop Advertising Ideas Ice Cream Shop Openings What Type of Business Is an Ice Cream Shop? An ice cream shop is a business that primarily sells ice cream but may also specialize in other frozen treats such as milkshakes, gelato, frozen yogurt, and sorbet. Each frozen treat has a unique preparation method. Ice cream shop owners offer a wide range of toppings from classics like chocolate syrup to inventive options like bubble tea add-ins. One of the biggest appeals of ice cream shops is customization because customers can order their favorite frozen treats to their preference. For owners, opening an ice cream shop is an attractive option since they don’t require expansive kitchens or seating areas. They can be profitable businesses since ice cream is a popular food, especially in the summer. Opening an Ice Cream Shop Opening an ice cream shop may seem like an overwhelming task at first. However, breaking down the process into steps makes it easier to tackle. Follow our 10-step guide to opening an ice cream shop. 1. Ice Cream Shop Concepts and Branding Choosing an ice cream shop concept and brand is the first step in opening an ice cream shop. It is here where you’ll decide how your shop serves customers and what type of industry trends you incorporate into your ice cream shop’s business model. When it comes to ice cream shops, there are a few major concepts and branding options you need to consider before moving on to the next steps of planning. Seasonal vs Year-Round Ice Cream Shops Ice cream is often considered a seasonal food that is mostly consumed in the spring and summer. Unless you operate in a year-round warm climate, your ice cream sales will taper during the fall and winter months. Many ice cream shops are only open seasonally, opening around the first day of spring and closing during the waning days of summer. Alternatively, your ice cream shop can stay open during the colder months, hoping that a solid product, loyal customer base, or diverse menu will continue bringing people through the door when the weather gets colder. Ice Cream Trucks Food trucks are gaining traction in the broader food industry, but they aren't a new concept in the ice cream business. A neighborhood ice cream truck is iconic, and a visit from one is the highlight of a summer day for children. Starting an ice cream truck over a traditional brick-and-mortar location gives you the chance to be mobile and go directly to consumers. Doing so can increase impulse sales and lower overhead costs. However, ice cream trucks must deal with inconveniences such as limited space, parking regulations, permits, and insurance. Fixed Menu vs Self-Service Ice Cream Shops One of the newer trends in the ice cream industry is self-serve ice cream shops. Traditionally, ice cream shop customers order from a menu of select items. However, a new wave of modern ice cream shops has changed the formula, allowing customers to customize their frozen treats at various stations before charging customers based on product weight. 2. Ice Cream Shop Business Plans Writing an effective business plan is a critical part of starting an ice cream shop. A business plan gives you a medium to outline your goals, strategies, and budget all in one location. A financial document like a business plan will come in handy down the line when you’re attempting to impress lenders and investors to secure funding for your ice cream shop. To create a comprehensive overview of your ice cream shop, your business plan should contain the following: Executive Summary - The executive summary is written last because it provides a brief overview of all the information included in your business plan. Company Description - In this section provide a written description like your executive summary but expand upon specifics such as strategies and projections. Concept and Menu - This section explains what concepts you have chosen for your ice cream shop and outlines the items you plan to offer on your menu. Management and Ownership Structure - Discuss what type of ownership your ice cream shop will have and how your management team will be set up. Employees and Staffing Needs - This section should outline how many employees you’ll need to operate your ice cream shop and what positions must be filled. Marketing and Competitor Analysis - Identify a target market and complete a comprehensive analysis of nearby competitors to find potential competitive advantages. Advertising and Marketing Strategies - List potential advertising and marketing methods to entice customers and establish brand loyalty. Financial Projection and Summary - In this section, outline sales projections, perform a break-even analysis, and list potential expenses. For an in-depth guide to writing a business plan, check out our restaurant business plan guide. 3. Ice Cream Shop Start-Up Costs While not as pricy as opening a restaurant or some other foodservice locations, opening an ice cream shop still requires capital. Typically, opening an ice cream shop will cost you anywhere between $20,000 to $50,000. However, this figure can vary based on whether you decide to buy or rent a location and whether you purchase new or used equipment. Here are a few of the most important expenses you’ll have to cover when starting an ice cream shop: Down Payment - Purchasing a food truck or brick-and-mortar for your ice cream shop is a major expense. Although a loan is usually taken out for such a large sum, expect to make a down payment of around 15-20% of the cost. Property Renovations/Construction Costs - Purchasing a location or food truck is rarely enough to be ready for opening. Plan to spend money on renovations and construction. Ice Cream Shop Equipment - To produce, store, and sell ice cream, investments in a variety of appliances and equipment are needed. Required equipment includes ice cream makers, refrigerators, and freezers. Ice Cream and Supplies Inventory - Buying all the necessary ice cream ingredients, containers, and utensils for your ice cream shop can be costly. Employee Wages - Running an ice cream shop will require a handful of managers, employees, and staff who need to be paid a reasonable salary. Advertising - An advertising budget is needed to run marketing campaigns and bring new customers through the door. POS System - A POS system is a big help in streamlining the ordering process, inventory management, and sales reporting, making it a great investment for new ice cream shops. Permits and Licensing - Opening an ice cream shop requires you to receive several permits and licenses, some of which come with fees. 4. How to Secure Funding for a New Business There are several ways that you can secure funding and ensure that your dream of owning an ice cream shop becomes a reality. Determine how much money will be required for the initial start-up, as the figure will determine what funding option best fits your needs. Self-Funding - You may be able to fund portions of your ice cream shop with your personal funds. Tapping into savings accounts and retirement plans can provide you with funds and control over your business, but that means you assume all of the risks yourself. Lenders - Small business loans and traditional commercial loans can provide you with enough funding to get your business started. Interest rates may mean you’ll be paying more in the long run, but a loan means you won’t need to immediately put up your personal finances or give away equity. Venture Capital - Venture capital is a form of private equity financing that is usually given to new businesses in exchange for equity. Finding an investor for your business is a great way to secure the funds required for an ice cream shop start-up. An investor can prove to be a valuable business partner, but giving up equity and other concessions are major drawbacks. Crowdfunding - Crowdfunding involves a community of people pooling together payments to reach a goal. Contributors are often rewarded with special prizes or discounts, incentivizing consumers to contribute. 5. Business Licenses and Permits Before you can legally open your ice cream shop and begin making sales, you'll need to acquire the right business licenses and permits. A few of the most important ones are listed below but double-check with local laws and seek legal counsel to ensure your ice cream shop has everything it needs to open. Business License - Business licenses are the legal requirements for you to operate in your industry and location, and as a result, they may vary based on location. Employee Identification Number - Your ice cream shop will require a nine-digit employee identification number before you can hire employees and staff. Every business in the United States has a unique employee identification number for identification purposes. Seller’s Permit - A seller’s permit legally authorizes your business as a collector of sales tax. Many states and local areas require a seller’s permit, so be sure to double-check your state and local laws. Health Permit - To sell any prepared food product, a health permit confirming safety and sanitation is required. Health permits are usually handled by county and local governments, meaning laws and regulations regarding health permits can vary greatly from location to location. Back to Top 6. Ice Cream Shop Locations The location you choose for your ice cream shop is an important part of executing your vision and making your initial concepts a reality. While those starting an ice cream truck business don’t need to worry about location too much, for brick-and-mortar stores, a good location is vital. Perform a location analysis to determine the best location, maximize profits, and attract customers is highly recommended. While looking for an ice cream shop location, there are several features that you should keep in mind. Space - Your ice cream shop location needs to have enough space to house several appliances, a serving area, and possibly a seating area for customers. Foot Traffic - An ideal ice cream shop location is an area that receives plenty of foot traffic, resulting in impulse buying from customers. Seasonal Traffic - Ice cream shops make most of their profits during the summer months, so a location that receives more traffic in the summer, like a shopping center across from a public pool or beach access point, is ideal. Overhead Costs - Lack of sales during the fall and winter months means an ice cream shop location ideally has low overhead costs to offset low sales during tough times. Some of the most common overhead costs you should look to save on include rent and utilities. 7. Ice Cream Shop Menu Putting together a solid selection of items for your menu is critical to bringing customers through the door and ensuring that they come back. You'll want to make sure that your menu pricing is affordable for consumers but still generates profits. Creating an ice cream shop menu is a tight balancing act, as you need to bring classic ice cream flavors customers expect while also standing out from the competition. Outside of ice cream, there are a few different items that you should consider adding to your menu. Milkshakes - Sweet drinks made by blending a mixture of ice cream, milk, and various flavorings. Offer malted milkshakes for an old-timey ice cream shop menu item with universal appeal. Floats - A unique creation that consists of a large scoop of ice cream served in a glass with root beer or another soda. Italian Ice - A classic way to cool off on a hot summer day, Italian ice is made from water, sugar, and natural or artificial fruit flavorings. Gelato - While it’s similar to ice cream in appearance and flavor, gelato often contains less fat, is churned at a slower speed, and is served at a warmer temperature. Mangonada - A popular Mexican frozen beverage, magonadas are made from ripe mangoes, lime juice, chamoy sauce, and chili-lime salt seasoning. Frozen Yogurt - As the name suggests, frozen yogurt is made with yogurt, milk, and cream, resulting in a tangier taste than ice cream. Popular Ice Cream Flavors Ice cream shops offer a wide range of flavors, but there are a handful of common flavors that customers expect. Here are a few of the most common flavors that will guarantee sales for your ice cream shop: Vanilla Chocolate Strawberry Cookies and Cream Mint Chocolate Chip Lactose Free Ice Cream Lactose intolerance affects millions of people in the United States, directly impacting their ability to enjoy ice cream and other dairy products. Lactose-free ice cream can either be made by filtering the lactose out of the milk used in ice cream, or by adding synthetic lactase enzymes into dairy milk. Offering a selection of lactose-free ice cream on your menu is a great way to cater to guests with alternative diets, and it can be a competitive advantage over other ice cream shops that don’t have similar offerings. Dairy Free Ice Cream Similar to lactose-free ice cream, dairy-free ice cream takes the process a step further and eliminates dairy from the recipe. A substitute is used in its place, usually an ingredient like almond milk or coconut milk. Dairy-free ice cream is a great addition to your menu as it not only appeals to lactose-intolerant customers but also vegan customers. Vegan menus are growing in popularity, so offering ice creams that vegans can order may boost sales and help your ice cream shop establish a niche customer base. 8. Ice Cream Shop Decor The setup and design of your ice cream shop help tell your brand story. Many people have a specific idea of how ice cream shops are stylized, usually with bright colors and loud, cheery music. Common colors used in ice cream shop design include bright reds, pinks, and teals as well as patterns such as polka dots and stripes. However, you may want to stray away from the classic ice cream parlor aesthetic and follow emerging foodservice design trends instead. Beyond decor, there are areas of your ice cream shop that need to be created with functionality in mind. Serving/Dispensing Stations - Traditional ice cream shops will need to dedicate a large area for storing the ice cream meant for serving. Typically, several large freezer ice cream cabinets are required to store the flavors. The more modern variants of ice cream shops that charge by weight won’t require this, but they will require ice cream dispensers to be placed around the store. Weighing Stations - Ice cream shops that charge by weight will need several weighing stations for customers to weigh their creations and determine the price. Seating - Most ice cream shops require some form of seating area for customers to enjoy their ice cream. Ideally, an ice cream shop should offer both indoor and outdoor seating so customers can choose based on the weather. 9. Advertising Ideas for Ice Cream Shops When starting any new business, it's important to let people know that you have opened and are ready for business. The best way to do this is by engaging in advertising campaigns to entice customers. Thankfully in today’s digital world, there are several ways you can effectively advertise your business and reach your target market. Try generating hype and building excitement with these ice cream shop advertising ideas: Establish a Strong Website - In today’s business climate, creating a solid website is a requirement for a business. A website is an easy location for customers to learn everything they need to know about your business. In the past, creating a website was a daunting task, but there are now several platforms on the Internet that can help you design a basic yet attractive website. Social Media Outreach - Using social media advertising to attract customers is a great way to secure more business. Social media is becoming more prevalent in our daily lives and requires minimal time and effort to use, making it an attractive advertising option. Digital Presence - Several websites such as Yelp, OpenTable, and Tripadvisor play an important role in how customers decide to shop. Ensure that your business is registered on these websites, as well as free tools such as Google My Business to maximize your brand exposure. Promotions and Sales - Special deals and sales are a great way to get customers to check out your ice cream shop. The prospect of savings and good deals will catch the attention of consumers, and once they try your quality product, there will likely come back for more. Loyalty Programs - Rewarding customers for frequently buying your product is a great way of establishing brand loyalty and securing repeat customers. Implementing loyalty programs such as digital punch cards, special member statuses, and targeted deals and promotions will not only attract new customers but will keep those you already have coming back. 10. Ice Cream Shop Openings As the time to open your ice cream shop to the public nears, you’ll have to decide how you’ll want to handle your ice cream shop opening. The biggest decision you’ll have to make when opening your ice cream shop is whether you want to host a soft opening, a grand opening, or both. Soft Opening vs Grand Opening A soft opening is a simulated opening with real customers that allows your shop to test menu items, service flow, and customer capacity. While a soft opening isn’t required, working out all the potential kinks before your ice cream shop officially opens can be beneficial. A grand opening is a special celebration designed to mark the start of your business. Grand openings sometimes have special offers, exclusive menu items, or live events to generate hype and celebrate the opening of the shop. Hosting a grand opening event is a great way to launch your business, and immediately entice customers to check out your new shop. Back to Top Ice cream is one of the most popular foods in the United States and brings people together. We all have memories of getting ice cream on hot summer days with loved ones. For those looking to offer those experiences to a new generation of people while simultaneously running a profitable business, opening an ice cream shop is the perfect opportunity. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not and is not intended to constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Hire a Chef
Hiring a qualified chef for your restaurant is a challenge, but despite the obstacles, it's a vital part of your business's ability to succeed. A chef assists in training new staff, oversees cooking processes, develops menus, and provides input in marketing decisions that affect the restaurant. Below, we’ll explain how to find a chef for your restaurant, give sample chef interview questions, and suggest some qualities that could be beneficial for your chef to possess. Shop All Restaurant Training Books Click the links below to learn more about the hiring process: Where Can I Find a Chef for Hire? Chef Interview Questions Chef Skills and Qualities to Look for When Hiring What to Know Before You Replace Your Current Chef Where Can I Find a Chef for Hire? If you're wondering how to find a chef, we've created a list of some common recruiting methods you can use to hire a chef for your restaurant. Use a recruiting agency. Agencies are great at finding new chefs with minimal effort and replacements with discretion. If you are looking to replace your current chef, using an agency can help to keep your search quiet until you are ready to make the transition. As an added bonus, many recruiting agencies do not collect payment until a replacement is found and hired. Hire internally. Oftentimes, sous chefs have the necessary degrees or qualifications to be a head chef. As an added benefit, hiring within often boosts company morale because of two reasons: employees like the prospect of upward mobility and having room for growth, and hiring a known person within the company lessens the fears that can come with having a new boss. Use word-of-mouth advertising. Talk to your suppliers; they may know someone who is looking for a change. While this isn’t necessarily discreet, word-of-mouth can be one of the best ways to hire a chef. Post an ad online. Job posting websites are great for tossing a wide net to try and catch potential applicants. You can even post anonymous job listings called "blind ads" if you are looking to maintain discretion. By posting a blind ad, you gain the advantage of accessing a large pool of applicants without alerting current staff or competition. Chef Interview Questions After you have located a potential chef for your restaurant, you'll want to run interviews to ensure they are a good fit for your business. Here are some general interview questions for chefs when you're looking to find the right chef for your restaurant: How many years of experience do you have working in restaurants? Did you attend culinary school? If not, how did you receive training? Do you have management experience? If so, how many employees did you oversee? How do you like to run a kitchen? Give an example of how you handled a stressful situation at work in the past. What role do you believe a chef plays in relationship to the front of the house? What are your career goals? What do you do to continue improving your skills? Why do you want to leave your current position? Why are you interested in working here? You may want to ask additional questions that are specific to your restaurant. If you serve a cultural cuisine, ask the chef if they have any experience making your type of food. If your restaurant has an extensive wine list, ask the chef what their favorite wine is. You may even wish to ask them what their favorite entree on your menu is to ensure that they have interest in the food you’re serving. Chef Skills and Qualities to Look for When Hiring While they may have great cooking skills, not every candidate will hold the leadership skills necessary to run a successful kitchen. Here are some qualities of a chef to look for when interviewing applicants. Even temperament: Restaurants have days when everything goes wrong. How your chef reacts in these scenarios will play a part in how the rest of the staff responds. Having someone who is calm and collected under pressure will help keep your kitchen running smoothly on high-stress days. Ability to train staff: Experienced and qualified chefs should also be good educators and trainers. They are responsible for showing new hires the ropes. They know how to use all the restaurant's equipment and can teach a new employee how to properly use this equipment as well. Eye for quality: Chefs set the standard in a restaurant kitchen. Hire a chef that wants to put only the best food up for serving. Regardless of how great the ambiance, presentation, and atmosphere of your restaurant is, if the food is not prepared properly, the customer will have a negative impression of your restaurant. Attention to detail: On top of everything else, your chef is responsible for being detail-oriented. They write specials, contribute to menus, and need to read and order inventory correctly. Computer skills: Going hand-in-hand with attention to detail, chefs must have good computer skills. Proficiency in Excel spreadsheets will allow them to cost recipes and check menu profits. Also, knowing how to use social media would enable them to become a valuable part of the marketing process for your restaurant. Experience and shared philosophy: Having someone who graduated from a reputable culinary school or has many years of experience is fantastic! However, a chef should have similar views as the owner on what qualifies as good customer service. What to Know Before You Replace Your Current Chef There are a few risks associated with hiring a new chef for your restaurant. Namely, your chef may decide to quit if they find out that you are trying to replace them. Here are some consequences that could come with your current chef quitting abruptly: Food quality deteriorates Preparation speed decreases Competitors capture your patrons as a result of your changed food quality and service speed Food waste costs may increase as a result of lower food quality and decreased preparation speed Sometimes it’s necessary for you to change your staff, but deciding to replace your chef should not be taken lightly. If it does not go smoothly, the transition period could cause serious repercussions for your restaurant’s bottom line and reputation. If possible, retain your current chef and help them become the employee your restaurant needs. A lot of time and effort goes into hiring a chef. Taking strides to show appreciation, giving incentives, or promoting your chef's name can go a long way in keeping that valuable employee on your payroll. By retaining your chef, it is possible to avoid the headaches and costs of trying to hire and train a replacement. Back to Top Hiring a new chef for your restaurant can make a large impact on the performance of your restaurant, positively or negatively. Make sure that you're prepared for the transition period by deciding how you'll go about your search, knowing what you're looking for in a candidate, and nailing down your interview questions ahead of time.
Restaurant Manager Duties: Hiring a Manager
Contrary to what their title implies, restaurant owners spend a lot of time away from their business. This kind of structure, known as absentee business, requires managing a restaurant even when the owner is unavailable. That's where a restaurant manager becomes important. But once you have your hiring process set up, finding the right restaurant general manager only takes a matter of time. What is a Restaurant Manager? A restaurant manager makes sure all of your operations at your restaurant run smoothly; therefore, restaurant manager duties range from equipment delivery to hospitality to training new servers on dining etiquette. Restaurant managers are critical to a business' success. Restaurant Manager Duties and Responsibilities Depending on what you're looking for, general managers could do everything from making sure day-to-day operations run according to plan to counting income and tracking expenses. Below are a list of responsibilities that your restaurant manager usually handles: Managing the restaurant staff Training new employees Staff scheduling Creating protocols Ordering food for the kitchen staff Checking in with customers and handling any complaints Promoting and marketing the restaurant Managing the budget Ensuring that the restaurant is up to health and safety standards Determining the manager's responsibilities can help you find the right candidate and also help you decide which tasks you'll carry out as owner. You should also have an employee handbook in place for your restaurant manager and employees. This will make sure that everything remains consistent in the work environment. Regardless of how much responsibility you give to your manager, you are still the ultimate decision-maker of your business. That requires you to trust someone who will work in your absence. Sometimes, as with business owners living out of town, this option may not even be available to you — you simply have to give daily control to someone else. Restaurant Manager Skills You will be putting a lot of trust into your restaurant manager, so it is important that they have a strong skill set in order to effectively manage your restaurant. Below are some key skills that great restaurant managers should possess: Time management Excellent interpersonal skills Communication skills Teamwork skills Problem-solving skills Organizational skills How Much do Restaurant Managers Make? The average restaurant manager salary is about $49,000. Of course, a lot of factors come in to play when it comes to salary. These factors consist of location, size of the restaurant, experience of the applicant, and how many restaurants they will be managing. It is important to find someone who is a perfect fit for your restaurant and determine a salary based on what their duties will be. How to Find a Restaurant Manager With the Internet, local news sources, personal connections, and headhunters, finding candidates is a snap. Below are three great options for finding a restaurant manager. Job search engines. Monster or Indeed are some of the easiest ways to get applications, typically through the form of an email resume. Sometimes, this can result in a large amount of applicants that aren't necessarily a great fit for the position. Personal connections and recommendations. These are also great ways to get candidates. These techniques don't result in long lines, but they're better for finding quality and trustworthy applicants. Headhunters. These are one of the most effective and fast-working recruitment tools available. If you have a large restaurant and are planning on opening multiple locations, this might be a great option for you. These firms can actually conduct the early stages of the interview process for you, giving you the time to focus on other urgent tasks until the agency believes they've found someone you should hire. Then you interview the candidate and make your decision. It may cost extra, but your recruitment firm will filter out any unworthy applicants and only give you the best of the best, saving you time as you make the final decision. Conducting the Interview The most critical moment in the hiring process, an interview is your chance to learn everything you want to know about your candidates. It's also their opportunity to learn everything about you and your business. Below are some tips for interviewing a restaurant manager: Create a positive environment Offer coffee or water Welcome the applicant with a smile and an invitation to sit If an interview goes south, don't be afraid to end it at the next opportunity. While it's not courteous to stop people mid-sentence, you can at least wrap things up with a quick "thank you" before showing them the door. If the interview is going well, share that with the applicant at the end of the interview. Telling applicants that you're interested and that they'll hear more when you've made a decision are both great ways to ease them out of an interview and calm their nerves. It also establishes a positive rapport as the interview winds to a close, creating a more professional and encouraging feel. Consider Your Restaurant's Growth Path It's important to consider how your business may change from the time you hire your general manager. If you expect to have another location by the end of year four, then you can decide whether you want a manager with multi-unit experience, or if you want to hire individual managers for all your locations and have them report to you. In addition, looking at expected growth can also give you an idea of how much you can offer to your manager and employees in terms of raises, particularly those who stick with you for long periods of time. Hiring the Right Applicant With all of your interviews completed, selecting your new manager will likely be a difficult decision. Ideally, a combination of a willingness to adapt to changing conditions, previous experience, personality, negotiable salary requirements, and other factors will lead you to the perfect candidate. Striking a balance of those ideas will give your business a multi-faceted second-in-command who will be able to keep things under control without you constantly looking over his shoulder. Great managers should be firm when they need to be firm, understanding when they need to be understanding, and — above all else — fair to their employees. With a manager like that on your side, you can rest assured that you have hired the right candidate for the job.
How to Balance a Cash Register
Balancing a cash register is the method used to accurately account for all daily monetary transactions in a business. Good accounting and bookkeeping procedures begin with a balanced register. Typically, trustworthy employees who prove capable of exchanging cash in an efficient manner will operate the cash registers. When their shift is complete, it’s time to prepare the drawer for the next employee to use or for earnings to leave your location in the form of a bank deposit. The best process for how to balance a cash register is simple to introduce with just a few easy steps. Shop All Cash Registers and Cash Drawers 1. Determine the Best “Starting” Amount The cash register should contain a consistent number of bills and coins so you can make change for your customers. However, too much cash in a drawer at one time can lead to theft, which could leave your wait staff in a potentially dangerous situation. Stuffing the drawer can also result in bills falling to the ground or slipping into the back of the register. Regardless of intent, both situations take away from your business’s bottom line. You can't accurately create a profit and loss statement for your business if shrinkage is affecting your sales. Select a base amount of cash to keep in the register to easily handle routine transactions throughout the first half of the shift. It also helps to pick a round number, and one that is easy to count by hand prior to loading and after removing the drawer. Generally, this number will be between $50 and $150. 2. Assign One Employee Per Register Prior to the start of a shift or meal, ensure that a single individual will be responsible for the register for the entirety of the allotted time. If multiple registers are required, take time to carefully assign one employee to each register. When work areas and specific responsibilities are noted ahead of time, it will improve the efficiency of your dining operation. By allowing several employees to access one drawer in a short period of time, there can be room for mistakes and increased opportunities for bills to go missing. 3. Require the Same Employee to Count Their Drawer When making your restaurant staffing schedule, create drawer counting assignments. While it may not always be possible, try to have the same staff member count his or her drawer at the end of a shift with a supervisor nearby. This leaves little room for discrepancies in the final amount. Any small overages or shortages (up to $1) are usually the result of human error. If the difference is routinely any larger, the supervisor or owner will need to decide if disciplinary action is required. 4. Schedule Times for Cash Drops A cash drop is when a manager or supervisor manually removes and deposits cash into the drawer in order to keep up with customer transactions. Depending on the traffic and frequency with which your customers pay with cash, these drops will typically take place towards the end of a meal rush. Make a point to always note the individual who has deposited the cash and maintain a standard amount for each cash drop. If time allows, have the cashier sign off on the transaction, since they will be the ones held responsible for working with the new balance. 5. Separate Earnings from Starting Amount, and Promptly Store in a Safe Earnings intended for a bank deposit should remain in a sealed envelope, then placed into a safe along with other restaurant cash register drawers. It’s important that the safe is located in a secure, isolated area, with owners and supervisors the only ones capable of unlocking it. Incorporating a combination of door alarms or security cameras is beneficial as well. If your staff is participating in tip pooling or tip sharing, be sure that this amount is accounted for and recorded. 6. Utilize Up-to-Date Cash Register Software Today, restaurants and bars rely heavily on a cash register system, especially those that operate in a fast-paced environment or with multiple registers in use at one time. Equipping your establishment with software that is out-of-date will only cause problems. To prevent this, ensure that your business is reaching its full potential with the right cash register software. There are many software options available, several of which can be custom designed for the operation you wish to run. Balancing your register on a daily basis is a great way to stay organized and ensure that the drawer matches up with your sales reports. If there are discrepancies, you'll catch them right away and be able to pinpoint the cause. Creating a cash handling policy and incorporating it into your restaurant employee handbook is an excellent way to hold cash handlers responsible for the transactions they make during their shift.
How to Tie a Neckerchief
Neckerchiefs are a classic addition to chefs’ uniforms across all kinds of foodservice settings. Whether you are a line cook in a fast casual restaurant or a Michelin star chef, a neckerchief is a stylish and useful accessory. That being said, neckerchiefs can be tricky to tie, and the last thing you want during a busy meal service is to have your neckerchief come untied and fall into the sauce you’re cooking. To find out why neckerchiefs are useful for chefs or to learn how to tie a neckerchief, keep reading. What Are Neckerchiefs? A neckerchief is a piece of fabric, usually square or triangular in shape, that is worn around the neck. Neckerchiefs can be worn for stylistic reasons, or they are often worn as part of a uniform. Why Do Chefs Wear Neckerchiefs? Chefs wear neckerchiefs to help them stay cool in warm kitchens. This piece of fabric absorbs sweat and prevents it from dripping into the dishes being prepared, so it can help your commercial kitchen stay sanitary. Additionally, chefs can untie their neckerchief to mop their brow or other areas on their face when conditions are especially hot. While neckerchiefs have a practical purpose, some establishments may also require this accessory in order to complete their kitchen staff uniform. How to Tie a Neckerchief <iframe width="560" height="315" src="/v/?num=4473&width=560&height=315&embed=1" frameborder="0"></iframe> 1.Lay your neckerchief flat on a surface. 2.Fold it in half to make a rectangle. If your neckerchief is tringular, match the pointed edge to the straight edge. 3.Repeatedly fold the rectangle along the long edge to make it into a thin strip. 4.Drape the strip around your neck, keeping the right side longer than the left. 5.Wrap the long side of the strip around the short side, ending with the long side on the left and the short side on the right. 6.Take the long end up and behind the knot. Then, pull the long end down through the knot. 7.Bring the two short ends up behind the knot, and then tuck them into the same space where you pulled the end down in the previous step. 8.Straighten the knot so that it sits comfortably. If you'd like a solution to keep your neck cool while working in the kitchen, a neckerchief is a great option for you. Once you master the tying technique for this classic chef accessory, you'll be ready for busy meal services in a hot environment. Until you memorize it, refer to our video and written instructions to see how to tie a neckerchief like a chef.
How to Make A Restaurant Schedule
A functional dining room service relies on a logical staff schedule. Before you spend any time making your employee schedule, it’s important to know some of the basics first. Factors like tipping, weekly hours, time off, overtime, and laws for employing minors all come into play when making a successful restaurant schedule. While it can seem overwhelming, there are a few helpful things to keep in mind that will make the process much easier. What are Tipped Employees? A tipped employee is someone who mainly earns their wages through tips. While there are many professions where tipping is customary, servers and bartenders are among the most common. Tipped wages are calculated differently, depending on your state. Some states are required to pay their employees full minimum wage before tips, in which case patrons are expected to tip less or not at all. However, tipping at restaurants is customary throughout most of the United States, so servers are typically only paid a minimum cash wage that’s combined with tip wages to reach the federal minimum wage or more. You should also keep in mind that certain members of your staff will not receive tips. Typically, the front-of-house staff will split their tips from the shift, and back-of-house don’t receive tips. With that in mind, make sure your prep cooks and dish washers are making an hourly wage that’s appropriate. How to Offer a Fair Week’s Work for Your Employees Aside from compensating for some employees receiving tips while others don’t, it’s also important to note that some shifts are more lucrative than others because more customers mean more tips. No matter what kind of foodservice establishment you have, this is just a fact of life. There are a few ways you can ensure that every person receives an appropriate amount of tips throughout the week. Vary Each Person’s Shift Time In most cases, your business will have busy times and slow times of day. If you own a coffee shop, the early morning hours will likely be the most popular, as patrons swing by to pick up coffee or breakfast on their way to work. If you’re the owner of a bar, evening will likely be your busiest time, as people wind down with a beer after a long day. So keep an open dialogue with your staff about these patterns and make sure everyone gets an opportunity to earn fair tips by switching up their schedule. One of the best ways to approach this difference between shifts is to spread your staff out evenly, allowing equal opportunities for your senior staff and new hires to experience a mix of different times of the day. This will also ensure that everyone gets ample experience and is properly trained on all the different responsibilities that come with each shift time, which will ultimately leave more room for flexibility when it comes to employees filling in for each other. Schedule an Appropriate Amount of People You need to make sure more people are scheduled during busy times and fewer people during slow times. Not only does this make the division of tips fairer, but it also ensures that there are enough employees to complete the necessary tasks in relation to the demand. If you’re not sure what times of day are busiest, most POS systems can track transaction activity throughout the day, so you can pull graphs and see exactly when your traffic is at its peaks and lows. While it may seem like a good idea to compensate for slower times by offering a higher hourly rate during the times where tips are sparse, chances are that your slower shifts are less strenuous for your staff. So it makes sense that they should make more money for serving more customers. Conversely, any down time can be spent cleaning or taking care of other important tasks, so it’s still a valuable and productive time. But you probably don’t need three people to mop the floor, and if you have too many employees sitting around, they’ll need to split the small amount of tips they made and each go home with pennies. Keep Some People On Call While keeping some staff on call is not ideal, this approach can ensure that you have the help you need if things get unexpectedly busy. Similarly, don’t be afraid to send people home if things are slow. While it’s not good to ask your employees to shuffle their personal lives around to accommodate last-minute requests, being upfront with them about staying flexible for a few hours on a Saturday is alright every now and then. Also, you can encourage your managers to step in if things get crazy, since they have a higher hourly pay rate. Hire More than One Manager Take some of the pressure off your manager by hiring two co-managers. That way, you can have one manager on duty at all times to address any issues that may be too demanding of your regular staff’s time. While it may seem like paying two manager wages is not beneficial to your business, having a manager present at all times can go a long way towards improving a customer’s experience. And, as we all know, providing a positive experience for your customers is the only way your business will succeed. Remember That Your Employees Have Personal Lives Whether they’re working around school, a family, or second job, chances are your employees all have different scheduling needs. Ideally, you can get a sense of each person’s unique schedule when they’re first hired. That way, you can staff your establishment with people with varying availability. But even then, life happens and schedules are likely to change. So, when it comes to making a fair schedule, keep an open mind and check your employees' availability. Make Sure Your Employees Have Time to Rest Ensuring that each staff member has a fair amount of time off goes a long way towards preventing stress and fatigue. You should hire enough people so that everyone can have two days off per week, and if those days can be consecutive, that’s ideal. Also, make sure that you only ever ask the same person to close and open the next day if it’s an emergency. You want your staff to have enough time to feel well rested before returning to work. You should also come up with a clear system your staff can use to request time off for family events or vacations. Making Your Restaurant Schedule Most restaurant schedules are set up something like this: Name Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Becky X X 9 - 2 11 - 5 5 - Cl 11 - 5 9 - 2 Thomas 11 - 5 5 - Cl X X 11 - 5 9 - 2 9 - 5 Sue 5 - Cl 11 - 5 X 9 - 2 X 5 - Cl 5 - Cl Bill 9 – 2 9 - 2 1 - Cl 5 - Cl 9 - 2 X X This might be a typical setup for a coffee shop or bakery—something not too demanding. A full-service restaurant would obviously require more hands on deck, but this example should help represent the basic idea. As you can see, each day overlaps two people for at least an hour to give one person time to take care of any prep work, restocking, or other back-of-house tasks while the other person stays available to help customers. Each employee is given varying shift times to provide equal opportunity for tips and training experience. You’ll also notice that, while ideally your shifts will always begin and end at the same time, there will likely be instances where you’ll need to tack on a few hours to a shift to make up for an employee’s time off or other variable. In these cases, it’s a good idea to schedule lengthened shifts for slower days so your staff doesn’t get too fatigued. Here's a list of things to keep in mind while making your employee schedule: Determine how many of your employees fall into restrictions due to labor regulations, such as hours allotted to minors. Indicate each person’s days off. Figure out what roles need to be filled at different points during the day (i.e. what time should the prep cooks be there vs. when should your second bartender arrive to help cover the rush). Make sure you stagger your managers’ schedules. And everyone else’s schedules, for that matter. Fill out each shift so that there’s ample coverage all day. Calculate your FTE (full-time equivalent) for accounting purposes. While this is a basic example with just a few employees and shifts, larger establishments will, of course, have more people and more moving parts. Having a larger staff can certainly complicate things, but it also gives you more flexibility to shuffle things around in a way that will work best for everyone. Restaurant Scheduling Software While it’s possible to lay out your schedule manually, there are programs that can save you a lot of time and hassle as you create your schedule each week. For new businesses or schedulers, software can be a massive timesaver. There are a variety of places you can find software, so take some time to shop around and pick what works best for your needs. Some programs are designed to work with any foodservice setup, like 7shifts. Meanwhile, other programs are made for specific demographics, like independent restaurateurs — such as ScheduleFly. There's no universal "right" answer when it comes to making a schedule — you just have to pick one that works for you. If you don't want to use software, consider using the old fashioned method of a calendar, employee roster, and a little more time. Posting Your Schedule <figure class="article-image cta-caption"> <figcaption>Shop Planning Boards</figcaption> </figure> Your staff’s schedule will likely see frequent changes. It’s always a good idea to give your employees as much notice as possible, so plan on posting your schedule at least two weeks in advance. One popular method for posting schedules is to use a whiteboard with grid lines. You can transcribe your printed schedule onto a large whiteboard and let your staff trade shifts as much as they please. Just make sure to monitor overtime and schedules for minors. Other Restaurant Schedule Considerations Making a restaurant schedule can often seem like a juggling act. Just when you think you have everything laid out fairly and efficiently, another factor will come into play. Here are a few things to remember, especially if you ask some of your staff to work extra hours one week: Overtime Overtime is earned whenever an employee works more than 40 hours in a work week. The time that they work over the 40 hours earns them their regular pay plus 50% of their hourly wage. So if one of your prep cooks earns $10 an hour, but they work 42 hours in one week, they would earn $15 an hour for the two hours they worked overtime. To avoid overtime, maintain a well-equipped staff and a restaurant schedule that caps employees at or below 40 hours per week. You can also encourage overtime to allow employees to earn more, though the extra time worked could have an adverse effect on their energy. Work Scheduling Laws for Minors Foodservice jobs are some of the most popular positions for teenagers. In fact, many people’s first job is at a restaurant, washing dishes or waiting tables. As a restaurant owner, you will likely receive applications or job inquiries from people under the age of 18, so it’s important to know the legal guidelines for employing minors. Full-Time Equivalent (FTE) Measuring your work hours in the context of Full-Time Equivalent is beneficial for accounting purposes. This approach is popular for all kinds of businesses that employ many part time employees. In addition to making things clearer when tax time comes around, calculating FTE can ensure that you have enough coverage for each shift, without employing too many people. You want to make sure you can provide each person with enough hours to make the job worth their while, without overworking them or needing to go into overtime. By calculating the Full-Time Equivalent, you can more easily predict what kinds of hours each person will work and how much training you’re investing into each position. If all this information is making your head spin, just remember that restaurant scheduling doesn’t always have to be overly complicated. The best way to avoid headaches around your staff’s schedule is to create a culture of accountability in your restaurant. By earning the trust and respect of your employees, you can create a motivated work environment where your staff will want to show up on time. Building a trusted team of reliable employees is the best thing you can do to alleviate stress when schedule time comes around. Combine your staff’s accountability with scheduling software and other systems to keep you organized, and you’ll be an expert scheduler in no time.
Safety & Sanitation
How to Clean a Cutting Board
Cutting boards are an indispensable tool in any commercial kitchen. They're used to chop vegetables, fruits, and meats, making meal preparation more efficient. However, not all cutting boards are created equal. The two most popular types of cutting boards are plastic and wooden cutting boards. While both serve the same purpose, they have different properties and require different care. Properly caring for cutting boards not only increases their lifespan but also prevents bacteria from spreading and causing dangerous cross-contamination. Keep reading to learn how to clean your cutting board correctly. Shop All Cutting Boards Use the following links to jump to the cutting board cleaning method that interests you most: Wood vs Plastic Cutting Board Cleaning Plastic Cutting Boards Cleaning Wooden Cutting Boards Cleaning Bamboo Cutting Boards Wooden vs Plastic Cutting Board When choosing the right cutting board for your kitchen, it is important to understand their differences. Plastic cutting boards are lightweight, dishwasher safe, and easy to clean. They're also less expensive than wooden cutting boards and have a typical lifespan of 1-5 years. However, they can be more prone to knife marks, which can harbor bacteria. Compared to plastic cutting boards, wooden cutting boards are more durable and less prone to knife marks, helping you preserve your blade's sharpness. They also have antimicrobial properties and last about 5-10 years. However, wood cutting boards are naturally porous, meaning they can't be put in the dishwasher, making them harder to thoroughly clean. It is for this reason that wooden cutting boards are illegal for commercial use in New York City. How to Clean a Plastic Cutting Board Plastic cutting boards are the most common type of cutting board used in the foodservice industry. Because they can be easily scratched and scored, it's important to clean them properly to kill any bacteria trapped in the deep grooves. Most plastic cutting boards are designed to be dishwasher safe, but repeated exposure to high temperatures may cause warping. How to Clean Plastic Cutting Board with Bleach Use the following method for cleaning plastic cutting boards with bleach: Mix cleaning solution: Create a sanitizing solution of 1 tsp. of bleach to 1 quart of water. Wipe the board: Once the cleaning solution has been mixed, wipe the surface of your plastic cutting boards down with the cleaning solution. Rinse: Once the board has had time to sit for a few minutes, rinse it with water and let it air dry. How to Clean Plastic Cutting Boards With Vinegar If you are wary of using bleach on your cutting boards, vinegar can be used as a substitute. Create paste: Mix equal amounts of baking soda and vinegar into a paste-like substance. Apply to board: Once the paste has been mixed, spread it over the cutting board and let it sit. Rinse: After five minutes, wash the board with soap and water and rinse. How to Clean a White Cutting Board Try the following solution if your white cutting board is still stained after cleaning with bleach or vinegar: Create paste: Add 1 teaspoon of baking soda, 1 teaspoon of salt, and 1 teaspoon of water to make a paste. Apply to board: Spread the paste over the stained areas. Rinse: After five minutes, rinse the board with soap and water. Can You Put Plastic Cutting Boards in the Dishwasher? You'll want to make sure your plastic cutting board is listed as dishwasher-safe before putting it in the dishwasher. Prolonged exposure to heat and water inside the machine can cause a plastic board to warp over time, making it uneven and less effective. How to Maintain Plastic Cutting Boards When you start to see scoring on your plastic cutting board, use a steel scouring pad to remove any loose plastic particles from the board’s surface, and then use a belt sander to smooth out the surface. Most plastic cutting boards should be replaced after 1 year of regular use. Back to Top How to Clean a Wood Cutting Board Wooden cutting boards have naturally porous surfaces that can harbor bacteria. Tiny cuts or grooves made on their surfaces also provide a natural habitat for bacteria to grow, which makes cleaning wooden cutting boards extremely important to prevent cross-contamination. There are several methods used for cleaning wood cutting boards including soap and water, vinegar, and bleach. How to Clean a Wood Cutting Board with Soap and Water Follow these steps for cleaning a wooden cutting board with soap and water: Wash: Hand wash the board immediately after use with water and dish soap. Dry: Pat the board dry with a paper towel or clean dishtowel immediately after cleaning. How to Clean a Wood Cutting Board with Bleach Effectively kill bacteria on your wooden cutting boards with bleach. Mix bleach solution: Create a mixture of 1 tsp. of bleach for every 1 quart of water. Apply solution: Pour the mixture over the board and rinse thoroughly with hot water. How to Clean a Wood Cutting Board with Vinegar Vinegar is excellent for neutralizing odors and eliminating bacteria. However, due to its lack of potency, using vinegar is not recommended for cutting boards used with raw meat, fish, or poultry. Pour: Open your vinegar and pour it over the surface of your board. Wipe: Once you've poured the vinegar, wipe down with a clean, wet cloth. Dry: Allow the board to dry after it's been cleaned. Can You Put Wood Cutting Boards in the Dishwasher? Wood cutting boards are not dishwasher safe. Because moisture absorption can cause splintering and warping of the wood as well as encourage rapid bacteria growth, never submerge your wood cutting board under water or clean it in the dishwasher. How to Maintain Wood Cutting Boards Seasoning your wood cutting board can extend its life and prevent warps and cracks from forming. Depending on how often you use your wooden cutting board, you can season it weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Here’s how to season your wooden cutting board: Condition: Wipe food-grade mineral oil or beeswax over your dry board’s exterior. Rest: Allow the oil to sit for a few hours. Wipe: Use a dry cloth to wipe off excess oil or beeswax. Never use vegetable or olive oil to season a cutting board because these can become rancid over time. Back to Top How to Clean Bamboo Cutting Boards Bamboo cutting boards have a very similar look and feel to wooden cutting boards and can be cared for in the same way. In general, bamboo cutting boards will not crack, warp, or stain as easily as wooden boards because of their higher density. They’re also more resistant to cuts and scars caused by knives than wooden alternatives, which means they’re more resistant to hazardous bacteria growth. Just like wooden cutting boards, you should not soak your bamboo cutting board or put it through the dishwasher. To clean your bamboo cutting board, follow the steps below: Choose a cleaning substance: You may use dish soap, white vinegar, or a dilution of bleach and water to clean your board. Add hot water: Combine your chosen cleaning product with hot water and thoroughly scrub the surface of your board. Dry: Pat the board dry with a paper towel or clean dishtowel immediately after cleaning. How to Maintain Bamboo Cutting Boards The process for maintaining a bamboo cutting board is very similar to that used to maintain a wooden board: Condition: Wipe food-grade mineral oil or beeswax over your dry board’s exterior. Never use vegetable or olive oil to season a cutting board because these can become rancid over time. Rest: Allow the oil to sit for a few hours. Wipe: Wipe off excess oil or beeswax with a dry cloth. Freshen up: You can also slice a lemon in half and rub it cut-side down over the board’s surface to freshen up the board between oil or beeswax treatments. The natural acidity of the lemon will help to break down any residue on your cutting board. Back to Top Each type of cutting board has unique needs for cleaning and maintenance. Therefore, it is important to know how to treat your cutting board to avoid unsafe levels of bacteria and prevent damage. Use this guide as a reference when cleaning your cutting boards, but if you remain unsure of how to treat your board, consult with the board's manufacturer.
How to Clean a Kitchen Hood
Kitchen hoods are a key part of any restaurant, helping to ventilate your workplace and remove hazardous particles from the air. Because of their importance in the kitchen, keeping your hood systems in working condition is imperative to your safety and success. Along with regular maintenance checks, making an effort to keep your hoods clean can help to ensure they stay in working condition. If you’re unfamiliar with how to clean a kitchen hood, this article will teach you how to do it properly. Commercial Hood Cleaning Keeping your kitchen hoods clean is an important way to maintain a healthy, safe, and functional workplace. If grease or other contaminants are allowed to build up in your hood system, you may experience an increased risk of fires, improper ventilation, and even unpleasant odors in your kitchen. For this reason, you must schedule regular cleaning for each hood you own. Keep in mind that since a hood system is comprised of a variety of parts, each one must be cleaned separately to ensure the job is done correctly. To learn how to clean your kitchen hoods, grease traps, and filters, continue reading below. Click any of the sections below to learn how to clean the different parts of your hood system: Exhaust Hood Cleaning How to Clean Grease Trap Screens in Range Hoods Kitchen Hood Filter Cleaning How to Clean Kitchen Hood Fans How to Clean Kitchen Hood Ducts Kitchen Hood Cleaning Services How Often Should You Clean a Kitchen Hood? Exhaust Hood Cleaning An exhaust hood helps to draw smoke, fumes, and other particles in the air out of your kitchen. Over time, these particles can build up in your hood system, resulting in a need to have it cleaned. Use the following instructions to learn how to clean an exhaust hood: Remove any additional components: To best clean your kitchen hood, be sure to remove any grease traps, filters, and fans to ensure each component is cleaned separately. Mix cleaning solution: In a bucket, prepare a solution of warm water and liquid degreaser. Scrub interior: Using the solution, scrub the interior of the hood using a non-abrasive scrub pad, soft-bristle brush, or cloth. Be sure to remove any grease or additional debris. Wipe interior: After scrubbing, wipe the interior using a damp cloth to remove any soapy residue. Afterward, use a separate towel to dry the interior. Scrub exterior: Using the cleaning solution, scrub the exterior of the hood to remove any excess grease. Wipe exterior: Remove any additional soap residue with a damp cloth. Dry the exterior using a separate towel. Dry: Give your kitchen hood additional time to air dry. How to Clean Grease Trap Screens in Range Hoods Grease traps are designed to keep fats, oils, and other greasy substances from entering your building’s ventilation or sewage system. If they begin to overflow, your hood system may begin to fail. The size of your grease traps can affect how often they need to be cleaned. Adhere to the following steps to keep them in good condition: Remove grease traps: Remove the grease traps from your range hood. Remove grease: Proceed to remove as much grease from them as you can. Be sure to place the grease in a separate container and refrain from rinsing it down a drain. Eliminate remnants: Using a non-abrasive scrubbing pad or soft bristle brush, scrub any remaining grease from the traps. Prepare degreasing solution: Using warm water and a liquid degreaser, create a cleaning solution in your sink. Be sure to check your degreaser bottle to find the appropriate water ratio. Soak traps: Once the sink has been prepared, soak your grease traps in the solution. Remove traps from solution: After waiting 5-10 minutes, remove the traps from the sink. Dry: Allow your grease traps to air dry before re-installing them in your kitchen hood. Kitchen Hood Filter Cleaning Cleaning your kitchen hood filters ensures that your system can correctly filter the air in your kitchen. As air is pushed through your hood system, these filters work to catch particles in the air and prevent them from being recycled back into the kitchen. Because of this, they can quickly become caked with grease and grime. To learn how to clean kitchen hood filters, follow the steps below: Remove filters: Take the air filters out of your range hood to clean them. Mix degreasing solution: In a sink or large tub, mix a solution of warm water and liquid degreaser. Be sure to check the bottle for the appropriate ratio of water. Soak filters: Place the filters in the water to soak. Since there is a chance the filters attract additional grease, consider allowing them to soak for 2-3 hours or even overnight. Remove filters from solution: After allowing them to soak, remove the filters from your cleaning solution. Scrub filters: Using a soft cloth, lightly scrub any additional residue from the filters and run them through the water to rinse any remnants. Dry: Allow the filters to air dry before reinstalling them in your kitchen hood. How to Clean Kitchen Hood Fans Sometimes referred to as blowers, a kitchen hood exhaust fan draws air into the hood. Not only do these fans help to maintain an even distribution and flow of air, but they also are the key component working to capture grease particles, smoke, and fumes as you cook. Depending on the type of hood you own, there may be as few as two fans, although many hoods are designed with more. To clean your kitchen hood fans, follow the steps below: Remove fan: To start cleaning your fan, detach and remove it from the kitchen hood. Remove fan blade cover: Once the blower has been removed, detach the fan blade cover using a drill. This gives you access to the individual fan blades. Detach fan blades: Remove each fan blade so that they can be washed individually. If your hood uses multiple fans, be sure to make a distinction between which fan is which. Soak blades: Submerge the fan blades in warm water with soap and allow them to soak. Dry: Once the fan blades have had time to soak, remove them from the water and allow them to dry. Consider using a microfiber cloth or letting them air dry. Reattach fan blades: After they’ve had time to dry, reattach the fan blades. Replace blower: Place the blower back in the kitchen hood and re-install it. How to Clean Kitchen Hood Ducts Although some ductwork extends beyond the range that you can comfortably clean it, there will likely be some exposed ducts to work on. If need be, consider having your ducts professionally cleaned by a team with the necessary training and knowledge. However, to clean exposed ducts within reach, follow these steps: Mix cleaning solution: Prepare a cleaning solution from warm water and liquid degreaser in a bucket or similar container. Scrub duct interior: With a non-abrasive scrubbing pad or soft-bristle brush, scrub the interior of the exposed duct. Scrub duct exterior: With the same pad or brush, scrub the exterior of the exposed duct. Dry: Once you’ve finished cleaning, allow the duct to dry. Kitchen Hood Cleaning Services If you’re unsure whether you want to clean your hood system yourself, consider hiring a kitchen hood cleaning service to do it for you. These services, which can vary in availability depending on your location, allow you to have your hood system cleaned by a team of professionals. Although it can be costly, professional cleaning may be the right choice depending on your preferences. Kitchen Hood Cleaning Cost Although the cost varies depending on the service you hire and how much work needs to be done, most businesses pay somewhere between $300 and $600 to have their kitchen hoods cleaned. In some cases, the cleaning process can take upwards of four hours. Some factors that might influence the cost and amount of time required to have your kitchen hood professionally cleaned include: Crew size Location Hood system size Water availability Hood system configuration Hood condition How Often Should You Clean a Kitchen Hood? In general, it’s said that you should plan to clean your kitchen hood once every three months. However, this number doesn't apply to everyone. It’s important to note that the length of time you can go without cleaning your hood depends on several different factors, each of which can have a different effect on your cleaning schedule. Some of the most significant factors include: Business volume: A busy restaurant results in a busy kitchen, in turn causing more stress on your kitchen hoods. Conversely, if you cook less frequently or are only open on certain days of the week, you may not need to worry about your kitchen hoods as much. Menu items: A menu with an abundance of greasy foods or foods that result in excess steam while cooked means that your kitchen hoods will be used more frequently and need to be cleaned frequently. Type of equipment: Although some appliances are exempt, most kitchen hood code regulations require that all appliances be placed under a hood. Remember to take into account what kind of equipment you use and if it can cause additional dirt or grease to build up in your hoods. To learn more about how often you should clean the different parts of your kitchen, consider reading our restaurant cleaning checklist. Back to Top Cleaning your kitchen hoods should be a regular occurrence in your restaurant and something that you take care to schedule regularly. Whether you’re hiring a service to do it for you or making an effort to clean them yourselves, keeping your hood systems clean helps to facilitate a safe and healthy environment for yourself, your guests, and your staff.
How to Season a Wood Cutting Board
Wood cutting boards are a staple supply for any kitchen and, with proper maintenance, can last for years. But it’s important to practice proper wood cutting board care and keep your board well-seasoned in order to prevent bacteria growth or unwanted splintering. The wood seasoning process is simple and will keep your cutting board looking and working great for years to come. How Often Should You Season a Wood Cutting Board? It’s recommended that the process be repeated about three times before using a board for the first time, and it should be seasoned again as soon as the finish looks worn down. We recommend using Emmet’s Elixir wood conditioner, which is a food-grade mineral oil that’s combined with naturally anti-microbial oils to penetrate, rejuvenate, and seal cutting boards, butcher blocks, and even tabletops. It’s the only NSF Listed wood conditioner, making it a perfect choice for your restaurant, deli, or cafe. Simply apply the elixir liberally, rub it in, wait for it to absorb, and then buff off any excess with a clean rag. How to Season a Wood Cutting Board Step-by-Step Here is a step-by-step breakdown of how to season a wood cutting board: 1.First, wash, rinse, and dry your cutting board. 2.Apply Emmet's Elixir wood conditioner. 3.Rub the Elixir into the wood using a cloth. Make sure you cover the sides and back of your board as well. 4.Let it set for about an hour, until most of the oil is absorbed. 5.Buff the board with a dry cloth to remove any excess oil. 6.Your board is ready to use! So, whether you’re refurbishing an old butcher block or seasoning your wooden cutting board for the very first time, this simple process is an important step towards maintaining a safe and sanitary cutting board at your restaurant.
How to Prevent Cross-Contamination
Cross-contamination occurs when harmful bacteria is transferred to foods, which can result in serious health risks like food poisoning or unintended exposure to food allergens. If your kitchen staff members know how to prevent cross-contamination by correctly storing and preparing food, you can save the time and money that would be wasted on improperly handled food. By making the effort to separate your foods while storing and preparing them, sanitizing your kitchen surfaces and equipment, and practicing proper personal hygiene, you can create a kitchen environment that follows food safety guidelines. What is Cross-Contamination? Cross-contamination occurs when disease-causing microorganisms, like bacteria and viruses, are transferred from one food to another. As a result, cross-contamination is one of the leading causes of foodborne illnes. Cross-contact is most frequently caused by unwashed cutting boards, hands, or kitchen tools like knives and tongs. While cooking to food-safe temperatures will kill dangerous bacteria, most food contamination happens when the bacteria from a raw food item interacts with food that doesn't need to be cooked. How to Prevent Foodborne Illness You can best prevent foodborne illness by being aware of the risk for contamination in each step of your food preparation process. It is possible to contaminate food before it is prepared, during preparation, and even when food is served to your customer. Implementing a HACCP program, or Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Points program, will help you to identify and control contamination risks. Teaching all of your staff how to prevent cross-contamination can help your food stay safe from the moment it arrives in your kitchen to its delivery at your guests' tables. By requiring your kitchen staff to obtain food handling certification or food handler's permits, you can further ensure that your kitchen is a safe and sanitary environment. Preventing Cross-Contamination through Food Storage You can avoid contaminating food before it is prepared by using the correct food storage techniques. Proper food storage in the refrigerator is important to prevent cross-contamination, as many types of food are often stored in one place. In this environment, contaminants can easily spread from one food item to another if they have not been adequately protected or organized appropriately. When organizing your kitchen, follow these guidelines for safely storing food: Keep raw meats and dairy in well-sealed, sturdy food storage containers to prevent contact with other foods. ServSafe recommends storing food in the following order from top to bottom based on the minimum internal cooking temperature of each product: ready to eat food, seafood, whole cuts of beef and pork, ground meat and ground fish, whole and ground poultry. If space and budget allow, store your raw meats and dairy items in separate refrigeration units from your fruits, vegetables, and other ready-to-eat items. Preventing Cross-Contamination During Food Preparation Even if food has been stored properly, there are still opportunities for cross-contamination once your staff starts preparing meals. Use the following preparation practices to avoid cross-contamination of foods: Clean your surfaces before preparing food on them, and be sure to sanitize them between uses. Failing to clean a work surface after preparing raw meat will contaminate any food items or equipment that you place on it afterwards. For added safety, use color-coded cutting boards to differentiate between supplies that are used for raw meat, fish, poultry, fruits, and vegetables. Try using color-coded chef knives to easily designate your knives for the same reason. Following HACCP guidelines for color-coded knives, green knives should be used with fresh produce, white knives for dairy, yellow with raw poultry, red with raw meat, blue for raw fish, and brown knives are meant to be used with cooked meat. To prevent contamination, equipment should be kept separate from food storage areas once it has been cleaned and sanitized. Practicing Proper Personal Hygiene Sometimes, contaminants linger on your employees’ hands and clothing. Here are some ways to prevent cross-contamination from improper hygiene habits: Require your kitchen staff to wear aprons and headwear to protect food from outside contaminants carried on the body or clothes. To best keep hands free from contamination, have employees wear disposable gloves and make sure that gloves are changed when an employee begins handling a new food or material. Also have employees wash their hands frequently and thoroughly, especially when handling raw meat, fish, or poultry. Handling Food Safely Preventing contamination is not finished until the food is brought to your customer’s table. This being said, cross-contamination can happen if utensils, glasses, and plates are improperly handled while your tables are set or cleared. To prevent contamination when serving food to your guests, consider the following tips on how to handle food safely: When plating prepared food, avoid using the same utensils to serve different food items. Have one for meat, fish, and poultry, and another for sides like vegetables or starches. Never put ice or garnish into a glass with your bare hands, but instead use a scoop or tongs. Always hold utensils by their handles and not by the portions that will come in contact with your patrons’ food. Similarly, have your servers handle your guests’ dishes by their base, without touching any portions of the plate where the food may go. Products for Preventing Cross-Contamination Now that you know how to avoid cross-contamination in your preparation processes, consider these products that make practicing sanitary habits easier. Probe wipes are essential for sterilizing probe thermometers after each use. Because they are used only once, disposable food thermometers help to eliminate the risk of cross-contamination. Day of the week and product labels allow you to clearly label food items in your storage areas, so your employees know what is being stored and when it is safe for consumption. Try color-coded probe thermometers to prevent cross-contamination while ensuring that your foods are cooked to safe temperatures. To prevent cross-contamination in your kitchen, it is important to practice sanitary habits throughout your food preparation processes. Food can be contaminated as early as during storage, and as late as during serving. Keeping your food safe means familiarizing yourself and your employees with techniques and products for preventing cross-contamination. You can refer to this article as a guide for beginning the practices that will help you run a safe and sanitary kitchen.
How to Clean & Boil Out a Deep Fryer
Regularly cleaning deep fryers is essential for establishments like Southern kitchens, fast food operations, and diners that rely heavily on their fryer. One of the best ways to clean your fryer is by boiling it out. Keep reading to learn what boiling out a deep fryer means, why you should do it regularly, and how to boil out your deep fryer successfully with these easy steps. Shop All Fryer Cleaner How to Boil Out a Deep Fryer Tutorial Video <iframe scrolling="no" src="/v/?num=8505&width=600&height=500&embed=1" frameborder="0" height="500" width="600" style="user-select: auto;"></iframe> What Does It Mean to Boil Out a Deep Fryer? Boiling out a deep fryer is the process of removing old oil, adding water and cleaning solution, and then boiling the water to thoroughly clean the interior of the fryer and remove any hard, stuck-on grime. Why Should I Boil Out My Deep Fryer? One of the main reasons you should boil out your deep fryer is because it can protect the taste of your food. Old food and grime in your deep fryer can affect the oil and how your food fries, which in turn affects the flavor. Boiling out your deep fryer also helps your oil last longer. If you don't boil out your fryer, there may be proteins, polar contaminants, and other materials that can affect your oil immediately after it's added, which causes it to deteriorate faster. By boiling out your deep fryer, you ensure your oil lasts longer, so you can save money on replacement costs. Plus, if you get into the habit of regularly boiling out your deep fryer, you'll eventually be able to use fewer chemicals, because you will prevent grime from building up. What You Need to Boil Out Your Deep Fryer Cleaning a deep fryer is simple, but you'll need a few tools for the job. Here's what you'll need: Deep fat fryer cleaner High temperature fryer brush Fryer cleanout rod Step-by-Step Instructions for Boiling Out a Deep Fryer Follow these directions to thoroughly clean your deep fryer. 1.Drain all of the grease from the fryer and safely discard it via an oil caddy and an approved oil discharge container. 2.Use a fryer cleaning rod to clean any remaining debris out of the drain line. 3.Rinse the fryer with hot water to remove excess undrained fat. 4.Fill the fryer with cool water within at least 3-4" of the top. Then, add your deep fat fryer cleaner. Check the instructions on the bottle to find the specific amount you need to use. 5.Boil slowly for 20 minutes. 6.Allow the fryer to drain slowly. When the water has drained, use a long handled fryer brush to clean the sides, top, and heating elements of the fryer. 7.Rinse thoroughly to remove all residue. 8.Add your new oil. Add fry powder or oil stabilizer to the fresh oil to make it last longer. Boiling out your deep fryer at regular intervals can help improve the taste quality of your fried food, cut down on oil replacement costs, and improve the life of your fryer. Additionally, it's a simple process that involves removing the oil, adding water and cleaning solution, boiling until stuck-on grease and grime come off, and finally adding in fresh oil.
Startup Tips
How to Start a Donut Shop
Donut shops specialize in the preparation and sale of donuts. Donuts are considered one of the most popular baked goods in the United States, and donut shops can be found in towns across the country. They've grown to become a staple of many people's morning routines, providing a much-needed pick-me-up to start the day. If you’re looking to start a donut shop, we’ve compiled a list of steps to walk you through the process. Shop All Donut Shop Equipment Click any of the tips below to skip to the donut shop startup information that interests you: Write a Donut Shop Business Plan Investigate Donut Franchises Calculate the Cost of Opening a Donut Shop Obtain Donut Shop Funding Purchase Donut Shop Equipment Create a Donut Shop Menu Advertise Your Donut Shop Hire and Train a Donut Shop Staff Host a Soft Opening Donut Shop FAQ 1. Write a Donut Shop Business Plan A business plan provides a clear and structured roadmap for how to start your donut shop. It outlines your goals, strategies, and financial projections, helping you stay on track and make informed decisions. One of the key purposes of a business plan is to present your concept to potential investors. Whether you seek funding from a bank, a private investor, or even friends and family, a well-crafted business plan can make a difference when securing capital. In addition to providing a foundation for your business and attracting investors, a business plan serves as a valuable tool for you as the owner. It helps you stay focused on your goals and objectives and provides a framework for making informed decisions as you navigate the challenges of starting and running a donut shop. To learn more about this topic, read our guide on how to write a bakery business plan. 2. Investigate Donut Franchises Franchises are regionally or nationally recognized brands that operate in many locations, allowing independent investors, known as franchisees, to purchase the rights to use the franchise name, products, and business model. The main advantage of investing in a donut shop franchise is brand recognition. Established franchises have already built a solid reputation and a loyal customer base, which can give your new business a head start. Franchisees also benefit from the support and guidance provided by the franchisor, which can be valuable if you’re new to the foodservice industry. It's important to note that investing in a donut shop franchise comes with financial obligations. In exchange for the franchise rights, franchisees are required to pay a monthly or annual franchise fee. This fee covers the use of the franchise name, products, and business model. Additionally, franchisees are responsible for other expenses, such as marketing fees and royalty payments based on sales. We’ve listed some of the most popular donut shop franchises below: Krispy Kreme franchise cost: Krispy Kreme franchisees must have liquid capital of $300,000 and pay a franchise fee of $12,500 to $25,000. The average investment needed to start a Krispy Kreme shop ranges from $275,000 to $1,900,000. Dunkin' franchise cost: A Dunkin' franchisee must have a minimum net worth of $500,000 and pay a franchise fee of $40,000 to $90,000. On average, the total investment to start a Dunkin' franchise can range from $500,000 to $1,800,000. Duck Donuts franchise cost: A prospective Duck Donuts franchisee must have a minimum liquid capital of $200,000 and pay a franchise fee of $40,000. The average total cost to start a Duck Donuts ranges from $400,000 to $600,000. Tim Hortons franchise cost: A Tim Hortons franchisee must present a minimum liquid capital of $60,000 and pay a franchise fee of $25,000 to $50,000. The total investment needed to start a Tim Hortons ranges from $300,000 to $1,400,000. 3. Calculate the Cost of Opening a Donut Shop The average cost to start a donut shop falls between $40,000 and $90,000. It’s important to note that this figure can vary depending on several factors, including your business concept and where you want to open your shop. To budget accordingly, you should build an understanding of these costs and how they can affect you. We’ve compiled a list of donut shop startup expenses below to help inform your decisions: Acquiring a commercial space: Buying a donut shop can cost between $80,000 and $300,000 while leasing a commercial space can cost an average of $5,000 per month depending on your lease agreement. Equipment costs: The average cost of donut shop equipment ranges from $15,000 to $30,000. Permits and licenses: Depending on your location, you may need to apply for permits and licenses including a sales license, zoning permit, and food handler’s license, along with completing a health inspection. Each permit may be associated with application or renewal fees. 4. Obtain Donut Shop Funding While some prospective owners may have the necessary funds readily available, many people will need to secure loans or find investors to make their dream of owning a donut shop a reality. Remember to highlight your unique offerings and demonstrate a solid business plan to increase your chances of obtaining the necessary funding. Continue reading to learn about the different financing options available to you. Traditional bank loan: Traditional bank loans involve taking out a set amount of money and paying it back over a fixed period. Business line of credit: A business line of credit functions similarly to a credit card. You'll be provided with a set line of credit that can be used for a wide range of purchases and interest on the money you spend. Small business loan: Small business loans are loans available through the U.S. Small Business Administration to help entrepreneurs establish and grow their businesses. Crowdfunding: Finding funding through sites like GoFundMe can be an effective tool for new business owners. Supporters can donate money towards your cause and help you quickly and efficiently get the funding. Equipment cost: Equipment loans can be useful for getting quick money to repair or upgrade the equipment in your donut shop. Business credit card: Business credit cards allow you to make purchases for your business. They are effective for paying off smaller expenses and shouldn't be used in place of a larger loan. 5. Purchase Donut Shop Equipment Donut shops require specialized equipment to function efficiently and produce high-quality donuts consistently. The type of equipment you purchase and the quantity you'll need depends on your projected output and the available space in your kitchen. We'll walk you through the equipment you'll need below. Kitchen Equipment Purchase the following appliances to complete your donut shop kitchen: Convection ovens: Ideal for baking large amounts of donuts and other treats. Donut glazers and finishing tables: Provide a surface for glazing and decorating your signature donuts. Donut depositors: Allows you to distribute the perfect amount of dough for your donuts. Dough mixers: Perfect for preparing dough in the kitchen. Dough scales: Allows you to verify your dough is portioned correctly. Donut baskets and screen racks: Ideal for cooling donuts and other baked goods. Front of House Equipment and Supplies The equipment and supplies listed below allow you to design a functional front-of-house area: POS equipment: Allows you to conduct transactions. Display cases: Perfect for highlighting your signature donuts. Menu boards: Ideal for displaying your menu or specials. Bakery boxes: Allows customers to take multiple donuts on the go. Paper cups: Ideal for serving coffee, tea, and other beverages. Lids: Ensures that guests do not spill their beverages on the go. Coffee stirrers: Allows guests to prepare coffee as they see fit. 6. Create a Donut Shop Menu Your menu is the centerpiece of your donut shop, and in many cases, it's the first thing customers see when they walk in. Choosing what to offer on your menu can be difficult, and it's crucial to get it right. Keep the layout of your menu in mind and highlight customer favorites or limited-time promotions. When it comes to pricing your menu, be strategic. Consider the cost of ingredients, preparation time, and overhead expenses, and offer a range of price points so that customers with different budgets can find something they enjoy. Offer a variety of treats: Include donuts, donut holes, and other baked goods on your menu. This gives your customers access to a wide range of selections and ensures they will find something they enjoy. Highlight seasonal items: Consider adding themed items to your menu throughout the year to boost sales. For example, you could offer pumpkin spice donuts during the fall or holiday-themed donuts during the winter season. Don't forget drinks: Expand your menu to offer coffee, tea, or smoothies, complementing your donut selection and giving guests more variety to choose from. 7. Advertise Your Donut Shop Advertising is crucial for creating awareness and generating excitement for your donut shop. Marketing costs can vary depending on your business type, goals, and the marketing strategies you choose. As a small business owner, it's essential to allocate a portion of your budget towards advertising to ensure your donut shop gets the attention it deserves. On average, donut shops spend 5-8% of their revenue on advertising. While this may vary based on individual circumstances, it provides a general guideline for budgeting purposes. Keep in mind that the more you invest in advertising, the greater the potential return on investment. To help identify the strategy that works best for you, we've listed some donut shop marketing methods below: Traditional marketing: Traditional methods, such as print media and radio advertisements, can be effective with local audiences. Place ads in local newspapers or magazines highlighting your unique offerings. Radio commercials can be a great way to reach commuters and capture their attention during their daily commute. Social media marketing: Platforms like Facebook and Instagram are excellent tools for reaching a wide audience at a minimal cost. Create engaging posts showcasing your delicious donuts, behind-the-scenes footage of your shop's preparation, and sneak peeks of your menu. Word of mouth: Encourage your friends, family, and loyal customers to spread the word about your donut shop. Offer them incentives, such as discounts or freebies, for referring new customers. 8. Hire and Train a Donut Shop Staff Your employees are the backbone of your business, and having the right team in place can make all the difference in how efficiently your shop operates. When it comes to hiring, it's not just about finding people with the necessary skills. It's about finding individuals who fit into your company culture and can contribute to a positive workplace environment. A strong company culture not only attracts customers but also helps to retain employees, reducing turnover and ensuring continuity in your operations. As an employer, your responsibility doesn't end with hiring employees. It's equally important to invest time and resources into training them properly. This ensures that they have the knowledge and skills to perform their duties effectively and consistently. Below, we've created a list of tips to guide you through the hiring process. Write clear position listings: Clearly defining the job positions and their requirements will help you attract candidates who best fit your needs. Recruit effectively: Depending on the location of your donut shop, you may need to actively recruit and advertise your job openings to reach potential employees. Online job boards, social media, and local networking can help you cast a wider net and find the right talent. Conduct interviews and background checks: Asking behavioral-based questions and checking references can provide valuable insights into a candidate's work ethic, problem-solving abilities, and compatibility with your team. 9. Host a Soft Opening A soft opening is a limited, invite-only unveiling of your donut shop. It's an opportunity for you and your staff to have a dry run before the grand opening, and it can also generate positive word of mouth for your business. During the event, consider offering a limited menu or highlighting your signature donuts. This way, you can focus on perfecting a smaller selection of items, ensuring they are prepared to the highest standard. The limited, invite-only nature of a soft opening also creates a sense of exclusivity and anticipation among your guests and allows you to receive valuable feedback. Their opinions and suggestions can help you identify areas for improvement and make necessary adjustments before opening to the public. Donut Shop FAQ We've answered some of the most common questions about starting a donut shop below. How Much Does it Cost to Open a Donut Shop? The cost of starting an independent donut shop ranges from $50,000 to $150,000, but this number can fluctuate based on a variety of factors. The location you choose, the amount of equipment you need to purchase, and potential renovations to your shop can all impact your initial investment. How Much Profit Does a Donut Shop Make? A small donut shop situated in a highly trafficked area can rake in up to $150,000 in profit annually. It's important to note that donut shop sales can fluctuate seasonally. January and February often see low profits as customers kick off the new year with resolutions to eat healthier. As summer approaches, donut shop owners can expect an upward trend in sales, with a sharp increase coming in the fall. Back to Top Starting a donut shop requires careful planning, a solid business strategy, and a large amount of hard work. Donut shops come with significant financial and operational obligations, but when executed correctly they can be very successful. By adhering to the information above, you can position yourself and your donut shop for success in a competitive industry.
How to Start a Catering Business
Catering businesses are often an ideal, flexible alternative to opening and operating a restaurant. They allow you the creative freedom of running a foodservice operation without standard hours or a rigid schedule. Plus, catering companies often require less startup capital and financial risk than a full-service restaurant. If you’re considering starting a catering business, keep reading to learn more about this foodservice segment. Shop Catering Supplies Click below to learn how to start a catering business: Choose a Catering Business Concept Write a Catering Company Business Plan Aquire Catering Business Permits and Licenses Create a Catering Menu Find a Catering Kitchen Buy Catering Equipment and Supplies Hire Your Catering Staff Market Your Catering Business What Is a Catering Business? A catering company is a business that prepares food for special events, often creating a multi-course menu that suits the needs of the patron and event space. The food is either prepared on-site or transported to the location and served throughout the course of the event schedule. How Much Does It Cost to Start a Catering Business? To get your business off the ground, you can expect to spend somewhere between $10,000 to $50,000 between equipment, licenses, transportation, and marketing. The investment can certainly pay off if successful. Catering businesses can make around $30,000 to $80,000 annually. Pros and Cons of a Catering Business Before you begin buying equipment or drafting a business plan, it’s important to understand what makes a catering business unique. Pros Operating a catering business requires much less financial risk and burden than opening a restaurant while still offering you creative freedom. Many caterers can easily rent a space or equipment. Forego staff if your operation is on the small side and reduce food waste by cooking for a predetermined headcount. Cons Catering an event often puts you and your food in a less controlled environment than a restaurant. When you own a restaurant, you’re preparing food in the same kitchen every night and serving in the same dining room. With catering jobs, you’re either preparing food in a rented kitchen or on-site. During the event, you and your food are at the mercy of the venue space, their amenities, the weather, and staff you may not work with often. Starting a Catering Business We’ve compiled the top 8 steps to help you learn how to start a catering company: 1. Choose a Concept Creating a solid concept or theme can enhance the marketability of your catering business. Try to focus your concept on something you’re interested in or, better yet, passionate about. Do you have a specialty you’ll serve or will you be catering to a particular dietary need? Menu concepts can include options like brunch foods, casual sandwiches, desserts, finger foods, comfort food, or any idea that gives your business direction. Identify Your Target Audience It’s also important to consider what type of catering business you’re interested in pursuing and the capacity you’ll be capable to cater to. These are just some of the target audiences that may be interested in hiring a catering company: Corporate events: conferences, cocktail parties, staff meetings Social gatherings: weddings, galas, charity events, birthday celebrations Personal uses: cooking a meal in someone’s home for a small gathering or date night or preparing a meal kit ahead of time that clients can take home and reheat later Research the Area When choosing your theme, it’s important to think about the demographic you’ll be serving, how you plan to price your services, and if you can access the equipment needed to sustain your theme. In your location analysis, you’ll want to take stock of the competition in your area to ensure that your niche will be well accepted in the community you have chosen. As part of your research, you can contact potential customers who are likely to hire caterers, like wedding planners, event coordinators, and conference centers, to see what they look for when working with catering companies. Gain Exposure and Experience Like any business venture, it takes a certain level of experience to successfully execute a start-up. Consider working for an already established catering company prior to opening your business. While researching what you’ll need and how to operate is helpful, it won’t compare to the hands-on experience and guidance gained through a working professional. If working for a catering company isn’t doable, volunteer to plan small-scale events for people you may know. Host a holiday party for friends and family or prepare a church luncheon for a small crowd. Operating on a smaller scale first allows you to find and fix potential problems and gain honest feedback from a forgiving crowd. 2. Write a Catering Business Plan A compelling business plan helps organize your dream into tangible segments that will allow your investors to understand and support your vision. We’ve added the most common points you’ll want to include in your catering company business plan. Executive Summary - This section will recap the details of your business plan, so it is often easier to write it last. Company Overview - In this section, you’ll present your company mission statement with the goal of expressing why you would like to start a catering business. Concept and Menu - Explain your concept, what sets you apart, and what niche you will be filling with your menu selections here. Management and Ownership Structure - Create a game plan for what your management structure will look like, whether that means you’re managing alone or you’ll have managers operating under your supervision. Staffing Needs - Outline how many employees you’ll need to start off with and how many you plan to hire in the future as your company grows. Competitor Analysis - Here, you’ll want to share your research on the competitors in your area and who your target customers will be. Advertising and Marketing - Provide your marketing ideas in this section including social media plans, website layouts, and events you will attend to locate clientele. Financial Summary - Finally, you’ll need to provide a breakdown of your financial expectations, including start-up costs, overhead expenses, and profit margins. 3. Acquire Catering Business Licenses and Permits Before you cater your first event, you must apply for the proper permits and ensure your kitchen and staff are well aware of food safety practices and regulations. Be sure to check the rules and regulations with your local jurisdiction to acquire all of the appropriate permits and licenses you’ll need for your catering business. List of Common Catering Permits General Business License - Every business in the United States is required to acquire a business license to operate. Employer Identification Number - To receive a tax ID number and hire employees, an EIN is needed. This is issued by the IRS. Food Handler Permit - A food handler permit shows that you and your employees are familiar with and practice safe food handling practices in your business. Caterer Permit - In some states, a catering permit is needed along with a food handling permit, allowing you to distribute food safely as a certified catering company. Home Occupation Permit - If you are starting or operating your catering business out of your home, you’ll need a home occupation permit to legally certify your home as the headquarters of this business. Health Permit - To receive a health permit, a health inspector will need to visit the location where you prepare your food to deem your location and practices safe for handling food. Catering Business Insurance - You’ll want to protect your business from potential “what if’s” with general insurance options. These usually cover accidents, auto incidents, workers’ compensation, and property damage. Liquor Licenses - If you’re offering bar services, you must come up with a safe serving plan to ensure your staff is serving responsibly. Plan for Potential Problems A little planning can go a long way when it comes to unexpected foodservice emergencies. Think about common obstacles you could encounter with your catering business, and work with staff to establish a response plan. Potential problems could include: Inclement weather at an outdoor event More guests to feed than you had expected Shortage of staff No access to power 4. Create a Menu Create your menu for your catering business before you begin to look at workspaces and equipment. Figuring out what types of food you’ll be cooking means you can decide what equipment, appliances, and space you’ll need to successfully prepare your offerings. While it’s important to stay true to your theme and concept, you need to offer a menu with the versatility to accompany a wide range of tastes, preferences, and dietary restrictions. Create a selection of offerings that are, for example, gluten-free, vegan, dairy-free, or low-carb. And if your menu items are especially spicy, be sure to offer a few more manageable options as well. Once your menu is established, determine how you’ll price your items or event packages. It’s important to have a sample menu prepared and pricing figured out before meeting with your first potential clients. Test Your Menu Try testing your menu concept and dishes in small, no-pressure scenarios, similar to how a restaurant would host a soft opening. Gather friends and family together, or offer to cook for a small gathering or fundraiser in your community. Be sure to ask for candid feedback from your guests. You can even provide everyone with a pen and paper to write their thoughts down anonymously. Once you’ve successfully served your crowd and received feedback, it is important to keep tweaking your recipes. Practice making them over and over again while focusing on efficiency, taste, and presentation. 5. Find a Suitable Working Space Many states have laws and regulations in place to prevent caterers from operating out of their home kitchens. If you choose to do so, you’ll most likely need to make immense modifications to your home and receive approval from local governing authorities. Instead, most caterers start by renting out kitchen space or finding a building to make their own. If you’re just starting out or operating at a low volume, your most economical option would be to rent a commercial kitchen space. This is ideal for those working one or two days a week or for only a few hours at a time. For high-volume operations or those looking to make this a full-time business, you’ll want a place you can have access to 24/7 with more storage and customizable equipment. If you want to offer tastings for potential clients or sell your goods to the public, you’ll need to rent space with a separate storefront area from where you do your cooking or baking. 6. Buy Catering Supplies and Equipment Next, you’ll want to customize and stock your space with supplies and equipment that are conducive to your cooking. Focus on what equipment will be most beneficial for preparing your menu items. For example, if you’re focusing on desserts, you’ll want to equip your kitchen with extra ovens. And if your specialty is Southern comfort food, more fryers are a must. A complete catering supplies checklist will help you stock up on the appropriate inventory to help your business be successful. Here are just some of the supplies you may need: Table Settings - Dinnerware, flatware, charger plates, napkins, tablecloths, and glassware Display and Decor - Table numbers, dessert stands, cases, candles, and centerpieces Disposable Catering Supplies - Paper napkins, plastic cutlery, appetizer plates, cocktail picks, and foil pans Transport Supplies - Insulated pan carriers, glass racks, coolers, and food storage boxes Cooking and Holding Equipment - Induction cookers, portable grills, holding cabinets, and outdoor burners Serving Equipment - Serving trays, chafers and fuel, serving utensils, and food pans Beverage Supplies - Beverage dispensers, coffee urns, coffee airpots, and ice Furniture and Seating - Folding tables, folding chairs, cocktail tables, bars, canopies, and tents Janitorial and Cleaning Supplies - Garbage cans, cleaning towels, disposable gloves, and handwashing stations 7. Choose Your Staff Finding the right staff members to help prepare and serve your offerings can be a challenging task. When choosing staff and introducing them to your business, be sure to consider the following: Decide whether your operation is large enough to hire additional employees Begin with a temp agency until you can grow your business Create a dress code or provide uniforms Offer adequate training in serving protocols and food safety 8. Make a Marketing and Advertising Plan Once you’ve laid the groundwork for your business, it’s time to market your catering business. Start by figuring out who your target audience is and go from there. This can be determined based on the type of catering operation you plan on running. For example, if you’re interested in social gatherings, you can showcase your menu at bridal expos and contact event planners. Other marketing strategies include: Create a memorable logo that embodies your theme Print out your menu or pricing info to hand out to potential clients Create a website and social media accounts to connect with customers Form relationships with corporate event coordinators and venue holders Offer tastings at local fairs or charity events If you’re looking for the creative freedom of running your own business without the financial undertaking of operating a restaurant, catering could be an enticing option. And with proper planning using the steps above, your business will be off to a good start. No matter what type of catering you decide to do, be sure to create a mouthwatering menu and dynamic concept future customers will flock to. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Start a Candy Business
The pandemic created a lasting shift towards grocery delivery and pickup for households across America. This new convenience has caused a ripple effect across many niche markets in the grocery sector, including a decrease in impulse buying candy in checkout lines. With fewer people getting their fix from the usual big confectionary brands, a space has opened in the confectionary segment for small brands to make their mark. This is the perfect time to capitalize on the confectionery market gap. Below are the steps on how to open a candy store: Click any of the tips below to read the section that interests you: Candy Store Business Plan Candy Store Cost Candy Store Funding Candy Store Permits and Licenses Candy Making Supplies Candy Store Menu Candy Store Marketing Candy Store Staffing Candy Store Opening How to Open a Candy Store From the early stages of ideating to marketing your opening day, read the steps below on how to start a candy business: 1. Create a Business Plan When opening any business, writing an effective business plan is essential. With a business plan, you can outline your candy shop’s goals and projections. This document will be vital in the future, as it will provide banks and investors with all the information they need before they decide to fund your candy shop. If you want to create an effective, in-depth candy shop business plan, you should include these sections: Executive Summary - A summary of the information included in your business plan that highlights your goals and why your candy shop is worth investing in. Company Description - Provide an overview of your company that is similar to your executive summary, but go more in-depth when it comes to projections and strategies. Concept and Menu - Describe what concept you have chosen for your candy shop and what confections you will serve. Management and Ownership Structure - Go into detail about what type of ownership structure your candy business will have and discuss the shop’s management hierarchy. Employees and Staffing Needs - This section outlines the employees and staff that are required to run your candy shop. Marketing and Competitor Analysis - In this section, identify target demographics and markets and analyze potential competitors to your business. Advertising and Marketing Strategies - This section should outline potential marketing and advertising strategies that could be used to reach your target demographics. Financials - Use this section to analyze financial projections, list expenses and costs, and discuss how long until the business becomes profitable. Back to Top 2. Determine the Cost of Opening a Candy Store When gathering cost estimates for your candy store, consider the below instances: Candy Equipment and Ingredient Cost - If you’re going the made-in-house route, you will need to set aside funds for candy-making equipment, ingredients, and paying your confectioners and/or chocolatiers for their labor. If you’re going the wholesale route, you’ll only need to consider the costs of selling pre-made candy. Candy Packaging and Candy Displays - Beautifully displaying your confections plays into the whimsical, kid-in-a-candy-store feeling that makes candy so easy to sell. For this, you will need bakery cases and wall-to-wall shelving filled to the brim with confections. To further extend the feeling of quality for your products, wrap them nicely in candy packaging for a lasting touch. Storefront Payments - If you decide on renting a brick and mortar candy business, take into account how much space you’ll need. It’s essential to have enough space for your candy equipment and ready-to-sell products. Additionally, if you plan on operating an ice cream station in your candy shop, make sure there is enough space for guests to comfortably dine. Regardless, the cost of retail rent is determined by square foot and can range from anywhere from $10/square foot to as high as $30/square foot. How Much Does It Cost to Open a Candy Store? The cost to open a candy store can start at a few thousand dollars if you’re only operating online. If you want to open a brick and mortar candy business, starting costs can range anywhere from $50,000 to $150,000 depending on the size and scale of your operation. Back to Top 3. Secure Funding for Your Candy Store While selling candy may seem cheap and easy, the sum of finished product costs can actually be very expensive. Consider the following options as ways to acquire extra capital and continue the process of opening your candy business: Loans: Popular among small business owners, there are a variety of loans that exist for people interested in opening a business. Among them are traditional bank loans, small business loans, and equipment loans. Investors: Another popular option for business owners is obtaining funding through investors. This is where your strong business plan in Step 1 comes into play: pitch your candy shop business plan to an investor or group of investors so they can consider helping fund your candy store. Keep in mind, whether you like it or not, the investors will want to stay informed on the status of your business. Crowdfunding: Utilize websites such as GoFundMe to create a place for people to donate to your candy business. Your page should tell your story so genuine supporters can donate their money in a no-strings-attached manner. To keep engagement and create a community, continuously update your page with updates until your opening day. Self-Funding: If you can afford to do so, self-funding your own business is the easiest way to secure funding for your candy store. You would not have to ask banks, investors, or friends and family for money, and you can run your business exactly how you see fit. However, do not be discouraged if you cannot meet the high costs of everything in the end. Stay open-minded and try one of the other ways of securing funding mentioned above. Back to Top 4. Acquire Candy Store Permits and Licenses Whether you’re opening up a candy store or starting a candy business online, you will need permits and licenses to legally produce and sell any confections. The licenses you need to open a candy shop are as follows: Sellers Permit - A seller’s permit authorizes a business to collect sales tax. Requirements for seller’s permits vary based on local and state laws, so be sure to research relevant laws. Health Permit - A health permit is required for any business that sells cooked or prepared foods to customers and outlines standards of safety and sanitation for your business. Health permits are under the domain of county health departments, meaning laws regarding health permits can vary depending on your location. Employer Identification Number - An employee identification number is required for every business in the United States. Your EIN is unique to your business and is used for identification purposes with the IRS. Business License - A business license is a permit that is issued by the government that authorizes you to operate your business. Business licenses can vary based on location and industry, meaning you may have to obtain multiple business licenses at the local, state, and federal levels. Resale Certificate - Also known as a tax exemption certificate, a resale certificate allows a business to purchase wholesale goods without having to pay the local sales tax. However, keep in mind you will have to collect the tax from customers when they buy your products. Without this certificate, you will have to pay sales tax on all purchases. Sign Permit - If you decide to open a storefront candy shop and want to put out a sign indicating information about your business to passersby, you will need to obtain a sign permit. Certificate of Occupancy - A certificate of occupancy proves that your building is safe to inhabit. You will only need this document if you decide to open a brick and mortar candy store. Back to Top 5. Invest in Candy Making Supplies If you are making your confections in-house, you will need to gather all of the candy-making supplies and ingredients. Below are a few different pieces of equipment and specialty wares you’ll want to invest in: Candy Equipment - It all depends on what you actually decide to make for your candy business, but candy equipment items can include copper kettles, scales, batch rollers, candy wrapping machines, candy cutters, cotton gloves, rotating stretchers or hooks for pulling candy, candy molds, and thermometers for recording candy temperatures. Ingredients - Your candy store ingredient inventory should include items like sweeteners, extracts and flavorings, specialty food coloring, and bulk chocolate if you decide to add chocolates to your menu as well. Back to Top 6. Create a Menu of Different Types of Candy People love innovative candy as much as they love nostalgic candy, so don’t be afraid to be creative with your flavors, as long as you also offer the classics. Here are a few different types of candy to add to your candy business: Hard candy Soft candy Salt water taffy Lollipops Chewing gum Gummies Rock candy Cotton candy Candy buttons Bonbons Brittles Gourmet popcorn Toffee Chocolate bars Truffles Fudge Shop Bulk Candy Back to Top 7. Market Your Candy Store Hit the ground running with sales by marketing your candy store. Build hype before the big day by making social media accounts that feature pictures and videos of your confections, videos on how the candies are made, and any themed candy or special orders you’ve put together to profile your product range. If you will have a storefront candy shop, place signs in the windows during remodeling. Include your business’s name, the tentative grand opening date, and anything else that will entice customers to look forward to the day your shop opens. If you don’t have a storefront candy shop and will be exclusively selling your candy online, marketing on social media is a great place to start. Other sales avenues can be selling to and supplying local movie theaters, independent convenience or grocery stores, bakeries that do not have the space to make housemade candies, and locals who rent out vacation homes that want to add a parting gift for their guests. Back to Top 8. Hire and Train Your Staff For those that are making candies and chocolates in-house, you’ll probably need to hire a confectioner and/or chocolatier or two when you first start out. Candy and chocolate making is a very laborious and skilled job. Make sure to hire back-of-house staff that can not only have a great experience but ones that you can afford to pay fairly for their labor. Your pay rate should match their skill level as well as their job description. If you will be operating a physical candy store, hire front-of-house employees to package, display, and sell products. This job does not require too much skill, so look to hire teenagers or college students for part-time work, while you have at least one full-time staff manager on the floor as well. Back to Top 9. Opening Your Candy Store Once all of your planning is done, funding is set, equipment is bought, and staff is hired, it’s time to start thinking of your candy business’s launch. We recommend a soft opening first and then a grand opening: Soft Opening A soft opening is the launch of a business for a limited number of people at first to test its services, acclimate staff, and make improvements. Hosting a soft opening also helps build anticipation and allows a space for your guests to give you valuable feedback. Grand Opening A grand opening should be saved for when your candy business is well and truly open to the public. Grand openings are events that involve exclusive deals, special events, and large crowds. Having a grand opening is an effective way to generate hype and introduce your candy shop to the neighborhood and prospective customers. Back to Top The world’s infatuation with sweets is present in almost every culture, and a candy business creates a one-stop-shop to capitalize on the sweets craving that every human experiences. Whether your candy business is online or being made and sold in a store, follow our guide to help start a successful candy business.
How to Start a Vending Machine Business
Starting a vending machine business presents a unique opportunity due to its hands-off nature. When combined with a low cost of entry, high growth potential, and low risk, starting a vending machine business seems like a great business venture. Regardless of whether you’re an experienced business owner or a new entrepreneur, opening your own vending machine business is a potentially lucrative option to take advantage of. If you’re looking to generate passive income and start your own vending machine business, check out our vending machine startup guide below. Shop All Vending Machine Supplies Use these links to learn more about individual aspects of how to start a vending machine business: Vending Machine Business Plan Vending Machine Products Vending Machine Supplies Vending Machine Licenses Vending Machine Locations Vending Machine Jobs Vending Machine Advertising Starting a Vending Machine Business Vending Machine Business FAQ What Is a Vending Machine Business? A vending machine business is any business that makes money from selling products from one or more vending machines. Customers pay at the vending machine and the items are dispensed. Due to the automation and simplicity, a vending machine business is a great side-hustle for those looking for hands-off passive income. An operator just needs to purchase and stock a vending machine and then income can start flowing in. 1. Vending Machine Business Plan Creating a solid business plan is a great way to map out future ideas and goals, setting a vision for the future of your vending machine business. In this plan, you will outline topics such as strategies, expenses, and a break-even point, all in one location. Should you want to expand your business in the future, a business plan will make it easier to secure loans. In order to create an all-encompassing business plan, you should include the following: Executive Summary - Written after the rest of the business plan is finished because it summarizes all of the information contained in your business plan. Company Description - Outline the basics of your vending machine business, including specifics such as projections and goals. Concept - Discuss what type of vending machine you’ll operate as well as the inventory you plan to stock your vending machine with. Management and Ownership Structure - Disclose if there are any business partners involved in your vending machine business and if so discuss the management hierarchy. Employees and Staffing Needs - If you plan on expanding your vending machine business to the point where employees are required, outline what positions need to be filled and how they will help your business operate. Marketing and Competitor Analysis - Analyze potential competitors and outline your business’s strategies to outshine the competition. Advertising and Marketing Strategies - Discuss potential marketing and advertising strategies that can be used to gain customers and grow your business. Financial Summary - Cover financial information such as a break-even analysis, sales projections, assets, and liabilities. For a more in-depth guide on how to write a solid business plan, check out our business plan guide. 2. Vending Machine Products The inventory you stock your vending machines with will be a huge factor in how successful your business will be. When deciding on what to stock your vending machines with, consider factors such as location, target market, and cost of goods. It may be a smart idea to stock vending machines in different locations with different products because some items sell better in some locations than others. Here are some of the most popular products to stock your vending machine with: Candy - Individually wrapped snacks like candy are popular in vending machines, as many different consumer groups love sweets. Brand loyalty to brands like Snickers and Hershey’s makes it easy to entice customers. Chips - Chips are the perfect salty complement to candy in a snack vending machine, being another popular snacking option consumers love. Water - Bottled drinks such as water are a beverage option that sells well in just about any location, including gyms, amusement parks, and schools. Soda - Soda and other carbonated beverages are a popular option in vending machines. Offering a variety of different products and flavors of soda appeals to a wide consumer audience and is a great way to boost sales. Energy Drinks - A popular alternative to coffee, energy drinks provide customers with a burst of energy to make it through the day. For this reason, energy drinks sell well in locations such as offices and schools. Sports Drinks - Sports drinks are a great beverage to sell to health-conscious consumers, especially in locations such as gyms and fitness centers. 3. Vending Machine Supplies To start your vending machine business, you’re going to need a handful of supplies before you begin making sales. Unlike starting some other businesses, very little is required to start a vending machine business, lowering the barrier of entry. Here is a list of supplies you’ll have to acquire to start and expand your vending machine business: Vending Machines - Each time you expand your business, you have to purchase another vending machine to place at a new location. Inventory - Vending machines need to be filled with a variety of different products for customers to purchase. Parts and Accessories - Vending machine parts and accessories will be required to replace shelving and make repairs to malfunctioning machines. Transportation - Transportation supplies such as vending machine transporters will be required to move and set up vending machines at new locations. Back to Top 4. Vending Machine Licenses Many rules regulate the operation of vending machines, and there are some permits that need to be acquired. Laws and permits covering vending machines vary from state to state, so make sure you double-check your local laws. There may also be varying regulations depending on where you place your vending machine. For example, you may be limited in what you’re able to sell in a school vending machine. That being said, here are some of the most common vending machine permits and licenses required: Business License - All businesses in the United States require a business license to operate. Business license requirements vary from location to location, so do your research on what is required from your business license in your state. Employee Identification Number - An Employee Identification Number (EIN) is needed for identification purposes. You can’t hire employees without an EIN and the process can be lengthy, so be sure to apply for your EIN early in the formation of your business. Vendor License - A basic business license that needs to be obtained before you can sell food items within a location. 5. Vending Machine Locations When it comes to vending machine profitability, location is key to success. A vending machine should be placed in a location that gets a lot of foot traffic and people spend a lot of time in. Additionally, you’ll want to place your vending machine in a location that doesn’t charge high commissions or fees. If you’re looking for a location to start your vending machine business, here are some of the best places to maximize the success of your vending machine: Gyms - Gym-goers looking for a post-workout snack are a great audience to target with vending machines. Gym vending machines can be especially successful if you offer healthy foods and beverages like granola bars and sports drinks. Schools - Vending machines in schools can be high-earners, capitalizing on snacking habits of teenagers and young adults. Students love to pick up a quick snack or drink while studying or in between classes, making school vending machines profitable. Airports - Airports involve a lot of waiting around for customers due to layovers and delayed flights. Vending machines in airports can cater to these customers, offering snacks and drinks while they wait for their flight. Hotels - Hotel vending machines are potentially lucrative, taking advantage of tourists looking for quick food items. Vending machines offer a convenient alternative for guests who aren’t looking to eat at a hotel restaurant. Office Buildings - Office buildings that house 50 or more employees are a fantastic location for vending machines. Office workers get hungry and thirsty working throughout the day, leading them to purchase snacks from vending machines and similar micro markets. Malls - Malls have a high amount of foot traffic, meaning there are a lot of potential customers. As customers get hungry from shopping around, they're likely to check out your vending machines and pick up a few snacks. 6. Vending Machine Jobs While it is possible to run a small vending machine business on your own, once you start to branch out and expand you’ll need to hire some employees. The everyday tasks of these employees can range from stocking and maintaining your vending machines to mapping the future of your business. These employees help you maintain the progress you have already made with your vending machine business and make it easier to plan out a successful future. Here are some of the most common positions vending machine businesses consider: Technician - An experienced vending machine technician must perform regular maintenance and answer repair calls. Driver/Stocker - A driver/stocker may be required to load supply trucks and stock vending machines in different areas. Retail Merchandiser - Larger vending machine businesses can benefit from having a retail merchandiser analyze performance metrics and work towards improving sales. Field Sales Consultant - A field sales consultant handles negotiations with on-site locations and brainstorms ideas for new vending machine sites, making it easier to expand. Back to Top 7. Vending Machine Advertising Although a good chunk of your profits stems from impulse sales generated by foot traffic, advertising is still important to a vending machine business. Vending machine advertising ranges from methods designed to alert traffic of your vending machine’s presence to reaching out to customers and alerting them of your machines’ locations. Here are some of the most common types of vending machine advertising to engage in. Brochure - A physical brochure that lists all your machines’ products and locations can be posted for customers to see and pass around. Website - A strong website that highlights the locations and offerings of your vending machine is a great way to advertise your business and inform prospective customers. E-mail Marketing - Reach out to other businesses and customers in your machines’ locations via email, advertising where your vending machines are located and what products they sell. Signs - Although a more traditional form of marketing, large eye-catching signs can grab the attention of foot traffic and direct them toward your machine. 8. Starting a Vending Machine Business Unlike the start of some other businesses, a grand opening isn’t required to kick off your vending machine business. However, the start of your business is still critical and you’ll want to ensure everything runs smoothly. You'll want to keep your vending machine well-maintained and stocked during its launch period, ensuring no problems occur. Giving customers a positive first experience with your equipment makes them more likely to come back, establishing a customer base that could lead your vending machine to become a big earner. Vending Machine Business FAQ We cover some of the most common vending machine business questions below: How Much to Start a Vending Machine Business? The cost to start a vending machine business varies greatly, as there are many varying factors you have to consider. Around $2,000 is the minimum requirement to start a vending machine business, allowing you to purchase a used vending machine and enough inventory. However new vending machines can cost anywhere from $4,000-$10,000, so if you plan on utilizing brand new equipment, you’ll have to invest more initially. Also, inventory needs to be considered, as selling expensive higher-end products in your vending machine will force you to raise your initial investment as well. Are Vending Machines Profitable? Although each situation is different, on average vending machines are usually profitable. Even when expenses like rent and commission fees are factored in, vending machines will typically turn a slow profit. Some vending machines may produce a small profit, earning anywhere from $20-$50 profit a week. However, vending machines that are well-run and placed in high-traffic areas could earn hundreds of dollars of profits a week. As your vending machine business expands over time you’ll have a handful of big earners along with other vending machines that churn out a smaller weekly profit. What Is a Micro Market? A micro market is a food retail space that has self-checkout technology. Although similar to vending machines, there are some slight differences. Both are automated vending options that allow for self-checkout, but micro markets have a more diverse selection of healthier options and open-style purchasing. However, vending machine businesses have a lower cost of entry and offer cheaper products, making a vending machine business easier to start. Back to Top When executed correctly, starting a vending machine business can generate hundreds of dollars every week in profits. With such a low cost of entry and low involvement, vending machine businesses are perfect for those looking to dip their toe into the world of entrepreneurship. Vending options in high-traffic areas like hospitals and schools don’t appear to be going away soon, making this the perfect time to start your own vending machine business. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Open a Pizza Shop
With 93% of Americans consuming pizza at least once a month, it’s no surprise that pizza shops are one of the most popular types of restaurants. Opening a pizzeria can be a great investment, especially when you’ve prepared correctly. If you’re wondering how to open a pizza shop, your first priority should be coming up with delectable recipes and deciding what types of pizza you want to feature on your menu. See below for a complete guide to starting your pizza business. Shop All Pizzeria Supplies & Equipment Opening a Pizza Shop Whether you are ready to open your pizza shop or are deciding if you want to open one, it's important to understand what is necessary to start a successful pizza-serving business. 1. Create Your Pizza Recipes and Form Your Menu With pizza places on nearly every street corner, you can set your pizzeria apart by honing your craft to make sure your pizza is unique and tastes great. High-quality, fresh ingredients are important for flavor, and you can also experiment with various toppings to design innovative pizzas. Make sure to write down each step when trying out different recipes, so you can recreate your pizza inventions. Deciding what will be on your menu can set the stage for fleshing out your service style and brand. It will also determine what type of equipment you need, the crowd you hope to attract, the staff you hire, and the funding you might need. These are all important when forming your idea and writing a business plan. 2. Choose Your Pizza Shop Service Style and Brand Coming up with a promising concept and brand is important for envisioning your restaurant, writing your business plan, and securing funding. Choosing a Pizza Shop Service Style The most common pizza place service styles are below. You can also choose a combination of these service styles. This decision may ultimately depend on how much startup funding you have, the location you choose, and your unique vision. Sit-down. A sit-down pizzeria allows for a wider range of customers than other service styles. In addition, it allows you to communicate your brand, ambiance, and to provide hospitality. This option, however, has an increased investment. Delivery. A delivery pizza shop is a convenient option for many customers. However, there is an increased risk related to the safety of your delivery drivers along with an increased price for customers because of the delivery labor cost. Take-Out. A take-out pizza place is likely the least expensive option, as it requires less equipment, space, tableware, and more. One downside is that the price and food are your only main selling points as opposed to your pizzeria’s unique feel and welcoming wait staff. Choosing a Pizza Shop Brand Choosing a brand for your pizza place may depend on your service style. But you can (and should) still create your own memorable brand. Are you a fast casual spot that’s geared towards millennials, or are you a sit-down, upscale spot with Italian dishes? Are you an old-fashioned pizza hub with Coca-Cola bottles and retro signs? Next to the food you offer, your restaurant's brand and feel are the next factors to win over customers, so be sure to put careful thought into your concept. 3. Write a Business Plan for Your Pizza Place Here is a basic overview of what should be included in your pizza shop business plan. A business plan is essential for structuring your business, staying organized, and obtaining funding. Executive Summary Company Overview and Description Market Analysis Business Offerings Management Marketing and Public Relations Strategies Financial Projection 4. Find a Great Location for Your Pizzeria When choosing a location to open your pizza place, we recommend the following techniques: Try to find an area where similar restaurants are scarce. Some healthy competition can be a good thing in the restaurant world, but you don't want to be overshadowed by the most popular pizza place nearby. Find a spot that is easily visible. If possible, choose a location that faces a busy street, gets heavy foot traffic, or features parking spaces. If your pizza shop is open and inviting to passersby, you'll be more likely to bring in new customers. Explore the demographics and eating patterns of people in the area. Make sure there is a customer base that will be attracted to your restaurant service style and brand in the location you choose. 5. Secure Loans and Funding for Your Pizza Place When seeking funding for your restaurant, you will first want to figure out what amount of total startup funding you need for your pizza shop. You should first assess how much money you already have available to use as startup funding and how much more you will need to get your pizza shop started. To do this, consider all the costs of opening your pizza shop and the costs necessary to keep it running on a daily basis. You should then budget, predict, and plan the next year in advance to know how much you will need to stay in business. Consider applying for restaurant startup loans if you need funding to carry out your business plan. 6. Stock Up on Pizza Business Equipment The pizza business equipment necessary for your pizza shop will depend on your restaurant concept, but there are some essentials that every pizzeria will need: Refrigeration equipment Dough preparation equipment, such as dough sheeters, dough presses, and proofing cabinets Pizza ovens – you can choose from conveyor ovens, impinger ovens, pizza deck ovens, convection ovens, or a brick pizza oven Basic preparation supplies, including pizza cutters, cutting boards, serving utensils, and plates Serving supplies, like pizza stands and pizza delivery bags You may be able to find deals on used or outlet cooking equipment for your pizza shop. Pizza ovens are a big expense, so look for discounts wherever you can find them. For a complete list of equipment, check out our pizza shop equipment list. 7. Hire Qualified Employees Your employees will be the face of your pizzeria, so you want to make sure they'll represent you in the best way possible. When interviewing candidates, look for positive, warm personalities. It's important that customers feel comfortable interacting with your staff. Also look for potential employees who are genuinely interested in becoming a part of your restaurant. If they care about the success of your pizzeria, they are more likely to put forth hard work and good effort. 8. Advertise Your New Pizza Shop It's important that locals and out-of-towners both know about your pizza place and can find helpful information about it. Create excitement around your new pizzeria to entice customers to want to try it. Utilize social media. Create a Facebook and Instagram account that entices potential patrons with photos of your food, behind-the-scenes pictures of employees, and information about your pizzeria. Make sure to use high-quality photos. Create an appealing website. Your website should be easy to navigate and should represent your brand. Include all the necessary information about your pizza place, such as your address, phone number, hours, and menu. Join Yelp. This is another easy way for patrons to easily learn about your pizzeria but to also leave feedback. Since it is a well-known website, joining Yelp will also increase your credibility. Create an ad for the local paper. Getting the word out before you open your pizza shop could give you an advantage, especially if pizza businesses are already popular in the area. Create a digital check-in. Create a digital rewards program through an app that will appeal to the growing number of consumers who use smartphones. Create an email list. The trick to engage customers with emails is to use relevant content to each group of customers. For example, sending dine-in specials to reservation customers or sending delivery coupons to online ordering customers are both great ideas. Your email should communicate your brand and forge a relationship with guests who will look forward to choosing your pizza place. Offer promotions to new customers. Give guests a free soft drink or an extra side dish with a pizza slice. This will give customers the impression that they are treated well at your establishment, and they will be more likely to recommend your pizza shop and to return themselves. Consider hosting a grand opening. This can take place after your soft opening or in place of it. You can also host other events, such as late-night promos, how-to-make-your-own pizza nights, music events, or themed dinners. 9. Host a Soft Opening We recommend hosting a soft opening before your full-fledged starting date. This allows you to test run your service strategies and fix any issues that may come up. Consider offering a smaller menu or just serving for part of the day. You can also host friends and family event withs complementary dishes or invite local businesses. These approaches also help you to gain local patrons who may spread the word of your new pizza place before its official opening date. With such a high demand for pizza, opening a pizza shop has the potential to yield great returns. But this profitable bottom line is more likely with impeccable logistical planning, delicious recipes, and a distinctive brand and concept. If you're looking for more specific ways to captivate your pizzeria customers, be sure to incorporate new foodservice trends into your pizzeria. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Start a Grocery Delivery Business
With only so many hours in a day, many people look for ways to streamline their daily routine. Because of this, many services like food delivery and meal kits have expanded to make customers' lives more convenient. In particular, grocery delivery services have seen a substantial rise in popularity. Beyond just saving time, these services have inspired business owners and entrepreneurs to establish their own method of grocery delivery. Below, we’ll investigate what a grocery delivery service is and what steps to follow to start your own. What Is a Grocery Delivery Business? A grocery delivery service allows customers to order groceries and have them delivered without visiting a grocery store. Doing so allows them to keep their kitchens stocked without wasting time or having to make a trip back to the store for an item they forgot. While some grocery stores might choose to create their own delivery service, it’s also possible to start an independent business that shops for clients. How to Start a Grocery Delivery Service Grocery delivery services operate differently than traditional businesses, making it difficult to identify a starting point. Below, we’ve provided a list of steps to help you make informed decisions as you establish your delivery service. Click any of the sections below to learn how to start and manage your own grocery delivery business: Choose a Type of Service Identify Key Demographics Assess Competition Invest in Equipment and Transportation Set Prices Create a Website Establish a Schedule 1. Choose a Type of Service Choosing the right type of grocery delivery service is essential, as your success can vary depending on the market you'll be making deliveries in, the number of employees you intend to hire, and your business goals. To learn more about the different grocery delivery options available to choose from, continue to the list below: Partner with a grocery store: One of the easiest options available is to contract with a local grocery store. In this scenario, the store would charge customers for deliveries and pay your company to fulfill them. Partner with a wholesaler: Starting an account with a wholesaler allows you to let customers place an order which you’d then pick up directly from the wholesaler. Partnering with a wholesaler rather than a grocery store can result in cheaper food prices and a higher opportunity to profit, however, it may be more difficult to find customers. Register with a delivery service: Working through a delivery service such as Uber Eats or WeGoShop is an easy way to get started in the grocery delivery business. These companies allow users to place orders directly through their app, which then assigns a driver to deliver food to them. Work directly with customers: Another option available is to forgo registering or partnering with other companies and work directly with customers. This will require you to set up an effective line of communication and invest in your own supplies, but it can be rewarding in the long run. 2. Identify Key Demographics An important part of starting a grocery delivery service is identifying what groups of people are most likely to be a customer. In general, people order their groceries online because they don't have enough time in the day to go to the grocery store. Additionally, many customers have their groceries delivered because they have difficulty getting to the store on their own. These groups of people can range from busy parents trying to balance their home and work lives to senior citizens or individuals in assisted living facilities. Regardless of who is ordering, analyzing the demographics in your market makes it easy to decide on marketing strategies and accommodate your customers. 3. Assess Competition Competitive analysis, when done right, can give your business an advantage. Identifying your competition, their services, and how they operate doesn’t just help you to understand the industry, but also helps to give you a competitive advantage against other businesses in your market. Additionally, this practice can help you to stay on top of industry trends and any changes happening in your specific market. Don't just study your competitors' successes, analyze their mistakes to avoid repeating them. 4. Invest in Equipment and Transportation Having the right equipment helps to keep your delivery drivers prepared for any food they might have to deliver. Furthermore, having access to reliable and efficient transportation is the key to making deliveries fast and efficient. Continue reading below to learn how you can invest in equipment and transportation to improve your customer service: Coolers: Since customers may order frozen foods, make sure that your drivers have coolers on hand. This helps to ensure cold foods remain cold until they reach their destination. Insulated food carriers: Having insulated food carriers on hand while making deliveries is helpful when customers order hot foods, particularly those prepared in-store. These carriers allow you to keep foods warm and fresh as you drive from the grocery store to your delivery destination. A reliable car: Not only does investing in a reliable car make it easy to get from place to place, but it also makes it easier to make deliveries during inclement weather, when you may see an increase in orders. Being able to drive safely through snow, rain, or any other type of weather makes it easier to get to your destination on time. A GPS system: As they make deliveries, it's important to make sure your drivers know how to get to their destination. For that reason, be sure to provide them with a reliable and accurate GPS system that will guide them from place to place. 5. Set Prices Setting competitive prices ensures that you are maximizing profit and making the most of your services. Generally, grocery delivery services make their money by collecting subscription fees, charging delivery fees, and product markup. To learn more about these fees and how they are applied, continue reading the list below. Markup: In most cases, groceries available for purchase through a delivery service are slightly more expensive than they are in store. This is because many services increase prices to ensure they make a profit. The amount you mark up items depends on several factors including their in-store price, other fees you charge, and what your competition may charge. Subscription fees: Some grocery delivery services charge customers a membership fee in order to use their services. This can be a weekly, monthly, or even annual charge. Although prices can vary depending on a variety of factors, many memberships amount to roughly $100 annually. Delivery fees: In addition to membership fees, it’s also possible to charge customers a fee for each order they place. The amount you charge can vary depending on how much a customer orders. For example, when a customer puts in a small or standard order, you may charge them a standard fee. However, if they place a larger order, it’s possible to waive the delivery fee. In many cases, waiving this fee encourages larger orders, which in turn results in more money made from marked-up prices. Beyond knowing what to charge your customers, it's also important to have a system in place to refund them if their order isn't complete. Since many grocery ordering services rely on in-store employees to retrieve the items a customer wants, there is a chance that something is forgotten or the store is out of that specific product. Since customers pay in advance for their groceries, you'll need to be able to give them a refund for any missing products. 6. Create a Website Since many potential customers will do research online, it's essential to make sure you create a website with up-to-date information for your grocery delivery service. Furthermore, consider allowing customers to order food directly through your website, as this makes it convenient for them to shop and gives you an easy way to keep track of orders. Whether you’re building your site by yourself, hiring a professional to design it for you, or working through an online website hosting service, having a functional and convenient website is a key to success in the modern business world. 7. Establish a Schedule As your service grows in popularity, it may become difficult to keep up with deliveries. Increased demand, repeat customers, and the size of your orders can all affect how long it takes to get food to your customers. Because of this, it may be helpful to consider establishing a delivery schedule. Setting a delivery schedule makes it easy to keep track of your orders and make sure they arrive on time. You can set them weekly, bi-weekly, or even work with customers individually to establish a schedule that works best. Some factors to consider as you begin putting together your delivery schedule include: Driver availability Vehicle capabilities Traffic patterns Geographical restrictions Weather forecasts Average time spent per delivery Previous difficulties fulfilling orders Back to Top Starting a grocery delivery service presents a unique set of challenges and expectations compared to other types of businesses. Due to the type of work they require, the different ways they can be approached, and the different factors that affect how they perform, it may be difficult to identify how to get started in the grocery delivery business. By building an understanding of what a grocery delivery service is and familiarizing yourself with how to start one, you’ll be able to put yourself in a position to succeed.
How to Start a Butcher Shop
Butcher shops have long been the place to get premier high-quality cuts of meat. Recent trends such as a growing interest in organic and sustainable meat options as well as a rising interest in charcuterie products have created new opportunities for butcher shops to widen their consumer base and expand their offerings. If you're looking to start your own butcher shop, check out our butcher shop startup guide. Looking for supplies for your butcher shop? Click below. Shop All Butcher Shop Supplies Use these links to learn more about individual aspects of how to open a butcher shop: Choose a Butcher Shop Concept Write a Butcher Shop Business Plan Secure Butcher Shop Funding Pay Butcher Shop Start-Up Costs Acquire Butcher Shop Permits and Licenses Find Butcher Shop Locations Hire Butcher Shop Staff Market Your Butcher Shop Opening Your Butcher Shop What Is a Butcher Shop? A butcher shop is a retail store that sells meat and poultry products, but may also sell other products such as fish. Butcher shops process and package the meat on-site, resulting in fresh, great-tasting products. However, butcher shops typically don’t have a slaughterhouse on-site and will get fresh meat from another source. Butcher shops can become a key part of local communities, supplying residents with fresh meat and healthy sources of protein. For prospective owners, starting a butcher shop is a great opportunity as it allows you to corner a niche market. Americans are known for their love of meat, and meat-lovers will almost always be willing to go above and beyond to acquire high-quality cuts of meat. Starting a Butcher Shop Starting a butcher shop business seems complicated at first glance, but breaking down the process into individual steps makes everything easier. We've created a 9-step guide to starting a butcher shop, covering everything you need to prepare for before you start your business. 1. Choose a Butcher Shop Concept Choosing what type of butcher shop you want to open is one of the most important steps in the planning process because it will determine what your target market is. During the conceptualizing phase, you will decide what type of products you serve your customers, as well as what industry trends you incorporate into your business. There are several different concepts that you can choose from, each targeting a different section of the market and serving different products. Traditional Butcher Shop Traditional butcher shops specialize in selling various cuts of meat and their complementary products. You’ll find meats such as beef, pork, and chicken at a traditional butcher, allowing customers to get all their meat products in one location. Most traditional butcher shops also offer other food options such as charcuterie and prepare their own cooked meat products. Vegan Butcher Shop A vegan butcher shop prioritizes selling meat-free products and plant-based alternatives. The idea of a vegan butcher shop is new and growing, as alternative diets like veganism continue to rise in popularity. Some common products sold at vegan butcher shops include plant-based “meats” such as vegetable burgers and dairy-free complementary items such as vegan cheeses. The idea of a vegan butcher shop may seem contradictory, but starting a vegan butcher shop allows you to stand out from the competition and cater to alternative diets. Halal Butcher Shop Halal butcher shops are a foodservice trend that is rising in popularity, mostly in communities that have strong Muslim cultural roots. Halal butcher shops serve customers the same way traditional butcher shops do, however, the method of slaughtering animals differs. Halal is Arabic for “permissible”, and Halal meat means the animal was slaughtered according to Islamic law. For meat to be considered Halal, the animal has to be healthy at the time of slaughter, have its blood completely drained from its carcass, and be approved by the Halal Food Authority. Opening a Halal butcher shop as opposed to a traditional butcher shop allows you to expand your markets and should be considered if you're opening a butcher shop in a location with a large Muslim population. 2. Write a Butcher Shop Business Plan When opening any business, writing an effective business plan is essential. With a business plan, you can outline your butcher shop’s goals, projections, and plans. This document will be vital in the future, as it will provide banks and investors all the information they need before they decide to fund your butcher shop. If you want to create an effective in-depth butcher shop business plan, you should include these sections: Executive Summary - A summary of the information included in your business plan that highlights your goals and why your butcher shop is worth investing in. Company Description - Provide an overview of your company that is similar to your executive summary, but go more in-depth when it comes to projections and strategies. Concept and Menu - Describe what concept you have chosen for your butcher shop and what food items you will serve. Management and Ownership Structure - Go into detail about what type of ownership structure your butcher shop will have and discuss the shop’s management hierarchy. Employees and Staffing Needs - This section outlines the employees and staff that are required to run your butcher shop. Marketing and Competitor Analysis - In this section, identify target demographics and markets and analyze potential competitors to your business. Advertising and Marketing Strategies - This section should outline potential marketing and advertising strategies that could be used to reach your target demographics. Financials - Use this section to analyze financial projections, list expenses and costs, and discuss how long until the business becomes profitable. If you're looking for a deep dive into how to write a business plan, check out our in-depth business plan guide for more information. 3. Secure Butcher Shop Funding A solid business plan for your butcher shop should help you secure loans and investments easier. Funding your butcher shop may seem expensive at first, but there are plenty of ways that you can come up with the money. Your business plan should outline how much you need for funding and will allow you to determine the best way to approach funding your butcher shop. Here are some of the most common funding options available to prospective butcher shop owners: Small Business Loan - A small business loan is a special type of loan that is easier to obtain and has favorable interest rates. This type of loan can provide you with the funding you need to get your butcher shop off the ground, without having to give up equity or pay high-interest payments. Traditional Commercial Loan - If you need a lot of funding for your butcher shop, a traditional commercial loan may be required. Traditional commercial loans will provide you with more money, but the application process will be stricter, and interest rates may not be as favorable as they are with small business loans. Private Equity Financing - Private equity financing involves you giving up equity in your butcher shop in exchange for a monetary investment. Private equity isn’t a loan, so you won’t have to pay anything back, but be careful about giving away too much equity and control of your butcher shop. Self-Funding - If you have any money saved up, you could utilize those savings and put them towards your butcher shop. Self-funding your butcher shop allows you to avoid giving up equity and paying high-interest rates, but it can be risky to put up your personal savings for funding. Crowdfunding - With crowdfunding, a community of people can pool their resources together and reach a set monetary goal. In return for their donations, crowdfunders are usually given special deals or exclusive products that can’t be obtained normally. Back to Table of Contents 4. Pay Butcher Shop Start-Up Costs When starting your butcher shop, you’ll run into various start-up costs that you’ll have to cover. Starting a butcher shop can cost anywhere from $20,000 to $45,000. This is a ballpark estimate, as many factors can influence start-up costs. These factors include where your business is located, whether you’re buying or renting, and what type of equipment you stock your business with. Despite some variance in start-up costs, here are a few items that you should prepare to pay for as you start your butcher shop: Down Payment - The cost of the physical butcher shop location will be one of the biggest start-up costs you’ll have to pay. A loan can be taken out to help cover the expense, but a down payment of 15-20% of the loan’s principal will be required. Remodeling and Construction Costs - When you purchase a brick-and-mortar location for your butcher shop, it won’t be ready right away. To get your butcher shop in shape to serve customers, you’ll have to sink a few thousand dollars into remodeling and construction costs. Butcher Equipment - To prepare meat, your butcher shop may require equipment such as meat slicers, indoor smokers, food dehydrators, meat tenderizers, and meat grinders. Butcher Shop Inventory - A butcher shop needs to be stocked with different types of meats, as well as different cuts of each type of meat to serve customers. Butcher Shop Supplies and Disposables - Supplies like butcher paper, twine, food wrap, containers, and utensils are not pricy, but their costs can add up over time. Employee Wages - There are many different types of employees needed to run a butcher shop. These employees need to be compensated and paid wages. Marketing - In order to attract new customers and reach your target market, you’ll have to invest in marketing and advertising campaigns. Permits and Licensing - To open a butcher shop, you’ll have to acquire various permits and licenses. Application fees and other expenses can arise during this process. 5. Acquire Butcher Shop Permits and Licenses Before opening your butcher shop, you’ll have to apply for and receive a variety of permits and licenses. These important documents cover many aspects, including business identification purposes and the authorization to sell certain products. A few of the most important documents are listed below. Check your local laws to see which permits and licenses are required in your location. Business License - A business license is a permit that is issued by the government that authorizes you to operate your business. Business licenses can vary based on location and industry, meaning you may have to obtain multiple business licenses at the local, state, and federal levels. Employee Identification Number - An employee identification number is required for every business in the United States. Your EIN is unique to your business and is used for identification purposes with the IRS. Seller’s Permit - A seller’s permit authorizes a business to collect sales tax. Requirements for seller’s permits vary based on local and state laws, so be sure to research relevant laws. Health Permit - A health permit is required for any business that sells cooked or prepared foods to customers and outlines standards of safety and sanitation for your business. Health permits are under the domain of county health departments, meaning laws regarding health permits can vary depending on your location. Retail Food License - In some locations such as Pennsylvania, retailers that sell or serve food directly to the customer must have a retail food license. Double check your local laws before you start serving customers. Meat Establishment License - In some locations, you may have to apply for a meat establishment license, giving your state’s department of agriculture the authority to regulate and inspect the processing of meat. 6. Find Butcher Shop Locations Choosing a location for your butcher shop is a critical step in setting your business up for future success. A quality butcher shop location allows you to reach customers easily and increase sales, boosting the success of your business. Before any decision is made about a final location, you should conduct a thorough location analysis. Here are some key qualities you should look for while searching for a location for your butcher shop: Size - Your butcher shop needs to be large enough to house equipment, store meat products, and display items for sale. Traffic - Butcher shops may struggle to initially attract customers and gain traction, so having a location that receives lots of foot and vehicle traffic can be a great way to get your name out and attract new customers. Ease of Delivery - A butcher shop will frequently receive shipments of meat products and other supplies, so consider ease of access for delivery trucks when choosing a location. Anchor Stores - The main competitors to butcher shops include supermarkets, so try to avoid settling in a location that uses a major supermarket as an anchor store. Back to Table of Contents 7. Hire Butcher Shop Staff A butcher shop has many moving parts, and as a result it needs several different staff members to operate. Some of these employees focus on handling and preparing meat products, while others are customer-facing. When starting a butcher shop, here are some of the most important positions you should look to fill: Butchers - Butchers are the most important part of your staff. Your butchers will be the ones cutting and trimming meat, as well as preparing meat for sale through weighing and wrapping. Managers - A managerial staff may be required to monitor the butcher shop when you’re not around and to assist in ensuring everything runs as intended. Front-of-House Staff - A butcher requires some front-of-house staff to take orders and check people out. If you plan on offering a full menu and a dine-in seating area, then you will need to hire servers as well. Cooks/Chefs - If you plan on offering cooked or prepared food items, you’re going to need to hire a few cooks to follow recipes and prepare dishes. Packers/Loaders - A butcher shop will frequently receive shipments of meat and other supplies, meaning having staff members dedicated to unloading and packing shipments may be required. 8. Market Your Butcher Shop Marketing and advertising your butcher shop is required to get your name and brand out to the public. With so many advertisements competing for attention in today’s business climate, it can be very hard to stand out from the competition. If you want to market your butcher shop and reach your target market, check out these marketing tips: Integrate Yourself Into the Community - A successful butcher shop integrates into its local community and forms long-lasting connections with community members. Ingratiate yourself to your community by hosting events, supplying local parties, and getting to know local community members. Improve Digital Presence - Websites and programs such as OpenTable, Yelp, and Google My Business are vital to the growth of small businesses. Ensure that your butcher shop is registered on these sites and utilizes them in order to maximize brand exposure. Create a Strong Website - In today's digitized world, having a strong website is critical to growing your business. There are several platforms available to businesses that make creating a solid website a simple task. With a solid website, customers will have a location where they can learn about your business and order products. Offer Promotions and Sales - To attract new customers to your butcher shop, try offering special deals and promotions to customers. Offering high-quality or unique meats to prospective customers at a great deal is a fantastic way to get new people in the door. The idea is to attract new customers with your sales and promotions, and then rely on your great product and business to retain them. Establish a Loyalty Program - Retaining customers is an important part of business, and establishing a loyalty program is a great way to boost customer retention. Try offering special member statuses and frequent-shopper discounts to individual customers. When it comes to supplying meat and food to restaurants, try offering discounts to clients that frequently purchase large bulk orders. 9. Opening Your Butcher Shop As the process of starting your butcher shop winds down to a close, you’ll have to have some type of special opening event to mark the occasion. The opening of your butcher shop is vital because it introduces your business to the community and sets the tone for success. Depending on what type of butcher shop you’re starting, there are a few different opening options that you can choose from. Soft Opening With a soft opening you can ensure that everything with your butcher shop is ready to go, and give your staff a helpful simulated experience. During this time you can get valuable feedback on aspects such as your menu offerings and the pricing of your products. Additionally, a soft opening allows you to invite important members of the community, giving you a chance to introduce your butcher shop and establish critical relationships. Grand Opening The opening of your butcher shop marks a special occasion, which means a grand opening is in order. Grand openings are events that involve exclusive deals, special events, and large crowds. Having a grand opening is an effective way to generate hype and introduce your butcher shop to prospective customers. This will be their introduction to your business for many people, so leaving a positive first impression with a great grand opening is important. The consumption of meat in the United States is still very high even with the emergence of alternative diets like vegetarianism and veganism, meaning butcher shops are still great business opportunities. In fact, these trends offer a great opportunity for butcher shops to expand their offerings and capitalize on market trends with new products. If you’re looking to open a shop that can become a key part of your local community as the premier meat supplier, opening a butcher shop is a great option. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Start a Home Bakery
If you want to start a baking business but owning a storefront isn't for you, operating a home bakery can be a great alternative. Starting a home bakery is also a good option for those looking to get started in the restaurant industry, and bakers at home due to coronavirus. Usually smaller in scale than retail or wholesale bakeries, home bakeries allow bakers to sell products that are made in their own homes. But there is more to starting a home baking business than just making bulk batches of cookies in your personal kitchen. To learn more about what it takes to open a home bakery, keep reading. Shop All Bakery Supplies How to Start a Bakery Business from Home Before you open your home bakery, there are some key factors that you need to consider. In this guide, we'll walk you through your first steps, beginning with researching legalities and ending with home bakery marketing strategies. Use the following links to navigate and learn more about a specific aspect of opening a home bakery: Home Bakery Laws Home Bakery Market Research Certifications, Licenses, and Health Requirements Marketing Your Home Bakery Costs: Initial and Ongoing Expenses Home Bakery Laws The most important step before opening a home-based bakery is to make sure that home bakeries are legal in your area. The laws surrounding home bakeries vary greatly from state to state, so you must do your research before investing in your home baking business. Before you begin, be sure to visit your state’s Department of Health website to see what is legal under laws that are often referred to as "cottage food laws." What Are Cottage Food Laws? Cottage food laws regulate whether or not you can produce low-risk foods in your home for sale. Often, these foods include certain baked goods, candies, pickled products, dry goods, and canned foods. Cottage food laws are designed for very small businesses, with many states putting a cap on how many thousands of dollars in revenue your business can make while still considered legal. Not only do these laws limit your sales and what kinds of foods you can make, but they also limit where you can sell your products. Many states specify legal venues, which may include farmer’s markets, events, roadside stands, online, or even your home. This being said, some states have strict limitations on these venues. For instance, what may be legal to sell at a farmer’s market in one county may not be legal in a neighboring county. Each time you sell your goods at a new venue, be sure to research whether or not it is prohibited first. Additionally, home bakeries may be restricted in certain jurisdictions even within states where they are legal. It is imperative to check your local zoning laws so that you are not fined or shut down for opening a baking business in an area that is zoned for residences. Certifications, Licenses, and Health Requirements Once you know that your state and jurisdiction will allow you to open a home bakery, you must look into what kinds of certifications, licenses, and health precautions are required. Some states do not require licenses for small-scale businesses under cottage food laws, but some states do mandate that you acquire certification and a business license. Changes to Your Kitchen Layout Depending on your home kitchen's current layout, you may need to make adjustments before your bakery can be opened for operation. Check with your state’s laws to see if any changes are mandatory, which may include the following: Installing additional sinks Creating separate food storage and food preparation areas from your personal kitchen area Adding a sprinkler system Updating your ventilation system or hoods Health Inspection Considerations Your state may also require owners of home bakeries to pass health inspections. These visits from Health Officers could assess everything from the equipment you use and your means of storage to employment practices and sanitation methods. Inspectors may also be on the lookout for prepared goods and ingredients being stored or served at proper temperatures. Food Safety Certification Another certification you may be required to obtain is a food safety certificate. There are many state-approved food safety courses available that educate you in proper food handling, storage, and preparation techniques to avoid the risk of cross-contamination and foodborne illness. While many states have numerous laws surrounding home bakeries, with the proper research and qualifications, you can open a safe and legal operation. Costs: Initial and Ongoing Expenses The next step in opening your home bakery is to come up with a thorough business plan. As you write this plan, you’ll have to consider your startup costs as well as your financial projections. Below, we list some expenses that you can expect as you prepare to open your bakery: Home Bakery Startup Costs Renovations Kitchen equipment License fees Insurance Beginning inventory or ingredients But just because there is a lot of required cost for starting your small business, that doesn't mean you can't follow a few tips to help save and cut down your spending. Here are some helpful pointers for saving your new business some money: Purchase smallwares, hand tools, and other bakery supplies in bulk online to save money. Buy your ingredients in bulk from farmer’s markets or wholesale retailers rather than from grocery stores. Take note of how much gas you're using. Try to limit your trips to replenish ingredients and supplies, and if you're planning to deliver goods, decide how large of a radius you’d like to serve. Start with crowd-pleasing recipes to make your first sales. As time goes on, experiment with more unique products to keep your customer base intrigued. After you've tallied your startup costs, apply them to your financial projections. To make financial projections for your bakery business plan, you must outline your ongoing costs and compare them to the success you expect as a result of your market research. Below, we explain how to find the target market for your home bakery. Home Bakery Market Research Your target market, or the population you are catering to, is one of the most important aspects of your business plan. With various types of bakeries to choose from, you have to find your niche while also complying with the product and venue restrictions that your state has in place. Here are some example target markets and suggestions for best capturing their business. Before you try to sell to these markets, be sure to check that they are legal venues within your home bakery’s jurisdiction. Offices or Corporate Buildings This market may like to serve food at their frequent meetings in the morning and afternoon hours. For these customers, you can deliver your baked goods on serving trays for easy sharing. Products for the Office or Corporate Building Market Assorted muffins Small pastries Bagels Doughnuts Schools From fundraiser events to PTA meetings and class parties, schools often have gatherings where your products could be served. Products for the School Market Assorted cookies Brownies Decorated cupcakes Restaurants If you live in a town full of family-style diners or other busy restaurants, then these establishments could be a great target market for you. Many restaurants want to serve dessert options, but they may not have the time or space to produce them. Products for the Restaurant Market Cakes Cheesecakes Pies Nut Breads Seasonal specials Regional desserts: cannoli, tiramisu, baklava Health-Conscious Customers Perhaps you live in a young, active, up-and-coming neighborhood. Your target customers may have gluten-free diets or want low-calorie treats to suit their busy lifestyle, and so this market is the perfect opportunity for you to offer unique dessert alternatives. Products for the Health-Conscious Market Granola Flourless cakes Nut breads Trail mixes Be sure to clearly label any allergens that may be present in your baked goods. Additionally, it may be a good idea to label items that are vegan-friendly. Marketing Your Home Bakery To get your bakery business off the ground, you need to make sure that your market knows you’re open for operation. Here are some ways you can market your home baking business. Word of Mouth By actively engaging yourself within your residential community, you not only market yourself, but you build relationships with customers. If these customers are satisfied with the consistent quality of your baked goods, they will return for more business and spread the word of your bakery. Online Marketing and Social Media Develop a website or create a Facebook page for your bakery. Tweet about upcoming specials and post pictures on Instagram of your products to gain followers who could become your customers. Sell at Local Events or Venues In this case, the quality of your products will speak for itself. The more that you make your quality baked goods visible at your venues of sale, the more you’ll build a customer base who may contact you for special orders. If you want to start a home baking business, there are several rules and regulations that you need to research before you begin investing. Check with your state and local governments to see if home bakeries are legal in your area, and then find out what kind of licenses are required. Once you have all legal matters sorted out, it's important to do market research and choose your business's niche. As you start your new home bakery, refer to this article for guidance through the opening process. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How To Host A Restaurant Soft Opening
You’ve successfully purchased a location and transformed it into a brand new restaurant. The space is furnished, the kitchen is stocked, and the menu is written. What’s next? How do you get your restaurant in business? If you plan to open a new restaurant, consider hosting a series of soft openings, or soft launches, to give your staff and kitchen equipment a test run before officially opening your doors to the public. If the coronavirus has forced you to temporarily shut your doors, you can ease back into the business by hosting a soft opening when you're ready to reopen your restaurant. We explored some options and tips for a soft opening that can lead to a successful grand opening. Click below to learn more about each aspect of hosting a restaurant soft opening: Soft Opening Advantages and Disadvantages Soft Opening Invitations Soft Opening Menus How to Create a Neighborhood Presence How to Collect Feedback What Is a Soft Opening? A soft opening or soft launch is the opening of a business for a limited number of people at first to test its services and make improvements. While a grand opening occurs on the actual day your restaurant opens its doors to the public, a soft opening is a beta test that happens well before your restaurant officially opens. There are several advantages and some disadvantages to hosting a soft opening. Advantages of a Soft Opening A soft opening is not a requirement, but there are clear advantages of hosting one before fully opening your doors. Here are some of the major advantages: Get feedback: Collect comments directly from customers on the food, drinks, service, and overall atmosphere. Iron out logistics of your location: Focus on evaluating the seating capacity, the flow of the space, the point-of-sale system, and the kitchen equipment. Prepare the staff: Allow staff to practice menu knowledge and learn how to be a good server, creating consistency among staff members. Build anticipation: Get the word out about your new location by encouraging guests to tell their friends about their experience. Make adjustments: Implement the feedback and tweak things that could use improvement before opening. Disadvantages of a Soft Opening It is important to note that there are some disadvantages to hosting a soft opening: Creates urgency to open: A soft opening should be hosted with a grand opening date in mind. That date should not be too long after the soft launch or else the hype will die down, and your customers may forget or lose interest. Exposes ideas to competitors: A soft launch exposes your ideas to the world which may end up in the hands of a competitor. Delay your grand opening too long, and they may have a chance to implement those ideas before you open. Potential low-quality feedback: Hosting a friends and family restaurant soft opening may not provide you with the best feedback. Those closest to you may want to spare your feelings when it comes to criticisms, so encourage them to be open and honest with constructive feedback, or invite additional guests outside of your inner circle. Soft Opening Invitation The soft opening invitations you send out are an important part of enticing people to test out your restaurant. Depending on how many people you are inviting and your style, you can either email the invite for a more casual feel or send a physical invitation in the mail for something more upscale. Don’t forget to choose a memorable design to grab your guests’ attention. Regardless of how the invitation is sent, the expectations for the event should be listed. Here is a list of what to include on a soft launch invitation: Date Time Address Pricing: Free, Flat Rate, or Menu Pricing RSVP Method and Date Dress Code Timing and Capacity It may be difficult to gauge how many people you can handle for your soft opening. Some locations have all of their guests served during the same time slot. However, staggering the guests provides a realistic flow of service in your location. A common number of guests to invite in a night is usually 100 people, broken up into different time slots. For example, if your event begins at 6 p.m., you would invite 25 people to arrive at 6 p.m., 25 more to arrive at 6:30 p.m., and so on. With this concept, your staff also gets practice serving different stages of a meal at once. One aspect to decide upon is if you will be allowing walk-ins and how many extra people you can fit in your location at a given time. By inviting people beforehand while still allotting space for more, you can gauge how your restaurant handles both your reservation system and walk-in crowds. Building a Soft Opening Guest List You may be tempted to open your doors to the public right away for your soft launch. However, who you invite can have a strong impact on your success moving forward. Invite Familiar Faces Friends and family are much more forgiving in the event of rough patches during your soft opening. A crowd of familiar faces will give you constructive criticism, offering insight while being aware that this is, in fact, a test run. Just remind them to be honest, since friends and family are also more likely to try and spare your feelings. By inviting people you know, it's easier to follow up with them for critiques. This allows you to assess your strengths and weaknesses to make those final tweaks before opening to the public. Familiar faces are also more likely to provide you with free advertising and help build anticipation before you officially open. Contact Local Business Owners To introduce themselves to local business owners, many restaurant owners will host a soft opening event just for the surrounding businesses in their area. A soft opening is usually a restaurant’s first introduction to the local community, making it a great time to create a strong first impression with other local business owners. By hosting a meal or happy hour just for local businesses, you’re expressing an interest to contribute to the established community you have joined. In doing so, you might earn some bookings for upcoming events and meal slots. Forming professional relationships with other community businesses is vital to your success, so be sure to make a strong first impression. Reach Out to Community Leaders and Influencers Prominent local leaders and community influencers are great guests to invite to a restaurant soft opening. These individuals have lots of pull within a local community, meaning that they can generate positive word-of-mouth advertising. Community leaders and influencers often have followings of people that other community members don’t have. Positive reviews from these important individuals can raise your restaurant’s reputation and launch your business with a running head start. Just be prepared to pull out all the stops to impress these people, as their words have a lot of weight behind them and negative reviews from them can do more harm than good. How to Make a Soft Opening Menu Once you’ve decided that a soft opening is a good option for your establishment, the next step is to put together a menu for the occasion. There are a few factors to decide upon before you can host your soft opening. Each type of soft opening menu has pros and cons, so it's up to you to decide which type of soft opening menu best fits your establishment. 1. Full Menu Soft Opening For those restaurants that are close to their grand opening date, offering a full menu soft opening may be the perfect beta test before your actual launch. Offering your restaurant’s complete menu during a soft opening provides a comprehensive overview of the establishment, allowing you to get feedback on all of your dishes. A full menu soft opening will provide you with the most relevant and precise feedback, as the soft opening essentially simulates how your grand opening will go. Although serving your entire menu at a soft opening provides great feedback, there are some drawbacks to hosting such an intricate event. You need to be fully prepared to host a full menu soft opening, meaning that every aspect of your restaurant needs to be ready to launch. A soft opening with an all-encompassing menu also makes it difficult to pinpoint problem areas and mistakes, as you’re testing so many aspects at once. Full menu soft openings provide great feedback, but hosting one likely won’t be the smoothest process unless you’re completely ready for the challenge. 2. Spotlight Signature Dishes from the Menu To ensure that your restaurant stands out from Day 1, serve signature dishes during your soft opening that give guests something to talk about. If you have dishes that are specifically made to match your theme, your soft launch is the perfect time to showcase them. This is also a great time to release a beta menu. This means you only display a few dishes but let your customers know that more additions to the menu are coming, giving them a reason to return after your grand opening to try more food options. By test running your signature dishes, you have a chance to provide your customers with a memorable meal but also make minor adjustments before your doors are open. You can also host multiple soft opening events featuring different parts of the menu each time, which we will explore further. 3. Target a Time Span There is no exact formula on the timeline a soft opening should take, however, the general time frame ranges from 3 days up to two weeks. Your time span will help you determine how many events to have within that time and what to serve on which days. Two soft opening strategies are outlined below that may work for your establishment. Three-Day Strategy: This style is more of an intimate sneak peek and is usually done through personal invitation. Day 1: A cocktail hour featuring appetizers and beverages for friends, family, and local business owners Day 2: A breakfast and lunch meal for friends and family Day 3: A dinner meal for friends and family One to Two-Week Strategy: Think of this as a multi-course meal served over the span of several days. This requires a bit more advertising. Two nights of full menu service for just friends and family One night of full menu service for local business owners One day to launch a breakfast menu that is open to the public One day to feature Sunday brunch that is open to the public One day to serve a lunch menu that is open to the public One day to launch a dinner menu that is open to the public One night of Happy Hour that is open to the public 4. Pick a Pricing Strategy Restaurant menu pricing for a soft opening varies from case to case. Some restaurants offer completely free food, a discounted menu, or a meal selection limited to just a few full-priced options. If you plan on charging full price, be sure to include freebies as a ‘thank you’ for guests' input. This is a good way to have customers try a variety of menu items that they may not have selected to purchase with their meal. These selections can include an appetizer or dessert sampler platter, a drink flight, or your signature cocktail free of charge. If you do choose to provide a completely complimentary event, just be conscious of your budget so it doesn’t end up hurting you rather than helping. Back to Top Create a Neighborhood Presence with a Restaurant Soft Opening Integrating your business into the local neighborhood is an important part of establishing a loyal customer base. Creating a neighborhood presence before your grand opening date allows you to get a head start on forming connections with community members who may one day become your regular customers. Opening Events Turning your restaurant’s soft opening into a community event goes a long way in establishing roots in your local community. If possible, try incorporating entertainment like live music, photo booths, or games, turning your soft opening into a celebration. Guests will be more likely to come when there are other amenities present. Also, turning your soft opening into a community event may boost attendees’ enjoyment of the event and help establish important connections with local patrons. Showcase Your Business Before Opening By announcing your restaurant's presence before officially opening your doors to the public, you'll build anticipation leading up to your grand reveal. What better way to do so than with a live showcase of your menu during your soft opening? Consider operating your own grab-and-go stand that customers can swing by to extend your restaurant services prior to opening. If that option isn't available, seek out other local opportunities to grant a sneak peek at your food. Are there any local food shows or community events you could feature a stand at or cater to get your name known? These restaurant marketing tactics speak volumes more than any flyer or social media posting. Collect Feedback From Your Soft Opening Once you have finished preparing for your soft opening by selecting a menu, inviting your guests, and reaching out to your community, there is one critical step left: collect feedback. The feedback gathered from your guests during your soft launch is extremely valuable in order to make improvements before you open to the public. It is for that reason that your feedback should be gathered in writing. If just spoken to a server during the event, the details of the feedback may be forgotten. Instead, you can hand out a feedback form with the check at the end of the meal and even offer coupons for completed forms. Feedback from your soft opening can help make sure your grand opening is a success. Back to Top A soft opening may feel like an additional step delaying you from opening your doors, but it can be highly valuable to your restaurant’s success. It provides the opportunity to find areas of improvement and get in some much-needed practice before officially opening your establishment. When planning for your soft launch, be sure to select your menu and guest list wisely to make the most of the experience.
How to Start a Meal Prep Business
As people continue to fill their lives with busy work hours, hobbies, and family obligations, the time for creating weekday dinners becomes more difficult. A meal prep delivery business caters to those busy lifestyles, providing customers with delicious meal options that are quick and easy to prepare. Whether you want to start a food delivery business for your local community or are thinking of providing on a national level, we’ve listed the steps below on how to start a meal prep business. Shop All Meal Prep Supplies Learn about the meal prep business steps by clicking below: Choose Your Concept Write a Business Plan Obtain Funding Finding a Work Space Get Permits Ordering Supplies Setting Up Your Shipping Strategy Creating an Ordering Platform Hiring Advertising What Is a Meal Kit? A meal kit is a collection of pre-portioned ingredients that make up the components of a recipe. Companies assemble meal kits, place the recipe card alongside them, and then ship the meal to the customer for them to cook at home. Sometimes the ingredients are partially cooked, the vegetables pre-cut, or the whole meal is assembled and ready to bake. The idea behind meal kits is for customers to save time in the kitchen and cook something new while ensuring it’s a delicious meal they’ll enjoy. 1. Choose Your Meal Prep Business Concept Now that you're interested in starting a meal delivery service, it’s time to choose the concept. The below points outline key questions to ask yourself about how you’d like your meal prep delivery service to run in terms of the food being prepared and who it’s for: Types of Cuisines So, what are you cooking? Are you an expert in a certain global or regional cuisine? If so, this could be an exceptional way to introduce traditional recipes and ingredients to potential customers that may be unfamiliar but want to learn. You can also create a fusion concept where you take different aspects from two or more cuisines and blend them into new recipes. If you aren’t an expert in a specific international cuisine, try framing your concept around ideas like healthy meals or comfort foods. Your meal prep business could also be about experiencing specialty ingredients that your customers have possibly never used in their cooking. Or, if your meal delivery service is centered around making the recipe from scratch, maybe your recipes can bring in various cooking applications so customers can try out different techniques in their kitchen. Dietary Restrictions Whether it be allergies, lifestyle changes, or following various weight loss methods, millions of people have an altered way of eating in some form. To target all people and demographics, catering to specific diets is a smart business move so you never have to turn down a potential customer. Target Market With all of your concept ideas in tow, think about who would benefit from this meal kit delivery service. Whether it’s everyone and anyone, busy families with kids, people who want to learn how to cook, or those who have no interest in cooking at all, make sure you keep this person in mind. If you’re making premade dinners that just need to be heated, market to families or busy people that don't have time to cook an extravagant meal at the end of the day. When choosing your meal kit delivery concept, it’s important to find your niche. There are both small businesses and national suppliers that offer delivered meal kit subscriptions or fully meal-prepped dishes right to a door. So, as you think about the three points above, think about what your niche will be so you can stand out from the competition. Are all of your fruits or vegetables saved from being thrown away because they’re not up to cosmetic standards to be stocked in grocery stores? Is the meat in your recipes a specific type of game that most people don’t eat daily or know how to cook? Whatever your niche is can also be one of your biggest marketing points. 2. Write a Meal Prep Business Plan Whether you’re starting a food delivery business from home or beginning a meal prep business in a commercial kitchen, you’ll need to write out a business plan. A business plan lays the foundation of your business and can help you get loans from investors, forecast your sales, stay organized with the tasks you need to complete, and map out any gray areas about operating your business. Your business plan should include the following: Executive Summary Company Description Concept and Menu Management and Ownership Structure Employees and Staffing Needs Market and Competitor Analysis Advertising and Marketing Strategies Financials For additional information on how to write a business plan, check out our piece on how to write a restaurant business plan. 3. Obtain Funding for Your Meal Prep Business Now that you have the financial projection from your business plan, you’ll know the amount of funding you’ll need to get started. Even if you’re starting a food delivery business from home, you’ll need startup supplies to begin your meal kit business. If you’re working with a bigger operation, add up the costs of supplies, rent, utilities, salaries, and any other operational expenses you have. From there you can create a budget and forecast how much money you’ll need to apply for loans. 4. Find a Meal Prep Workspace The next step to starting your own meal prep business is to find a workspace that is best suited for your needs. If you plan to operate your food delivery business from home, you'll be running most of your operations from your personal kitchen. If you’re planning to operate a meal prep business on a larger scale, you will most likely need a workspace that has enough square footage and professional equipment to keep up with the demand. A ghost kitchen may be the best fit for your operation as you won't need to worry about having a front-of-house area. You could also expand your current restaurant into a meal prep delivery business to expand the reach of your menu. When looking for your workplace, find a suitable establishment that has separate areas for the following: Kitchen - This is the most important room of your business. There should be enough room in this kitchen for the size of the operation you will handle, as well as all of the necessary amenities to recipe test or prepare your meal kits. Packaging Station - A specific place for packaging and putting together your meal kits is needed for proper organization, handling, and keeping track of orders. Shipping and Distributing - Make sure you have optimal refrigeration storage space to keep your meal kits cold before loading them onto the truck or taking it to a shipping center. Office Space - A designated place for desks, computers, and phones for your accounting, marketing, and customer service teams. Meeting Rooms - If you would like to host potential clients or business investors, having an on-site meeting room to conduct business is a great investment. It’s the perfect place to start or end your tour of the facility. 5. Obtain Permits Starting a meal prep business from home or in a facility requires special permits. Below we’ve outlined which permits you will need to get your business off the ground and running: Employer Identification Number (EIN) Seller’s Permit Business License Food Handler’s License Catering License Health Department Permits Zoning Permits Dumpster Placement Permit If you plan on operating a meal prep delivery business from home, reach out to your local jurisdiction to make sure you are meeting all of the qualifications and acquiring the correct permits. For more in-depth information about each permit, check out our Restaurant Permits and Licenses article. Back to Top 6. Order Supplies for Your Meal Prep Business To make your product, you will need the correct supplies to start making meal kits or meal prep food deliveries. Below are a few necessities you’ll need to get started on your meal kits: Ingredients - Based on your projected sales, figure out how much ingredient inventory from your recipes you will need in your kitchen to make your meal kits. Buying in bulk is a great way to keep costs down, but throwing out spoiled food at the end of the day is throwing money in the garbage. Portion packaging supplies - Before purchasing your meal packaging supplies, think about how you would like your partially cooked meals or pre-prepped ingredients to be presented when your customer opens up their box. Keep that presentation image in mind when you choose the size, material, and shape of your containers. If you’re not changing up your menu too frequently, consider buying this type of container in bulk to save on costs. Shipping supplies - Once your meals are packaged, it’s time to put them in their designated boxes to get them shipped out. You’ll need boxes, dry ice to keep everything cold, packing tape, and a printer for labels. Shop All Take-Out Containers 7. Set Up Your Meal Prep Business’s Shipping Strategy Making sure your customers’ orders arrive cold and fresh is extremely important. To get it all in place to be done right the first time, figure out what cooling method you would like to use to keep your products safe, what shipping service you will use, and how much it will cost to ship one of your meal kit boxes. That way you’ll know the shipping cost to charge your customers so you’re not overcharging or undercharging. 8. Create a Meal Prep Business Ordering Platform Your website is one of, if not the only, place where you will get your sales. Therefore, your website needs to be top-notch and performing at its best. Investing in a great website that’s user-friendly is the best way to obtain sales. You can create websites for free by using Squarespace, Weebly, or Wix, and you can pay a small amount for domain names and cool business features. These types of websites also provide pre-made templates, so you can browse and select one that speaks to your business’s aesthetic. When choosing your template and creating your website, think about the colors, pictures, and fonts you will use to target your key demographic: If your concept prioritizes simple ingredients that make the meal easy to put together, try to keep the website minimalist If your concept prioritizes plant-based eating, use bright, fun colors that match the hue of fresh vegetables If your concept prioritizes omnivore eating, studies have shown that warm colors such as red, orange, and yellow make people hungrier rather than cool tones. You could also put drawings of animals and vegetables together in your design. Try to implement these six tabs into your website: The Meal Plans - Show off all of your meal kits that you have to offer, as well as any set meal plans that allow customers to buy two or more meal kits for their week’s meals. How It Works - Explain how the process goes in case your customer is new to purchasing from a meal prep business: pick your meals, get them delivered to your home, and cook them. Help your customer see how easy it is to use your service. Pricing - Whether you’re showing the price per meal or your set meal plans, it’s important to be upfront about your cost. Use this page to help your customers understand that they can save on the price per meal when they shop in a bundle. Gifting - People love to give gifts that share a moment and make memories, and that’s exactly what your meal kit does. Providing this option to gift a meal or week’s bundle can drive up your sales. When someone buys the meal(s), provide a printable e-gift card option or a scheduled email. About Us/Your Business's Name - This is where you can describe the story of your business and convince your customer to pick your meal prep delivery business over the competition. Show the faces of the people that made it happen so your customers can have a more personable relationship with your business. Contact Us - Give your customers the ability to voice questions, comments, or critiques, which can help to improve your meal prep business in the long run. 9. Hire Employees for Your Meal Prep Business As you start out, you’ll probably begin small. If you want to stay a small, local business, then that’s great! If you want a large team and to distribute nationally, also great! Either way, you’ll need to hire kitchen staff, and maybe even marketers, accountants, and distributors to take the contents of a recipe card to the steps of a customer’s front door. Cooks - Trained, skilled, and knows the different knife cuts, cooks help get the meal prep work done and come up with recipes for future menu ideas. Marketers - Having the product ready to go is one thing, but making it known and selling it to consumers is a whole other ballpark. Hire a marketer or two to help with advertising your meal prep business. Accountant - Keeping track of sales, expenses, and making sure everyone is paid on time: a trained accountant keeps your meal kit business's finances in order. Packagers - When the orders start coming in, a packager helps with properly storing the food and creating the meal kits that your customers purchased. Everything needs to be sent out perfectly and safely, which will be your packager's top priority. Customer Solutions Specialists - When customers have questions, comments, complaints, or compliments, you need to make sure they are heard and answered. Having a customer solutions specialist on the team to prioritize these problems can give you a step up with your customer service needs. 10. Advertise Your Meal Prep Business Once you have your target demographic identified and have found ways to market yourself to be different from the competition, it’s time to take that information and start advertising. Below are some great, and oftentimes free, ways to market and advertise your meal prep business: Utilize social media - With apps like Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram, you can post, update, and inform customers of all of your offerings. Make sure you’re using Instagram best practices to not only highlight your meal kits but also reach out to potential customers, or let them find you. Create an email list - Create newsletters with catchy subject lines to pull in your reader’s attention. Your email should communicate your brand and forge a relationship with guests who will look forward to choosing your meal prep delivery business. Offer promotions to new customers - Utilizing this strategy is a great way to spread the word about your meal prep business. When a customer purchases a certain amount of meal kits (either all at once or over time), give them a gift certificate to send to a friend that offers one free meal kit. You can also use holidays as times to create discount codes for celebrations such as Valentine’s Day or a New Year's Eve night indoors. Create a loyalty program - Show your regular customers your appreciation for their business by making a loyalty program. For example, for every 10 meal kits they buy, throw in a new one they haven’t tried yet for free! Providing a new meal kit will expand their knowledge of your menu and will introduce something new that they will love and crave. Feature ads on podcasts - If it's within the budget, using podcasts' commercial breaks is a smart marketing investment. Let the show's hosts try out your meal kit for free so you know they'll love it, and give them a loose script with room for improvisation. That way they can effectively sell your meal kits and share their own experiences of cooking with them. Back to Top Now that you’ve become familiar with the ins and outs of how to start a meal prep business, it’s time to start planning so you can make your dream a reality. Whether you’re creating meal kits or fully prepped meals to quickly heat up, you now know how to run the meal prep business and make a profit while doing it.
How to Open a Restaurant
Owning and operating a restaurant is a dream job for many aspiring entrepreneurs. It's a dream that may have been put on hold as the pandemic forced restaurants to halt indoor dining or even close their doors permanently. The effects of the coronavirus are still being felt by restaurant owners across the country as the industry struggles to right itself. To weather the crisis, the foodservice landscape has adopted new restaurant trends and diversified revenue streams to meet the present challenge. Many believe that restaurant ownership is still within reach, and we've created a restaurant startup checklist to get you started. How To Start a Restaurant Starting a restaurant requires some careful planning and is a more manageable feat when broken down into steps. If you're curious about how to open a restaurant, we've created an 11-step guide to navigate you through the process. Click the steps below to learn how to start a restaurant: Choose a Restaurant Concept and Brand Create Your Menu Write a Restaurant Business Plan Obtain Funding Choose a Location and Lease a Commercial Space Restaurant Permits and Licenses Design Your Layout and Space Find an Equipment and Food Supplier Hire the Right Staff Advertise Your Restaurant Host a Soft Opening 1. Choose a Restaurant Concept and Brand If you've been dreaming of opening your own restaurant, you've probably thought a great deal about your restaurant concept. Choosing the concept of your business is the fun part of the restaurant planning process, when you get to let your imagination run wild. Your concept should include the type of restaurant you want to open, the style of cuisine you'll serve, and the service style you'll use. The interior of your restaurant should also be in line with your concept. Here are some examples of restaurant concepts to spark your creativity: A ghost kitchen concept that serves vegan comfort food for delivery only A fast casual restaurant that specializes in build-your-own ramen bowls A fine dining restaurant with a traditional French menu Your restaurant brand is more specific and can be thought of as the way you choose to communicate your mission and identity to the public. Your restaurant name, logo, menu design, and merchandise should all present a cohesive image of your brand. The advertising channels you use should also rely heavily on your brand identity to influence the style and method. Target Demographic If you already have a location in mind for your business, the demographic of the area should be used to shape your concept. If you're beginning with the concept first, you must choose a location with a demographic that can support it. 2. Create Your Menu Building out your menu is the next creative step in the process of opening your restaurant. Choosing which menu items to feature should be enjoyable for any food lover, but make your decisions carefully. Your menu will dictate the type of equipment you'll need, the skills you should look for in your staff, and the type of crowd you hope to attract. For instance, if you envision a dessert menu full of delicate French pastries, you'll need a pastry chef and the supplies to match. If pizza is your thing, you'll need dough mixers, proofers, and experienced chefs who know how to handle pizza dough. Also consider your demographic. If you get a great deal on leasing a space in a college town, your restaurant menu should be tailored to college-age customers. But if you won't budge on your dream to create an upscale menu, you must choose a location where the median personal income can support higher price points. When you finalize your menu choices, use our guide to menu design and our resource for pricing a menu to create an attractive, profitable menu. 3. Write a Restaurant Business Plan Starting a restaurant, like any new business, requires a solid business plan. This is the step that may become a stumbling block for those unfamiliar with business plans and how they are written. Restaurant business plans are divided into sections that describe all the aspects of your new business, from your restaurant concept to your financials. The purpose of the plan is to help you flesh out the finer details and summarize your business to potential investors. When you reach out for restaurant loans, the restaurant business plan serves as the proof that your venture will be successful. Below are the principle components of a restaurant business plan: Executive Summary - This is the first section in your business plan, but it's helpful to write it last and make it a summary of the other sections you've already completed. Company Overview and Description - Use this section to write a more detailed company overview than what you've included in the executive summary. Concept and Menu - In this section, describe all the details of your restaurant concept and menu. Management and Ownership Structure - Outline your management and ownership structure. It's helpful to use charts as a visual aid. Employees and Staffing Needs - It's easy to underestimate the number of staff members you need. By putting it down on paper, you'll have a more realistic vision of how many employees you need to hire to operate your business. Marketing and Competitor Analysis - This section of your business plan requires careful research. You'll need to provide an analysis of the demographics and competition for your chosen location. Advertising and Marketing Strategies - Use the marketing analysis you completed in the previous step to choose the right marketing strategies. Financial Projection and Summary - When it comes to obtaining funding for your new restaurant, this section is the most important. Use it to provide a sales forecast and break-even analysis. 4. Obtain Restaurant Funding The next step needed to start your new restaurant is to obtain funding. Most of us don't have enough capital on hand to cover the cost of opening a restaurant without financial assistance. Securing funding from outside sources will determine if you can make your dream of restaurant ownership a reality. Begin by estimating total restaurant startup costs along with the cost needed for daily operations. Use this information to create a budget and forecast the total cost of running your restaurant for the next year. With your restaurant budget now in hand, compare the total cost to the amount of capital you have on hand to determine how much funding you will need. Remember to include the costs of licenses, equipment, building repairs, and staff salaries. Here are a few ways to secure funding for your new restaurant: Traditional Commercial Loan - This type of loan is acquired directly through a bank. You will typically see lower interest rates and access to higher amounts of capital with a traditional commercial loan. However, collateral is required, and you must have a high credit score. Business Line of Credit - Similar to a credit card, you can get approved for a maximum credit amount. Interest only accumulates as you use the money, though lending standards are higher, and you may not be able to borrow as much money as you could with other types of loans. Small Business Loan - While you can get a small business loan directly from a bank, many banks partner with the U.S. Small Business Administration (SBA). You can receive a small business loan even with borderline credit, and the SBA guidelines are set up to protect both the lender and small business owners. Collateral is required, and it may take some time to get approved. Investors - Reach out to your network or sign up for a site like AngelList to find investors for your restaurant. Crowdfunding - Sites like Kickstarter, FoodStart, Indigogo, and GoFundMe are great platforms to raise money to cover your startup costs. For more detailed information, see our restaurant funding and loans guide. 5. Choose a Location and Lease a Commercial Space When choosing a location for your new restaurant, the following factors are among the most important: Visibility and Accessibility - Select a location with good visibility that receives plenty of vehicle and foot traffic. Consider parking availability and ease of access for cars and pedestrians. Demographics - The target market of your restaurant should match the demographics of the area. Labor Costs - Your labor cost will vary depending on location. In areas where the cost of living is higher, you'll need to pay a higher wage to attract good employees. Local Competition - You can learn a lot by looking at the competing restaurants in your area. The key is to choose a location where similar restaurants are successful, but avoid a neighborhood that is saturated with restaurants that directly compete with your concept. When it comes to choosing a space, we recommend leasing. It allows you more flexibility if you decide to expand or make other business changes when first starting out. 6. Restaurant Permits and Licenses To start a new restaurant, you'll need to obtain several federal, state, and local permits and licenses. It's helpful to enlist legal counsel when filing for restaurant permits and licenses to make sure you don't miss a step. These are some of the most important licenses required: Business License - All restaurants require a business license to operate in the US. The type of business license you'll need, the cost of the license, and how often you need to renew varies by state. Employee Identification Number - Start the application for an Employee Identification Number (EIN) early in your process, because it can take some time to get approved. You'll need an EIN to officially hire employees and set up your payroll. Foodservice License - To get a foodservice license for your new restaurant, you'll have to pass an inspection that shows your business meets all food safety regulations. Liquor License - If you plan to serve alcohol at your restaurant, you'll need a liquor license. Alcohol can boost your sales immensely, but the process of obtaining a liquor license can be lengthy and costly. 7. Design Your Layout and Space There are two components to designing the layout of your new restaurant: your front-of-house space and your back-of-house space. Each space has its own unique requirements. If you need assistance, consider working with an industry expert to create a custom design layout that meets your needs. Keep these factors in mind when designing your dining room layout: Seating Capacity - Local regulations determine the seating capacity of your dining room. You must meet requirements for square footage per customer based on the size of your space and the number of exits. Dining Room Furniture - Choose restaurant seating that aligns with your concept. Consider seating capacity and comfort level when choosing the style and shape of your restaurant furniture. Ambiance and Decor - You can enhance your restaurant's ambiance through the use of decor and lighting. Cleanability - Flooring and wall fixtures should be made of materials that are easy to clean and disinfect. Carpeting is not the best choice for a dining room because it absorbs odors and spills. Fabric window treatments and drapes also absorb smells and are costly to clean regularly. When designing your kitchen layout, consider the flow of service and allocate sufficient space for the following tasks: Warewashing - The warewashing area should be easily accessible for servers entering the kitchen with dirty dishes. This area will house dish machines, compartment sinks, and drying racks. Dry and Cold Storage - Dry and cold storage areas should be close to the receiving area so that shipments can be put away quickly. These spaces will require shelving and organization. Food Preparation - This is the space where the kitchen staff will perform all food prepping tasks. You'll need space for work surfaces and food prepping tools. Meal Cooking - The majority of cooking tasks are performed in this space. You'll need room for heavy equipment like range tops, deep fryers, and flat top grills. Service - The service area should be right next to the cooking area so that prepared meals can be passed to servers quickly. A staging area with heat lamps keeps meals hot until they can be picked up. 8. Find an Equipment and Food Supplier Before you can open your new restaurant, your kitchen must be outfitted with the right equipment. There are some types of equipment that every restaurant needs, like refrigeration units and cooking equipment. Depending on your menu, you might also need specialized equipment like pizza deck ovens or pasta cookers. The size and layout of your kitchen will affect some of your choices, like whether to choose narrow-depth equipment or to double stack units to save space. Another consideration is deciding whether to buy new or used restaurant equipment. Buying your restaurant equipment online provides many benefits. While you're juggling the other steps of opening your new restaurant, the ability to shop online, research features, and compare prices on your own time alleviates some of the stress. Look for an online supplier that specializes in commercial restaurant equipment with wholesale prices and fast shipping. Leasing equipment is an option that can save you money and free up capital for other items in your budget. You'll also need to find a supplier for food, disposables, and all the items you'll reorder on a regular basis. Working with a supplier that offers free shipping saves you money when you order bulk supplies. Look for added benefits like the Webstaurant Rewards® Visa Business Card, which offers rewards for every WebstaurantStore purchase. 9. Hire the Right Staff The hiring stage of opening your new restaurant provides the opportunity to build a great work culture from the very start. Putting thought into your employee benefits, training program, and incentives is important when considering the work/life balance of your future staff. Your employee retention will be more successful if you make these factors a priority. Start by hiring your management team so they can help carry out your mission and hiring goals. Make a list of all the restaurant positions you'll need to fill in order to operate your restaurant on a daily basis. Consider how many days you'll be open during the week and how many shifts you'll run each day for the front- and back-of-house. Your staff requirements will vary based on the unique needs of your new restaurant, but these are some of the most common positions: Management Team - General manager, kitchen manager, front-of-house manager Kitchen Staff - Head chef, sous chefs, prep cooks, line cooks, dishwashers Front-of-House Staff - Servers, hosts, food runners, bussers Bar Staff - Bartenders, barbacks, cocktail servers You may also need to hire employees like marketing experts, PR specialists, and accountants. To prepare for the interview process, see our guide on restaurant interview questions, so you can identify the most fitting candidates for your restaurant. 10. Advertise Your Restaurant If you're starting a new restaurant, you have to get the word out and attract your future customers. Advertising provides basic information about your restaurant so that prospective customers know where you're located and what type of cuisine you're serving. Successful advertising should also build excitement around your brand. Below are some tips to market your restaurant: Build a Website - Your restaurant website should be easy to navigate, and the design should represent your brand. Include basic information about your restaurant, including your address, phone number, hours, and menu. Though you can hire a professional to create your website, you can make one with user-friendly website hosting platforms, like Wix, Squarespace, or Wordpress. Create a Yelp, TripAdvisor, Google My Business, and OpenTable Account - Registering with these sites makes it easy for potential guests to find your restaurant information. Guests can also leave reviews after visiting, which increases your authority and appeal, especially if you have a high rating and positive feedback. Use Social Media - Today, a social media presence is an absolute must for restaurants. Create Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram accounts to share news, photos, and tidbits about your restaurant. TikTok might be an appropriate social media option for your restaurant if your target demographic uses the platform regularly. Offer Promotions to New Guests - Offer a promotion for first-time guests. A free beverage, dessert, or discount on their first bill is an enticing way to attract customers. Host a Grand Opening - Create buzz around your new restaurant by hosting a grand opening. Other special events like wine tastings, live music, or cooking classes are another great way to attract attention. 11. Host a Soft Opening You've heard the old saying, "Practice makes perfect." The same goes for restaurant openings. A soft opening is a practice run to help you prepare for the real grand opening of your new restaurant. Invite a limited number of guests to attend your soft opening, usually the friends and family of your staff. This strategy allows you to work out any kinks in your service. Here are a few popular soft opening ideas: Trial Menu - Offer a sample menu with a limited number of options. It reduces stress on new staff and encourages customers to come back to see the full menu reveal. Limited Schedule - Consider operating under a limited schedule for the first few days you are open. Sneak Peek Event - Host a "sneak peek" happy hour with select menu items and signature drinks. Friends and Family Night - Invite friends and family to your soft opening for a fun, stress-free way to prepare for grand opening. Neighboring Homes and Businesses - Gain local fans and build community pride by offering a soft opening invite to neighboring homes and businesses. Despite the challenges of the last year, the restaurant industry will always be an important part of our economy and culture. As foodservice trends continue to diversify, space opens up for extraordinary new eateries to step in and take advantage of new consumer interests. Use our restaurant opening guide to help with the successful execution of your unique restaurant concept. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Start a Brewery
Breweries are popular with a variety of customers, whether they're a casual beer drinker, a craft beer enthusiast, or just looking for a place to spend Friday night. As the demand and popularity of beer continues to rise, so does the interest in new breweries. If you’re considering opening a brewery of your own, we’ve compiled a list of steps and tips to help guide you through the process and successfully open your own business. Shop All Brewery Equipment Click any of the tips below to read the section that interests you: Write a Brewery Business Plan Choose a Brewery Concept Determine the Cost of Starting a Brewery Secure Brewery Funding Apply for Permits and Licenses Choose a Brewery Location Buy Brewery Equipment Create a Draft List and Menu Advertise Your Brewery Host a Soft Opening Continue reading to learn about how to open your own brewery! 1. Write a Brewery Business Plan A business plan is one of the most important steps for starting any business. Not only does it act as a roadmap that guides you through the process of opening your business, but it is essential for securing funding from investors. A good business plan includes detailed information on your concept, market, business structure, and financial situation. For additional information on this topic, consider reading our piece on how to write a restaurant business plan. 2. Choose a Brewery Concept Your concept is what defines your brewery. It influences everything from how customers will identify you as a company, to the messaging you target in advertisements, to the type of employees you’ll hire. To identify your brewery concept, you’ll have to choose a name, identify your brand, and determine what type of brewery you want to operate. Naming Your Brewery Choosing a name for your brewery can be a daunting task, not just because there are so many options to choose from, but because your choice will define your company for years to come. As you go through the process of choosing a name for your brewery, keep in mind that a good name will share the following traits: Original: The first and most obvious step in choosing a name for your brewery is making sure that it isn’t already taken. Additionally, be careful not to choose a name that is too similar to an existing name. Not only will this help you to protect yourself and secure a trademark, but it can help to avoid lawsuits from other brands who might think you’ve infringed on their intellectual property. Memorable: Choose a name that your customers will remember. A good starting point is to aim for a name that’s easy to spell and pronounce. Furthermore, choosing a name that rolls off the tongue and is fun to say can help to make your name memorable. Reflective: The name you choose should reflect your company. Try to create a list of what distinguishes your brand from others, or what defines you as a company. For example, if your brewery is located in Boston, you might choose something that reflects the culture of New England Broad: Your brewery’s name should be able to have broad appeal and lend itself to a variety of branding opportunities, themes, and products. Choosing a name that is too specific can limit the number of opportunities you have, and by extension prohibit growth. Identify Your Brand Identifying a brand is an essential part of establishing yourself as a brewery. Your brand can help you to connect with potential customers, identify target markets, hire employees, and strategize the direction of your business. To identify your brand, start by determining your company values. Understanding what matters to your company and employees is a key part of your branding. Once you’ve done this, you can discover your target audience and the emotion behind your products. It’s not enough just to identify a brand and move on. Once you’ve determined your values, key demographics, and emotional impact, you have to make an effort to create continuity. This means following through on your promises and acting in accordance with the values of your company. Doing so will allow you to truly establish yourself in the industry, within the community, and with your employees. Choose a Type of Brewery The increased demand for beer has lead to innovation in the industry, and by extension, a variety of brewery types. Though they differ in size, scale, and impact, each brewery serves a specific function and can be effective given your goals. Nano Brewery: As its name suggests, a nano brewery is the smallest type of brewery. There isn't a set amount of beer that a nano brewery is allowed to produce until they officially scale up to micro-sized. Microbrewery: A microbrewery is defined as a brewery that produces less than 15,000 barrels of beer annually. These types of breweries are typically independently owned, and sell the majority of their products onsite rather than through beer distributors. Brewpub: A brewpub is a hybrid between a restaurant and a brewery. Most of their beer is brewed for the purpose of being sold to customers at their bar. Taproom Brewery: Taproom breweries are professional breweries which sell beer onsite and through distributors, yet don't offer restaurant services to guests. Often times, the taproom will be attached to the brewery itself. Regional Brewery: A regional brewery is defined as a brewery that produces between 15,000 and 6,00,000 barrels of beer per year. Breweries which exceed this level of output are recognized worldwide. Contract Brewing Company: A contract brewing company hires other breweries to produce their beer. The hiring company retains the responsibility of marketing and distributing the beer while the company they've hired is responsible for production and packaging. 3. Determine the Cost of Starting a Brewery Because there are so many different types of breweries, the cost of opening your own can vary quite a bit. Several factors including how much beer you plan on producing, the possibility of serving food and maintaining a dining room, and the size of the property you’ll be operating in can influence the price of your brewery. Below, we've listed the estimated costs of a brewery's various expenses. Brewery Equipment Cost: The amount you pay for brewing equipment ultimately depends on the size of your brewery and whether you buy it new or used. You can purchase brewing equipment with the smallest capacity for $100,000 or less if you buy it used, or pay up to $1 million or more for a brand-new, 30-barrel system. Furniture Cost: Depending on the style and level of quality you're looking for in your brewery, the price of. restaurant furniture in your restaurant can range from as low as $4,000 to as high as $15,000. Rent or Mortgage Payments: When you decide on retail space to operate your brewery out of, take into account how much space you’ll need. It’s essential to have enough space for your utilities and brewing equipment. Additionally, if you plan on operating a taproom, make sure there is enough space for guests to comfortably dine. Regardless, the cost of retail rent is determined by square foot and can range from anywhere from $10/square foot to as high as $30/square foot. What Is the Average Cost of Starting a Brewery? In total, the cost of opening a brewery can range from as low as $250,000 to upwards of $2 million. However, for a standard brewery, it's reasonable to expect that value to fall between the range of $500,000 and $1.5 million. The average cost of opening a brewery is dependant on a number of factors which vary based on your concept, location, needs, and preferences. 4. Secure Brewery Funding A key step in opening your brewery is to secure funding. While you may have money saved up, chances are you’ll still have to seek additional funding. Consider the following options as ways to acquire extra capital and continue the process of opening your brewery: Self-Funding: As was mentioned above, it’s possible to fund your brewery, at least in part, with your own money. However, due to the high cost associated with acquiring equipment, permits, and other expenses, you'll likely have to look for additional funding from outside sources. Investors: One possible source of funding can come through investors. With a good business plan and a strong meeting in which you pitch your plan to an investor or group of investors, they may consider giving you money to fund your brewery. Keep in mind that once they’ve invested, they’ll have a vested interest in your business and will likely want to stay informed. Loans: A variety of loan opportunities exist for people interested in opening a business. Among them are traditional bank loans, small business loans, and equipment loans. Crowdfunding: Crowdfunding is a relatively new yet effective method of securing funding. Websites such as GoFundMe let supporters donate money towards your brewery, allowing you to set funding goals and provide updates on business development. 5. Apply for Permits and Licenses To legally own and operate a brewery, or any business that produces or sells alcohol, you’ll have to apply for a liquor license. Depending on your production and serving needs, you have the option of applying for a limited license, which allows you to sell specific types or quantities of alcohol, or a full license. Cost of Liquor Licenses The cost and availability of liquor licenses can vary depending on what state you live in. In some instances, acquiring a license can cost you as low as $3,000, yet in others, it can cost upwards of $400,000. Additionally, many states require an application fee to be considered for a liquor license. In some states, such as Pennsylvania, there are only a set number of licenses in circulation, meaning that you may have to apply for a transfer or pay higher costs to acquire one. Cost of Restaurant Licenses Since many breweries choose to serve food as well as beer, you may want to investigate the cost of restaurant licenses and permits. A food service license certifies that your business meets all regulations and standards and has been deemed fit to serve food to customers. As with all fees, the amount you have to pay can vary depending on a number of factors. Nevertheless, it's safe to assume the cost will fall somewhere between the range of $100 and $1,000. Back to Top 6. Choose a Brewery Location Choosing a location for your brewery represents a significant investment. Therefore, you must consider a variety of factors to make the best decision for you and your brewery’s future. Consider the following details as you search for a location to start your brewery: Zoning: Your brewery location will be determined by local government zoning regulations. In most cases, breweries can only be located in zones designated for industry. Nevertheless, these regulations can vary depending on where you are, so check in with your local government before making a decision. Brewery Requirements: You won't be able to run a successful brewery if you choose a building that doesn't fit your needs. For example, if you plan on producing a large amount of beer, be sure to find a building where you’ll be able to efficiently carry out production. Building Space: Be sure to find a building that has enough space for you and your staff to comfortably work. Key factors to consider include storage space, space for equipment and machines, and possible dining areas for guests. Additionally, find a building that has adequate parking spots for your employees, guests, and yourself. Safety Precautions: As with any business, the most important thing to consider is safety. Make sure the building you choose will pass safety inspections and allow you to safely carry out day-to-day operations. 7. Buy Brewery Equipment A key step in starting a new brewery is investing in the right equipment and supplies to start brewing beers and serving customers. While the quality and amount of equipment you need will vary depending on the size of your business, there are a few essential categories of equipment and supplies that you'll have to buy before you can get to work. Beer Brewing Equipment: You can't start brewing beer if you don't have the right equipment. Be sure to invest in fermenters, boiling equipment, and brew kettles to make sure you’re ready to start making your own brews! Beer Bottling and Packaging Supplies: Bottling and packaging supplies can help to simplify the packaging process and make sure that every customer is satisfied with their order. Commonly used bottling and packaging supplies can range from equipment such as growler fillers to simple packaging products such as labels and beverage shippers. Keg Tapping, Dispensing, and Serving Equipment: If you plan on serving beer on-site, make sure you invest in your own keg tapping, dispensing, and serving equipment. This can include beer dispensers, tap towers, nitro infuser boxes, and pump keg taps. Refrigeration Equipment: It’s essential to invest in refrigeration equipment to keep your brews cool and refreshing. Depending on the size of your brewery, your refrigeration equipment can range from countertop bottle coolers to walk-in refrigerators. Keg Storage: Keep your brewery organized by shopping for keg storage products. Consider investing resources into keg racks to improve your storage capacity and stay organized. Additionally, purchase hand trucks and drum handling equipment to safely and efficiently transport kegs throughout your brewery. Beer Making Accessories: While they may not be required for the brewing process, beer making accessories can make your brewing experience easier and help you to further customize your brews. Consider buying your own test strips and meters, stock pots, and portion scales to upgrade your brewing experience. Beer Glasses: Keep your brewery stocked with a variety of beer glasses to accommodate any new brews you might plan on introducing. Examples of the different types of beer glasses include Belgian beer glasses, pilsner beer glasses, and IPA beer glasses. Beer Ingredients and Flavorings: Stock your kitchen with a variety of beer ingredients and flavorings to make sure you have everything you need to customize your brews. This includes honey, cocktail bitters, wood chips and chunks, liquid malt extract, and a variety of other products. 8. Create a Draft List and Menu Once you’ve acquired equipment and established what kind of brewery you want to open, you’ll have to create a draft list and menu. A balanced draft list allows your guests to choose from a variety of beers and helps you to showcase your products. Consider keeping at least one of each of these types of beer characteristics on tap: Light: The definition of a light beer varies depending on where you are in the world. In general, it’s described as a pale beer that features has a reduced alcohol content or amount of calories. Additionally, light beers typically feature a lower amount of carbohydrates. Malt: Malt beers often feature a rich combination of flavors, often with a hint of sweetness or nuttiness. Despite what their rich flavors may suggest, malt beers come in a variety of colors and alcohol percentages. Roast: Roasted brews are often dark in color, are made from highly roasted malt grains, and are distinguishable by their rich flavors and deep colors. Common flavors of roasted brews include coffee and cocoa. Tart: Tart brews, as their names suggest, feature a sour, almost acidic taste. While many tart beers are lighter in color, it's possible for them to have medium or even darker shades. Their earthy and sometimes fruity taste differentiate them from other brews. Hoppy: A hoppy beer is defined by it’s prominent sweetness, bitterness, flavor, and aroma. You're likely to get the most intense flavors in hoppy beers, with the most common being pine, herbal, and fruity. High IBU: IBU stands for International Bitterness Units scale, and exists to measure a beer’s bitterness. A beer with a high IBU will be more bitter than one with a lower IBU. High ABV: ABV stands for Alcohol by Volume, and is a standard measurement to assess the strength of a beer. A higher ABV means that your beer is more alcoholic. Brewery Menu When creating your menu, it’s important to choose foods that pair well with beer. Consider adding the following foods to your menu if you plan on serving food in your brewery: French Fries Onion Rings Nachos Wings Mozzarella Sticks Sliders Chips and Dip 9. Advertise Your Brewery Before you open your new brewery, it’s essential to start advertising your new business to increase public awareness and drum up excitement for your grand opening. The cost of marketing can vary depending on which forms you use, but in general, the average small business spends 1-2% of their annual revenue on advertising. Consider using the following forms of advertising as you establish a marketing campaign for your new brewery: Print Advertising Billboards and Signage Radio Commercials Television Commercials Online Advertising Additionally, depending on your location, you may have the opportunity to enter into a beer festival. Events like these allow a variety of breweries to showcase their brews for a large number of people, and often feature music, entertainment, and food. 10. Host a Soft Opening Once everything is in place, it’s time to prepare for your grand opening. Before you officially open your doors to the public, consider hosting a soft opening. Not only does this allow you to continue generating excitement for your new brewery, but it allows you and your staff to prepare for what a normal work day will be like. Though it may seem like an intimidating task, the process of developing and opening your own brewery is possible to complete as long as you have a strong plan, stay prepared, and are ready to work hard. Follow the steps and tips outlined above to guide yourself through the process and successfully open your new brewery! Back to Top <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
How to Open a Bar
Have you been dreaming of opening your own bar but you’re not quite sure where to start? You’ve probably thought about your concept and your name, but maybe you’re unsure about some of the finer details, like how to obtain funding and permits. Running a successful bar can be lucrative and rewarding, as long as you perform some careful research and follow the correct steps. We outline the process of starting your own bar, from the initial concept to your grand opening, so you can fulfill your dream of becoming a bar owner. Shop All Bar Supplies How to Open a Bar Opening a bar requires some initial research and planning. You can make sure that you're covering all the bases by following our bar opening checklist below. Click on any of the steps to read the section that most interests you: Choose a Bar Concept and Brand Choose a Name for Your Bar Choose a Business Entity for Your Bar Write a Bar Business Plan Secure Funding for Your Bar Find the Perfect Location Obtain Permits and Licenses Find a Liquor Supplier Design a Bar Layout Buy Your Equipment and Supplies Hire the Right Staff Advertise Your Bar Host Your Soft Opening 1. Choose a Bar Concept and Brand The fun part of starting your own bar is creating your concept and brand. Your concept includes all the general ideas you have about what kind of bar you want to open. Your brand is slightly more defined and encompasses the identity and mission of your business. Every detail of your bar should support your brand, from your service style to your decor and ambiance. A good question to ask yourself is how do you want people to feel when they walk in your bar? Here are some examples of bar concepts to get you thinking about your own bar: An unpretentious neighborhood bar with comfortable booths and a jukebox of classic hits, where folks can unwind after work. A barcade with vintage pinball games that serves only a few types of beer, where guests can let loose and have fun on a Friday night. A moody martini bar with neon lights and hypnotic music, where guests can feel like they’re part of an exclusive club. A sophisticated wine bar with modern furniture and art on the walls, where guests can sip flights of wine paired with appetizers. The most important thing to note is that your concept and brand should be in line with the demographics of your chosen location. When you get to the step of performing market research, you may have to adjust your brand to meet the needs of the neighborhood you are serving. 2. Choose a Name for Your Bar Choosing the name for your bar can feel like the moment that your dream is becoming a reality, but how do you choose the right name? Make sure that it’s catchy, make sure it reflects your brand, and make sure it’s unique. Remember that your name will be used on all of your marketing materials and merchandise, including menus, staff uniforms, and advertisements. Stay away from names that are too long and complicated. After you’ve chosen a name that represents your bar perfectly, it’s time to consider trademarking it. This protects your name from being used by any other businesses, which can be helpful if your location is in a high-density area. It’s especially important if you plan to expand your business to multiple locations in the future. 3. Choose a Business Entity for Your Bar Every business owner has to decide what type of entity or business structure to establish. This impacts your legal liability, your ownership rights, how your business is taxed, and your funding options. These are the common entity types for small business owners: Sole Proprietorship - This is the most common type of structure for small businesses and requires no paperwork to set up. Once you start a business that operates for profit, you are automatically running as a sole proprietorship. The downside of this entity is that as the bar owner, you are liable for any lawsuits against your business. Partnership - A verbal agreement between two or more taxpayers is all that’s needed to start a partnership, which makes it very appealing. However, you are liable for the mistakes of your partner so it’s recommended that you go ahead and create a partnership agreement anyway. Always have a lawyer review your partnership agreement before signing. Limited Liability Company - Also known as an LLC, this type of business entity is very popular due to its liability protection. Because an LLC exists as its own separate legal entity, the business owner isn’t liable for any lawsuits against the business. The downside of an LLC is that it does require the proper forms and a fee to be filed with the Secretary of State’s office. 4. Write a Bar Business Plan This is the point where you need to sit down and get your business plan on paper. Having a thorough business plan is going to help you when you reach out to investors and apply for loans. It’s also a great way to work through any areas of uncertainty you may have about how your business is going to operate. A bar business plan should include the following: Executive Summary Company Overview and Description Market Analysis Business Offerings Management Marketing and Public Relations Strategies Financial Projection 5. Secure Funding for Your Bar After doing your financial projection you’ll have a better idea of the funding you’re going to need to make your dream happen. Make a list of all the startup costs required to get your bar running. Then add in the cost of daily operations, including the cost of alcohol, salaries, utilities, and rent. From there you can create a budget and forecast how much money you’ll need to keep your bar running for the next year. Next, determine how much money you have to put towards your startup costs and how much additional funding you’ll need. Now that you have a definitive number, you can begin the process of applying for loans. The initial investment that you make could be paid back within a few years if you run your bar successfully. 6. Find the Perfect Location Performing a location analysis is the best way to find the perfect location for your bar. There are many factors to consider, but these are some of the most important: Target Demographics - You should either begin by targeting a location with demographics that match up with your concept, or base your entire concept off of the demographics of a predetermined location. Health Regulations and Zoning - Zoning regulations can vary greatly between cities and counties. Make sure to become familiar with your location's zoning laws so you know what to expect. Visibility and Access - It’s extremely important to choose a location that is visible to people driving or walking by. Accessible parking is always optimal. Nearby Competition - If an area is already saturated with bars, you may want to either choose a different location, or make sure your bar has a unique concept that stands out. 7. Obtain Permits and Licenses Making sure you have the appropriate licenses may be the most tedious step along the way, but it’s vital to getting your bar open for business. It never hurts to enlist the help of legal counsel to make sure you have all the bases covered. The number of permits you’ll need and the total cost of fees will vary by state. These are some of the most important licenses required: Employee Identification Number - You’ll need an Employer Identification Number, or EIN, to apply for many of the permits below. This number identifies you as an employer and allows you to officially hire your staff. To obtain your EIN, visit the IRS website and fill out their online application. Liquor License - Without a liquor license, you can’t legally sell alcohol. Not only does the license permit you to sell alcoholic beverages, it also determines what type of alcohol you can sell and the times and days you can operate. The process for obtaining one can be lengthy, so you should start on this one right away by contacting your state’s Alcoholic Beverage Control agency. Or, consider starting a zero-proof bar, and you can skip this step. Foodservice License - If you plan on serving food at your bar, you’ll need a foodservice license. This ensures that your business meets food safety laws and regulations. To obtain a foodservice license, apply online at your state government’s website. Alcohol and Tobacco Tax and Trade Bureau - Referred to as the TTB, this federal agency regulates businesses that sell alcohol. Before you open for business you’ll need to register with the TTB, which can be done on their website. The TTB also requires that you keep a record book containing the date and quantity of all alcohol received from your suppliers. This step is very important because if you get inspected by a federal officer and fail to produce the log book, you could be fined up to $10,000. Here are a few examples of other permits you may need to open your bar: Sign Permit Music Permit Certificate of Occupancy Pool Table Permit Dumpster Placement Permit 8. Find a Liquor Supplier With most of the paperwork out of the way, it’s time to make a wish list of the spirits, beer, or wine that you want to stock in your bar. You might already have a selection in mind or you could do some research to see what’s popular in the area. The concept of your bar might weigh heavily in this decision, especially if you’re going to specialize in one type of alcohol, like craft beer or small-batch wines and spirits. You’ll want to find an alcohol distributor that offers the brand and products you have on your wish list. Many wholesalers have websites with portfolios that showcase all their products and pricing. Here are some things to keep in mind when you choose a distributor: Brand selection Minimum purchase requirements Payment terms and discounts Delivery dates Availability of brand ambassadors or promotional materials Once you stock your bar with alcohol, you should begin to take liquor inventory so that you can maintain the appropriate quantities. Taking consistent liquor inventory will give you an idea of how your bar is performing, what your par levels should be, and which products are selling. 9. Design a Bar Layout If you’re designing your bar from scratch, the best thing to do is take measurements of the entire space. You can draft the layout on paper or take advantage of design software to come up with a virtual blueprint. Having the blueprint is going to help you choose fixtures, equipment, stools, and seating that will fit inside your space. Keep in mind that the space should remain functional. Your staff should be able to move freely around any tables or booths. The area behind your bar should have enough space for liquor displays, speed rails, and bottle coolers. You should also allow enough room for the maximum number of bartenders on your busiest shifts. When it comes to choosing your decor, make sure it supports your brand and concept. Artwork, lighting fixtures, and furniture can all be used to create an experience for your guests. Check out current design trends to come up with ideas. 10. Buy Your Equipment and Supplies You’ll need to outfit your bar with some basic equipment in order to serve drinks. It’s important to factor in the space and electrical requirements you’ll need for these items: Bottle Coolers - These back bar coolers provide space for all the bottles and cans that you’ll need to keep chilled. Ideally, the bottle cooler will sit under your bar so that bartenders can access it quickly. Ice Machines - It’s going to take a lot of ice to keep the beverages flowing at your bar. You’ll need a reliable ice machine to produce large volumes of ice throughout the shift. Ice Bins - Once your ice machine makes the ice, you’ll need to store it in a place that’s convenient for your bartenders. Under bar ice bins fit beneath the bar so your staff can easily access ice for cocktails and blended drinks. Glass Washer - Having a glass washer under the bar is extremely convenient. Some models are designed to fit inside an underbar sink and require no electricity. Bar Blender - You’ll need a reliable, commercial-grade bar blender for making popular blended drinks like daiquiris and margaritas. Look for a model with a cover to reduce noise while blending. Beer Dispensers - Your bar isn’t complete without a beer dispenser. These units feature a refrigerated cabinet that holds your beer kegs, while the beer is dispensed through a tap tower on top of the dispenser. In addition to your bar equipment, you'll also need to stock up on other bar essentials. Make sure you have the appropriate glassware to serve your beverages. Depending on your menu, you might need garnishes, drink ingredients, and cocktail mixes. For your bar top, you'll need cocktail napkins, coasters, and stirrers. 11. Hire the Right Staff Different types of bars may have different staffing needs. For instance, a large nightclub will require some additional employees that a small neighborhood bar won’t need, like bottle service staff or a house DJ. If you own a wine bar, you might want a sommelier on staff. Here are some of the key positions that you’ll need to get most bars up and running: Bar Manager Bartenders Barbacks Servers Host / Hostess Security / ID Checker Many potential employees are enthusiastic to start a new venture and get in on the ground floor of a new bar. With such a high turnover rate, the best way you can keep your stellar bartending staff is by defining your workplace culture from the very beginning. In addition to interviewing and hiring new employees, make sure that you create a thoughtful training program that outlines clear expectations. A critical part of bar ownership is ensuring that your staff is well-trained to look for signs of visible intoxication. Your training program should emphasize these signs and provide guidance on how to deal with intoxicated patrons. It's your responsibility to make sure that your guests are safe at all times, while they enjoy drinks at your bar and when they leave your bar. 12. Advertise Your Bar You’ve done your due diligence and now you’re ready to let the community know about your new bar. This is where the critical step of advertising and marketing your bar comes into play. Here are some tips you can use to inform your potential customers about your business and build excitement about your opening day: Create a website – Building a website for your bar is essential. Many customers will be researching your business online before making a visit, so you should provide key information on your site. Your site should also be representative of your brand. Use social media – Another way to reach potential customers is by creating accounts on social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram. You can share high-quality photos of your signature cocktails and advertise promotions. Make a Yelp account – Create a business profile on Yelp so that you have more online visibility and customers can submit reviews for your bar. You can personally ask your guests to leave reviews by putting a request on your bar receipts. Sign up for Google My Business – Google My Business is a free service that ensures your bar information will show up in Google searches and on Google Maps. Make sure to provide as much information as possible, including your website, hours, photos, and price ranges. Use your store front – As you’re doing construction on your new bar, passersby will be naturally curious about your new business. Make sure to utilize posters and sidewalk signs to provide information about your bar and the opening date. Place an ad in the local paper – Purchase advertising space in the local newspaper to share information about your new bar. You could even include a coupon for half-off drinks. Create a loyalty program – Sign up for a mobile app loyalty program and reward your guests for their continued business. If you specialize in craft beers, provide a way for guests to track and rank the beers they’ve enjoyed at your bar. Promote a Happy Hour – Happy hours are a great way to attract customers through value-priced drink specials. You can also offer complimentary samples and free snacks. Host an event – There are a variety of events you could host in your bar to create some buzz. If you own a wine bar, consider hosting a wine tasting. If you own a tap house, trivia nights can be very successful at bringing in more customers. Don’t forget the most important event of all, your grand opening! 13. Host Your Soft Opening A soft opening is a practice run that allows your bar staff to test out their operation on a limited number of guests before the actual grand opening. The benefit of a soft opening is that it gives you an idea of what you are doing right and what areas of your service may need more attention. Your staff gets the opportunity to practice without the pressure that comes with a busy opening day. An easy way to host a soft opening is to invite the friends and family of your employees for a sneak peek event. Now that you’ve become familiar with all the steps necessary to opening a bar, you can begin to make your dream a reality. By planning every aspect of your bar operation ahead of time, you can start your business off on the right foot. <aside class="pquote"> <blockquote> The information provided on this website does not, and is not intended to, constitute legal advice. Please refer to our Content Policy for more details. </blockquote> </aside>
Even the seasoned chef, bartender, barista, or manager has questions from time to time. No matter what you're looking to do, our how-to guides have detailed information to help you accomplish the task at hand. Many of our how-to guides feature instructional videos and helpful step-by-step photos on a variety of relevant foodservice topics. Whether you’re looking to pour the perfect pint at your bar or need advice on writing a business plan for your food truck, we've got you covered.